Installation and
Customization Guide
for the Model 3174
Workstation Controller
Module
Bay Networks, Inc. Corporate Headquarters
4401 Great America Parkway
Santa Clara, CA 95054
8 Federal Street
Billerica, MA 01821
March 1995
*893-745-B*
© 1995 by Bay Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
SynOptics Communications, SynOptics, Wellßeet, and Optivity are registered trademarks of Bay
Networks, Inc. Bay Networks, Bay Networks Press, PhonePlus, and Lattis System 3000 are
trademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.
Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective
holders.
Statement of Conditions
In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, SynOptics
Communications, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this
document without notice.
SynOptics Communications, Inc. does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or
application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein.
3174 Licensed Internal Code Notice
Licensed Internal Code remains the property of IBM and is to be used only in accordance with
the Licensed Internal Code information included with the SynOpticsÕ Model 3174 module.
In this document, the term Microcode refers to 3174 Licensed Internal Code.
Lithium Battery
CAUTION: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. The
3174 module may contain a lithium battery. This battery is not intended for customer
replacement.
Lithium batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations or your companyÕs
safety procedures. Contact your service representative for disposal information.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If it is not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case users will be required to take whatever measures may be
necessary to correct the interference at their own expense.
EN 55 022 Declaration of Conformance
This is to certify that the SynOptics Communications Model 3174 module is shielded against the
generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89/336/
EEC, Article 4a. Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022:1987 Class B (CISPR
22:1985/BS 6527:1988).
BestŠtigung des Herstellers/Importeurs
Es wird hiermit bestŠtigt, da§ das Model 3174 module gemŠ§ der im BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/
1991 und Vfg 46/1992 aufgefŸhrten Bestimmungen entstšrt ist. Das vorschriftsmŠ§ige Betreiben
einiger GerŠte (z.B. Testsender) kann jedoch gewissen BeschrŠnkungen unterliegen. Lesen Sie
dazu bitte die Anmerkungen in der Betriebsanleitung.
ii
893-745-B
Das Bundesamt fŸr Zulassungen in der Telekommunikation wurde davon unterrichtet, da§ dieses
GerŠt auf den Markt gebracht wurde und es ist berechtigt, die Serie auf die ErfŸllung der
Vorschriften hin zu ŸberprŸfen.
Die ErfŸllung der zutreffenden Vorschriften hŠngt von der Benutzung geschirmter Kabel ab. Der
Benutzer ist fŸr den Erwerb der entsprechenden Kabel verantwortlich.
CertiÞcate of the Manufacturer/Importer
It is hereby certiÞed that the SynOptics Model 3174 Workstation Controller module has been
suppressed in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 and Vfg
46/1992. The operation of some equipment (for example, test transmitters) in accordance with
the regulations may, however, be subject to certain restrictions. Please refer to the notes in the
operating instructions.
Federal OfÞce for Telecommunications Approvals has been notiÞed of the placing of this
equipment on the market and has been granted the right to test the series for compliance with the
regulations.
Compliance with the applicable regulations is dependent upon the use of shielded cables. It is the
responsibility of the user to procure the appropriate cables.
Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement (with Shielded
Cable)
Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement
This equipment is in the 1st category (information equipment to be used in commercial and/or
industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference by Data Processing Equipment and Electronic OfÞce Machines that are aimed at
preventing radio interference in commercial and/or industrial areas.
Consequently, when this equipment is used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto,
radio interference may be caused to equipment such as radios and TV receivers.
Compliance with the applicable regulations is dependent upon the use of shielded cables. The
user is responsible for procuring the appropriate cables. Read instructions for correct handling
Electromagnetic Emissions
Meets requirements of:
FCC Part 15, Subparts A and B, Class A
EN 55 022 (CISPR 22:1985), Class A B General License
VCCI Class 1 ITE
893-745-B
iii
Contents
Preface
Purpose xxvii
Audience xxvii
Conventions xxvii
Special Message Formats xxvii
Two-tiered Procedure Format xxviii
Use of Enter, Type, and Press xxviii
Other Conventions xxviii
Related Publications xxix
Bay NetworksÐSynOptics Documentation xxix
IBM Documentation xxx
Bay Networks-SynOptics Customer Support xxxi
CompuServe xxxii
InfoFACTS xxxii
Support Wire xxxiii
World Wide Web xxxiii
Chapter 1 Introduction and Functional Overview
The Model 3174 Module 1-1
Operations 1-4
Diskettes 1-4
Status Codes 1-5
Tests 1-5
Problem-Solving 1-6
The Front Panel 1-6
Terminal Ports 1-8
Comm Port 1-8
Operator Panel 1-9
Status Display 1-9
LEDs 1-9
IML Push Button 1-9
Dual-Function Push Buttons 1-9
The Backplane Interface 1-10
IBM 3174 Controller Features 1-10
Token-Ring DSPU 1-10
SNA Gateway 1-11
APPN 1-12
TCP/IP 1-13
893-745-B
v
Frame Relay 1-14
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
CSCM 1-16
1-15
Chapter 2 Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
Precautionary Procedures 2-1
Unpacking Procedure 2-1
Quick Installation Procedures 2-2
Jumper Settings 2-3
Setting the Bit Rate Selection Jumper (JP1) 2-4
Setting the Backplane Connection Jumper (JP2) 2-4
Installing the Module 2-5
Monitoring the Front Panel 2-10
WhatÕs Next? 2-12
Chapter 3 Customization Planning
Worksheet Summary 3-5
Customizing Procedures 3-7
Completing Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment 3-8
098: Online Test Password 3-8
099: Product Assistance Data 3-8
100: 3174 Model Designation 3-9
101: Host Attachment 3-9
102: LAN Adapter Type 3-10
103: Non-Standard Operation Selection 3-10
Filling Out Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host Definition 3-11
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S 3-13
104: Controller (Model 3174 Module) Address 3-13
105: Upper Limit Address 3-13
106: LAN Address and Service Access Point 3-14
Address 3-14
Service Access Point (SAP) 3-14
107: Gateway Address and SAP 3-15
Address 3-15
Service Access Point 3-16
108: Unique Machine Identifier 3-16
110: Presentation Space Storage Support (Includes Multiple Logical
Terminal Support) 3-17
116: Individual Port Assignment 3-18
117: Port Assignment 3-19
118: Port Address 3-19
vi
893-745-B
121: Keyboard Language 3-19
123: Country Extended Code Page Support 3-21
125: Miscellaneous Feature Options (A) 3-22
126: Miscellaneous Feature Options (B) 3-25
127: Response Time Monitor Definition 3-27
128: RTM Boundaries and Interface Specification 3-28
132: Alternate Base Keyboard Selection 3-28
136: Standard Keyboard Layouts 3-29
137: Modified Keyboard Layouts 3-30
138: Standard Keypad Layouts 3-31
139: Concurrent Communication Keyboard Language 3-31
141: Magnetic Character Set 3-32
150: LAN Gateway 3-32
165: Compressed Program Symbols 3-33
166: Attribute Select Keypad 3-33
168: Additional Extension-Mode Key Definition (Personal Computers)
3-33
172: PS/55ÑModel 3174 Printer Sharing 3-34
173: DFT Options 3-35
175: DFT Password 3-37
179: Local Format Storage 3-38
190: Number of ISDN DSPUs 3-38
213: Between Bracket Printer Sharing 3-39
215: Physical Unit Identification (Module) 3-39
220: Alert Event Report Function 3-40
221: 3174 (Model 3174 Module) Alert Control Point 3-41
310: Connect-Data-Set-to-Line Operation 3-42
313: NRZ or NRZI Encoding 3-42
317: Telecommunication Facilities 3-42
318: Full- or Half-Speed Transmission 3-44
332: X.25 Options 3-44
340: RTS Control Response Options 3-45
365: X.21 Switched Host DTE Connection 3-45
370: Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size 3-46
372: Autocall/Autodisconnect 3-46
382: Transmit I-Frame Size 3-47
383: Token-Ring Network Maximum Out 3-48
384: Ring Speed of the Token-Ring Network 3-48
385: Link Subsystem Name 3-48
386: Receive I-Frame Size 3-49
893-745-B
vii
Filling Out Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space and 10DÑPresentation Space
Storage 3-50
Determining PS Storage Requirements 3-50
PS-Related (MLT) Considerations 3-55
Filling Out Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment 3-56
Completing the Port Assignment Worksheet When 116 = 1 3-57
Completing the Port Assignment Worksheet When 116 = 2 3-58
Changing Port Assignments 3-60
Filling Out Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM 3-61
Changing the RTM Specifications 3-62
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and
52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles 3-63
Logical Channel Numbering 3-63
Connection Identifier 3-64
Link Attachment Questions 3-65
400: Network Type 3-65
424: 3174 (Model 3174 Module) DTE Address 3-66
431: Packet Sequence Numbering 3-66
433: K-Maximum Out 3-67
434: Nonstandard Default Packet Size 3-67
435: Nonstandard Default Window Size 3-68
450: Link Level Transmit Timeout 3-68
451: Number of Retries 3-68
461: Lowest Incoming Channel 3-69
462: Highest Incoming Channel 3-69
463: Lowest Two-Way Channel 3-69
464: Highest Two-Way Channel 3-69
465: Lowest Outgoing Channel 3-69
466: Highest Outgoing Channel 3-70
Virtual Circuit Definition Questions 3-70
401: Circuit Type 3-70
402: Logical Channel Identifier 3-70
409: X.25 Keyboard Support Options 3-71
420: Incoming Call Options 3-73
421: Outgoing Call Options 3-74
423: Host DTE Address 3-76
430: Negotiated Packet Size or PVC Packet Size 3-76
432: Negotiated Window Size or PVC Window Size 3-77
440: Throughput Class Negotiation 3-77
441: Closed User Group 3-78
viii
893-745-B
442: Recognized Private Operating Agency 3-78
452: Connection Identifier 3-79
453: Connection Options 3-79
Changing the X.25 Options 3-80
Filling Out Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA 3-81
500: CSCM Unique 3-81
501: Network ID 3-81
502: Logical Unit Name 3-82
510: APPN Network Controller 3-83
511: APPN Control Point Name 3-83
512: APPN Virtual Node Name 3-84
Filling Out Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node Definition 3-85
610: APPN Sessions 3-85
611: APPN Nodes/Link 3-85
612: APPN Wildcard Option 3-86
613: APPN Wildcard Host In 3-87
614: Alert Focal Point Name 3-87
615: Alert Focal Point Network ID 3-88
616: Report to Alert Focal Point (Host Links) 3-88
620: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Primary Host Name 3-88
621: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Primary Host Name Network ID 3-89
622: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Backup Host Name 3-89
623: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Backup Host Name Network ID 3-89
Filling Out Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources 3-90
Filling Out Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers 3-93
Filling Out Worksheet 17ÑAssociated LUs 3-94
Filling Out Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes 3-95
Filling Out Worksheet 18ÑCOS Definition 3-96
Filling Out Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node Definition 3-97
Filling Out Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group Definition 3-99
Filling Out Worksheet 20BÑCOS Transmission Group Definition 3-100
Filling Out Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation 3-101
Filling Out Worksheet 22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Options 3-102
650: 3174-Peer Support 3-102
656: Multiport Bridging 3-102
Filling Out Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer Definition 3-103
651: 3174-Peer Bridge Support 3-103
660: 3174-Peer Port Address Range 3-103
661: Percentage of Discard Threshold 3-105
Filling Out Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition 3-106
893-745-B
ix
680: Bridge Number 3-106
681: Bridge Maximum Frame Forward Size 3-106
682: Bridge Performance Counter Threshold 3-106
683: Logging Interval 3-107
684: Alert Threshold 3-107
685: Token-Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode 3-107
Filling Out Worksheet 22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces 3-108
Filling Out Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode 3-109
Overview of Bridging 3-109
Source-Route Bridging 3-110
Local Bridging 3-110
Remote Bridging 3-110
Multiport Bridging 3-111
Connectivity 3-111
Multiport Bridge Planning 3-113
Assigning Ring Numbers for Remote Bridges 3-113
Spanning Tree 3-113
Multiport Bridge Restrictions 3-113
Filters 3-114
Bridge Frames 3-114
Port Filters 3-114
Local Management Functions 3-115
LAN Manager Support 3-116
Filling Out Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile 3-117
670: Bridge Number 3-117
671: Token-Ring Segment Number 3-117
672: 3174-Peer Segment Number 3-118
673: Token-Ring Hop Count 3-118
674: Frame Forwarding Active 3-118
675: Bridge Performance Threshold 3-119
676: Logging Interval 3-119
677: Alert Threshold 3-119
Filling Out Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management 3-120
652: LAN Manager Support 3-120
653: 3174-Peer Online Test Updates 3-120
690: Reporting Link 0 Password 3-121
691: Reporting Link 1 Password 3-121
692: Reporting Link 2 Password 3-121
693: Reporting Link 3 Password 3-121
Filling Out Worksheet 24AÑFilter Definition 3-122
x
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filter 3-123
Filling Out Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters 3-124
Filling Out Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters 3-126
Filling Out Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters 3-128
Filling Out Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters 3-130
Filling Out Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters 3-132
Filling Out Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order Definition 3-135
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram 3-138
Filling Out Worksheet 27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure 3-147
700: Configure the TCP/IP Feature 3-147
Filling Out Worksheet 28ÑPort Set 3-148
Filling Out Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map 3-150
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set 3-152
721: Station Set Name 3-155
722: Station Type 3-156
723: Port Set Name 3-157
725: Host Connection Menu Option 3-158
751: Data Stream Supported by the TCP/IP Host 3-158
762: Wraparound Option (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream) 3-159
763: New Line Option (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream) 3-159
764: Margin Bell (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream) 3-160
765: DEC Host ASCII Character Set (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream)
3-160
771: Automatic Line Feed for Cursor Control (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
3-160
772: Carriage Return/Carriage ReturnÑLine Feed Selection (IBM 3101
Data Stream) 3-161
773: Automatic New Line for Cursor Control (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
3-161
774: Scrolling (IBM 3101 Data Stream) 3-161
775: Line Turnaround Character (IBM 3101 Data Stream) 3-161
776: IBM ASCII Host Character Set 3-162
790: Default IP Address 3-162
791: Non-standard TCP Port Number 3-162
Filling Out Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination 3-163
Filling Out Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options 3-166
052: LAN IP Address 3-166
054: LAN Subnet Mask 3-166
057: IP Routing 3-166
058: Maximum Telnet Connections 3-167
893-745-B
xi
059: Maximum Printer Connections 3-167
060: TCP/IP Buffer Space 3-167
062: Routing Field Support 3-168
064: All Routes Broadcast 3-168
066: Frame-Relay IP Address 3-168
068: Frame-Relay Subnet Mask 3-169
Filling Out Worksheet 31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information 3-170
Filling Out Worksheet 31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services 3-171
Filling Out Worksheet 31DÑTCP/IP 3174 (Model 3174 Module) Defined
Nicknames 3-172
Filling Out Worksheet 31EÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements 3-173
Filling Out Worksheet 38ÑDevice Definition 3-174
800: Printer Authorization Matrix 3-174
801: Logical Terminal Assignment 3-174
802: Prompts for Extended Vital Product Data 3-174
803: Integrated Services Digital Network Definition 3-174
Filling Out Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM) 3-175
Filling Out Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment (LTA) 3-176
Filling Out Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (VPD) 3-177
Filling Out Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network 3-178
900: LAN Address and SAP 3-178
905: Token-Ring Error Alerts 3-178
908: LAN Link Subsystem Name 3-179
912: Group Poll Address 3-180
Restrictions 3-180
920: ISDN Link Subsystem Name 3-180
925: Number of LAN DSPUs for Frame Relay 3-180
Filling Out Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment 3-181
Filling Out Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission Definition 3-182
Filling Out Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements 3-183
Storage Planning Procedure 3-184
Storage Requirements for DSPUs 3-185
Filling Out Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions 3-187
001: Local Copy Print Queue Buffer Size 3-187
002: Calculator Function 3-187
003: 5250 Emulation for Field Exit 3-188
004: LAN T1 Timer 3-188
005: LAN T1 Retry Count 3-189
006: Copy from Session to Session 3-189
007: HAP Sharing for Local Copy 3-189
xii
893-745-B
008: CSCF IML Password Required 3-190
009: Non-Standard Feature Options 3-190
Filling Out Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description 3-190
080: Token-Ring Address 3-190
082: Ring Speed of the Token-Ring Network 3-191
Overview of Frame Relay 3-192
Virtual Circuits 3-192
Local Management Interface (LMI) 3-193
When an LMI Is Not Supported 3-193
Filling Out Worksheets 53ÑFrame Relay and 53SÑSecondary Frame Relay
3-194
090: Frame-Relay DLCI Number and SAP 3-194
Questions 108 through 220 3-194
250: Frame-Relay LLC Poll/Response Timer 3-194
251: Frame-Relay LLC Idle Timer 3-194
252: Frame-Relay LLC Retry Count 3-194
253: Frame-Relay LLC Transmit Window Size 3-195
260: Maximum Receive Basic Transmission Unit (BTU) Size 3-195
261: Maximum Send Basic Transmission UNIT (BTU) Size 3-195
Filling Out Worksheet 54ÑFrame Relay Description 3-196
300: Enable Frame Relay over Communications Adapter 3-196
313: NRZ or NRZI Encoding 3-196
552: Maximum Number of DLCIs 3-196
554: Committed Information Rate 3-197
558: Frame-Relay Congestion Control 3-197
560: Discard Eligibility (DE) Bit Support 3-197
562: Local Management Interface (LMI) Type 3-197
563: Local Management Interface (LMI) Transmit Polling Interval 3-198
566: Additional Receive Buffer Space 3-198
569: Define DLCIs 3-198
570: Virtual MAC Address 3-199
Filling Out Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions 3-200
Filling Out Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment 3-201
Filling Out the Keyboard Worksheets 3-202
Restrictions 3-206
General 3-206
Exceptions 3-207
Local Functions 3-210
APL 3-211
Nomenclature Presentation 3-211
893-745-B
xiii
Languages Supported on Modifiable Keyboards 3-212
The Keyboard Changes Chart 3-217
Keyboard, Shift, and Function Groups 3-218
A Sample Keyboard Changes Chart 3-219
Chapter 4 Customization
Using this Guide 4-2
Displaying the Master Menu 4-3
Master Menu Displayed 4-4
Using Worksheet and Task Tables 4-5
Worksheet Table 4-5
Task Table 4-7
Customizing the Control Diskette 4-8
Correcting Errors 4-9
Verifying the Control Disk Drive 4-9
Using the 3174 Utilities Guide 4-10
Using the Customize Control Disk Menu 4-11
Configuring the Control Diskette 4-13
PF Keys for the Configure Procedure 4-13
Configuring Panel Flow 4-15
Configuring the Control Disk 4-19
Token-Ring Description Panel 4-21
Multi-Host Definition Panel 4-22
Host Panel 4-23
Common SNA Panel 4-25
Common Network Panel 4-26
Frame-Relay Index Assignment Panel 4-27
Token-Ring Gateway Panels 4-28
117: Port Assignment Panel 4-30
128: RTM Panel 4-33
Frame-Relay Description Panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions Panel
332: X.25 Options Panel 4-37
End User Productivity Functions Panel 4-38
Configure Complete Panel 4-39
Multi-Host Definition Panel 4-40
Common Network Panel 4-43
Frame-Relay Index Assignment Panel 4-44
Token-Ring Gateway Panels 4-44
117: Port Assignment Panel 4-45
128: RTM Panel 4-47
xiv
4-36
893-745-B
332: X.25 Options Panel: 4-48
Configure Complete Panel 4-49
WhatÕs Next? 4-50
Initializing the RAM Disk 4-51
Making the Model 3174 Module Operational 4-52
How to IML the Model 3174 Module 4-52
Appendix A Model 3174 Module Utilities
Customizing Utilities A-1
Customize the Control Disk A-1
Central Site Customizing A-2
Identify Customizing Keyboard A-2
Support Utilities A-2
Merge DSL A-3
Copy Files A-3
Diagnostics A-4
Microcode Upgrade A-4
Media Management A-4
Which Display Stations Can You Use? A-5
Customizing Utilities A-5
Customizing a Control Disk A-7
The Customizing Panels A-8
Customizing Utility Options A-9
Option 1: Customize the Control Disk A-9
Option 6: Central Site Customizing A-10
Parameter Assignments Panel A-10
Label Definition Panel A-13
Option K: Identify Customizing Keyboard A-15
Customize Control Disk Menu A-17
Option 1: Configure A-17
Configuration Option Overview A-18
Typing in Responses to the Configuration Questions
Correcting Responses A-19
Option 2: Define Devices A-19
Option 3: Merge RPQs A-20
Option 4: Modify Keyboards A-20
Option 5: Define AEA and TCP/IP A-20
Option 6: Define APPN Node A-21
Option 7: Define COS A-21
Option 8: Define 3174-Peer and Bridges A-22
893-745-B
A-18
xv
Option 9: Define WAN Profiles
A-22
Appendix B How To Merge DSL Code
PF Keys for Merge B-1
Merge DSL Code Procedure
WhatÕs Next? B-8
B-2
Appendix C How To Copy Files
Creating Backup Diskettes C-2
Copy File Options C-2
Full Copy C-3
Full Copy Procedure C-4
Modify and Copy C-5
Copy Customizing Data C-7
Copy Device Definition C-7
Copy Patches C-8
Copy Modified Keyboards C-8
Copy RPQs C-9
Copy User Data C-10
How to Determine Maintenance and Microcode Levels
Copy Files Procedure C-12
For Modify and Copy Only C-14
WhatÕs Next? C-15
C-11
Appendix D How To Upgrade Microcode
After the Microcode Upgrade D-1
Merge RPQ Procedure D-1
Customize the Control Diskette Procedure
PF Keys for Microcode Upgrade D-3
Upgrading the Microcode D-3
Getting Started D-4
Microcode Upgrade Procedure D-4
WhatÕs Next? D-7
Upgrading the RAM Disk D-8
D-2
Appendix E How To Perform Media Management
Media Management Options E-1
PF Keys for Media Management E-2
Display Disk Information Procedure E-3
Create Dump/Trace Diskette Procedure E-5
WhatÕs Next? E-7
xvi
893-745-B
Appendix F How To Identify Customizing Keyboards
When You First Customize with a Utility Diskette F-1
When You Recustomize with a Utility Diskette F-2
PF Keys for Identifying the Customizing Keyboard F-3
Procedure for Identifying the Customizing Keyboard F-3
WhatÕs Next? F-4
Appendix G Keeping Records
Local Copy G-1
Using the Copy Procedure to Manage Customization Data
Duplicate Diskettes G-5
G-3
Appendix H Specifications
Appendix I Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet Introduction Ia-1
Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment Ia-2
Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host Definition Ia-3
Worksheet 4ÑSDLC Ia-4
Worksheet 5ÑX.25 Ia-6
Worksheet 5SÑSecondary X.25 Ia-8
Worksheet 9ÑToken-Ring Network Ia-10
Worksheet 9SÑSecondary Token-Ring Network Ia-12
Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space (MLT) Ia-14
Worksheet 10DÑPresentation Space Storage Ia-15
Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment Ia-16
Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM Ib-2
Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options Ib-3
Worksheet 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options Ib-5
Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA Ib-7
Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node Definition Ib-8
Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources Ib-9
Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers Ib-10
Worksheet 17ÑAssociated LUs Ib-11
Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes Ib-12
Worksheet 18ÑCOS Definition Ib-13
Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node Definition Ib-14
Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group Definition Ib-15
Worksheet 20BÑCOS Transmission Group Definition Continued
Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation Ib-17
Worksheet 22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Options Ib-18
893-745-B
Ib-16
xvii
Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer Definition Ib-19
Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition Ib-20
Worksheet 22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces Ib-21
Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode Ib-22
Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile Ic-1
Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management Ic-2
Worksheet 24AÑFilter Definition Ic-3
Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filters Ic-4
Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters Ic-5
Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters Ic-6
Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters Ic-7
Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters Ic-8
Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters Ic-9
Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order Definition Ic-10
Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram Ic-11
Worksheet 27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure Ic-12
Worksheet 28ÑPort Set Ic-13
Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map Ic-14
Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set Ic-15
Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination Ic-17
Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options Ic-19
Worksheet 31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information Ic-20
Worksheet 31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services Ic-21
Worksheet 31DÑTCP/IP 3174 Defined Nicknames Ic-22
Worksheet 31EÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements Ic-23
Worksheet 38ÑDevice Definition Ic-24
Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM) Ic-25
Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment (LTA) Ic-26
Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (EVPD) Ic-27
Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network Id-1
Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment Id-2
Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission Definition Id-3
Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements Id-4
Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions Worksheet Id-7
Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description Id-8
Worksheet 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles Id-9
Worksheet 53ÑFrame Relay Id-11
Worksheet 53SÑSecondary Frame Relay Id-13
Worksheet 54ÑFrame-Relay Description Id-15
Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions Id-17
xviii
893-745-B
Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment
Non-Katakana Converged Keyboards Id-19
Katakana Converged Keyboards Id-21
Enhanced Keyboard (U.S.) Id-23
Enhanced Keyboard (World Trade) Id-25
Enhanced Keyboard (Katakana) Id-27
Id-18
Appendix J Abbreviations
Glossary
Index
893-745-B
xix
Figures
Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-7.
Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-5.
Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-13.
Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-2.
893-745-B
Model 3174 module in a System 3000 environment 1-3
Model 3174 module front panel 1-7
Model 3174 module in a gateway configuration 1-11
Model 3174 module in an APPN configuration 1-12
Model 3174 module in a TCP/IP configuration 1-13
Model 3174 module in a frame-relay configuration 1-14
Model 3174 module in a 3174-Peer Communication
configuration 1-15
Model 3174 module jumper locations 2-3
Model 3174 module installation 2-6
Model 3174 module Comm port cable connection to a modem
2-8
Model 3174 module terminal port cable connection to a terminal
2-9
Model 3174 module faceplate and System 3000 Intelligent hub
2-10
Example of a completed Worksheet 10D 3-54
Logical channel assignments 3-64
Multiport bridging 3-112
The 3270 response key 3-138
Filling out the station type column on the 3270 Attachment
Diagram 3-140
Filling out the default destination columns 3-142
Example of 3270 station sets 3-144
Example of 3270 port sets 3-145
Example of port-to-port set mapping (assignment) 3-151
Example of the AEA and TCP/IP Default Destination worksheet
3-163
Example of the TCP/IP Default Destination worksheet 3-165
Example of a keyboard changes chart 3-217
Example of a completed keyboard changes chart 3-220
Master Menu 4-4
Disk drive assignment panel 4-10
xxi
Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-37.
xxii
Customize Control Disk Menu 4-11
Configure panel sequence (1 of 4) 4-15
Configure panel sequence (2 of 4) 4-16
Configure panel sequence (3 of 4) 4-17
Configure panel sequence (4 of 4) 4-18
Customize Control Disk Menu 4-19
Model/Attach panel 4-20
Token-Ring Description panel 4-21
Multi-Host Definition panel example 4-22
Layout of a typical host panel 4-23
Common SNA panel 4-25
Example of the Common Network panel 4-26
Example of a Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel 4-27
Example of 940: LAN Address Assignment panel 4-28
Example of 941: LAN Transmission Definition panel 4-29
117: Port Assignment panel (24 lines displayed) 4-30
117: Port Assignment panel when responses are typed in
the IS column 4-31
117: Port Assignment panel when responses are typed in
the address columns 4-32
Version A of the 128 panel 4-33
Version B of the 128 panel 4-34
Frame-Relay Description panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions panel 4-36
332: X.25 Options panel 4-37
End User Productivity Functions panel 4-38
Configure Complete panel 4-39
Multi-Host Definition panel example 4-40
Layout of a typical secondary host panel 4-41
Common Network panel (partial representation) 4-43
Example of a Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel (partial
representation) 4-44
940: LAN Address Assignment panel (partial representation)
4-44
941: LAN Transmission Definition panel (partial representation)
4-45
117: Port Assignment panel (partial representation) 4-46
Version A of the 128 panel (partial representation) 4-47
Version B of the 128 panel (partial representation) 4-47
332: X.25 Options panel (partial representation) 4-48
893-745-B
Figure 4-38.
Figure A-1.
Figure A-2.
Figure A-3.
Figure A-4.
Figure A-5.
Figure A-6.
Figure A-7.
Figure B-1.
Figure B-2.
Figure B-3.
Figure B-4.
Figure B-5.
Figure C-1.
Figure C-2.
Figure C-3.
Figure C-4.
Figure C-5.
Figure D-1.
Figure E-1.
Figure E-2.
Figure E-3.
Figure E-4.
Figure E-5.
Figure F-1.
Figure G-1.
893-745-B
Configure Complete panel 4-49
Example of a customizing display station A-7
Standard panel layout A-8
Master Menu A-9
Example of a Parameter Assignments panel A-11
Maximum and minimum dimensions of diskette label A-13
Label Definition panel A-14
Customize Control Disk Menu A-17
Example of the DSL Merge panel for selecting drives B-3
Example of the DSL Merge panel with filenames shown B-4
Selecting an option on the DSL Merge panel B-5
The DSL Merge panel: merge complete B-6
Example of the DSL Merge panel with the delete and merge
options B-7
Copy Menu C-1
Copy Menu C-4
Example of a diskette label showing maintenance and microcode
levels C-11
Copy Menu C-13
The Modify and Copy panel C-14
Example of Microcode Upgrade panel for selecting drives D-5
Media Management Menu displayed E-2
Media Management Menu E-3
Example of a diskette information panel E-4
Media Management Menu E-5
Diskette Creation panel E-6
Panel to identify the Customizing Keyboard F-4
The Printer Assignment Indicator G-2
xxiii
Tables
Table 1-1.
Table 2-1.
Table 2-2.
Table 2-3.
Table 2-4.
Table 3-1.
Table 3-2.
Table 3-3.
Table 3-4.
Table 3-5.
Table 3-6.
Table 3-7.
Table 3-8.
Table 3-9.
Table 3-10.
Table 3-11.
Table 3-12.
Table 3-13.
Table 3-14.
Table 3-15.
Table 3-16.
Table 3-17.
Table 3-18.
Table 3-19.
Table 3-20.
Table 3-21.
Table 3-22.
Table 3-23.
Table 4-1.
Table 4-2.
Table 4-3.
Table 4-4.
893-745-B
Sample Model 3174 module 3270-type device configurations
1-8
Quick installation procedure 2-2
JP1 jumper settings and function 2-4
JP2 jumper settings and function 2-5
LED state and definition 2-11
Type of host attachment 3-5
Additional host attachment 3-6
Additional areas 3-6
Valid question 101 responses 3-9
Keyboard languages supported 3-20
Compatible CECP languages 3-21
Compatible Eastern European languages 3-21
Compatible Cyrillic languages 3-21
CECP languages supported 3-22
Microcode RPQ numbers associated with keyboards 3-29
Response selection for question 317 3-43
Response selection for question 340 3-45
PS storage (MLT) without Multihost Support 3-51
PS storage (MLT) with Multihost Support (without Token-Ring
Gateway feature) 3-52
Allocating buffer local copy print 3-53
Port assignment changes for Worksheet 11A 3-60
RTM specifications changes for Worksheet 12Ñ128 3-62
Packet size to PIU relationships 3-67
TCP/IP station-type specific questions 3-153
Storage requirements for DSPU combinations (4-KB RU
gateway support) 3-186
T1 Timer ranges 3-188
Modifiable keyboard languages 3-212
Key function nomenclature 3-215
Worksheet table 4-6
Task table 4-8
Matching procedures and worksheets 4-12
PF key functions for the Configure procedure 4-13
xxv
Table 4-5.
Table D-1.
xxvi
Matching procedures with options 4-50
Procedures performed after Microcode Upgrade
D-2
893-745-B
Preface
This guide presents the principal features of the SynOptics¨ Model 3174
Workstation Controller Module, referenced throughout this document as the
Model 3174 module. The guide includes instructions for installing and
ª
conÞguring the Model 3174 module in the Lattis System 3000 concentrator
and provides a physical description of the Model 3174 module and a summary
of customization questions and attributes.
Purpose
This guide provides information for installing and customizing your Model
3174 module. Included are customization panels, conÞguration worksheets,
and directions for using 3174 utilities. This book also explains how to check the
Model 3174 module once it is installed.
This guide supports ConÞguration Support C Release 6.0 microcode.
Audience
This guide is intended for the following people at your site:
■
Network manager/administrator
■
Hardware installer
Conventions
This section describes the conventions used in this guide.
Special Message Formats
This guide uses the following formats to highlight special messages:
NOTE: This format is used to highlight information of importance or special
interest.
893-745-B
xxvii
Preface
CAUTION: This format is used to highlight information that will help you
prevent equipment failure or loss of data.
WARNING: This format is used to highlight material involving possibility of
injury or equipment damage.
Two-tiered Procedure Format
The procedural steps in this guide are presented in a two-tiered format. The Þrst
tier describes the step very brießy, but precisely. An experienced user may need
to read only the Þrst tier to complete the task. The second tier describes the step
in more detail and includes results of performing the step.
Use of Enter, Type, and Press
This guide uses enter, type, and press to describe the following actions:
■
When you read Òenter,Ó type the text and press the Enter key.
■
When you read Òtype,Ó type the text, but do not press the Enter key.
■
When you read Òpress,Ó press only the alphanumeric or named key.
Other Conventions
This guide uses the following typographical conventions:
xxviii
italics
Book titles and UNIX Þle, command, and directory
names.
courier font
Screen text, user-typed command-line entries.
Initial Caps
Menu titles and window and button names.
[Enter]
Named keys in text are shown enclosed in square
brackets.
[Ctrl]+C
Two or more keys that must be pressed simultaneously
are shown in text linked with a plus (+) sign.
ALL CAPS
DOS Þle and directory names.
Left mouse button
Click the left mouse button to select an object on a map
or an item from a menu or list.
893-745-B
Related Publications
Right mouse button
Click the right mouse button to select an object to
display a pop-up menu.
Related Publications
Bay NetworksÐSynOptics Documentation
For additional information on the Model 3174 module, refer to the following
documents:
■
Planning and Site Preparation Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation
Controller Module (Bay Networksª part number 893-747-A)
■
Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174
Workstation Controller Module (Bay Networks part number 893-746-A)
■
Release Notes for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module (Bay
Networks part number 896-053-B)
From Bay Networks Pressª, you can purchase the following documentation
for additional system-level information on the SynOptics System 3000:
893-745-B
■
LattisNet System 3000 Token Ring Connectivity Guide (Bay Networks part
number 893-052-A)
■
System 3000 Publications Note (Bay Networks part number 893-179-B)
■
LattisNet System 3000 Ethernet Connectivity and Verifying (Bay
Networks part number 990-520-A)
■
Model 3502B STP/UTP Token Ring Host Module Reference Sheet (Bay
Networks part number 893-470-A)
■
LattisNet System 3000 Token Ring Connectivity Guide Addendum (Bay
Networks part number 893-584-B)
■
Model 3505A Token Ring UTP Host Module Reference Sheet (Bay
Networks part number 893-096-C)
■
LattisNet System 3000 Model 3505B Token Ring STP/UTP Host Module
Reference Sheet (Bay Networks part number 893-449-B)
■
Connecting, Verifying, and ConÞguring LattisNet System 3000 Token Ring
Network Management Module for IP Networks (Bay Networks part
number 893-232-C)
xxix
Preface
■
LattisNet Model 3522 Token Ring Bridge Installation and ConÞguration
Guide (Bay Networks part number 893-395-C)
■
LattisNet Token Ring Bridge Bridging Concepts Guide (Bay Networks
part number 893-402-D)
■
Model 354-ST Token Ring Fiber Optic Extender Reference Sheet (Bay
Networks part number 893-194-A)
■
Model 3442 Token Ring STP Ring-In Ring-Out Module Reference Sheet
(Bay Networks part number 893-036)
■
LattisNet Model 338X/3800 Router Software Installation and Basic
Operation Guide (Bay Networks part number 893-432-A)
■
Model 338X/3800 Open Protocols ConÞguration Guide (Bay Networks
part number 893-433-A)
■
LattisNet Model 3805 Token Ring Personality Module Reference Sheet
(Bay Networks part number 893-439-A)
To purchase publications for SynOptics products, order by part number from
Bay Networks Press at the following numbers. You may request a free catalog
of Bay Networks Press product publications.
■
Phone: 1-800-845-9523
■
FAX: U.S./Canada: 1-800-582-8000, International: 1-916-939-1010
IBM Documentation
The following related publications are available for the IBM 3174
Establishment Controller:
xxx
■
3174 Introduction
■
3174 Status Codes*
■
3174 Site Planning
■
3174 Planning Guide*
■
3174 Utilities Guide*
■
3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide*
■
3174 ASCII Functions Reference
893-745-B
Bay Networks-SynOptics Customer Support
■
3174 Customer Problem Determination*
■
3174 Terminal UserÕs Reference for Expanded Functions*
■
3174 Functional Description*
■
3174 Reference Summary
■
3174 Character Set Reference
■
3174 X.25 Operation
■
3174 Data Stream ProgrammerÕs Reference
NOTE: The publications marked with asterisks are available as a kit. Bay
Networks strongly recommends that you order a kit when you order your
Model 3174 module. See your marketing representative for information.
Bay Networks-SynOptics Customer Support
Bay Networks provides live telephone technical support to our distributors,
resellers, and service-contracted customers from two U.S. and three
international support centers. If you have purchased your Bay Networks
product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support
staff of that distributor or reseller for assistance with installation, conÞguration,
troubleshooting, or integration issues.
Customers also have the option of purchasing direct support from Bay
Networks through a variety of service programs. The programs include priority
access telephone support, on-site engineering assistance, software subscription,
hardware replacement, and other programs designed to protect your
investment.
To purchase any of these support programs, including PhonePlusª for 24-hour
telephone technical support, call 1-800-2LANWAN. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call (408) 764-1000. You can also receive information on support
programs from your local Bay Networks Þeld sales ofÞce or purchase Bay
Networks support directly from your reseller.
Bay Networks provides several methods of receiving support and information
on a nonpriority basis through the following automated systems.
893-745-B
xxxi
Preface
CompuServe
Bay Networks maintains an active forum on CompuServe. All you need to join
us online is a computer, a modem, and a CompuServe account. We also
recommend using the CompuServe Information Manager software, available
from CompuServe.
The Bay Networks forum contains libraries of technical and product documents
designed to help you manage and troubleshoot your Bay Networks products.
Software agents and patches are available, and the message boards are
monitored by technical staff and can be a source for problem solving and
shared experiences.
Customers and resellers holding Bay Networks service contracts can visit the
special libraries to acquire advanced levels of support documentation and
software.
To open an account and receive a local dial-up number, call CompuServe at
1-800-524-3388 and ask for representative number 591. In the United
Kingdom, call Freephone 0800-289378. In Germany, call 0130-37-32. In the
rest of Europe, call 44-272-760681. Outside the U.S., Canada, and Europe, call
614-529-1349 and ask for representative number 591, or you can consult your
listings for an ofÞce near you. Once you are online, you can reach our forum by
typing the command GO BAYNETWORKS at any ! prompt.
InfoFACTS
InfoFACTS is the Bay Networks free 24-hour fax-on-demand service. This
automated system contains libraries of technical and product documents
designed to help you manage and troubleshoot your Bay Networks products.
The system can return a fax copy to the caller or to a third party within minutes
of being accessed.
To use InfoFACTS in the U.S. or Canada, call toll-free 1-800-786-3228.
Outside North America, toll calls can be made to (408) 764-1002. Calls from
outside North America must be made from a fax machine handset. International
faxes MUST be initiated from and responded to at the same fax machine.
xxxii
893-745-B
Bay Networks-SynOptics Customer Support
Support Wire
Support Wire is the Bay Networks online support information system
speciÞcally designed and maintained for service-contracted customers and
resellers. Support Wire resides on the OneLine service. You can access it with a
computer and modem or via the Internet. FirstClass remote client software is
required and provided free to service-contracted users that request access to
this system.
Support Wire contains libraries of technical and product documents designed to
help you manage and troubleshoot your Bay Networks products. Software
agents and patches are available, and the message boards are monitored by
technical staff and can be a great source for problem solving and shared
experiences. Different views and access to restricted sections are available
depending upon your service contract status.
To access OneLine and Support Wire, you must register to receive your
personal connection starter kit. The kit contains the access numbers, Internet
address, and FirstClass software. To request the kit, call 1-800-2LANWAN.
World Wide Web
The World Wide Web is a global information system for distribution of Þles and
document viewing online via the Internet.
The Customer Support Web Server offers technical documents, software
agents, and an email capability for communicating with our technical support
engineers. In addition, a feature of the Customer Support Web Server allows
service-contracted customers and resellers to view information on open or
closed cases associated with their contracted site.
Bay Networks maintains a World Wide Web Home Page that you can access at
the uniform resource locator (URL) http://www.baynetworks.com. The
Customer Support Web Server is a menu item on that Home Page. A direct
connection to the Internet and a Web Browser (such as Mosaic or Netscape) are
required.
893-745-B
xxxiii
Chapter 1
Introduction and Functional Overview
This chapter presents an overview of the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module and describes the moduleÕs key features.
The Model 3174 Module
The Model 3174 module is a single-slot module providing IBM 3174 Model
23R functions based on token-ring, remote (telecommunication), and coaxial/
IBM Cabling System (ICS) connectivity. The Model 3174 module offers the
following components and capabilities:
893-745-B
■
Four terminal ports, supporting a maximum of 32 devices of the 3270 type
in various conÞgurations
■
A single telecommunication port (Comm port) on the front panel, enabling
communications to remote hosts
■
Compatibility with existing IBM 3174 cabling, multiplexer hardware
(IBM 3299 Terminal Multiplexers), and attached 3270-type devices
■
A single token-ring connection on the System 3000 backplane, enabling
support of 3174 token-ring functions
■
A wide range of network management capability, enabling management
from both existing IBM 3174 management platforms (such as NetView)
and hub management platforms (such as AIX NetView/6000 and other
platforms)
■
Conformance to System 3000 speciÞcations for module operations,
enabling consistent management when other types of modules are present
■
Backplane NMI connection support, allowing participation in System
3000 conÞgurations with and without System 3000 management
■
Compatibility with existing 3174 reliability, availability, serviceability
(RAS) procedures and with external user interfaces (EUIs)
1-1
Introduction and Functional Overview
The Model 3174 module also supports the following major features:
■
3270-type terminal attachment
■
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) and X.25 host protocols
■
Token-ring gateway support
■
Token-ring downstream physical unit (DSPU) conÞguration
■
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN)
■
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) support
■
Frame-Relay Communications
■
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
■
Central Site Customizing Utility (CSCU), Central Site Change
Management (CSCM), and Central Site Control Facility (CSCF)
■
Fiber-optic multiplexer attachment (via the Model 3299-F Terminal
Multiplexor Module)
■
Terminal attachment using coaxial wiring (via the Model 3299-C
Terminal Multiplexor Module)
■
Terminal attachment using telephone twisted-pair coaxial wiring (via
the Model 3299-U Terminal Multiplexor Module)
The following IBM 3174 Controller features are not supported:
1-2
■
Port Expansion Feature (the Model 3174 module attaches a maximum
22of 32 devices that are of the 3270 type)
■
Binary synchronous communication (BSC)
■
Local channel attachment (ESCON or OEM-parallel)
■
Concurrent Communication Adapter (CCA)
■
Internal multiplexers (Terminal Multiplexer Adapter (TMA) or Telephone
Twisted-Pair Terminal Multiplexer Adapter (TTP TMA))
893-745-B
The Model 3174 Module
■
Integrated-Services Digital Network (ISDN) Adapter
■
ASCII Emulation Adapter (AEA)
■
Ethernet
■
X.21
■
20-MB Þxed disk
■
HardÞle functions (for example, CSCM library storage)
The 3174 guides listed in ÒRelated PublicationsÓ in the Preface contain more
detailed information about the IBM 3174 controller and its features.
Figure 1-1 shows an implementation of a Model 3174 module.
Model 3000 chassis with
Model 3174 module
Modem
3270-type device
4400
Figure 1-1. Model 3174 module in a System 3000 environment
893-745-B
1-3
Introduction and Functional Overview
Operations
Diskettes
Diskettes containing the control program microcode, utilities (for example,
customizing and diagnostics), and downstream load (DSL) Þles are shipped
with the Model 3174 module. The module, as it is received, is not an
operational unit. Using diskettes, you must customize it with your system
conÞguration prior to its use. You should work closely with your site planners
and system coordinators when customizing your module. Refer to Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó and Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for information
about module customization.
NOTE: Microcode may be classiÞed as IBM Licensed Internal Code. Refer to
the Ò3174 Licensed Internal Code NoticeÓ at the beginning of this document
for information.
The types of diskettes are:
1-4
■
Control (CTL) DisketteÑThe Control diskette is used for the daily
operation of the module. Once the Control diskette is customized, it
contains operational microcode and conÞguration information unique to
your organization. For example, the customized Control diskette contains
information that describes all the terminals attached to the module. A
Control diskette is shipped with your module.
■
Control Extension (DSL) DisketteÑThe Control Extension diskette is
shipped with your module. Its microcode must be copied onto the RAM
disk prior to initial machine load (IML) of the module. The Control
Extension diskette is used in conjunction with the Control diskette. It
contains both microcode necessary to make the module operational and
DSL Þles. DSL Þles containing microcode necessary for certain device
types are used for display stations that require the module to downstream
load its operational microcode and for some features and functions such as
TCP/IP, 3174-Peer Communication and Bridges, and APPN.
893-745-B
Operations
■
Utility (UTL) DisketteÑThe Utility diskette contains the microcode
necessary to run various module utilities, including customization and
ofßine diagnostics. A Utility diskette is shipped with your module.
■
Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) DisketteÑThe RPQ diskette contains
the changes or additions to the functional capabilities of the module to
fulÞll your unique data processing requirements.
■
Library (LIB) DisketteÑThe LIB diskette is used to store the central site
library members and their customizing data.
Status Codes
Operation of the Model 3174 module may depend on the use of status codes
and their action plans. After you install the module, it will communicate with
you by means of status codesÑprompting you for responses, informing you of
the progress of an operation, or indicating that a problem exists. The SynOptics
Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation
Controller Module and IBM 3174 Status Codes guide describe the status codes.
Tests
The following tests can be performed:
893-745-B
■
OfßineÑYou should learn how to run the ofßine tests described in the
SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174
Workstation Controller Module. These tests help you solve problems that
occur with the Model 3174 module. Ofßine tests are on the Utility
diskette.
■
OnlineÑThe Control diskette provided with the Model 3174 module
contains diagnostic routines called online tests. The online tests permit
you to test the various 3174 functions or view statistical 3174 data. Online
tests are described in the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module.
1-5
Introduction and Functional Overview
Problem-Solving
Knowing the results of pertinent tests enables you to help your support groups,
who in turn can help you solve a problem.
The Model 3174 module and the attached terminals are part of a larger
network. To solve a problem, it usually is necessary to isolate the problem to a
particular part of the network. The problem-solving procedures in the
SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174
Workstation Controller Module assist you to isolate and correct problems that
may occur.
For example, many problems are the result of poor cable connections.
Therefore, you may be asked to check cable or terminal connections to Þnd the
source of the problem.
If the procedures in the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide
for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module do not help to solve the
problem, you may be directed to other 3174 publications that have more
detailed procedures for correcting problems. You may also refer to your System
3000 publications for information on hub problem determination. You may
want to contact your service personnel for assistance in using these procedures.
You should gather all the information available to you before you call for
assistance about a problem.
The Front Panel
Figure 1-2 shows the front panel of the Model 3174 module. The front panel
includes four terminal ports, the communication (Comm) port, an operator
panel, a diskette drive, and a module ejector.
1-6
893-745-B
The Front Panel
Status Bypass NM C
Fault Ring 1 Ring 2
Data 4Mb/s 16Mb/s
Status display
IML
Alt 2
Enter
Alt 1
Advance
Diskette
drive
Comm
port
Terminal
ports
Module
ejector
4522
Figure 1-2. Model 3174 module front panel
893-745-B
1-7
Introduction and Functional Overview
Terminal Ports
The four terminal ports have dual-purpose connectors (DPCs) that support both
coaxial and ICS cabling. Up to 32 3270-type devices can be supported.
Table 1-1 shows a sample of the various device conÞgurations supported by the
Model 3174 module.
NOTE: The terminal ports are not directly controlled by management
modules.
Table 1-1. Sample Model 3174 module 3270-type device
conÞgurations
Maximum number of attached devices per port
Physical
port
Directly
attached
Attached to
8-port
multiplexer
Attached to
32-port
multiplexer
0-7
1
8
32
8-15
1
8
0
16-23
1
8
0
24-31
1
8
0
Note: Any device configuration value higher than 1 implies the use of an external multiplexer. Refer to the
IBM 3299 Terminal Multiplexer Product Information and Setup manual for more information on using
multiplexers.
Comm Port
Remote connectivity is provided through the Comm port. The Comm port
connection is a standard 25-pin D-shell connector. It supports the following
electrical interfaces for SDLC, X.25, and frame-relay remote attachment:
■
CCITT V.24/V.28 (EIA 232-D)
■
CCITT V.35
NOTE: X.21 is not supported.
The communication cables connect either directly to a host or to a modem that
provides a teleprocessing link to a host.
1-8
893-745-B
The Front Panel
Operator Panel
The Model 3174 module operator panel contains a four-character Status
display, nine light-emitting diode (LED) indicators, and three push buttons. The
functions of the indicators and controls on the Model 3174 module operator
panel are described in the following paragraphs.
Status Display
This display shows status codes.
LEDs
The LEDs indicate status and activity for the components of the Model 3174
module. Table 2-4 in Chapter 2, ÒInstallation, Hub Customization, and
Checkout,Ó describes the various LED states.
IML Push Button
The IML push button is recessed. When the IML push button is pressed and
released, IML tests run. If no errors are found, operational microcode is loaded
into module storage from a customized Control diskette in the diskette drive
and the RAM drive. If a failure occurs during any portion of the IML sequence,
a status code appears in the Status display.
The IML push button is also used with the ALT 1 and ALT 2 push buttons.
Dual-Function Push Buttons
The ALT1/ADV and ALT2/ENTER push buttons are dual-function push
buttons. Each can work in conjunction with the IML push button or alone for
Advance or Enter functions.
■
ALT 1/ADV push buttonÑThe ALT 1 push button is pressed in
conjunction with the IML push button to do any of the following tasks:
Ð Customer setup tests
Ð Customizing procedures
Ð Diagnostic tests
The Utility diskette contains the test and customizing microcode and must
be installed in the diskette drive.
The ADV push button is used to scroll the Test Menu or to display
additional status code Þelds in the Status display.
893-745-B
1-9
Introduction and Functional Overview
■
ALT 2/ENTER push buttonÑThe ALT 2 push button is pressed in
conjunction with the IML push button. ALT 2 IML is used whenever
hardware problem determination is required. The Utility diskette contains
the test microcode and must be installed in the diskette drive.
■
The ENTER push button causes the function indicated in the Status
display to be performed. ENTER is also used when the module is
operational to display any status codes that may be present during normal
operations.
The Backplane Interface
The System 3000 concentrator connects to a token-ring network through its
backplane port. You can select two modes of operation for the backplane
interface:
■
Backplane Connection jumper
■
Bit Rate Selection jumper
The selections are made by means of onboard backplane jumper settings. Refer
to ÒJumper Settings,Ó in Chapter 2, ÒInstallation, Hub Customization, and
Checkout,Ó for more information about selecting the jumper settings.
IBM 3174 Controller Features
Refer to the IBM 3174 Functional Description manual for more detailed
information about the following IBM 3174 Controller features.
Token-Ring DSPU
The Model 3174 module normally operates as a token-ring control unit,
allowing devices that are coaxially attached to the module to communicate with
up to eight SNA hosts that are accessible through the token-ring network.
1-10
893-745-B
IBM 3174 Controller Features
SNA Gateway
The SNA gateway allows the Model 3174 module to provide a gateway for
devices in token-ring networks. Up to 250 DSPUs can access an SNA host
through the Comm port. The DSPUs are identiÞed by mapping each address to
a unique SDLC address or frame-relay data link connection identiÞer/service
access point (DLCI/SAP). At least one SDLC address or DLCI/SAP is always
reserved for the Model 3174 module. Figure 1-3 shows a standard gateway
conÞguration.
Model 3174
module
Model 3000 chassis
Model 3502
host module
SNA host
Modem
4401
Figure 1-3. Model 3174 module in a gateway conÞguration
893-745-B
1-11
Introduction and Functional Overview
APPN
The APPN feature enhances the connectivity options of the Model 3174
module and its coaxially attached devices. APPN in the Model 3174 module
allows interconnection of systems of widely differing sizes into networks of a
dynamic topology. APPN connectivity is obtained through either the Comm
port or the token-ring backplane port. The resulting network is now easier to
use, is more reliable, and provides more ßexibility. Figure 1-4 shows an APPN
conÞguration.
SNA host
Modem
Modem
4402
Figure 1-4. Model 3174 module in an APPN conÞguration
1-12
893-745-B
IBM 3174 Controller Features
TCP/IP
TCP/IP allows coaxially attached displays and printers operating in control unit
terminal (CUT) mode to communicate with a TCP/IP host through a token-ring
network or frame-relay network. Figure 1-5 shows a TCP/IP conÞguration.
TCP/IP host
TCP/IP host
Ethernet
MAC bridge
or IP router
4403
Figure 1-5. Model 3174 module in a TCP/IP conÞguration
TCP/IP allows the Model 3174 module to communicate through a LAN or
frame-relay network with other TCP/IP hosts. IP routing provides static routing
between a LAN interface or frame-relay network. The TN3270 protocol
enables terminals attached to the controller to access 3270 applications using
TCP/IP as the transport mechanism. Line printer daemon (LPD) server and
TCP/IP socket printing allow TCP/IP hosts to send printer output to Model
3174-attached printers.
893-745-B
1-13
Introduction and Functional Overview
Frame Relay
The optional Frame-Relay Communications feature enhances the connectivity
options of the Model 3174 module by allowing the Model 3174 module to
transport the following multiple protocols across a frame-relay network: SNA,
LAN Gateway, APPN, multiport bridging, and TCP/IP.
Frame Relay supports multiport bridging that connects two or more bridge
ports with a combination of token-ring, frame-relay, or 3174-Peer
Communications support. Remote source route bridging uses frame relay to
interconnect token-ring and 3174-Peer segments to remote token-ring and
3174-Peer segments. Figure 1-6 shows a frame-relay conÞguration.
TCP/IP host
SNA host
Frame-relay
network
Modem
5683
Figure 1-6. Model 3174 module in a frame-relay conÞguration
1-14
893-745-B
IBM 3174 Controller Features
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
3174-Peer Communication allows IBM personal computers (or equivalent) and
Personal System/2 (PS/2) computers coaxially attached to the Model 3174
module to communicate peer-to-peer by forming a star-wired LAN segment.
Remote bridging function is supported to interconnect two token rings (or
3174-Peer segments) across a frame-relay network or communications link
using frame-relay protocols. The LAN segment is bridged to a token-ring
network through the backplane port. Figure 1-7 shows a possible 3174-Peer
Communication conÞguration.
SNA host
Token ring
Bridge
PC or PS/2
with fixed disk
4404
Figure 1-7. Model 3174 module in a 3174-Peer Communication conÞguration
893-745-B
1-15
Introduction and Functional Overview
CSCM
Central Site Customization Utility (CSCU) and Central Site Customization
Management (CSCM) help you customize the Model 3174 module more easily.
CSCU allows you to create customized Control diskettes for distribution to
controllers and Model 3174 modules in your network. CSCM allows you to
distribute customizing or microcode data electronically, instead of sending the
data by means of a diskette.
NOTE: The Model 3174 module CSCU library storage data is limited to 210
library members on each library diskette.
For more information about CSCU and CSCM, refer to ÒCentral Site
CustomizingÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó and refer to the
IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide.
1-16
893-745-B
Chapter 2
Installation, Hub Customization, and
Checkout
This chapter describes the installation, hub conÞguration, and checkout
procedures for the Model 3174 module. Read the precautionary procedures
before unpacking the module.
Once the module has been installed, follow the steps in Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó to conÞgure the module for proper operation.
Precautionary Procedures
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage static-sensitive devices on circuit
boards. Follow these precautions when you handle the Model 3174 module:
■
Do not remove the board from its antistatic shielding bag until you are
ready to inspect it.
■
Handle the board by the faceplate only.
■
Use proper grounding techniques when you install the Model 3174
module. These techniques include using a foot strap and grounded mat or
wearing a grounded static discharge wrist strap. An alternate method is to
touch the grounded rack or other source of ground just before you handle
the module.
Unpacking Procedure
Use the following procedure when unpacking the Model 3174 module:
1.
Verify that the model number listed on the side of the shipping carton
matches the model number of the Model 3174 module you ordered.
2.
Remove the module from the shipping carton.
3.
Remove the module from the antistatic shielding bag and inspect it for
damage. Always handle the module by the faceplate, being careful not
to touch the components.
If the module appears to be damaged, replace it in the antistatic shielding
bag, return it to the shipping carton, and contact your local supplier.
893-745-B
2-1
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
Bay Networks suggests you keep the shipping carton and antistatic shielding
bag in which your module was shipped in case you later want to repackage the
module for storage or shipment.
Quick Installation Procedures
Table 2-1 outlines the steps you must complete to install your module. If you
are familiar with these instructions, you may want to use the table as a
checklist.
NOTE: You must perform Steps 7 and 8 (initialize the RAM disk and IML the
module) to make the module operational.
Table 2-1. Quick installation procedure
Step
Procedure
Reference
1.
Unpack the module. (Follow ESD
precautionary procedures.)
“Unpacking Procedure”
in this chapter
2.
Configure the jumpers on the module
to the appropriate settings.
“Jumper Settings”
in this chapter
3.
Insert the module into a blank slot in the
hub and tighten the faceplate screws.
“Installing the Module”
in this chapter
4.
Establish connections from the module using
the appropriate connectors and cabling.
“Installing the Module”
in this chapter
5.
Plan the customization of the module.
Chapter 3, “Customization
Planning”
6.
Customize the Model 3174 module using the
appropriate diskettes, and IML the module.
Chapter 4, “Customization”
7.
Initialize the RAM disk.
“Initializing the RAM Disk”
and “Making the Model 3174
Module Operational” in
Chapter 4, “Customization”
8.
IML the module and verify LED status for
normal operation.
“How to IML the Model 3174
Module” in Chapter 4,
“Customization”
Note: For potential problems, refer to the
SynOptics Problem Determination and Service
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module.
2-2
893-745-B
Jumper Settings
Jumper Settings
The Model 3174 module has two onboard backplane jumpers: JP1 and JP2.
These jumpers enable you to select your backplane conÞguration.
The two modes of operation speciÞed by the jumpers are:
■
Backplane Connection
■
Bit Rate Selection
Figure 2-1 shows the location of the jumpers on the Model 3174 module.
Ring 2
16MB
ISOLATED
Ring 1
4MB
JP2
JP1
4405
Figure 2-1. Model 3174 module jumper locations
893-745-B
2-3
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
NOTE: Ring speed is measured in megabits (Mb) per second not megabytes
(MB).
Setting the Bit Rate Selection Jumper (JP1)
JP1 is the Model 3174 module Bit Rate Selection jumper. It enables you to
select either 4 or 16 Mb/s ring speed.
With JP1 in the top (factory default) position, ring speed is 16 Mb/s. With the
jumper in the bottom position, ring speed is 4 Mb/s.
Table 2-2 deÞnes selection of JP1. Figure 2-1 shows JP1 set to 16 Mb/s.
Table 2-2. JP1 jumper settings and function
Jumper
position
Ring
speed
Factory
default?
Top
16 Mb/s
Yes
Bottom
4 Mb/s
No
Setting the Backplane Connection Jumper (JP2)
JP2 is the Model 3174 module Backplane Connection jumper. The backplane
jumper controls ring selection according to the ring segment number to which it
is set.
There are two possible ring segment numbers: Ring 1 and Ring 2. When JP2 is
in the bottom (factory default) position, the Model 3174 module operates on
the Ring 1 segment. With JP2 in the top position, the module operates on the
Ring 2 segment. JP2 can also be set to an isolated mode so it is disconnected
from the backplane rings.
2-4
893-745-B
Installing the Module
Table 2-3 deÞnes selection of JP2, and Figure 2-1 shows JP2 set to Ring 1.
Table 2-3. JP2 jumper settings and function
Jumper
position
Token-ring
networks
accessed
Factory
default?
Top
Ring 2
No
Middle
Isolated
No
Bottom
Ring 1
Yes
It is not necessary for modules to be placed directly next to one another in order
for them to communicate on the same ring.
Installing the Module
Installation of the Model 3174 module into an operational hub does not require
you to power down the hub. The Model 3174 module has the ability to be hot
swapped, meaning that you can install and remove the module while the hub is
operating. This procedure will not affect operation of any other module in the
hub. When installing the module, please follow the precautionary procedures
outlined earlier in this chapter.
Read through the installation instructions completely before actually doing any
of the installation tasks. Then, return to Step 1 and follow the instructions.
Perform the following steps to install the Model 3174 module:
1.
Locate the moduleÕs serial number label on the back of the module.
Record the serial number, which you need for customization.
2.
Set the jumpers to the appropriate positions.
The two jumpers, JP1 and JP2, are used to select the token-ring network
and ring speed. See Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 for explanations of the jumper
settings.
3.
893-745-B
Locate a blank slot in the hub. If necessary, remove a blank panel on
the hub to expose the slot for the module.
2-5
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
4.
Insert the module into the board guides at the top and bottom of the
slot and slide it into the hub, as shown in Figure 2-2. Make sure the
connectors are Þrmly seated in the backplane of the hub. Use the
inserter/extractor lever to guide the module into the hub.
Model 3174
module
Model 3000 chassis
4406
Figure 2-2. Model 3174 module installation
5.
Fasten the screws on the front panel of the Model 3174 module
faceplate to the hub with your Þngers (do not overtighten).
At the power-up sequence or reset, the module performs a series of
internal self-tests, including processor checks, Þrmware integrity tests,
memory tests, and interface module tests. These tests take approximately
30 seconds to complete.
Without a diskette, the unit will post a status code of 130 and the fault
indicator will be on. This is normal when there is no a diskette in the drive.
Should the unit detect a failure, a status code appears on the Status display
on the front panel, and the Fault LED is turned on. Refer to the IBM 3174
Status Codes manual and the SynOptics Problem Determination and
Service Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module for
information on problem solving.
2-6
893-745-B
Installing the Module
6.
Do you want to establish a remote attachment to a host?
Yes Attach one end of a communication cable to the Comm port on the
faceplate of the module, and set all the TEST/OPER switches on the
communication cable to TEST.
NOTE: There are several possible communication cable conÞgurations
available, depending on your installation. Refer to the SynOptics Planning
and Site Preparation Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module and the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the
Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module for more information on the exact
communication cable you need for your installation.
No Continue with Step 7.
7.
Insert the Utility diskette into the diskette drive.
NOTE: For the following steps, if the correct numbers do not appear in the
Status display, refer to the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module and the IBM 3174
Status Codes manual.
8.
Press and hold ALT 1.
9.
Press and release IML.
31 appears in the Status display.
10. Release ALT 1.
40 appears in the Status display.
11. Press ADV repeatedly until 81 appears in the Status display.
12. Press the Enter key.
81 appears in the Status display.
13. Press the Enter key.
Tests run and progress numbers appear in the Status display. The tests can
take several minutes to run.
After the tests are successfully completed, 2081 appears and remains in
the Status display.
893-745-B
2-7
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
14. Do you have a communication cable attached to the Comm port?
Yes Set the TEST/OPER switches on the communication cable to OPER.
No Continue with Step 15.
15. Attach the end to the appropriate modem, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Refer to the modem documentation if necessary.
Modem
4407
Figure 2-3. Model 3174 module Comm port cable connection to a modem
16. Remove the Utility diskette from the diskette drive. Store the diskette
with the module publications.
2-8
893-745-B
Installing the Module
17. Do you want to attach 3270-type devices to the module?
Yes Install the signal cables to the terminal ports on the faceplate of the
module. Attach the other ends to 3299 terminal multiplexers or
3270-type devices, as shown in Figure 2-4.
NOTE: There are many possible signal cable conÞgurations available,
depending on your installation. Refer to the SynOptics Planning and Site
Preparation Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module for
more information on the exact signal cables you need for your installation.
No Continue with Step 18.
4428
Figure 2-4. Model 3174 module terminal port cable connection to a
terminal
18. See Table 2-1 earlier in this chapter for your next step in the
installation procedure.
893-745-B
2-9
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
Monitoring the Front Panel
The LEDs on the faceplate of the Model 3174 module show the status and
activity for the components of the Model 3174 module. There are nine LEDs:
Status, Bypass, NM C, Fault, Ring 1, Ring 2, Data, 4Mb/s, and 16Mb/s.
Figure 2-5 shows the location of the LEDs on the faceplate of the Model 3174
module, and Table 2-4 describes the various LED states.
Status Bypass NM C
Fault Ring 1 Ring 2
Data 4Mb/s 16Mb/s
4409
Figure 2-5. Model 3174 module faceplate and System 3000 Intelligent hub
2-10
893-745-B
Monitoring the Front Panel
Table 2-4. LED state and deÞnition
LED
State
Status
Green — on
Definition
Module is receiving DC power.
If a network management module (NMM) is attached
to the same backplane ring, this LED also indicates
that the communications path to the NMM is working
and that network management has not detected a
fault in the 3174 module.
Bypass
NM C
Fault
Ring 1*
Ring 2*
Data
4Mb/s
16Mb/s
Green — off
Module is not receiving power, the Fault LED has
been turned on, or communication with the NMM
has timed out.
Yellow — on
NMM has bypassed (isolated) the module from the
backplane ring.
Yellow — off
Module is not bypassed.
Yellow — on
Module backplane ring connection is under NMM
control.
Yellow — off
Module backplane ring connection is not under
NMM control.
Yellow — on
Fault has occurred within the module. The Ops
panel provides additional information on the fault in
the form of status codes.
Yellow — off
Fault has not been detected within the module.
Green — on
Module is connected to Ring 1 of the two
independent backplane rings.
Green — off
Module is not connected to Ring 1 on the backplane.
Green — on
Module is connected to Ring 2 of the two
independent backplane rings.
Green — off
Module is not connected to Ring 2 on the backplane.
Green — flashing
based on traffic
Data is being transferred over one of the module
physical connections.
Green — off
Data is not being transferred over one of the module
physical connections.
Green — on
Bit Rate Selection jumper is set to 4 Mb/s.
Green — off
Bit Rate Selection jumper is not set to 4 Mb/s.
Green — on
Bit Rate Selection jumper is set to 16 Mb/s.
Green — off
Bit Rate Selection jumper is not set to 16 Mb/s.
* If both the Ring 1 and Ring 2 LEDs are off, the Isolate operation has been selected, and the module is not
connected to either backplane ring.
893-745-B
2-11
Installation, Hub Customization, and Checkout
WhatÕs Next?
Initial installation and checkout are complete. To make the Model 3174 module
operational, you must follow these steps:
2-12
1.
Plan the customization of the module (refer to Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó for information).
2.
Customize the module (refer to Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for
information).
3.
Initialize the RAM disk (refer to ÒInitializing the RAM DiskÓ in
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for information).
4.
IML the Model 3174 module (refer to ÒMaking the Model 3174
Module OperationalÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for
information).
893-745-B
Chapter 3
Customization Planning
Refer to the IBM 3174 Planning Guide if you are planning microcode
customization for the Þrst time. If you are experienced at planning microcode
customization, you may want to skim those chapters before you begin the
following procedure.
Planner: During this procedure, you leave these steps and go to the planning
sections of this chapter that contain the information you need to Þll out the
worksheets. Once the worksheets that are required for a step are completed,
return to this procedure to complete the next step.
The worksheets are located in Appendix I, ÒConÞguration Worksheets,Ó of this
guide and in the IBM 3174 Planning Guide.
The following steps explain how to Þll out each worksheet:
1.
Fill out Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment.
2.
On Worksheet 1, you speciÞed a response to question 101. Depending
on that response, Þll out one of the following worksheets.
If question 101ÑHost Attachment
Fill out
worksheets
= 2—SDLC
4, 14
= 3—X.25
5, 13, 14
= 7—Token-Ring Network
9, 14, 54
= 9—Frame-Relay Network
53, 54
= M—Multihost Support
2
Planner: If you did not Þll out Worksheet 2, proceed to Step 5.
893-745-B
3-1
Customization Planning
3.
On Worksheet 1, you speciÞed a response to question 102. Depending
on that response, Þll out one of the following worksheets.
If question 102ÑLAN Adapter Type
Fill out
worksheets
= 0—None
None
= 1—Token Ring
51A
Planner: If you did not Þll out Worksheet 2, proceed to Step 5.
4.
Complete this step only if you Þlled out Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host
DeÞnition.
Depending on the response you speciÞed in the Host Attach Þeld for the
primary host on the primary link (1A), Þll out one of the worksheets in the
following table.
If the primary hostÕs attachment field
Fill out
worksheets
= 2—SDLC
4, 14
= 3—X.25
5, 13, 14
= 7—Token-Ring Network
9, 14, 54
= 9—Frame-Relay Network
53, 54
Write in 1A in the Host ID Þeld at the top of the worksheet.
3-2
893-745-B
5.
Consult the following table to determine if you have responded to a
question that requires additional planning. If not, read the following
ÒPlannerÓ note to determine where to proceed.
If on worksheets
Question
Fill out
worksheets
4, 5, and 9
116 = 1 or 2
11A
4, 5, and 9
127 = nonzero
12
4
150 = 10
150 = 00 and 510 = 1
150 = 10 and 300 = 1
45, 46, 47,
45
45, 46, 47, 56
53
150 = 1
45, 46, 47, 56
54
569 = Y
55
Planner: If you are not planning for multihost support, go to Step 8. If you
are planning for multihost support, complete the remaining steps.
6.
893-745-B
Each additional host attachment requires separate worksheets. The
worksheets that you Þll out depend on the link attachment and on the
communication protocol. For each additional host attachment, Þll out
the worksheets indicated. (Be sure to include the host identiÞer on
each worksheet.)
If the communication protocol is
Fill out
worksheets
X.25
5S, 13S
Token-Ring Network
9S
Frame-Relay Network
53S
3-3
Customization Planning
7.
8.
For each worksheet Þlled out in Step 6, consult the following table to
determine if you have responded to a question requiring additional
planning. (If not, go to Step 8.) Include the host identiÞer on each
worksheet.
If on worksheets
Question
Fill out
worksheet
5S or 9S
116 = 1 or 2
11A
5S or 9S
127 = nonzero
12
53S
150 = 1
45, 46, 47, 56
If you Þlled out Worksheet 14 and responded to question 510 with a 1,
a minimum level of APPN support is in effect. To exceed this level of
support, Þll out the worksheets indicated.
To deÞne
.
9.
3-4
Fill out
worksheets
APPN Node Definition
15, 16, 16A, 17,
17A
Class of Service (COS)
18, 19, 20 (A&B),
21
X.25 Circuit (WAN) Profiles
52
If you want to have one or more of the following features supported,
Þll out the worksheets indicated.
To support
Fill out
worksheets
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
22A–24H
Modified Keyboards
Keyboard 1–5
TCP/IP
25A, 27 through
31 (A,B,C,&D)
TCP/IP SNMP Options
31E
893-745-B
Worksheet Summary
10. If you want to deÞne devices, Þll out Worksheet 38. Depending on
responses speciÞed on Worksheet 38, Þll out the worksheets indicated.
To deÞne
Fill out
worksheets
Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM)
39
Logical Terminal Assignment (LTA)
40A
Extended Vital Product Data (Extended VPD)
41
11. Give the completed worksheets to the person who will customize the
Control diskette. If you have planned for multihost support, group the
worksheets by their host identiÞer before giving them to the
customizer.
Worksheet Summary
If you are familiar with the microcode customization process, you can use this
summary to plan your conÞguration. Table 3-1, Table 3-2, and Table 3-3 list
worksheets that you should Þll out to plan the speciÞc areas of your
conÞguration. Some worksheets are optional. The worksheets are located in
Appendix I, ÒConÞguration Worksheets,Ó of this guide and in IBM 3174
Planning Guide.
All conÞgurations require that you Þll out Worksheet 1.
Table 3-1. Type of host attachment
893-745-B
Attachment type
Worksheets
SDLC
with Token-Ring Gateway
4, 14
4, 14, 45, 46, 47
X.25
5, 13, 14
Token-Ring Network
with Frame Relay
9, 14, 51A
9, 14, 51A, 54
Frame-Relay Network
with Token-Ring Gateway
53, 54
53, 54, 14, 45, 46,
47, 56
Multiple Hosts
(The primary host on primary link requires
worksheets for one of the preceding options.)
2
3-5
Customization Planning
Table 3-2. Additional host attachment
Attachment type
Worksheets
X.25
5S, 13 or 13S
Token-Ring Network
9S
Frame-Relay Network
with Token-Ring Gateway
53S
53S, 45, 46, 47,
56
Table 3-3. Additional areas
3-6
Area
Worksheets
Multiple Logical Terminals
10 (A&D)
Port Assignment
11A
Response Time Monitor
12
APPN
15 through 21, 52
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
22A through 24H
Device Definition (PAM, LTA, and Extended VPD)
PAM LTA Extended VPD
38
PAM
LTA
Extended VPD
39
40A
41
Module Storage
49
Modified Keyboards
Keyboard 1–5
TCP/IP
25A, 27 through
31 (A,B,C,&D)
TCP/IP SNMP Options
31E
End-User Productivity Functions
50
Frame-Relay (data link connection identifiers) DLCIs
55
893-745-B
Worksheet Summary
Customizing Procedures
You may need to have the customizer do the following tasks:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Merge RPQs
Merge DSL
Copy Þles
Perform microcode upgrade
Perform media management
Identify customizing keyboard
Refer to the appendixes for these additional procedures.
893-745-B
3-7
Customization Planning
Completing Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment
098: Online Test Password
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters.
There is no default.
A response to this question is optional.
Enter a response if you plan to use any online tests that might affect the
operation of the Model 3174 module, or if you intend to use the Record/Play
function.
For additional information on the online tests, refer to the SynOptics Problem
Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module.
This password must not be the same as a standard NetView or VTAM
command (as deÞned by a CLIST). If a password duplicating a command is
deÞned, NetView will recognize it when online tests are invoked through
CSCF. NetView will execute the password as a command, and the online test
will never be executed.
When responding to this question with a password, do not precede the
password with blanks or enter blanks between characters.
099: Product Assistance Data
Response: Up to 68 alphanumeric characters.
A response to this question is optional. Use it to record the names and
telephone numbers of people to contact if there is a problem with the module.
You may leave blanks where you have not written an alphanumeric character.
3-8
893-745-B
Completing Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment
100: 3174 Model Designation
Response: 41R or 43R.
41R = Primary host attachment is SDLC, X.25, or frame relay
43R = Primary host attachment is the token ring
Enter the appropriate model conÞguration number of the module you plan to
customize.
There is no default response.
101: Host Attachment
Response:
2 = SDLC
3 = X.25
7 = Token-Ring Network
9 = Frame-Relay Network
M = Multihost Support
There is no default response.
NOTE: To use the Gateway feature, respond with 2, 9, or M.
Option 2 (SDLC) represents SDLC architecture on V.24/V.35 interfaces (either
switched or leased).
Use Table 3-4 to determine which responses for question 101 are valid with the
model you designated for question 100.
Table 3-4. Valid question 101 responses
If response to
question 101 is:
Response to question 100 can be:
2
41R
3
41R
7
43R
9
41R
M
41R, 43R
Responding with M indicates that you want to have multiple 3270 host
attachments.
893-745-B
3-9
Customization Planning
Multihost support requires that you plan the microcode customization by Þlling
out worksheets for each host attachment. Think of each attachment to a host as
a separate conÞguration.
102: LAN Adapter Type
Response:
0 = None
1 = Token Ring
The default response is 0.
This question determines whether or not the module attaches to the token ring.
If question 100 = 43R, question 102 must be 1. If question 100 = 41R, question
102 can be 0 or 1.
103: Non-Standard Operation Selection
Response: A 16-character hexadecimal string using hexadecimal digits 0Ð9 and
AÐF.
The default response is 0000000000000000.
This question determines whether the nonstandard operation (NSO) feature is
enabled. Each hexadecimal digit represents four NSO bits, and these bits
control the NSO feature. If an NSO bit is 1, the NSO feature is enabled. If it is
0, it is disabled.
NOTE: Most installations require that the NSO bits be set to the default. Your
customer support center advises you if any NSO bits are applicable for your
installation.
3-10
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition
If you respond with ÒM,Ó Þll out Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition. This
worksheet is used to identify the hosts and their characteristics.
The columns on Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition are described as follows:
Host ID
A two-character identifier for each host. The first
character is numeric and identifies the specific host
link. The second character is alphabetic and identifies
one of multiple hosts on that link.
A host ID beginning with the number Ò1Ó represents a
host on the primary link. Up to eight hosts can be
accessed over that primary link, depending on the
configuration. The second character in the host ID
differentiates between the hosts (AÐH). The letter ÒAÓ
in the host ID identifies the primary host. Secondary
hosts are identified as 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, 1G, and 1H.
Adapter Type
This field is not applicable.
Host Attach
This field identifies the type of host attachment for
each link. The primary host on the primary link (1A)
has the following possibilities:
2 = SDLC
3 = X.25
7 = Token-Ring Network
9 = Frame-Relay Network
NOTE: Respond with 3, 7, or 9 for single-link multihost support.
To use the Gateway feature, respond with 2, 9, or M.
See Table 3-4 for valid responses based on the model speciÞed in question 100.
893-745-B
3-11
Customization Planning
Hardware Group
This field is not applicable.
Include In IML
This field specifies whether a host will be included in
the IML (initial microcode load). Possible responses
are:
0 = No
1 = Yes
If you want to use a host only at certain times, fill out
the worksheets for the host attachment and have the
customizer respond to this field with 1. Once the
customization data has been entered for the host, the
response can be changed to 0. When you want to use
the host, change the 0 to 1 and re-IML the module.
Host Descriptor
This optional field is used to describe each host. The
description can contain up to 20 characters. If filled
out, the description appears in the operator information
area (OIA) of displays that access the host.
Correct functioning of devices that are emulating
control unit terminals (CUTs) may depend on the
display of the following indicators:
■
Programmable Symbol Indicators
■
Character Set, Color, and Highlighting
■
Shift Indicators
■
Caps Lock area
■
Extended Graphics
The Host Descriptor may overlay these indicators. If
one of these indicators is used, do not specify a Host
Descriptor.
3-12
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
104: Controller (Model 3174 Module) Address
Response: A two-character hexadecimal address.
There is no default response.
Ask the system programmer at the host system location for this hexadecimal
address. The host system recognizes this as the input/output (I/O) address.
For SDLC: If the host access is available through VTAM/Network Control
Program (NCP), specify the controller (Model 3174 module) address on the
ADDR operand of the NCPÕs physical unit (PU) statement.
For X.25: This is the X.25 secondary station address.
For token-ring gateway: The host system recognizes this as the lower (base) I/
O address.
105: Upper Limit Address
Response: A two-character hexadecimal address. The system programmer at
the host system location will supply this address.
For SDLC without the Gateway Feature: 00 is the only valid response.
For frame relay: This question is not applicable.
For the token-ring gateway: The upper-limit address indicates the range of
SDLC station addresses assigned to the token-ring downstream physical units
(DSPU) communicating to this host through the gateway. The addresses
deÞned at the host must begin with the gateway address and must be followed
by the addresses assigned to the token-ring DSPUs. The complete range of
addresses must be deÞned contiguously at the host access method.
For example: You have a token-ring network with 30 DSPUs and another
token-ring network with 10 DSPUs for a total of 40. The address of the module
you are customizing is 10. Your response to question 104 would be 10, since
that is the lower limit in the range of addresses. To Þnd the response to question
105, the upper limit in the range of addresses, add the number of DSPUs (in
hexadecimal). There are 40 DSPUs (28 hexadecimal). Therefore, the
upper-limit address is 38 (see the following example).
893-745-B
3-13
Customization Planning
Example
Decimal 40 (number of devices) = 28 hexadecimal
10 hexadecimal (the module address)
+ 28 hexadecimal (number of devices)
__________________________________________
= 38 hexadecimal (the upper limit address)
106: LAN Address and Service Access Point
Planner: Questions 106 and 107 apply to modules without the 3270 Gateway
feature that attach to the token-ring network.
Response: A 12-character hexadecimal address and a 2-character hexadecimal
service access point.
Address
Copy the token-ring address from Ò080: Token-Ring AddressÓ later in this
chapter. During customization, this question is automatically Þlled in with your
response to question 080.
Service Access Point (SAP)
The default is 04. If you are not using single-link multihost support, respond
with the default. Your response must be a multiple of four ranging from
hexadecimal 04 to hexadecimal EC.
When using single-link multihost support, you can access additional hosts
through a single gateway (if supported) by specifying additional service access
points (SAPs). Use of the SAP depends on the gatewayÕs capabilities. If you are
using single-link multihost support, you may have to specify a SAP other than
the default.
3-14
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
NOTE:
¥ When Þlling out the worksheets for secondary hosts on the primary link
(1BÐ1H), copy the address portion from Ò080: Token-Ring AddressÓ later
in this chapter. The response provided for the primary host (1A) is
automatically transferred to the secondary hosts during the customizing
procedures.
¥ If the gateway that you are using is a 372x, you must deÞne the token-ring
network addresses as locally administered addresses using dial digits (digits
that can be dialed on the telephone) 0 through 9 only. The 372x should be
connected through telephone lines.
¥ The response to questions 106 and 107 cannot be the same.
¥ All addresses must be unique.
107: Gateway Address and SAP
Response: A 12-character hexadecimal address and a 2-character hexadecimal
service access point.
Address
The address can be either a locally administered address or a universal address.
A locally administered address is in the following format:
XYYY YYYY YYYY
where X is hexadecimal 4, 5, 6, or 7, and YYY YYYY YYYY is the
user-assigned portion of the locally administered address.
A universal address is in the following format:
WWWW WWZZ ZZZZ
where:
WWWW WW
ZZ ZZZZ
893-745-B
=
The ID of the adapter manufacturer.
= The unique address portion of this adapterÕs universal
address.
3-15
Customization Planning
Service Access Point
The default is 04. If you are not using single-link multihost support, respond
with the default. Your response must be a multiple of 4 ranging from
hexadecimal 04 to hexadecimal EC.
When using single-link multihost support, you can access additional hosts
through a single gateway (if supported) by specifying additional service access
points (SAPs). Usage of the SAP depends on the gatewayÕs capabilities. If you
are using single-link multihost support, you may have to specify a SAP other
than the default.
NOTE:
¥ If the gateway that you are using is a 372x, you must deÞne the token-ring
network addresses as locally administered addresses using dial digits (digits
that can be dialed on the telephone) 0 through 9 only. The 372x should be
connected through telephone lines.
¥ The response to this question cannot be all 0s or the same as the response to
question 106.
¥ All addresses must be unique.
108: Unique Machine IdentiÞer
Response: Seven alphanumeric characters. We recommend that you use the
moduleÕs serial number that was recorded during installation (see Step 1 on
page 2-5) as the unique machine identiÞer. The serial number consists of seven
alphanumeric characters.
3-16
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
110: Presentation Space Storage Support (Includes Multiple Logical Terminal
Support)
Planner: This question has two parts. You must provide a nonzero response to
this question if you are planning:
■
For Multihost Support (question 101 = M)
■
For Copy Session-to-Session (question 006 = Y)
■
For Local Copy Print Queue (question 001 = 0000Ð1024K, in multiples of
2K)
■
To use the Split Screen function while communicating with a TCP/IP
destination
In responding to this question, you are allocating presentation space (PS)
storage for all host IDs on this link.
The default response is 0 0000, which speciÞes no Multiple Logical Terminal
(MLT), Copy Session-to-Session, or Buffered Local Copy Print capabilities.
A nonzero response to either part of this question allows you to conÞgure CUT
displays so they can use multiple host sessions, Copy Session-to-Session, and
Buffered Local Copy Print. If you respond to either part of this question with a
nonzero value, the other part of the question must be 0.
Response to Þrst part of question: 0 0000
Nonzero response: 1 to 8 allocates a preset amount of storage to support MLT,
Copy Session-to-Session, and Buffered Local Copy Print. The preset amount
ranges from 64 KB to 2688 KB.
Response to second part of question: 0 0000
Nonzero response: 0001Ð2784 allocates that amount of storage in kilobytes
(KB) to support MLT, Copy Session-to-Session, and Buffered Local Copy
Print.
A valid response should be a minimum of 0001 KB to a maximum of 2784 KB.
Refer to ÒDetermining PS Storage RequirementsÓ later in this chapter if you
want to specify a nonzero response to either part of question 110.
893-745-B
3-17
Customization Planning
116: Individual Port Assignment
Response: one to four alphanumeric digits.
The four digits of this response are grouped into two pairs. The Þrst (left-most)
pair represents the assignment of 3270 addresses. These are the only digits you
will specify.
The default response is 0.
For Port Assignment, you deÞne addresses for workstations attached to ports
26-00 through 26-31, not for PCs or controllers attached to the token ring.
Therefore, if you want to customize for any devices that are not attached to the
token ring, you should plan to customize for Port Assignment.
If your response is 0, 1, or 2, write your response in the left-most box and leave
the second box blank.
0 =
1 address per 3270 port; individual addresses are automatically
assigned.
1 = You assign the number of addresses for each port; individual
addresses are automatically assigned.
2 = You assign the individual addresses.
SX = X is the number of addresses per 3270 port; individual addresses
are automatically assigned. X is 1 to 5.
Enter 0 if you:
■
■
Want one 3270 address per port automatically assigned.
Do not want to plan for port assignment.
Enter 1 or 2 if you:
3-18
■
Plan to assign port addresses on a port-by-port basis.
■
Answered the Þrst part of question 110 with a nonzero response.
■
Plan to use distributed function terminals (DFTs) with multiple interactive
sessions. (The 3290 Information Panel and the 3270 Personal Computer
are some of the DFTs with multiple interactive sessions capability.)
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Enter SX if you:
■
Want to specify the number of addresses (1 to 5) to be assigned to each
3270 port.
■
Want to specify the same number of addresses for all 3270 ports and have
the individual addresses automatically assigned.
■
Answered the Þrst part of question 110 with a nonzero response.
■
Plan to use DFTs with multiple interactive sessions.
NOTE: The maximum number of addresses that can be assigned is 253. The
customizing utility prioritizes the assignment of addresses. Be sure that the
number of addresses you select in this question does not exceed 253.
Otherwise, some ports will not get addresses assigned or there will be fewer
addresses than you requested.
117: Port Assignment
This panel appears during the ConÞgure procedure if you respond to question
116 with 1 or 2. Port assignment for 3174-Peer devices is referred to in
question 660.
118: Port Address
This panel appears on the screen after the 117 panel if you assign your own
addresses; if you select automatic address assignment, this panel appears after
the customizer responds to question 116. It displays the assigned port addresses
in hexadecimal. The customizer cannot enter information on this panel.
121: Keyboard Language
Planner: The response given for this question must correspond to that given
when deÞning translate tables.
If you plan to answer question Ò123: Country Extended Code Page SupportÓ
with a 1 (CECP Support), you must use one of the valid CECP languages in
Table 3-9 when responding to this question.
Response: Two digits that represent the keyboard language that will be used in
this host.
The default response is 01 (U.S. English).
893-745-B
3-19
Customization Planning
This question allows you to customize a language for each conÞgured host. See
Table 3-5 for a list of supported languages. If you customize a different
language for each conÞgured host, the language must be compatible. For
compatible CECP languages, see Table 3-6; for compatible Eastern European
languages, see Table 3-7; for compatible Cyrillic languages, see Table 3-8.
Table 3-5. Keyboard languages supported
01 = English (U.S.)(1)
36 = Greek
02 = English (U.S.) ASCII-7(1)(2)
37 = Icelandic
03 = Austrian/German
38 = ROECE4 Latin
04 = Belgian
39 = Turkish
05 = Brazilian
40 = Yugoslavian
07 = Danish
41 = Swiss-French (New)
09 = Finnish
42 = Swiss-German (New)
14 = International
43 = Belgian (New)
15 = Italian
46 = Thai
16 = Japanese English
47 = Netherlands
17 = Japanese Katakana
48 = Greek (New)
19 = Spanish
49 = Brazilian (New)
21 = Spanish-Speaking
50 = Turkish (New)
22 = English (U.K.)
51 = Polish
23 = Norwegian
52 = Hungarian
24 = Swedish
53 = Romanian
25 = EBCDIC World Trade
54 = Czech
28 = Portuguese
55 = Slovak
1
29 = Canadian Bilingual
56 = Cyrillic (Russian)
30 = French
57 = Cyrillic (Macedonian/Serbian)
33 = English (U.S.) ASCII-International
58 = Croatian/Serbian/Slovenian
34 = English (U.S.) ASCII-83
59 = Cyrillic (Bulgarian)
35 = Cyrillic
60 = English (New U.K.)
Notes:
1 Alternate Keyboard Selection (132) is valid only with these languages.
2 Available on remote models only. Does not support Extended Data Stream.
3 Available only on SDLC and X.25.
4 Regional Office for Eastern and Central Europe.
3-20
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Table 3-6. Compatible CECP languages
01 = English (U.S.)
28 = Portuguese
03 = Austrian/German
29 = Canadian Bilingual1
07 = Danish
30 = French
09 = Finnish
41 = Swiss-French (New)
15 = Italian
42 = Swiss-German (New)
19 = Spanish
43 = Belgian (New)
21 = Spanish-Speaking
46 = Thai
22 = English (U.K.)
47 = Netherlands
23 = Norwegian
49 = Brazilian (New)
24 = Swedish
60 = English (New U.K.)
Table 3-7. Compatible Eastern European languages
51 = Polish
55 = Slovak
52 = Hungarian
58 = Croatian/Serbian/Slovenian
53 = Romanian
54 = Czech
Table 3-8. Compatible Cyrillic languages
56 = Cyrillic (Russian)
59 = Cyrillic (Bulgarian)
57 = Cyrillic (Macedonian/Serbian)
NOTE: If a different language is conÞgured for each host, all the languages
must be from one of the compatible language groups. If all the languages are
CECP languages, question 123 must be answered with a 1.
123: Country Extended Code Page Support
Response:
0 = No CECP Support
1 = CECP Support
The default response is 0.
If you respond to this question with a 1 (CECP Support), a larger deÞnition of
graphic characters than previous code pages will be supported, and the ability
for multilingual communication will be improved.
893-745-B
3-21
Customization Planning
WARNING: Answering this question with a 1 can result in a loss of data
integrity and cause unexpected characters to appear on the screen. Answering
this question with a 1 results in a loss of the Mono Case function on 3192
Models C, D, and F.
NOTE: You must answer question 121 with one of the valid CECP (Country
Extended Code Page) languages from Table 3-9 if you plan to respond to
question 123 with a 1.
You must answer question 121 with a valid CECP language other than
Icelandic if different languages are conÞgured for each host.
The languages supported by CECP are listed in Table 3-9. Beside each
language name is the two-digit response that is used when responding to
question 121.
Table 3-9. CECP languages supported
01 = English (U.S.)
28 = Portuguese
03 = Austrian/German
29 = Canadian Bilingual
07 = Danish
30 = French
09 = Finnish
37 = Icelandic
15 = Italian
41 = Swiss French (New)
19 = Spanish
42 = Swiss German (New)
21 = Spanish-Speaking
43 = Belgian (New)
22 = English (UK)
47 = Netherlands
23 = Norwegian
49 = Brazilian (New)
24 = Swedish
60 = English (New U.K.)
125: Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 00000000.
Specify digits 1Ð8 as either a 0 or 1. Digits are numbered from left to right.
3-22
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
NOTE: Digits 3 and 5 through 7 cannot be speciÞed on the worksheets for
secondary host attachments.
Digit
Description
1
Dual-Function Clear Key
2
Unsupported Control Code Translate
3
Clicker Option
4
Command Chaining
5
PS Load Altered Screen
6
File Transfer Aid
7
Background Alarm
8
Deferred Keystroking (Remote SNA Only)
Digit 1ÑDual-Function Clear Key: Specify this digit as 1 to prevent the
Clear key from putting a 3278, 3279, or 3180 display station into the default
screen size mode.
WARNING: Specifying this digit as 1 causes the Clear key to operate contrary
to the deÞnition given in the IBM 3174 Data Stream ProgrammerÕs Reference
manual. Host applications written to conform with the IBM 3174 Data Stream
ProgrammerÕs Reference manual may react unpredictably.
Digit 2ÑUnsupported Control Code Translate: Specify this digit as 1 to
translate the following interface codes into a hyphen character (EBCDIC
XÕ60Õ):
01 through 04, 06, 07, 09, 0A, 0B, 0E, 0F, 10, 14, 16, 17, 18, 1A, 1B, 1F
20 through 27, 2A, 2B, 2D, 2E, 2F
30 through 3B, and 3D
During READ operations, the hyphen character code returns to the host instead
of the original code.
893-745-B
3-23
Customization Planning
NOTE: Additionally, interface codes 3F and FF are replaced by hyphens on
devices without the Extended Attribute Buffer (EAB).
The above codes are reserved for future use in the IBM 3174 Data Stream
ProgrammerÕs Reference manual applications that transmit these codes as
data with a write-type command or within an outbound 3270DS structured
Þeld are not in conformance with the IBM 3174 Data Stream ProgrammerÕs
Reference manual and may encounter unpredictable results.
Specifying this digit as 0 (default) causes the module to reject the interface
codes and display a PROG 402 in the operator information area of the display
station, which receives a message containing one of the unsupported interface
codes. Pressing the RESET key clears the PROG 402 from the screen. Also, an
Erase Write or Erase Write Alternate command from the host application clears
the PROG 402 from the screen.
Digit 3ÑClicker Option:
0 = Keyboard clicker is off when the display station is turned on.
1 = Keyboard clicker is on when the display station is turned on.
Digit 4ÑCommand Chaining:
0 = Command Chaining is on.
1 = Command Chaining is off.
Performance may be downgraded if you specify this digit as a 1.
Digit 5ÑPS Load Altered Screen: Specifying a 1 inhibits screen ßashing
during a load PS.
Digit 6ÑFile Transfer Aid: The operation of DFT devices is not affected by
this option.
A response of 1 is required for the operation of the:
■
IBM Personal Computer or equivalent with an IBM 3278/79 emulation
card or equivalent performing Þle transfer, including the IBM 3270
Personal Computer operating in CUT mode.
■
3814 Switching Management System.
If 1 is speciÞed, the operation of other CUT (non-IBM PC) devices may be
degraded.
3-24
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Digit 7ÑBackground Alarm:
0 = Background alarm is allowed.
1 = Background alarm is disabled for background sessions.
This option has an effect only when question 110 (MLT) has been conÞgured
with a nonzero response.
Each MLT display has one foreground session and one or more background
sessions. The foreground session is the session currently displayed on the
display screen; the others are background sessions. Host updates to background
sessions may include sounding the alarm. This option allows the background
alarms to be disabled.
NOTE: This alarm is automatically disabled if digit 6 (File Transfer Aid)
receives a response of 1.
Digit 8ÑDeferred KeystrokingÑRemote SNA:
0 = Deferred keystrokes are discarded between segments within a request
unit (RU).
1 = Deferred keystrokes are processed between segments within an RU.
NOTE: Performance is degraded if you respond to this question with a 1.
126: Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 00000000.
893-745-B
3-25
Customization Planning
Digit
Description
1
Reserved (must be 0)
2
Coax Timeout Period
3
Disable Type Ahead
4
Enhanced Screen Support for 3270 CUT Devices
5
BIND Support
6
Reserved (must be 0)
7
No Clears to Display Devices
8
Reserved
Digit 1ÑReserved: The Þrst digit is reserved. It must be 0.
Digit 2ÑCoax Timeout Period: Specifying the second digit as 1 increases the
timeout period, used to ensure timely response from attached devices, from 50
microseconds (the default) to 100 microseconds.
Specify 1 for the second digit if:
■
You have devices attached through products that increase the coax delay
past 50 microseconds (for example, a 5209 Link Protocol Converter).
■
Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) multiplexers or devices are
attached to the module.
Digit 3ÑDisable Type Ahead: Specifying a 1 disables the Type Ahead
function on 3270 CUT displays. Specifying a 0 enables the Type Ahead
function. This function allows buffering of keystrokes for the display while the
module is waiting for the host to respond or unlock the keyboard.
Digit 4ÑEnhanced Screen Support for 3270 CUT Terminals: When set to
1, the module sends data to a workstation after a complete SNA chain has been
received. When set to 0, the module sends data to a workstation after complete
segments have been received. If the host link is operating at a slow speed, data
sent to a workstation in segments can cause choppy screen presentation.
Digit 5ÑBIND Support: This applies only to SNA hosts and affects only CUT
devices with Extended Function Feature (EFF), also known as Feature 6, that
have multiple sessions.
3-26
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
If a 0 (default) is speciÞed, the module will accept a BIND to a device with
EFF that speciÞes a screen size larger than the device had been deÞned for
when it was set up. For example, a 3472 set up as a Model 2 (24 x 80) will
accept a BIND that speciÞes a screen size of 43 x 80.
If a 1 is speciÞed, the module handles BIND processing and devices with EFF
the same as it handles devices without EFF. For example, the BIND is only
accepted if the number of rows is less than or equal to the rows in the model
size.
NOTE: The response to this question will affect the amount of MLT storage
that is required for devices with the EFF. Refer toÒDetermining PS Storage
RequirementsÓ later in this chapter for more information about MLT storage
and the EFF.
Digit 6ÑReserved: This digit is reserved. It must be 0.
Digit 7ÑNo Clears to Display Devices: If color or highlighting is used,
devices that support the Extended Feature Adapter (EFA) may experience a
ßashing effect when a Clear is performed. This ßashing effect varies depending
on screen content and transmission speeds.
If set to 1, Clears are not sent to the display. Screen data is erased one line at a
time from top to bottom, and the ßashing effect is eliminated. However, the
operation of CUT-attached devices may be degraded.
If set to 0 (Default), Clears are sent to the display and the entire screen is
cleared at once.
Digit 8ÑReserved: This digit is reserved.
127: Response Time Monitor DeÞnition
Response: Two digits. If one digit is 0, the other must also be 0.
The default response is 00 (no Response Time Monitor (RTM) support).
NOTE: If your response to this question is nonzero, you must Þll out
Worksheet 12ÑRTM.
893-745-B
3-27
Customization Planning
128: RTM Boundaries and Interface SpeciÞcation
During the ConÞgure procedure, this host-related panel appears if your
response to question 127 was nonzero.
132: Alternate Base Keyboard Selection
Planner: This question is valid only if question 121 was given a response of 01
or 29.
Response: Four digits (A value of 0, 1, or 2 for each).
0 = No
1 = Yes (keyboard without numeric lock)
2 = Yes (keyboard with numeric lockÑvalid for 8K1038 and 8K1158
keyboards only)
The default response is 0000.
Digit
Description
1
8K0808 Base keyboard
2
8K0932 Base keyboard (3178-C4)
3
8K1038 Base keyboard (3178-C3)
4
8K1158 Base keyboard
Your response to question 132 speciÞes the alternate keyboard layouts (if any)
that you want conÞgured in the system. If you use the default response, the
layout of the keyboards attached to the module is used.
Base keyboards 8K0808 and 8K0932 are mutually exclusive and replace the
standard Base Typewriter keyboards. Base keyboard emulators use the Base
Typewriter layout in their emulation; therefore, any change to the Base
Typewriter layout affects the Base keyboard emulators. Base keyboard 8K1038
can be used in addition to the other Base keyboards. Base keyboard 8K1158
replaces all of the standard Base APL keyboards.
To determine which keyboards you have, see Table 3-10, which lists the
microcode RPQs associated with the different keyboards.
3-28
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
NOTE: Base keyboards 8K0808, 8K0932, 8K1038, and 8K1158 do not require
RPQ microcode to operate.
Responding with a 1 to digit 3 (8K1038) and digit 4 (8K1158) results in the PF
keys being operational in the lower shift position.
Table 3-10. Microcode RPQ numbers associated with
keyboards
Microcode
RPQ numbers
Supported?
Response
8K0809
Yes
First digit = 1
8K1162
Yes
First digit = 1
8K0931
Yes
Second digit = 1
8K1034
No
See 8K1230
8K1035
No
See 8K1255
8K1163
Yes
Second digit = 1
8K1164
No
For Typewriter keyboard see 8K1230
Yes
For APL keyboard fourth digit = 1
No
For Typewriter keyboard see 8K1255
Yes
For APL keyboard fourth digit = 2
8K1166
No
See 8K1164
8K1230
Yes
Third digit = 1
8K1231
No
See 8K1255
8K1245
No
See 8K1255
8K1255
Yes
Third digit = 2
8K1165
136: Standard Keyboard Layouts
Planner: Answer questions 136, 137, and 138 only if the cluster includes a
display station that has a Converged or Enhanced keyboard that is operating in
native mode.
Response: Four digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 1001.
893-745-B
3-29
Customization Planning
Digit
Description
1
Converged Typewriter keyboard
2
Converged APL keyboard
3
Converged Data Entry keyboard
4
Enhanced Typewriter keyboard
By using the Modify Keyboards procedure, you can create as many as four
modiÞed versions of these layouts. However, the total number of keyboard
layouts (standard and modiÞed) that you select to use for any cluster cannot
exceed four (a combination of responses to questions 136 and 137).
Your response to this question speciÞes the standard keyboard layouts that you
want conÞgured in the system. Write a 1 in the Þeld for each standard keyboard
layout that you want conÞgured in the system. If you specify all four standard
keyboard layouts here (response = 1111), you cannot select modiÞed keyboard
layouts in question 137.
137: ModiÞed Keyboard Layouts
Response: Four digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 0000.
Refer to the ÒPlannerÓ note under question 136.
Digit
Description
1
Keyboard ID: A
2
Keyboard ID: B
3
Keyboard ID: C
4
Keyboard ID: D
Your response to question 137 speciÞes the modiÞed keyboard layouts that you
want conÞgured in the system. Each layout consists of a keyboard/keypad
combination that you can identify with the letter A, B, C, or D.
3-30
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Enter a 1 in the response Þeld for the IDs that you either plan to deÞne or have
already deÞned. This action conÞgures the layout assigned to that ID in the
system.
NOTE: The total number of keyboard layouts selected in questions 136 and
137 cannot exceed four.
138: Standard Keypad Layouts
Planner: This question applies only to Base, Converged, or Enhanced
keyboards in native mode. If the keyboard is being operated in emulation mode,
this question is not applicable.
Response:
0 = National Language Numeric Keypad
1 = Data Entry Keypad
2 = Program Function Keypad
The default response is 0.
These responses specify the type of keypad to be used with the standard
keyboard layouts you selected in question 136. If you selected one to four types
of keyboard layouts in question 136, you can select one keypad here to be used
with all of them.
NOTE: If you want to use the Calculator function, do not select response 2 for
this question.
139: Concurrent Communication Keyboard Language
This question is not applicable.
893-745-B
3-31
Customization Planning
141: Magnetic Character Set
Response:
A = None
B = Numeric
C = Alphanumeric (auto entry for secure data only)
D = Alphanumeric (auto entry for all data)
The default response is A.
Your response to question 141 speciÞes the type of magnetic character set (if
any) that has been installed.
NOTE: Your response to question 141 must be A if your response to question
121 was 35 (Cyrillic), 38 (ROECE), 40 (Yugoslavian), or 46 (Thai).
150: LAN Gateway
Response: Two digits (0 or 1)
The default response is 0 0.
Digit 1:
0 = This module does not act as a token-ring gateway to this host.
1 = This module does act as a token-ring gateway to this host.
Digit 2: This digit is not applicable.
NOTE: You cannot respond with a 1 to the Þrst digit of this question if your
response to question 105 is 00.
For frame-relay communications, Digit 2 does not appear. Use only Digit 1 for
your LAN gateway response.
On the secondary SDLC panel, Digit 2 does not appear. Use only Digit 1 for
your LAN gateway response.
If you respond with a 1 for Digit 1, Þll out Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network,
Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment, and Worksheet 47ÑLAN
Transmission DeÞnition. If you are using frame-relay communications, you
also need to Þll out Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment.
3-32
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
165: Compressed Program Symbols
Response:
0 = Do not send compressed Programmed Symbols data.
1 = Send compressed Programmed Symbols data.
The recommended setting is 1. (For DFTs, you do not need to specify a 1.)
166: Attribute Select Keypad
Response:
A = Attribute Select Keypad not in use
B = Attribute Select Keypad in use without numeric lock
C = Attribute Select Keypad in use with numeric lock
The default response is A.
NOTE: Your response to question 166 must be A if your response to question
121 was 35 (Cyrillic), 38 (ROECE Latin), 40 (Yugoslavian), or 46 (Thai).
168: Additional Extension-Mode Key DeÞnition (Personal Computers)
Planner: Answer this question only if the module has personal computers
(PCs) attached that use 3270 CUT mode emulation programs and will use the
MLT function.
Response:
0 = No additional extension-mode key is defined.
1 = Home key is the additional extension-mode key.
2 = Print ID key (IDENT) is the additional extension-mode key.
The default response is 0.
Many 3270 terminal emulation programs that run on PCs do not completely
emulate all the keystrokes available on a 3278 or 3279 CUT display station.
Therefore, an additional extension mode is required so that PCs with 3270
emulation programs can use the module MLT Change Screen functions.
The response to this question deÞnes an additional key used to enter keyboard
extension mode.
893-745-B
3-33
Customization Planning
A response of 1 or 2 to this question changes the function of the Home key, or
the Print ID key, on 3278 and 3279 keyboards and those that emulate 3278 or
3279 keyboards. For that reason, do not specify a nonzero response unless the
additional function is required to support a PC 3270 emulation program
providing CUT mode operation. If the Home key (or Print ID key) is selected
as the additional extension-mode key, you must press the Home (or Print ID)
key twice to perform the function normally associated with this key.
The Home key is the recommended extension-mode key because it is usually
an unshifted key on keyboards and provides easier operator access.
NOTE: This question affects all Base keyboards (for example, 3278 or 3279
keyboards) and all keyboards emulating 3278-type keyboards. It does not
affect IBM Converged or Enhanced keyboards unless those keyboards are
used in 3278 or 3279 emulation mode.
172: PS/55ÑModel 3174 Printer Sharing
Response:
0 = Do not enable printer sharing
1 = Enable printer sharing
The default response is 0.
This question enables printer sharing for PS/55 multistations attached to a
module.
NOTE: To use printer sharing, a PS/55 must have one of the following
installed:
¥ 3270 Personal Computer Version 5.05 or higher
¥ 3270 Personal Computer/Graphics Version 4.01 or higher
¥ Workstation 5578-001 Version 1.01 or higher
3-34
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
173: DFT Options
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 00000000. Digits are numbered from left to right. DFT
devices include:
■
IBM 3179 G Color Graphic Display Station
■
IBM 3192 G Color Graphics Display Station
■
IBM 3193 Display Station
■
IBM 3194 Display Terminal
■
IBM 3290 Information Panel
■
IBM 3270 Personal Computer
■
IBM InfoWindow 3472 Model G Display Station
■
IBM InfoWindow Graphics-5 3472 Display Station
If you do not have one of these devices, use the default.
Digit
893-745-B
Description
1
Enable Local Copy Format Controls
2
Automatic Form Feed before Local Copy
3
Automatic Form Feed after Local Copy
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Field Intensity Option
7
Field Intensity Option
8
Update Panel before Allowing Buffer Change
3-35
Customization Planning
Digit 1ÑEnable Local Copy Format Controls: DFT devices generate an
SNA-character-string data stream to perform a local copy operation to a printer.
If the printer does not have Save/Restore Format capability and is operated in
shared mode (in shared mode, local copy operation is permitted between
brackets of a host communication), it is possible that the local copy operation
could destroy the format controls established by the host program. Appropriate
speciÞcation of this digit establishes format controls. If a printer supports Save/
Restore Format, this option has no effect; the DFT device will send format
controls.
If this digit is set to 0 (default), the DFT device will not send format controls to
a printer that lacks Save/Restore Format capability. For SNA only, set this digit
to 0 for those operating environments where the host program does not
reestablish format controls with each Begin Bracket. Note that the format of the
local copy output depends on the format controls established by the operator or
host program.
When this digit is set to 1, the DFT device will send format controls to the
printer, although the printer lacks Save/Restore capability. This option enables
the local copy output to duplicate, as closely as possible, the character image
being copied from the DFT device. Set this digit to 1 for those operating
environments where the printer is not operated in shared mode or the host
program reestablishes format controls with each Begin Bracket.
Digit 2ÑAutomatic Form Feed before Local Copy:
■
Specify this digit as 0 if you do not want the printer to generate an
automatic form feed before a local copy operation is performed through
the DFT data stream.
■
Specify this digit as 1 if you want the printer to generate an automatic
form feed before a local copy is performed through the DFT data stream.
Digit 3ÑAutomatic Form Feed after Local Copy:
3-36
■
Specify this digit as 1 if you want to generate an automatic form feed after
a local copy operation is performed through the DFT data stream.
■
Specify this digit as 0 if you do not want to generate an automatic form
feed after a local copy operation is performed through the DFT data
stream.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Digits 4 and 5ÑReserved: The fourth and Þfth digits are reserved and
defaulted to 0.
Digits 6 and 7ÑField Intensity OptionsÑ3290: Use the sixth and seventh
digits to specify the Þeld intensity option.
■
Specify these digits as either 00 or 11 if you want the 3290 to underscore
all Þelds carrying the Þeld intensity attribute.
■
Specify these digits as 01 if you do not want the 3290 to underscore or
display in reverse video the Þelds carrying the Þeld intensity attribute.
■
Specify these digits as 10 if you want the 3290 to display in reverse video
the Þelds carrying the Þeld intensity attribute.
Digit 8ÑUpdate Panel before Allowing Buffer ChangeÑ3290: Specify this
digit as 0 if you want the 3290 to suspend panel updating to process a host
transmission. If this digit is set to 0, under high-data-rate conditions, the host
messages in the display buffer may be overlaid with new data before they are
displayed on the panel.
If this digit is set to 1, the contents of the display buffer is displayed on the
panel before new data is placed in the display buffer. Set this digit to 1 when
3290s are used as system consoles or for other applications where potentially
high message rates are possible and the user must visually interpret all data sent
by the host.
175: DFT Password
Response: A six-digit numeric password.
DeÞne a six-digit password. This password is used in 3290 setup level 3 every
time permanent changes are made to the 3290 logical terminal (LT) deÞnition
table.
The default response is 000000.
893-745-B
3-37
Customization Planning
179: Local Format Storage
Response: Three digits.
The default response is 0 0 0.
Digit 1ÑEnable Local Format Storage feature:
0 = No Local Format Storage (LFS) feature.
1 = Formats can be loaded to an LFS storage buffer, which is reserved for
this host.
2 = This response is valid only for hosts other than 1A. If this digit is
specified, that host can present formats. The 1A host manages the
formats.
3 = This response is valid only for hosts other than 1A. If this digit is
specified, that host can present formats and load them into its own
storage buffer or just present formats that are managed by host 1A.
NOTE: If the response for this digit is a 2 or 3 for hosts other than 1A, the
LFS feature must be enabled on the 1A host.
Digit 2ÑMode of Operation for Operator-Selected Formats:
0 = Operator-selected formats are disabled for this host.
1 = Operator-selected formats are enabled for this host.
This response must be 0 if the LFS feature is not selected (digit 1 = 0).
Digit 3ÑAmount of storage to be allocated for Local Format Storage on
each Host Connection:
0 = No storage allocated
1 = 64K
2 = 128K
3 = 256K
4 = 512K
5 = 1024K
6 = 1536K
The response for this digit must be 0 if digit 1 is 0 or 2. The response for this
digit must not be 0 if digit 1 is 1 or 3.
190: Number of ISDN DSPUs
This question is not applicable.
3-38
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
213: Between Bracket Printer Sharing
Response:
0 = No Between Bracket Printer Sharing
1 = Between Bracket Printer Sharing Allowed
The default response is 1.
Select 0 if you are not using local copy or if all printers on the Printer
Authorization Matrix (PAM) are deÞned in local mode (you do not want the
host to use the local copy printers for direct print operations). Select 1 if some
printers on the PAM are deÞned in shared mode (some printers are shared for
both local copy and host printing).
215: Physical Unit IdentiÞcation (Module)
Response: Five alphanumeric characters.
The default response is 00000.
The physical unit identiÞcation (PUID) is a Þve-character hexadecimal code;
the only valid characters are AÐF and 0Ð9. Each PUID in a network should be
unique.
Obtain the PUID from the system programmer. The PUID corresponds to the
IDNUM value in the VTAM PU deÞnition and identiÞes the module to the host
in response to an XID command.
A unique PUID is required for connections that the VTAM host views as
switched. The connections include the following:
893-745-B
■
X.25 host attached by means of a Model 3174 module using NCP
Packet-Switching Interface (NPSI)
■
Frame-relay host attached by means of a Model 3174 module using
frame-relay terminal equipment (FRTE)
■
Token-ring DSPUs using a Model 3174 module with NCP token-ring
interface (NTRI) as a gateway
3-39
Customization Planning
■
Token-ring DSPUs using the token-ring gateway with frame-relay host
attachment
■
Model 3174 module with DLUR support
If IDNUM is speciÞed on the PU statement and in the DLCADDR
parameter on the PATH statement, the PUID must match the IDNUM. A
unique PUID should be used for each PU in the module using multihost
support and a common DLUS node.
220: Alert Event Report Function
Response:
0 = No alert function
1 = Alert function without operator-generated alert message capability
2 = Alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from
port 00 of HG 26
3 = Alert function with operator-generated alert message capability from
all ports
NOTE: DFTs cannot issue an operator-generated alert message.
The default response is 0.
If you plan to specify Token-Ring Error Alerts (905 = 0 or 1), you should select
1, 2, or 3 for this question.
Alert is an SNA-only function that requires NetView, Version 1.1 or higher, at
the host. If Alert has been speciÞed, the module will attempt to send to the host
alert data for all errors that have not affected the integrity of the host adapter,
module processor, control storage, or the control program itself. The module
sends alert data, based on the module status codes it generates, in a session
between a system services control point (SSCP) and a physical unit (PU). The
alert information ßows to NetView. NetView determines which alert data is
signiÞcant and maintains a database of alert information based on the Þlters
that are in effect for devices throughout the network. The NetView database is
used for problem determination and failure isolation.
3-40
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
221: 3174 (Model 3174 Module) Alert Control Point
Planner: This question applies only to hosts on the primary link through
single-link multihost support.
Response:
0 = This host is not the alert control point for the module.
1 = This host is the alert control point for the module.
The default response is 0.
Your response determines whether or not the host you are planning for will be
the alert control point. A host designated as the alert control point receives
hardware, microcode, and LU-LU alerts. A host not designated as such only
receives alerts pertaining to LU-LU sessions.
NOTE:
¥ Only one host can be designated as the Alert Event Report control point.
¥ The primary host becomes the alert control point when question
220 = nonzero for the primary host and question 220 = nonzero and
question 221 = 0 for all secondary hosts on the link.
¥ If question 220 = nonzero for any secondary host attachment and 220 = 0
for the primary host, then an Alert Event Report control point must be
designated (question 221).
¥ If question 221 = 1, then your response to question 220 must be nonzero.
¥ If there is not enough storage to support a secondary host that has been
designated as the Alert Event Report control point, then the secondary host
is deconÞgured. The primary host becomes the Alert Event Report control
point by default.
893-745-B
3-41
Customization Planning
310: Connect-Data-Set-to-Line Operation
Response:
0 = Operation on a nonswitched line, or
Operation on a switched line in the U.S. or Canada, or
Operation in data terminal ready/data set ready (DTR/DSR) mode in
countries other than Canada, or
Connection via the CCITT V.35 interface, or
Connection using X.25
1 = Connection on a switched line via the CCITT 108.1 interface
operating in the connect-data-set-to-line (CDSTL) mode
The default response is 0.
313: NRZ or NRZI Encoding
Response:
0 = Use non-return-to-zero (NRZ) encoding
1 = Use non-return-to-zero inverted (NRZI) encoding
The default response is 0.
This parameter must be compatible with the host system communication
controller and the modem. Ask the system programmer which response you
should specify.
317: Telecommunication Facilities
Response:
0 = Nonswitched facilities
1 = Half-duplex SNBU operation (IBM Modems 3872, 3875, or
equivalent only)
NOTE: Half-duplex SNBU operation provided by modems other
than IBM 3872, 3875, or equivalent is supported. In this case,
respond to questions 317 and 340 with 0 on a separate Customized
Control diskette. IML this backup control diskette when the primary
operation fails.
2 = Switched networks
The default response is 0.
3-42
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
NOTE: Respond to question 317 with the default response if your connection
to the host does not require a modem.
To respond to this question, you need to know the following things:
■
Whether the modem in your installation is operating in full-duplex or
half-duplex in its primary facility
■
Whether the modem is operating in full-duplex or half-duplex in its
secondary facility
■
The type of communication line that is being used (nonswitched or
switched)
Use Table 3-11 to determine your response.
Table 3-11. Response selection for question 317
Primary
modem
operation
Secondary
modem
operation
Communication
Further
line type
Response requirements
Full-duplex
Full-duplex
Nonswitched
0
None
Half-duplex
Half-duplex
Nonswitched
0
None
Full-duplex
Half-duplex
Nonswitched
0
Backup Control
diskette (refer to
note)
Full-duplex or
half-duplex
Full-duplex or Switched
half-duplex
2
None
Note: On the backup Control diskette, respond to question 340 with a 0. For IBM 3872, 3875, or equivalent
modems, respond to question 317 with a 1. Otherwise, responses to all other customization questions
should be the same on both Control diskettes.
0 = Nonswitched facilities: Select this response for operation through a
modem or direct-connection attachment to certain hosts or communication
controllers such as a 3710, 3720, 3721, 3725, 3726, 4361, or 8100 where a
modem is not required.
1 = Half-duplex SNBU operation: Select this response for the backup Control
diskette conÞguration when the 3872, 3875, or equivalent modem supports
half-duplex RTS protocol on the secondary facility and supports full-duplex
RTS protocol on the primary facility. For modems other than 3872, 3875, or
equivalent, select 0 as your response.
893-745-B
3-43
Customization Planning
2 = Switched networks: Select this response for operation in point-to-point
mode on the public switched telephone network (PSTN). (A response of 2 is
not valid for links using the gateway function.)
318: Full- or Half-Speed Transmission
Response:
0 = Full-Speed Transmission
1 = Half-Speed Transmission
The default response is 0.
Specify a 0 if full-speed transmission operation is desired. Specify a 1 if
half-speed transmission operation is desired.
If the speed capability can be controlled by the local or host modem, it is
recommended that a 0 be speciÞed and that the modem control the speed. (This
parameter must be compatible with the host system communication controller
and modem.)
If the module controls the capability to operate in either full-speed or
half-speed mode, two Control diskettes can be generatedÑone for full-speed
operation and one for half-speed operation. To switch speeds, IML the
appropriate Control diskette.
NOTE: To determine if the operating speed can be controlled by the modem,
refer to your modem documentation.
332: X.25 Options
For the primary host (1A), you should Þll out Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options.
For secondary hosts (1BÐ1H), you should Þll out Worksheet 13SÑX.25
Options.
Some of the following questions apply to both worksheets.
3-44
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
340: RTS Control Response Options
Response:
0 = Controlled Request-to-Send (RTS)
1 = Permanent RTS
The default response is 0.
To respond to this question, you need to know the following things:
■
Whether the modem or DCE in your installation is operating in duplex or
half-duplex in its primary facility
■
Whether the modem or DCE is operating in duplex or half-duplex in its
secondary facility
■
The type of communication line that is being used (nonswitched or
switched)
Use Table 3-12 to select your response.
Table 3-12. Response selection for question 340
Primary
modem or
DCE
operation
Secondary
modem or
DCE
operation
Protocol
Response
Further
requirements
Full-duplex
Full-duplex
SDLC
1
None
Half-duplex
Half-duplex
SDLC
0
None
Full-duplex
Half-duplex
SDLC
1
Backup Control
diskette (refer to
note)
Note: If the host modems or DCEs use the NEW SYNC feature, selecting 2 may cause transmission errors. If
you are in doubt about whether your host modems or DCEs use the NEW SYNC feature, enter 0.
On the backup Control diskette, respond to question 340 with a 0; for IBM 3872, 3875, or equivalent
modems, respond to question 317 with a 1. Otherwise, responses to all other customization questions
should be the same on both Control diskettes.
365: X.21 Switched Host DTE Connection
This question is not applicable.
893-745-B
3-45
Customization Planning
370: Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size
Response:
0 = 265-byte Maximum I-frame size
1 = 521-byte Maximum I-frame size
The default response is 0.
When large amounts of data will be transmitted, network performance and
speed can be improved by responding to this question with a 1.
When APPN is selected and the connection is to NCP, the response to this
question should be a 1.
The I-frame size includes the length of the transmission header (TH) and
request or response header (RH). For example, if the maximum length of a
request unit (RU) segment is 512, then the I-frame size is 521 (512 + 9 for the
TH and RH).
NOTE: Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size refers to the maximum size of the I
frame that the module sends to the host.
372: Autocall/Autodisconnect
Response: Two digits.
The default response is 0 0.
Digit 1ÑEnable Autocall function:
0 = No autocall
1 = Enable DIAL autocall
If this digit is 1 or 2 and the module is not already connected to the host, the
module will attempt to make the switched connection to the host whenever a
new logical terminal becomes active. This may be when a device powers on or
when a logical terminal is Þrst reached in the change screen sequence.
3-46
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
Digit 2ÑEnable Autodisconnect function:
0 = No autodisconnect
1 = Enable autodisconnect
If this digit is 1, the module will break the switched connection to the host
when the last logical terminal becomes inactive or powers off.
The Autocall and Autodisconnect functions are independent of one another:
you can enable or disable one without enabling or disabling the other.
382: Transmit I-Frame Size
Response: Four numeric characters. A valid response ranges from 265 to 2057
bytes.
The default response is 0521.
Transmit I-Frame size refers to the maximum size of the I frame that the
module sends over the ring.
Where necessary, use a leading zero (for example, 0521 for 521 bytes).
NOTE:
¥ The response to this question depends on your gateway and ring
conÞguration.
¥ In responding to this question, consider the route by which data will ßow. If,
at link activation time, a route to the gateway that supports the speciÞed
I-frame size does not exist, I-frame size is downgraded to the maximum size
supported on the available route. When I-frame size is downgraded, a
unique status code appears on the operator panel and an error is written in
the event log.
¥ The I-frame size should include the length of the transmission header (TH)
and response header (RH). For example, if the maximum length of an RU
segment is 1024, the I-frame size speciÞed should be 1033 (1024 + 9 for the
TH and RH).
¥ Transmit I-Frame Size refers to the maximum size of the I frame that the
module sends over the token ring.
893-745-B
3-47
Customization Planning
383: Token-Ring Network Maximum Out
Response: One numeric character.
A valid response ranges from 1 to a maximum of 7.
The default response is 2. This Þeld speciÞes the maximum number of link
level I frames that the module transmits before waiting for an acknowledgment
and may also be referred to as the transmit window size.
NOTE: The response to this question is dependent upon your gateway and
ring conÞguration.
384: Ring Speed of the Token-Ring Network
Response:
0 = 4 Mb/s with normal token release
1 = 16 Mb/s with normal token release
2 = 16 Mb/s with early token release
The default response is 0.
The response must match the ring speed set by the Bit Rate Selection jumper
(JP1). Token release is determined from your answer to this question.
385: Link Subsystem Name
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters.
The default response is IBMLAN.
The link subsystem name identiÞes which module an alert is from when an
alert is sent to the host. This is a required Þeld when your response to question
101 = 7.
When responding to this question, do not precede the name with blanks or enter
blanks between characters.
3-48
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9S
386: Receive I-Frame Size
Response:
0 = Up to 4-K frames
1 = Up to 8-K frames
The default response is 1.
This question appears only on the Worksheet 9ÑLocal Area Network. When
8-K frames are selected, the Model 3174 module APPN network node (NN)
can support up to 100 links only.
893-745-B
3-49
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space and 10DÑ
Presentation Space Storage
Determining PS Storage Requirements
To determine your PS storage requirements, Þll in the following worksheets as
required for your conÞguration:
■
Worksheet 10A (Ports 26-00 through 26-31)
■
Worksheet 10D (All PS requirements)
The following steps explain how to Þll out each worksheet:
1.
In the Device Type/Screen Size column of Worksheet 10A, specify the
device and screen size for each terminal port that has a CUT display
attached to it (for example, CUT 24 ¥ 80).
The 3270 devices with the EFF (Feature 6) can support different screen
sizes. For these devices, the SNA host can send a BIND command to
change the screen size. Therefore, if the host attachment type is SDLC,
X.25, SNA, token ring, or frame relay, you must ensure that there is
enough storage for the largest screen that could be selected on the BIND.
For example, the device might be set up to support 24 ¥ 80 and the BIND
command could change this to 32 ¥ 80. (If your host applications do not
support screen size changes, set question 126 Bit 5 = 1 and select the
storage amount required for the screen size for which the device will be set
up).
The following list shows which setup options display station users must
select in order to get the EFF:
3-50
■
3180 displaysÑModel IDs 6Ð9
■
3191, 3192 displaysÑthe Extended Function Model IDs (2+, 3+, 4+,
or 5+)
■
3471 (Model B), 3472 (all models except G), 3481, 3482 displaysÑa
keyboard type other than 78EMU (3278 Emulation Mode)
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space and 10DÑPresentation Space Storage
2.
In the EAB? column, specify whether the CUT display stations have
EABs. Specify Y or N (Yes or No).
3.
In the Number of Sessions column, specify the number of host sessions
for the listed devices. The maximum is 5 sessions.
NOTE: Each 3270 host session requires a host address. You do not have to
add any storage for printer sessions or DFTs.
4.
Write in the amount of storage required for each device in the PS
Storage Required column.
To determine how much storage to reserve for each listed device, refer to
the following:
■
Table 3-13 if you are not using multihost support
■
Table 3-14 if you are using multihost support
Table 3-13. PS storage (MLT) without Multihost Support
Number of sessions
CUT device
screen size (KB)
1
2
3
CUT/24 x 80
0
0
2
4
6
CUT/24 x 80 with EAB
0
4
8
12
16
0
4
8
12
16
0
12
20
28
36
4
5
CUT/32 x 80
CUT/43 x 80
CUT/27 x 132
CUT/32 x 80 with EAB
CUT/43 x 80 with EAB
CUT/27 x 132 with EAB
Note: Ensure that there is enough storage for the largest screen that could be selected on the BIND.
893-745-B
3-51
Customization Planning
Table 3-14. PS storage (MLT) with Multihost Support (without
Token-Ring Gateway feature)
Number of sessions
CUT device
screen size (KB)
1
2
3
4
5
CUT/24 x 80
0
0
0
0
2
CUT/24 x 80 with EAB
0
0
4
8
12
0
0
4
8
12
0
8
16
24
32
CUT/32 x 80
CUT/43 x 80
CUT/27 x 132
CUT/32 x 80 with EAB
CUT/43 x 80 with EAB
CUT/27 x 132 with EAB
Note: Ensure that there is enough storage for the largest screen that could be selected on the BIND.
5.
After calculating the amount of storage each device requires for PS
support (MLT), add these amounts to determine the total amount of
storage required.
Write this amount on the Totals line at the bottom of the PS Storage
Required column of Worksheet 10A. Collect information from Worksheet
10A, and add it to Worksheet 10D.
6.
Calculate the amount of PS storage needed for Buffered Local Copy
Print.
The default response is 0000. This response will not enable the Local
Copy Print Queue feature.
a. Determine the average number of copies you want on the printer
queue.
b. Using Table 3-15, locate the buffer size for the device you use.
3-52
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space and 10DÑPresentation Space Storage
Table 3-15. Allocating buffer local copy print
CUT device screen size (KB)
Buffer size (K)
CUT/24 x 80
2
CUT/24 x 80 with EAB
4
CUT/32 x 80
4
CUT/43 x 80
4
CUT/27 x 132
4
CUT/32 x 80 with EAB
8
CUT/43 x 80 with EAB
8
CUT/27 x 132 with EAB
8
c. Multiply the number from Step 6a on page 3-52 by the buffer size.
You now have the Local Copy Print buffer size.
For example, if you want the potential to have three copies on the
printer queue and use a CUT/43 x 80 with EAB, you would need 24K
(3 x 8K).
Enter this number on Worksheet 10D.
893-745-B
7.
Calculate the amount of PS storage needed for Copy
Session-to-Session, using the formula on Worksheet 10D. Enter this
number on Worksheet 10D.
8.
If the Split Screen function will be used with TCP/IP, calculate the
amount of PS storage needed for Split Screen, using the formula on
Worksheet 10D. Enter this number on Worksheet 10D.
9.
Add the amounts on Worksheet 10D.
■
If you want to specify an exact amount of PS storage, write the amount
(with leading 0s) from Worksheet 10D for Presentation Space Storage
on Worksheet 49.
■
If you want to specify PS storage by using an MLT level, use the
following chart and, considering future expansion, determine which
level of MLT support you should select.
3-53
Customization Planning
If the total storage
required is:
Select
MLT level
1 KB to 64 KB
1
65 KB to 128 KB
2
129 KB to 512 KB
3
513 KB to 896 KB
4
897 KB to 1152 KB
5
1153 KB to 1536 KB
6
1537 KB to 2048 KB
7
2049 KB to 2688 KB
8
Figure 3-1 shows an example of Worksheet 10D that was completed using the
procedures in this section. Worksheet 10A has been Þlled out for the PS support
(MLT) that is required for those terminals. An addition of 30 KB is required for
Split Screen Function with TCP/IP, 24 KB for Local Copy Print Queue, and 40
KB for Copy Session-to-Session. The total (192 KB) is the exact amount of PS
storage required that you will enter on Worksheet 49.
Storage space subtotal source
Subtotal
Worksheet 10A—HG 26
98
Question 001: Local Copy Print Queue Presentation Space. Refer to
“Determining PS Storage Requirements” earlier in this chapter.
24
Question 006: Copy Session-to-Session Presentation Space. 4K x
number of ports configured (Refer to Worksheet 10A)
40
Split Screen Function with TCP/IP 2K x number of LTs without EABs
4K x number of LTs with EABs
10
20
Total (use for Worksheet 49):
192
Figure 3-1. Example of a completed Worksheet 10D
3-54
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space and 10DÑPresentation Space Storage
PS-Related (MLT) Considerations
If your response to either part of question 110 is nonzero, you cannot respond
to question 116 with 0 on the worksheet for the primary host attachment.
For information on port addressing of MLTs, refer to ÒFilling Out Worksheet
11AÑ117: Port AssignmentÓ next in this chapter. If you are conÞguring for
multihost support, refer to ÒFilling Out Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal
Assignment (LTA)Ó later in this chapter for information about deÞning host
sessions for terminals.
893-745-B
3-55
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment
If you respond to question 116 with a 1 or 2, you must Þll out Worksheet
11AÑ117: Port Assignment. Use the worksheet to assign the number of host
addresses per port connection. Addresses can be assigned to ports 26-00
through 26-31.
There are two procedures for Þlling out this worksheet. If you:
■
SpeciÞed that 116 = 1, use the procedure on page 57.
■
SpeciÞed that 116 = 2, use the procedure on page 58.
The columns on this worksheet are described as follows:
Port
This column lists the port numbers.
IS
This column defines the number of 3270 host addresses to
be assigned to each port. For a display using the MLT
function, this number must correspond to the number of
logical terminals requiring connections to the 3270 host.
The default for all ports is a 0 and can be changed to a
number between 1 and 5.
Host Addresses
These columns define the primary and secondary
addresses of a host. The addresses are used to route
information to and from the display stations and printers
assigned to the ports. The first column (1) represents the
hostÕs primary address. The remaining columns (2Ð5)
represent the hostÕs secondary addresses for displays
using the MLT function or the address of a host
addressable printer (HAP) (printer attached to a display).
(Use column 2 for host-addressable printers on host 1A.)
The combined total of primary and secondary host
addresses should equal the number of 3270 host sessions.
The following guidelines show how host addresses are
assigned.
3-56
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment
Completing the Port Assignment Worksheet When 116 = 1
If your response to question 116 is 1, select the ports you will use and deÞne
the number of host addresses per port. The customizing program automatically
assigns the primary and secondary addresses of the host.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment. If you have conÞgured
for multihost support, identify which host these port assignments are
for by writing the host identiÞer in the Host ID Þeld on the top of the
worksheet.
2.
In the IS column, write the number of host addresses you want
assigned (0 to 5) next to each port. If you do not want to use a port for
a 3270 host session, be sure to write a 0.
NOTE: This number must represent the total number of 3270 host
sessions desired to support the CUT or DFT device.
In the following example, DFTs or CUTs (with MLT support) are assigned
to ports 26-00 through 26-06. Ports with an entry of zero in the IS column
will not be used for 3270 host sessions.
117: Port Assignment
Port
26-00
26-02
26-04
26-06
26-08
Host Addresses
IS 1
2 3
4
2
4
3
3
0
5
Port
26-01
26-03
26-05
26-07
26-09
IS
3
3
2
0
0
Host Addresses
1 2
3
4
5
4410
893-745-B
3-57
Customization Planning
3.
Do not exceed the port assignment limitations for your protocol; a
maximum of 253 addresses in the range from 2 to 254 is permitted.
NOTE: If you deÞne a printer authorization matrix (PAM), check that the
printers, with the exception of local copy printers, are assigned addresses on
Worksheet 11A.
Planner: If you need to communicate these port assignments to the site planner,
use the Cabling Worksheets in the SynOptics Planning and Site Preparation
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module, which explains how
to enter the port assignments on the worksheet.
Completing the Port Assignment Worksheet When 116 = 2
If your response to question 116 is 2, assign (in decimal values) the primary
and secondary host addresses that you want to use for each port. The
customizing program automatically generates the IS Þeld.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate and make a copy of Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment. If
you have conÞgured for multihost support, identify which host these
port assignments are for by writing the host identiÞer in the Host ID
Þeld on the top of the worksheet.
2.
Under the host address column headings, write the addresses using
decimal values. When you assign host addresses to a port, assign them
to consecutive columns: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. You can skip addresses
between ports, or skip ports, but you cannot skip host address
columns.
For example, if you assign addresses to columns 1, 3, and 4, you must also
assign an address to column 2. The addresses themselves do not need to be
sequential; however, be careful not to repeat any addresses. For example,
7, 9, 5, 15 is an acceptable sequence, but 7, 9, 5, 9 is not acceptable. If
there is no address to specify, leave the Þeld empty on the worksheet.
3-58
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment
In the following example, DFTs or CUTs (with MLT support) are assigned
to 26-00 through 26-09 on HG 26.
117: Port Assignment
Port
26-00
26-02
26-04
26-06
26-08
Host Addresses
IS 1
2 3
4
2 3
5 7 8
9
10 11
12 13 14 15
18 33
5
16
Port IS
26-01
26-03
26-05
26-07
26-09
Host Addresses
3
1 2
4
20 21
22 23
24 25
26 27 28
29 30 31 32
5
4411
3.
Do not exceed the port assignment limitations for your protocol; up to
253 addresses, in the range from 2 to 254, are permitted.
NOTE: If you deÞne a PAM, check that the printers (with the exception of local
copy printers) are assigned addresses on Worksheet 11A.
Planner: If you need to communicate these port assignments to the site planner,
use the Cabling Worksheets in the SynOptics Planning and Site Preparation
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module, which explain how
to enter the port assignments on the worksheet.
893-745-B
3-59
Customization Planning
Changing Port Assignments
If you change your response to question 116, Table 3-16 explains how to Þll out
Worksheet 11A.
Table 3-16. Port assignment changes for Worksheet 11A
Change in 116
Was
Now
Change to worksheet
0
1
Fill out the IS column.
0
2
Fill out the host address columns (1–5) with decimal values.
1
0
None. The customizing program automatically assigns new
addresses.
1
2
In the host address columns (1–5), you can add new addresses or
you can delete or replace the previous assigned addresses (use
decimal values).
2
0
None. The customizing program automatically assigns new
addresses.
2
1
Fill out the IS columns with new values.
S1–S5
None. The customizing program automatically assigns new
addresses. (Remember, a maximum of 253 addresses can be
assigned. Refer to “116: Individual Port Assignment” later in this
chapter.)
S1–S5
3-60
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM
Filling Out Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM. If you have conÞgured for
multihost support, identify the host to which these RTM boundaries
apply by writing the host identiÞer in the Host ID Þeld on the top of
the worksheet.
2.
Enter your responses on the worksheet.
3.
■
To use the defaults, circle ÒDefault Values.Ó You have completed the
worksheet.
■
If your Þrst-digit response to question 127 was:
Ð
1 or 2, circle ÒVersion A.Ó
Ð
3, 4, or 5, circle ÒVersion B.Ó
For Version B, Þll out the eight-digit status ßag Þeld.
Respond with 0 or 1:
0 = No; turns off the function associated with the bit position.
1 = Yes; turns on the function associated with the bit position.
Digit Description
1
RTM enabled. If the default (0) is used, RTM will remain off unless turned
on by host support.
2
Transmits unsolicited RTM data when an UnBIND is processed (LU-LU).
3
Transmits unsolicited RTM data if counter overflows.
4
Sends alert if counter overflows.
5
Reserved. Set to 0.
6
Reserved. Set to 0.
7
Reserved. Set to 0.
8
Reserved. Set to 0.
NOTE: If you specify host support in question 127 but use the defaults for the
status ßag Þeld, RTM statistics are retained for any device unless a host
application enables the RTM function.
893-745-B
3-61
Customization Planning
4.
Specify the boundaries (B1ÐB4) in Version A or B.
Use the following rules when specifying boundaries:
■
Specify the time in minutes, seconds, and tenths of a second; for
example, 11:35.3 is 11 minutes, 35 and 3/10 seconds.
■
Do not specify a zero (00: 00.0) for Þeld B1.
■
Specify one to four boundaries, in sequence of ascending value. Do not
embed a zero between two nonzero entries.
■
The maximum boundary you can specify is 27:18.3. Any entries after
the maximum value must be zero.
■
The maximum boundary you can specify in the seconds Þeld is 59
seconds.
Changing the RTM SpeciÞcations
If you change your Þrst-digit response to question 127, Table 3-17 explains
how to Þll out Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM.
Table 3-17. RTM speciÞcations changes for
Worksheet 12Ñ128
Change in 127
3-62
Was
Now
Change on worksheet
1
2
Record the changed responses on version A of the 128 panel.
2
1
Record the changed responses on version A of the 128 panel.
3, 4, 5
1, 2
Fill out version A of the 128 panel.
1, 2
3, 4, 5
Fill out version B of the 128 panel.
3, 4, 5
3, 4, 5
Record the changed responses on version B of the 128 panel.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25
Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit ProÞles
Planner: The following questions appear on Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options, and
some appear on Worksheet 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options and Worksheet 52Ñ
X.25 Circuit ProÞles. The questions are grouped logically instead of
numerically. There are two groups: questions relating to subscription deÞnition
(link attachment) and questions relating to virtual circuit deÞnition.
If you are Þlling out a worksheet for a primary host link, locate Worksheet 13Ñ
X.25 Options. (If you have conÞgured for multihost support, identify the host to
which these X.25 options apply in the Host ID Þeld at the top of the worksheet.)
If you are Þlling out a worksheet for a secondary host link, locate Worksheet
13SÑSecondary X.25 Options. Identify the host to which these X.25 options
apply. Write your responses to the following questions on the worksheet.
If you are conÞguring for X.25 APPN nodes, locate Worksheet 52ÑX.25
Circuit ProÞles. You must Þll out this worksheet in addition to Worksheet 17AÑ
X.25 APPN Nodes.
Logical Channel Numbering
Questions 461 through 466 describe the logical channel numbering of your
network subscription. Responses to the questions determine valid ranges for
incoming and outgoing calls. Figure 3-2 shows how these questions relate to
one another in establishing channel ranges.
Figure 3-2 shows channel range pairs. Pairs must be in ascending order, and the
total number of channels and PVCs cannot exceed 255.
The outside delimiters of the channel ranges can be used. For example, some
networks use 0, and some assign Highest Outgoing Channel (HOC) to be 4095.
If there are no PVCs, the pairs must still be relative, but the Lowest Incoming
Channel (LIC) could be 1 while the Highest Incoming Channel (HIC) is 255.
893-745-B
3-63
Customization Planning
LCI
0
1
..
.
LIC
..
.
HTC
..
.
LTC
..
.
HTC
..
.
LOC
..
.
HOC
..
.
4095
LCI = Logical Channel Identifier
LIC = Lowest Incoming Channel
HIC = Highest Incoming Channel
Reserved for interface control
Permanent virtual circuits
One-way incoming
Two-way
Virtual
calls
One-way outgoing
LTC = Lowest Two-Way Channel
HTC = Highest Two-Way Channel
LOC = Lowest Outgoing Channel
HOC = Highest Outgoing Channel
4412
Figure 3-2. Logical channel assignments
Connection IdentiÞer
One module may communicate with several hosts simultaneously or may
establish several sessions simultaneously with one host. If the module has
several sessions with one host, DTE addresses are not sufÞcient to identify
sending and receiving DTEs.
For example, suppose a module has several sessions with one host. To the host,
each session appears as a separate module. If the host issues a call to the
module, the Incoming Call packet contains the hostÕs DTE address, but the
module cannot determine for which session the call is intended. A further
means of identifying separate sessions (host or module) within one DTE
address is required.
To do this, the connection identiÞer (CID) portion of the call request packet is
used. The CID is an eight-character Þeld that can be used, along with the DTE
address, to uniquely identify the session. If more than one PU on the same link
is associated with the same host system and the host system will be calling the
module, the CID is required. If the module will be calling the host, check with
your host system administrator to determine whether using CIDs is necessary.
3-64
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
If you are customizing for only one host, the CID can be speciÞed for Call
Packet veriÞcation instead of the host address.
Questions 420, 421, 423, 424, and 452 enable you to specify the remote DTEÕs
address and CID and contain more explanation of these Þelds.
Link Attachment Questions
The following questions pertain to link attachment. They appear on primary
host panels (Worksheet 13) only.
400: Network Type
Response: Four numeric characters.
The four digits of this response are divided into three parts. The Þrst two digits
represent the network type. The third digit represents the network level. The
fourth digit represents the type of diagnostic codes that should be sent for the
link.
Possible responses are shown below. The digits shown in bold type are the
digits to which the possible responses apply.
00 0 0: (First two digits)
00 = CCITT-recommended network with announced IBM support, not
DATANET-1.
01 = Connection is to the Netherlands DATANET-1.
If IBM has announced X.25 support for your countryÕs network and it is not
DATANET-1, use the default (00).
00 0 0: (Third digit)
0 = The network supports CCITT Recommendation X.25, 1980 level.
1 = The network supports CCITT Recommendation X.25, 1984 level and
beyond.
00 0 0: (Fourth digit)
0 = The module should use SNA diagnostic codes for errors that are
reported to the network.
1 = The module should use ISO diagnostic codes.
The default response to this question is 00 0 0.
893-745-B
3-65
Customization Planning
424: 3174 (Model 3174 Module) DTE Address
Response: A maximum of 15 numeric characters (0 through 9).
The default response is underscores.
This Þeld contains the local data terminating equipment (DTE) address for the
module. Enter a maximum of 15 digits for the number, leaving blanks or
underscores where you have not written a numeric character.
For any hosts on this link, if the Þrst digit of your response to question 421
(Outgoing Call Options) is 1 and the response to question 401 (Circuit Type) is
3 or 4, then you must respond to this question. Otherwise, circle the underscore
(default) on the worksheet.
431: Packet Sequence Numbering
Response:
0 = Modulo 8
1 = Modulo 128
The default response is 0.
Your response determines whether the extended packet sequence numbering
facility is to be used. Refer to your network subscription information to
determine your response. The response to this question can affect responses to
questions 432 (Negotiated Window Size) and 435 (Nonstandard Default
Window Size).
3-66
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
433: K-Maximum Out
Response: Maximum number of link level I frames. The response can be a
value of 1Ð7.
The default response is 2.
This Þeld speciÞes the maximum number of outstanding link level I frames that
the module transmits before waiting for an acknowledgment. Your network
subscription information indicates the correct response.
434: Nonstandard Default Packet Size
Response:
0 = 64-byte packet
1 = 128-byte packet
2 = 256-byte packet
3 = 512-byte packet
The default response is 1.
This Þeld contains the default packet size to which you subscribed in your X.25
network agreement. This value is used to select the packet size for a switched
virtual circuit (SVC) when packet size negotiation is not used.
Table 3-18 shows the relationship of packet sizes to Path Information Unit
(PIU) sizes.
Table 3-18. Packet size to PIU relationships
PIU Size
inbound
(question 370)
If question 370 = 0,
max. PIU = 265
If question 370 = 1,
max. PIU = 521
893-745-B
Packet size
Number of data
packets for
maximum PIU
64
5
128
3
256
2
512
1
64
9
128
5
256
3
512
2
3-67
Customization Planning
NOTE: Questions 434 and 435 do not apply to permanent virtual circuits
(PVCs).
435: Nonstandard Default Window Size
Response:
01Ð07 = Range for modulo 8 (if question 431 = 0)
01Ð11 = Range for modulo 128 (if question 431 = 1)
The default response is 02.
This Þeld contains the default packet window size value subscribed to in your
X.25 network agreement. This value is used to select the window size for an
SVC when window size negotiation is not used.
NOTE: Questions 434 and 435 do not apply to PVCs.
450: Link Level Transmit Timeout
Response: A value in the range 0001Ð2540.
You must respond to this question. No default is supplied.
This is the value referred to as T1 or Tp. It is speciÞed in 0.1-second intervals
and set to the value required by each individual network. Refer to your network
subscription for the value you should use. The module timer will be ±20% of
the value speciÞed. For values greater than 25.0 seconds (0250 input), the lower
(tenths) digit is ignored. For example, 0277 is treated as 27 seconds.
451: Number of Retries
Response: A value in the range 01Ð99.
You must respond to this question. No default is supplied.
Set this value (referred to as Np or N2) to the number of retries required by the
individual network. Refer to your network subscription for this information.
3-68
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
461: Lowest Incoming Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the lowest number Logical Channel Number (LCN) in the network
subscription that is reserved for calls incoming from the network. If you do not
use Incoming Call Channels, do not enter a response for this question.
462: Highest Incoming Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the highest number LCN in the network subscription that is reserved for
calls incoming from the network. If you do not use Incoming Call Channels, do
not enter a response for this question.
463: Lowest Two-Way Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the lowest number LCN in the network subscription that is reserved for
incoming or outgoing network calls. If you do not use Two-Way Channels, do
not enter a response for this question.
464: Highest Two-Way Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the highest number LCN in the network subscription that is reserved for
incoming or outgoing network calls. If you do not use Two-Way Channels, do
not enter a response for this question.
465: Lowest Outgoing Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the lowest number LCN in the network subscription that is reserved for
outgoing network calls. If you do not use Outgoing Call Channels, do not enter
a response for this question.
893-745-B
3-69
Customization Planning
466: Highest Outgoing Channel
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The response to this question is optional. If speciÞed, this response should
match the highest number LCN in the network subscription that is reserved for
outgoing network calls. If you do not use Outgoing Call Channels, do not enter
a response for this question.
Virtual Circuit DeÞnition Questions
The following questions deÞne X.25 characteristics for individual hosts and
virtual circuits.
401: Circuit Type
Response:
1 = Permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
2 = Incoming call (from host) only (SVC)
3 = Outgoing call (to host) only (SVC)
4 = Two-way call (SVC)
The default response is 4 for Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options and 13SÑ
Secondary X.25 Options. The default response is underscores for Worksheet
52ÑX.25 Circuit ProÞles.
This input Þeld indicates the type of circuit for this host. Refer to your
subscription information for your response. A permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
is a permanent logical connection between two DTEs, analogous to a
point-to-point SDLC nonswitched connection. It requires no call setup or
clearing by the DTE. A switched virtual circuit (SVC) is a temporary logical
connection between two DTEs, analogous to a point-to-point switched line.
402: Logical Channel IdentiÞer
Response: A value in the range 0000Ð4095.
The default response is 0000.
This decimal value is the channel identiÞer for the PVC speciÞed in question
401 and must be speciÞed only when the response to question 401 is 1. Refer to
your subscription information for your channel identiÞer.
3-70
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
409: X.25 Keyboard Support Options
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 10100100. Digits are numbered from left to right.
This Þeld allows you to choose how to use X.25 Extension Mode keys for this
particular virtual circuit. Keyboards on DFTs cannot be used for initiating or
terminating an X.25 connection. The X.25 keys are Extension, DIAL, LOCAL,
COMM (Communicate), and DISC (Disconnect).
Typically, the device attached to port 00 of HG 26 has access to all the X.25
Extension Mode keys. During customization, however, you can assign the keys
to all ports or delete certain keys. You can customize for automatic dial and
disconnect support (question 372) to eliminate the need to use X.25 Extension
Mode keys.
To allow the operator to change customized values for certain X.25 facilities on
a per-call basis during the Dial procedure, set the sixth digit (Dial Screen
Display) equal to 0.
NOTE: If the response to question 401 is 1, the Þrst, second, and sixth digits
have no meaning and are ignored.
Digit
893-745-B
Description
1
X.25 DISC Key
2
X.25 DISC Key
3
X.25 LOCAL and COMM
4.
X.25 LOCAL and COMM
5
X.25 Keys
6
Dial Screen Display
7
Disconnect/Local Mode Operation
8
Reserved
3-71
Customization Planning
Digits 1 and 2ÑX.25 DISC Key:
00 = X.25 DISC key is not supported.
01 = X.25 DISC key is supported only on port 00 of HG 26 or HG 27,
regardless of how the Þfth digit (X.25 Keys) is speciÞed.
10 = DefaultÑX.25 DISC is supported according to how the Þfth digit
(X.25 Keys) is speciÞed.
11 = Incorrect.
Digits 3 and 4ÑX.25 LOCAL and COMM Keys:
00 = X.25 LOCAL and COMM keys are not supported.
01 = X.25 LOCAL and COMM keys are supported only on port 00 of HG
26, regardless of how the Þfth digit (X.25 Keys) is speciÞed.
10 = DefaultÑX.25 LOCAL and COMM keys are supported according to
how the Þfth digit (X.25 Keys) is speciÞed.
11 = Incorrect.
Digit 5ÑX.25 Keys:
0 = DefaultÑX.25 keys are supported only on port 00 of HG 26.
1 = X.25 keys are supported on all ports (except those with a DFT
attached).
Digit 6ÑDial Screen Display:
0 = Display all Þelds on the Dial screen. This allows the operator to
change customized or default values on a per-call basis.
1 = DefaultÑDisplay only the host network (DTE) address (HNAD)
Þeld on the Dial screen. This allows the operator to enter only the
number to be called.
Digit 7ÑDisconnect/Local Mode Operation:
0 = DefaultÑIf no SNA sessions are active, pressing the DISC (SVC) or
LOCAL (PVC) key performs the disconnect or local mode operation.
If any sessions are active, pressing the key once inhibits the rest of the
keyboard. Pressing the key twice initiates the operation.
1 = The DISC (SVC) or LOCAL (PVC) key immediately performs the
disconnect or local mode operation, regardless of active sessions.
Digit 8ÑReserved: This digit is reserved and defaulted to 0.
3-72
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
420: Incoming Call Options
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 00000000. Digits are numbered from left to right.
Your response speciÞes how to process Þelds in an incoming call. Many of the
choices refer to optional facilities; refer to your network subscription
information before selecting your response.
If you are planning for X.25 single-link multihost support, you may be required
to answer digits 1 and 6 with a 1 if more than one of your virtual circuit
deÞnitions allows incoming calls (401 = 2 or 4). You must answer digit 1 with a
1 for all such virtual circuits and supply correct DTE addresses for question
423. If any of these virtual circuit connections are to the same host DTE
(responses to 423 are not unique), then you must answer digit 6 with a 1 and
supply a unique CID for question 452.
If the X.25 keyboard support option (question 409) speciÞes that the Dial
screen will display all the Þelds (sixth digit is 0), the operator can change any
values selected for incoming call options by using the Dial panel.
Digit
Description
1
Host DTE Address
2
Reverse-Charge Facility
3
Reverse-Charge Facility
4
Negotiated Packet Size Facility
5
Negotiated Window Size Facility
6
CID
7
Throughput Class
8
Reserved
Digit 1ÑHost DTE Address: This digit speciÞes whether to validate the host
(calling) DTE address on incoming calls.
893-745-B
3-73
Customization Planning
Digits 2 and 3ÑReverse-Charge Facility: These digits specify how to handle
calls with the reverse-charge facility.
00 = Do not accept calls that include the reverse-charge facility.
01 = Accept calls with the reverse-charge facility equal to reverse charge
requested.
10 = Accept calls with the reverse-charge facility equal to reverse charge
not requested.
11 = Accept calls with the reverse-charge facility whether reverse charges
are requested or not.
Digit 4ÑNegotiated Packet Size Facility: This digit speciÞes whether to
accept Incoming Call packets that include the negotiated packet size facility.
Digit 5ÑNegotiated Window Size Facility: This digit speciÞes whether to
accept Incoming Call packets that include the negotiated window size facility.
Digit 6ÑCID: This digit speciÞes whether to validate the CID on incoming
calls.
Digit 7ÑThroughput Class Negotiation: This digit speciÞes whether to
accept Incoming Call packets that include the Throughput Class facility.
Digit 8ÑReserved: This digit is reserved and defaulted to 0.
421: Outgoing Call Options
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
0 = No
1 = Yes
The default response is 00000000. Digits are numbered from left to right. Your
response speciÞes the Þelds to include in an outgoing Call Request packet.
Many of the choices refer to optional facilities. Refer to your network
subscription information before selecting your responses.
3-74
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
If the X.25 keyboard support option (question 409) speciÞes that the Dial
screen display all Þelds (sixth digit is 0), an operator can change any values
selected for outgoing call options during a Dial session on a per-call basis.
Digit
Description
1
Module DTE Address
2
Reverse-Charge Facility
3
Reverse-Charge Facility
4
Negotiated Packet Size Facility
5
Negotiated Window Size Facility
6
CID
7
Throughput Class
8
Reserved
Digit 1ÑModule DTE Address: This digit speciÞes whether to supply the
module (calling) DTE address in the Call Request packet.
Digits 2 and 3ÑReverse-Charge Facility: These digits specify how to handle
calls with the reverse-charge facility.
00 = Do not include the reverse-charge facility in the Call Request packet.
01 = Request reverse charge via the reverse-charge facility.
10 = Request no reverse charge via the reverse-charge facility.
11 = Incorrect response.
Digit 4ÑNegotiated Packet Size Facility: The response for this digit speciÞes
whether the negotiated packet size facility Þeld will be included in the Call
Request packet.
Digit 5ÑNegotiated Window Size Facility: This digit speciÞes whether to
include the negotiated window size facility Þeld in the Call Request packet.
Digit 6ÑConnection IdentiÞer: This digit speciÞes whether to include the
CID in the Call Request packet.
Digit 7ÑThroughput Class: This digit speciÞes whether to include the
Throughput Class facility in the Call Request packet.
Digit 8ÑReserved: This digit is reserved and is defaulted to 0.
893-745-B
3-75
Customization Planning
423: Host DTE Address
Response: A maximum of 15 digits (0 through 9).
This Þeld contains the HNAD, which is a unique address identifying this DTE
to the network. Enter a maximum of 15 digits for the telephone number, leaving
blanks or underscores where you have not written a numeric character.
You must respond to this question if:
■
Question 401 (Circuit Type) is 2 and digit 1 of question 420 (Incoming
Call Options) is 1.
■
Question 401 is 3 or 4.
Otherwise, circle the ÒunderscoreÓ (default) on the worksheet.
430: Negotiated Packet Size or PVC Packet Size
Response:
0 = 64-byte packet
1 = 128-byte packet
2 = 256-byte packet
3 = 512-byte packet
The default response is 0.
For SVCs: Your response to this question deÞnes the negotiated packet size
(NPKT) facility. This is an optional facility; refer to your subscription
information to see if a response is required.
This question is related to questions 420 (Incoming Call Options) and 421
(Outgoing Call Options). The fourth digit of both of these questions enables the
negotiated packet size facility. In question 420, if the fourth digit is 1, the
response you select here sets the size limit to which the module may negotiate
when accepting an incoming call. In question 421, if the fourth digit is 1, the
response you select here will be requested in the Call Request Packet.
For PVCs: This question has a different meaning for PVCs than for SVCs. If
you are conÞguring for PVCs, the packet size is not negotiated but remains
constant at the value you select here. If you are conÞguring for SVCs, the value
you select for this question is a limit on variable packet sizes.
3-76
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
432: Negotiated Window Size or PVC Window Size
Response:
01Ð07 = Range for modulo 8 (if question 431 = 0)
01Ð11 = Range for modulo 128 (if question 431 = 1)
The default response is 02.
For SVCs: This Þeld is used for the negotiated window size (NWND) facility.
It is an optional Þeld. Refer to your network subscription for information to
determine your response. In question 420 (Incoming Call Options), if the Þfth
digit is 1, the response selected here sets the size limit to which the module may
negotiate when processing an incoming call. In question 421 (Outgoing Call
Options), if the Þfth digit is 1, the response selected here will be requested in
the Call Request Packet.
For PVCs: This question has a different meaning for PVCs than for SVCs. If
you are conÞguring for PVCs, the window size is not negotiated but remains
constant at the value you select here. If you are conÞguring for SVCs, the value
you select for this question is a limit on variable window sizes.
440: Throughput Class Negotiation
Response:
3=
75 bps
4=
150 bps
5=
300 bps
6=
600 bps
7 = 1200 bps
8 = 2400 bps
9 = 4800 bps
A = 9600 bps
B = 19,200 bps
C = 48,000 bps
D = 64,000 bps
The default response is 9.
Throughput Class is a network facility that sets priority for packets. Refer to
your network subscription information for the response to this question.
893-745-B
3-77
Customization Planning
In question 421 (Outgoing Call Options), if the seventh digit is 1 (include the
Throughput Class facility in the Call Request packet), this Þeld supplies the
value for throughput class negotiation (TCLS). In question 420 (Incoming Call
Options), if the seventh digit is 1 (accept Throughput Class on an incoming
Call Request packet), the module accepts the requested value if it is less than or
equal to the customized value. If it is not, the customized value is returned.
441: Closed User Group
Response: 00Ð99 = Include closed user group facility in outgoing Call Request
packet.
A response to this question is optional. Consult your network subscription
information for your response. Enter a value to be included in the closed user
group (CUG) facility in an outgoing Call Request packet. If the Þeld is left with
underscores, blanks, or nulls, the closed user group facility is not included in
the outgoing Call Request packet.
An operator can enter this value on a per-call basis, overriding default or
customized values.
NOTE: If the response is a number with fewer than two digits, use a leading
zero. For example, if your response is 6, enter 06 on the worksheet. If there is
no response for this question, circle the underscore (default) on the worksheet.
442: Recognized Private Operating Agency
Response: 0000Ð9999 = Recognized private operating agency.
A response to this question is optional. Enter a value for the recognized private
operating agency (RPOA) facility if this applies to your system. If the Þeld is
left with underscores, this facility is not included in the outgoing Call Request
packet.
An operator can enter this value on a per-call basis, overriding default or
customized values.
NOTE: If the response is a number with fewer than four digits, use leading 0s.
For example, if your response is 57, enter 0057 on the worksheet. If there is no
response for this question, circle the underscore (default) on the worksheet.
3-78
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 13ÑX.25 Options, 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options, and 52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles
452: Connection IdentiÞer
Response: This identiÞer can have up to eight numeric characters (0Ð9),
alphabetic characters (AÐZ), or blanks. Refer to Ò420: Incoming Call OptionsÓ
earlier in this chapter for information about the CID and its use with the DTE.
NOTE: For customizing, you must enter alphanumeric characters for this
response. In the host SYSGEN procedure, however, you may be required to
enter hexadecimal characters for this same CID password. Check the
appropriate host documentation to determine SYSGEN requirements.
For example, when using the NCP Packet-Switching Interface (NPSI),
hexadecimal characters are required when coding the USRFIL2 keyboard of
the X25.OUFT statement, for calls originating from NPSI to the module.
453: Connection Options
Response: Eight digits (0 or 1).
The default response is 00000000. Digits are numbered from left to right.
Digit
Description
1
Level of CCITT X.25 architecture supported
2
Diagnostic code type
3-8
Reserved
Digit 1ÑCCITT X.25 Architecture Level:
0 = 1980
1 = 1984 and beyond
Digit 2ÑDiagnostic Code Type:
0 = SNA
1 = ISO
This digit identiÞes what type of diagnostic codes the module should use for
Clear Request or Reset Request packets when breaking the connection with the
remote DTE.
Digits 3Ð8ÑReserved: Digits 3 through 8 are reserved.
893-745-B
3-79
Customization Planning
Changing the X.25 Options
If you have changes to make to the X.25 Options, see the following table,
which explains how to Þll out Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options.
Change in 101
Change on worksheet
Your previous response was
101 = 3, and you did not
change it.
The 332 panel that appears on the screen displays the
previous responses. Enter your changed responses to
the 332 panel on the worksheet.
You changed your previous
response to 101 = 3.
The panel that appears on the screen displays
response fields is filled with Xs, underscores, and
default responses. Refer to “Filling Out Worksheets
13—X.25 Options, 13S—Secondary X.25 Options, and
52—X.25 Circuit Profiles” earlier in this chapter for
instructions on filling out that panel on the configuration
worksheet.
If you have changes to make to a previously
customized 332 panel, enter your changed responses
on the 332: X.25 Options panel on the configuration
worksheet. Reread the description of the question.
Check to see if the changed response requires you to
change a response to another question.
3-80
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA
Filling Out Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA
Planner: The following questions appear on Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA.
Locate Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA. Write your responses to the questions on
the worksheet.
500: CSCM Unique
Response:
0 = CSCM is not in use.
1 = CSCM is in use as a Network Site Controller.
2 = CSCM is in use as a Central Site Controller.
The default is 0.
NOTE: A response of 2 is not valid for modules using the 3270 Gateway
feature.
If you:
■
Do not want to use CSCM, use the default response.
■
Want to use CSCM and the module for which you are planning the
customization is a Network Site Controller, respond with 1.
■
Want to use CSCM and the module for which you are planning the
customization is the Central Site Controller, respond with 2.
■
Respond to this question with a 1 or 2, you must respond to questions
501: Network ID (NETID) and 502: Logical Unit Name (LUNAME).
501: Network ID
This name is used in an SNA network and an APPN network to uniquely
identify an SNA or APPN Network. It identiÞes the network of the module you
are planning to customize and distinguishes that network from the other
networks.
893-745-B
3-81
Customization Planning
The NETID name should be unique to all control point names (CPNAMEs),
LUNAMEs, and Serving NN names on the Network Resources worksheet and
the Associated LUs worksheet. Provide the same response to this question for
each module within a given network. If your response to question 510 = 1, this
name must be unique to both questions 511 and 512.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.) See the
following example:
Example
NETCONTA (valid)
NW CONTA (incorrect)
This response is required if question 500 = 1 or 2, or if question 510 = 1.
The name speciÞed should be obtained from or coordinated with the host
system programmer.
502: Logical Unit Name
The LUNAME identiÞes a module that is using change management. Specify a
unique name for each module in a given network. If the LUNAME is the same
as the CPNAME in question 511 and question 510 = 1, then the LU for CSCM
is considered to be an independent LU. The LU for CSCM is considered to be a
dependent LU if question 510 = 0, or if the names in questions 502 and 511 do
not match.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.) See the
following example:
Example
NETWKLU6 (valid)
LU6 NETW (incorrect)
The default is blanks.
The name speciÞed should be obtained from or coordinated with the host
system programmer.
3-82
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA
510: APPN Network Controller
Response:
0 = APPN is not active (this module does not participate in APPN).
1 = APPN is active on this module.
The default is 0. This indicates that APPN operational code is not activated. If
question 510 = 1 and no further APPN customization is performed, a minimum
APPN conÞguration is available along with the IBM-supplied default Class of
Service (COS) deÞnitions.
Planner: If you want to have a higher level of APPN support than the
minimum, you must plan for APPN.
511: APPN Control Point Name
This name is used as the CPNAME for the Model 3174 module APPN node
and identiÞes the node to the network. This is a required Þeld if customizing for
APPN.
The CPNAME must be unique to NETID and Virtual Node Name (VNODE),
as well as to other resources in the network.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.) See the
following example:
Example
G8644A (valid)
G864 4A (incorrect)
A response is required if question 510 = 1.
The name speciÞed should be obtained from or coordinated with the host
system programmer.
893-745-B
3-83
Customization Planning
512: APPN Virtual Node Name
This name is the VNODE for the token-ring network to which this NN is
attached.
A response to this question is optional and applies to connection networks.
The VNODE name must be unique to NETID and CPNAME, as well as to
other resources in the network. It must also be unique to all CPNAMEs,
LUNAMEs, and Serving NN names on the Network Resources worksheet and
the Associated LUs worksheet. All APPN nodes using the token-ring network
as an APPN connection network should have the same VNODE name.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.)
The name speciÞed should be obtained from or coordinated with the host
system programmer.
3-84
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node DeÞnition
Locate Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node DeÞnition. Using the following
information, write your responses to the questions on the worksheet.
610: APPN Sessions
Response:
1 = up to 225 sessions
2 = up to 500 sessions
3 = up to 750 sessions
4 = up to 1000 sessions
The default response is 1.
This response indicates the number of LU 6.2 intermediate sessions that may
be activated through the module.
Your response to this question is used to allocate the storage when the Model
3174 module NN is initially loaded. Since APPN sessions are dynamically set
up based upon resources (buffers, control blocks, links) available at session
initiation, this value may not always be achieved. In addition, the response is
used to determine the total amount of storage required for the module.
611: APPN Nodes/Link
Response:
1 = up to 20 nodes/links
2 = up to 75 nodes/links
3 = up to 150 nodes/links
4 = up to 225 nodes/links
The default response is 1.
This response indicates the number of Type 2.1 links (LAN, X.25, or frame
relay) supported by the module.
Your response to this question is used to allocate storage when the Model 3174
module NN is initially loaded. Because T2.1 links are dynamically activated as
required based upon resources (control blocks and ports) available at link
establishment, this value may not always be achieved. In addition, the response
is used to determine the total amount of storage required for the module.
893-745-B
3-85
Customization Planning
NOTE:
¥ The total number of linksÑT2.0 only, T2.1 only, and sharedÑcannot exceed
250.
¥ The maximum number of nodes stored in the APPN topology database is
based upon your response to question 611 on the APPN node deÞnition
panel. If you respond with a 1 or 2, then 149 is the maximum number of
nodes stored. If you respond with a 3 or 4, then 293 is the maximum.
612: APPN Wildcard Option
The wildcard option allows LUs to be dynamically located in a subarea node.
The wildcard option permits sessions to be established from LUs in the APPN
network to LUs in or through a subarea network.
The wildcard option does not guarantee that the session end point is in the host;
however, if it is, or if the host knows the LU location (assume subarea routing
will be done), the session will be established.
Response:
0 = No wildcard option
1 = Yes wildcard option
The default response is 0.
This response indicates whether this Model 3174 module APPN NN holds the
wildcard connection to the host for the APPN network.
NOTE:
¥ Only one NN in the entire connected APPN network may have the wildcard
option.
¥ The AS/400 refers to the wildcard option as *ANY Routing. If an AS/400 is
in the network with the *ANY option, then there cannot be an NN in the
network with the wildcard option (response to question 612 = 1).
3-86
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node Definition
613: APPN Wildcard Host In
Response:
1A = Host link 1A is used for wildcard routing.
1B = Host link 1B is used for wildcard routing.
1C = Host link 1C is used for wildcard routing.
1D = Host link 1D is used for wildcard routing.
1E = Host link 1E is used for wildcard routing.
1F = Host link 1F is used for wildcard routing.
1G = Host link 1G is used for wildcard routing.
1H = Host link 1H is used for wildcard routing.
The default response is 1A.
This response indicates which host link to this Model 3174 module APPN NN
will be used for wildcard routing.
614: Alert Focal Point Name
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional, and there is no default response. This question
indicates the focal point to which this module NN will report network
management alert information for itself and any served ENs. When a focal
point name is speciÞed, the module NN contacts the speciÞed focal point. If
left blank, a focal point may contact the module, or the module will default to
sending alerts on the SSCP-PU session.
If the focal point is Communications Manager/2 (CM/2) or AS/400, the focal
point name is the CPNAME of the focal point. If the focal point is NetView
Version 2 Release 4 or higher using VTAM Version 4 Release 1 or higher, the
VTAM CPNAME can be used as the focal point name for alerts. Otherwise, the
focal point name for NetView is the NetView LUNAME.
893-745-B
3-87
Customization Planning
615: Alert Focal Point Network ID
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional and identiÞes the network ID for the APPN focal point
for this module NN. If question 614 is left blank, the question is ignored. If this
question is left blank and question is 614 is answered, this question defaults to
the network ID of this module NN.
616: Report to Alert Focal Point (Host Links)
Response: One to eight host links (1AÐ1H).
This question is optional, and there is no default response. This question
indicates the host links for dependent LUs whose alerts are sent to the APPN
focal point. If left blank, the only alerts sent to the focal point are those from
the served ENs and those that pertain to the module PU.
620: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Primary Host Name
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional, and there is no default response. This question
indicates the CPNAME of the primary DLUS with which this module DLUR
will provide support for dependent LUs. A primary DLUS should be speciÞed
if the module DLUR is not adjacent to the DLUS node.
If the primary DLUS is speciÞed, dependent LU trafÞc for any PU supported
by this Model 3174 module DLUR must use the CP-SVR pipe. If the primary
DLUS is not speciÞed and a PU is not already active, a CP-SVR pipe can be
established.
NOTE: DLUS function is supported by VTAM Version 4 Release 2 or higher.
3-88
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node Definition
621: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Primary Host Name Network ID
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional and identiÞes the subnetwork in which the primary
DLUSÕs host resides. If question 620 is left blank, this question is ignored. If
this question is left blank and question 620 is answered, this question defaults
to the network ID of this module NN.
622: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Backup Host Name
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional, and there is no default response. This question
indicates the name of the backup DLUS with which this module DLUR will
provide support for dependent LUs if there is no response from the primary
DLUS. You cannot specify a backup DLUS if you have not speciÞed a primary
DLUS (question 620).
NOTE: DLUS function is supported by VTAM Version 4 Release 2 or higher.
623: Dependent LU Server (DLUS) Backup Host Name Network ID
Response: One- to eight-character name using a combination of the following
characters: uppercase AÐZ, 0Ð9, #, @, and $. The Þrst character must be either
an uppercase AÐZ or #, @, or $. Embedded blanks are not allowed.
This question is optional and identiÞes the subnetwork in which the primary
DLUSÕs host resides. If question 622 is left blank, this question is ignored. If
this question is left blank and question 622 is answered, this question defaults
to the network ID of this module NN.
893-745-B
3-89
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources.
2.
Fill out the CPNAME column.
The CPNAME is the name of the node you are deÞning. A maximum of
240 CPNAMEs can be deÞned; you may specify LUNAMEs for 120 of
them. The names must also be unique to NETID, CPNAME, and VNODE
(questions 501, 511, and 512). This Þeld is required when deÞning a
resource.
3.
Fill out the NODE TYPE column.
This Þeld speciÞes the APPN node type. This Þeld is required when
deÞning a resource.
Response:
1 = Low Entry Networking End Node (LEN EN)
2 = End Node (EN)
3 = Network Node (NN)
4 = Low Entry Networking End Node (LEN EN) SSCP
NOTE: The module supports up to eight adjacent NNs with CP-CP sessions.
An adjacent NN with CP-CP sessions is a resource that has been customized
with an ADDRESS or DLCI, a DLC TYPE, and a NODE TYPE of 3.
4.
Fill out the LUs column.
If LUs are wanted for a given CPNAME, place an X in this Þeld. This step
is optional.
3-90
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources
5.
Fill out the DLC TYPE column.
DLC TYPE is the type of data link control protocol for this link to the
adjacent node.
Response:
1 = Token-Ring Attached
2 = SDLC Attached
4 = X.25 Attached
5 = Frame-Relay Attached
NOTE: There can be only one SDLC node deÞned.
6.
Fill out the ADDRESS column.
The ADDRESS Þeld speciÞes the LAN address for establishing a link. If
DLC TYPE = 1 (Token-Ring), this ADDRESS Þeld is required. For SDLC
(DLC TYPE = 2), X.25 (DLC TYPE = 4), and frame-relay (DLC TYPE =
5) attachments, leave this Þeld blank.
Response: For DLC TYPE of token-ring, a 12-character hexadecimal
address plus a two-character hexadecimal service access point (SAP) ID.
All token-ring addresses on this worksheet must be unique.
The token-ring network address of the module assigned in question 106 or
900 cannot be speciÞed. If 3174-Peer Support (question 650 = yes) and
Bridge Support (question 651 = yes), or Multiple Bridging (question 656
= yes) are customized, 4000 XXXX XXFF (where XXXX XX is the user
portion of the address speciÞed in question 660) cannot be speciÞed.
NOTE: Make sure that you have not customized for more resources than you
speciÞed in question 611. Refer to Ò611: APPN Nodes/LinkÓ earlier in this
chapter for additional information.
893-745-B
3-91
Customization Planning
7.
Fill out the DLCI column.
The DLCI Þeld speciÞes the DLCI and SAP used to identify frame-relay
connections. If DLC TYPE = 5 (frame relay), this DLCI Þeld is required.
For token ring (DLC TYPE = 1), SDLC (DLC TYPE = 2), and X.25 (DLC
TYPE = 4) attachments, leave this Þeld blank.
Response: A decimal value between 0016 and 1007 and a two-character
hexadecimal SAP.
NOTE: Make sure that you have not customized for more DLCIs than you
speciÞed in question 552. Refer to Ò552: Maximum Number of DLCIsÓ later in
this chapter for additional information.
Make sure that you have not customized for more resources than you speciÞed
in question 611. Refer to Ò611: APPN Nodes/LinkÓ earlier in this chapter for
more information.
3-92
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers
Filling Out Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources QualiÞers
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources QualiÞers.
2.
Fill out the CPNAME column with the CPNAMEs that have a NODE
TYPE of 4 on Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources.
3.
Fill out the NETID column.
A NETID is the network identiÞer or network name of the deÞned LEN
SSCP. It can be the same as or different from the Model 3174 module
NNÕs NETID. This column is optional if the network identiÞer is the same
as the network identiÞer of the Model 3174 module NN.
4.
Fill out the PUNAME column.
The PUNAME is the PUNAME of the NCP that this LEN SSCP owns.
The PUNAME further identiÞes the LEN SSCP so that trafÞc can be
transparently routed when SSCP takeover occurs. This column is optional,
but it is recommended if the NN is eligible for SSCP takeover.
893-745-B
3-93
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 17ÑAssociated LUs
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 17ÑAssociated LUs.
2.
Fill out the CPNAME column with those CPNAMES on Worksheet
16ÑNetwork Resources that have an X in the LUs column.
3.
Fill out the LUNAME columns.
An LUNAME is a name of a logical unit that enables end users to
communicate with one another. For example, it is the name associated
with a particular application used in an APPN Network.
These four Þelds represent LUNAMEs and should be Þlled in using a
maximum of eight alphanumeric characters for each LUNAME. A
maximum of 480 LUs may be deÞned for one CPNAME or distributed
among a maximum of 120 CPNAMEs. (All 240 CPNAMEs cannot have
LUs deÞned to them.)
To name a group of LUs using generic location naming, deÞne the LUs
with a common name followed by an asterisk (*). For example, you can
use CICS* or TSO*.
4.
Fill out the Serving NN column.
For NNs (type 3), this Þeld may be left blank. Since an NN must be its
own server, the default is the CPNAME of the NN. During customizing,
an error is given if a speciÞc Serving NN name does not match the
CPNAME.
For an LEN end node or end node (node type 1 or 2), the CPNAME of the
Serving NN may be speciÞed. If left blank, the default Serving NN is this
Model 3174 module NN that you are customizing.
If you choose to deÞne a Serving NN, it can be any NN in the entire
network. Be sure that it is an NN because error checking cannot be done
by this module.
3-94
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes
Filling Out Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes.
2.
In the CPNAME column, write the CPNAMEs on the Network
Resources worksheet that have a DLC TYPE of X.25
(DLC TYPE = 4).
3.
In the PROFILE column, write the ID of the X.25 circuit proÞle to be
used for the characteristics of the link.
Refer to ÒVirtual Circuit DeÞnition QuestionsÓ earlier in this chapter for
the deÞned proÞles and their characteristics.
4.
In the CONNECTION ID column, write the Connection ID for this
connection.
5.
If the circuit is a Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) and you want the
module to initiate this connection, write the logical channel number in
the LCN column.
If the circuit is a Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) and you want the module
to initiate this connection, write the DTE address to be used in the CALL
packet in the DTE ADDR column.
893-745-B
3-95
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 18ÑCOS DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 18ÑCOS DeÞnition.
2.
Fill out the COS DeÞnition Number Þeld.
This Þeld represents the number of the COS that you want to add or
modify.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð14.
3.
Fill out the Model DeÞnition Number Þeld.
This Þeld represents the number of the COS to be used as the model (one
of the default values shown).
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð14.
NOTE:
¥ If a new COS deÞnition number is selected and a model deÞnition number is
not selected, the Clear DeÞnition will be used.
¥ If an existing COS deÞnition number is selected and a model is not selected,
the existing COS information will be displayed.
¥ If a COS deÞnition number is not selected and a model deÞnition is selected,
an error message will be displayed.
¥ If an existing COS deÞnition number is selected and a different model
number is selected, a warning message will be displayed stating that data
may be overwritten.
¥ The IBM-supplied values are always accessible. If you have modiÞed an
IBM-supplied COS deÞnition, you have actually modiÞed a copy of the
IBM-supplied deÞnition. Whenever an IBM-supplied COS is used as a
model, the original IBM-supplied COS deÞnition will be displayed. The
modiÞed data will be used for routing purposes.
¥ If a COS deÞnition number 1Ð5 (IBM defaults) is modeled on itself, then a
warning message will also be displayed.
¥ SNASVCMG, CPSVCMG, and CPSVRMGR are IBM reserved names and
not allowed as input.
3-96
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node DeÞnition.
2.
Fill out the COS Name Þeld.
For IBM-supplied defaults, the COS Name cannot be modiÞed. If you are
not using IBM-supplied defaults, Þll out this Þeld with a new COS name.
This is a required Þeld if other information is to be supplied.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.)
NOTE:
¥ The IBM default names are the only names that are allowed to begin with an
X'7B'.
¥ CPSVCMG, SNASVCMG, CPSVRMGR are IBM reserved names and cannot
be entered as Mode or COS name.
3.
Fill out the Transmission Priority Þeld.
This Þeld is used to select the priority of the trafÞc.
Response:
1 = High (interactive)
2 = Medium (normal)
3 = Low (usually for batch)
4.
Fill out the Node Weight Þelds.
You may deÞne up to eight sets of weighted values. Lower values indicate
that the node is more desirable in session route calculations. The value
speciÞed in column 1 should be lower than the value speciÞed in columns
2 through 8.
For example, the characteristics of a column should make preceding
columns more desirable than the next column. (The value speciÞed in
column 1 should make that column preferable to the values speciÞed in
column 2.)
893-745-B
3-97
Customization Planning
When the parameters in the column match the moduleÕs parameters, the
node weight of that column is used for route computation.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
5.
Fill out the Route Addition Resistance (RAR) Þelds.
These Þelds indicate how desirable one NN is compared to another NN for
routing intermediate sessions through them.
Any COS requiring an RAR less than 128 will not be routed through the
module. The module is set to a value of 128.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
0 = Most desirable
255 = Least desirable
6.
Fill out the Congestion Þelds.
These Þelds indicate whether or not a highly congested node should be
used.
Response:
0 = Use only nodes with low congestion.
1 = Use nodes with both low and high congestion.
Example
Min = 0, Max = 0: use only low congestion nodes.
Min = 0, Max = 1: use both high and low congestion nodes.
NOTE:
¥ The COS Name must not be a duplicate of any other COS name.
¥ All Min values must be less than or equal to their paired Max values.
¥ If any Þeld has been speciÞed in a column, all Þelds must be speciÞed for
that column.
3-98
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition. This
worksheet has two parts.
2.
The COS Name Þeld will already be deÞned with the name from the
COS Node DeÞnition panel.
3.
Fill out the Transmission Group (TG) Weight Þeld. This Þeld
represents the weight of the link. It is used in computing the best link
to take. The lower values, which are the most desirable weights,
should precede the least desirable weights, or higher values.
If all of the parameters in a column match the desired TG, the TG weight
of the Þrst match will be used.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
4.
Fill out the Cost/Connect Þeld.
This Þeld represents the relative cost of being connected over the line.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
5.
Fill out the Cost/Byte Þeld.
This Þeld represents the relative cost per byte of sending and receiving
data over the line.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
6.
Fill out the User-DeÞned Þelds (1, 2, and 3).
Use 1, 2, or 3 of these Þelds to describe any unique characteristics over
which you want to have control.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð255.
NOTE: All Min values must be less than or equal to their paired Max values.
If any Þeld has been speciÞed in a column, all Þelds must be speciÞed for that
column.
893-745-B
3-99
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 20BÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 20BÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition. This is
the second part of the worksheet.
2.
The COS Name Þeld will already be deÞned with the same name as on
the previous COS Transmission Group DeÞnition worksheet.
3.
Fill out the Link Speed Þeld. This Þeld represents the data rate for the
link.
The worksheet contains acceptable link speed values.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð13.
0 = Minimum speed
13 = Maximum speed
4.
Fill out the Security Þeld.
This Þeld represents the security of the medium over which the data is
sent.
The worksheet contains acceptable link speed values.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð6.
0 = Not secure
6 = Maximum security
5.
Fill out the Propagation Delay Þeld.
This Þeld represents the time required for the signal to travel from one end
of the link to another.
The worksheet contains acceptable link speed values.
Response: A numeric value from 0Ð5.
0 = Minimum time
5 = Maximum time
3-100
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation
Filling Out Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation.
2.
Fill out the Mode Name Þeld.
The Þrst Þve mode names are protected and contain the IBM-supplied
defaults. The mode name is an eight-character symbolic name that
identiÞes a subset of rules and protocols to be used between a pair of LUs.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.
NOTE:
¥ The IBM default names are the only names that are allowed to begin
with X'7B' represented by the # sign.
¥ CPSVCMG, SNASVCMG, CPSVRMGR are IBM reserved names and
cannot be entered as Mode or COS name.
3.
Fill out the # Þeld.
If you want to correlate a mode name with an IBM default COS name, use
the # Þeld to select the COS. Otherwise, Þll out a COS name in the COS
Name Þeld.
Response: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 are the only valid responses.
These correlate to the IBM-supplied COS names. When you enter a
number in this Þeld, the related COS Name Þeld must be blank.
4.
Fill out the COS Name Þeld.
The COS Name Þeld can be correlated to any name you desire.
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters. (First character must be
alphabetic, and no blanks or spaces between characters are allowed.)
When a COS name is speciÞed, a mode name must also be speciÞed. All
COS names used with a mode name must have been deÞned on the
previous COS DeÞnition worksheet and must be consistent network wide.
893-745-B
3-101
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Options
Locate Worksheet 22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridge Options. Write your responses
to the questions on the worksheet.
650: 3174-Peer Support
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default is N.
Enter:
Y
If you want 3174-Peer Communication to be operational when the
controller is IMLed.
N
If you do not want 3174-Peer Communication to be operational when the
controller is IMLed.
NOTE: If your response to question 650 = Y, then you must respond to
question 660. All addresses must be unique.
656: Multiport Bridging
Response:
0 = None
1 = Enable Source Route Bridging across any interface
The default is 0 (None).
Enter:
3-102
0
If you do not want to enable Source Route Bridging across any interface.
1
If you want to enable Source Route Bridging across any interface.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer DeÞnition
Locate Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer DeÞnition. Write your responses to the
questions on the worksheet.
651: 3174-Peer Bridge Support
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default is N.
Enter:
Y
If 3174-Peer devices will communicate with devices (which could be
token-ring gateways) that are not directly attached to the same 3174-Peer
segment. Ring Parameter Server (RPS) function is provided for the token
ring.
If 3174-Peer devices will communicate to this 3174 NN or token-ring
gateway, then 3174-Peer Bridge Support must be set to Y.
N
If you want to use Multiport Bridging (question 656 = 1).
NOTE: Question 651 cannot be ÒYesÓ when question 656 is Ò1.Ó
660: 3174-Peer Port Address Range
Response: A hexadecimal address.
A response is required if question 650 = Y.
893-745-B
3-103
Customization Planning
Address
The address you specify represents a range of default addresses that will be
used for 3174-Peer devices. The address range is in the following format:
4000 XXXX XX PN
where XXXX XX is the user-assigned portion of the address and PN is the
3174-Peer port number to which the device is attached. The 3174-Peer port
number is equivalent to the port number on the Model 3174 module to which
the device is attached. Thus ports 0 through 31 (represented by HG 26-00
through 26-31) map to X'31', not X'1F'.
NOTE: Although the address is a hexadecimal number, the PN must be entered
as a decimal number (for example, enter port 31 as X'31', not X'1F').
If LAN Manager is customized, the Model 3174 module has an individual
address on the 3174-Peer segment. It is X'4000 XXXX XXFF' where XXXX
XX is the user-assigned portion of the address speciÞed for the default address
of the attached device. An acceptable response is in the range from X'4000
0000 00' to X'4000 FFFF FF'.
NOTE: The system programmer will need to know the actual LAN individual
address that will be used by the 3174-Peer devices because this value will be
used when conÞguring the token-ring gateway. A 3174-Peer device may accept
the address customized for the Model 3174 module port to which it attaches,
or provide its own address.
If you select 3174-Peer Support (question 650 = yes) and Bridge Support
(question 651 = yes), token-ring address entries cannot be X'4000 XXXX
XXFF' and questions 106, 107, 570, and 900 cannot be in the range of X'4000
XXXX XX00' through X'4000 XXXX XX63' or be X'4000 XXXX XXFF'
(where XXXX XX is the user-assigned portion of the address speciÞed in
question 660).
3-104
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer Definition
661: Percentage of Discard Threshold
Response: 00Ð99 (percent)
The default is 05.
The 3174-Peer device is considered to be congested only if the percentage of
frames discarded by the Model 3174 module, during a 1-minute interval,
exceeds the speciÞed threshold. The response to this question speciÞes this
threshold in the form of a percentage. If you specify 0, the 3174-Peer device is
considered to be congested at the end of any 1-minute interval during which a
frame is discarded.
893-745-B
3-105
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge DeÞnition
Locate Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge DeÞnition. Write your responses
to the questions on the worksheet.
680: Bridge Number
Response: A hexadecimal value in the range of X'0' to X'F'.
The default is 1.
The bridge number is required to perform source routing. This number must be
unique between two segments connected to each other by multiple bridges.
681: Bridge Maximum Frame Forward Size
Response:
1 = 516 bytes
2 = 1500 bytes
3 = 2052 bytes
The default response is 3.
This Þeld sets the largest frame size that this bridge can handle.
682: Bridge Performance Counter Threshold
Response: 0000 to 9999.
The default response is 0010.
The Bridge Performance Counter Threshold speciÞes the maximum percentage
of information Þelds that may be discarded within one minute before a count is
incremented. The number speciÞed is in hundredths of a percentage (or frames
per 10,000). For example, an entry of 0120 is equal to 1.2%.
3-106
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition
683: Logging Interval
Response: A value in the range from 00 hours 00 minutes to 99 hours 59
minutes.
The default response is 02 00 (two hours).
This Þeld deÞnes the amount of time between detection of bridge congestion
and the logging of the congestion condition. During the logging interval, a
count is maintained of the number of 1-minute intervals that showed bridge
congestion. The value of this count is included in the log information.
The logging interval starts when congestion is Þrst detected and ends when the
interval is complete or the alert threshold is reached.
684: Alert Threshold
Response: A value in the range from 000Ð255.
The default is 010.
During a logging interval, the Alert Threshold deÞnes the number of 1-minute
intervals showing bridge congestion that are allowed to elapse before an alert is
sent for bridge congestion. If the number of minutes the bridge is congested
within the logging interval reaches the Alert Threshold, the logging interval is
treated as if it has been completed.
685: Token-Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is N.
Enter:
893-745-B
Y
If the token-ring adapter is to be opened in wrap mode without direct
attachment to the token ring, or if you want to allow host communication to
a peer device without requiring a token-ring attachment.
N
If you want to allow host communication to a peer device over a token-ring
attachment.
3-107
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 22DÐSource Route Bridge Interfaces.
2.
Fill out the Segment Number Þeld for the interfaces.
Response: A hexadecimal value in the range of X'001' to X'FFF'.
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the segment that is associated with the interface. Each
interface is viewed as one network segment from a source route bridge
perspective.
Each segment number on the Source Route Bridge Interfaces panel must
be a unique segment or ring number in the bridged network. A minimum
of two interfaces must be enabled on the Source Route Bridge Interfaces
panel for source route bridging to occur.
3.
Fill out the Frame Forwarding Active Þeld for the interfaces.
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is Y.
Enter:
Y If you want this bridge port to forward frames as well as process
frames received from other ports.
N If you do not want this bridge port to forward frames received from
other ports. If your response is N, the bridge will discard any frames it
receives and stop incrementing the discard counters.
A frame forwarding active value must be speciÞed for all deÞned
interfaces on this worksheet.
3-108
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode
Filling Out Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode.
2.
Fill out the Forward Spanning Tree Explorer (STE) Frames Þeld for
the interfaces.
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is Y.
This Þeld represents whether spanning tree frames are to be or are not to
be forwarded from this port.
Enter:
Y If spanning tree frames are to be forwarded to this port.
N If spanning tree frames are not to be forwarded to this port.
Overview of Bridging
There are two types of source-route bridge functions:
893-745-B
■
Local bridging function where the Model 3174 module can interconnect
Peer Communications devices on the Model 3174 module to devices on a
token-ring network directly attached to the Model 3174 module.
■
Remote bridging functions where the Model 3174 module can
interconnect two token rings (or 3174-Peer segments) across an
intervening frame-relay network or communications link using
frame-relay protocols.
3-109
Customization Planning
Source-Route Bridging
Source-route bridging is used to interconnect networks at the data link layer
(OSI reference model). Source-route bridging involves forwarding medium
access control (MAC) frames based on information in the MAC header. A
frame is passed from bridge to bridge until it reaches the Þnal destination.
A bridge examines each frame to determine whether it is destined for the bridge
itself or for another device on the token ring. The device that sends the frame
(the source) indicates within the frame the complete route to the Þnal
destination. The route is a sequence of identiÞers for the bridges and rings
along the path from the source to the destination device. The bridge is protocol
independent because it is unaware of the network protocol information in the
data Þeld.
Local Bridging
Local bridging is provided with the Model 3174 module Peer Communications
feature. When Peer bridge support is customized, the controller forms a bridge
that attaches one 3174-Peer segment to a token-ring LAN segment. It operates
as a MAC relay station, using source routing.
Remote Bridging
Remote bridging is provided with the Frame-Relay Communications feature
and provides transport of data from a locally attached token-ring device to a
device on a remote token ring connected across a frame-relay network. In
conjunction with the Peer Communications feature, the Peer devices can be
bridged across the frame-relay network to Peer devices on a remote Model
3174 module or devices on a remote token ring.
The Model 3174 module Frame-Relay Communications feature supports RFC
1490, a multiprotocol standard for frame relay. This standard establishes a
format for transport across a frame-relay network, so that any other device that
meets this standard can read all trafÞc sent into the network. Therefore, the
Model 3174 module can support multiple protocols, including bridge trafÞc,
across a frame-relay network. The format for a frame-relay bridge frame is an
802.5 format data packet encapsulated in an RFC 1490 formatted header.
Remote bridging requires a frame-relay connection between two compatible
bridges that are partners.
3-110
893-745-B
Overview of Bridging
Multiport Bridging
Bridges may be categorized based on the number of segments they
interconnect. A two-port bridge interconnects only two segments where each
port provides the physical attachment to a different LAN segment. A multiport
bridge has more than two ports, each port connected to different LAN
segments. Multitailed bridging occurs when there are multiple network
segments accessible through the same physical port.
The Peer Communications bridge function is a two-port bridge connecting a
token-ring segment to a Peer (coaxial-attached) segment. With the addition of
frame relay, the bridge function is expanded to support multiple physical
connections of Peer (coaxial), token ring, and frame relay.
Multiport bridging allows the source-routed trafÞc to access any combination
of three bridge ports simultaneously. In addition, the Model 3174 module
supports multitail bridging in which multiple DLCIs on one physical port can
be used for bridging to several remote partners.
Connectivity
The Model 3174 module multiport bridge interoperates with other frame-relay
remote bridge partners such as Wellßeet routers running software version 8.00
or higher, the IBM 6611, RXR/2, and 3172 Models, or other Model 3174
modules for bridging token-ring LANs. The Model 3174 module remote bridge
can take advantage of a point-to-point communications link between two
Model 3174 modules by using the frame-relay communications without
requiring a frame-relay service.
Figure 3-3 depicts a conÞguration of bridges that interconnect token-ring
LANs and Peer segments. The remote partners shown are the IBM RXR/2 and
6611 Models and the Model 3174 module.
NOTE: The IBM 3745 Model is not a remote bridge partner.
893-745-B
3-111
Customization Planning
RS/6000
server
SNA host
Token
ring
IBM 3745
Model
Wellfleet
router
System 3000 hub
System 3000 hub
Frame-relay
network
Token
ring
DSPU
6611
bridge
Token
ring
Token
ring
LNM
TCP/IP host
5729
Figure 3-3. Multiport bridging
3-112
893-745-B
Multiport Bridge Planning
Multiport Bridge Planning
With the Frame-Relay Communications feature, the Model 3174 module can
be deÞned as a remote source-route bridge. With source-route bridging, a
bridge number must be assigned to the Model 3174 module; this number is the
same regardless of number of ports conÞgured. Other considerations must be
made for ring/segment numbers, spanning tree, and restrictions.
Assigning Ring Numbers for Remote Bridges
Remote bridges map frame-relay DLCIs to the destination ring/segment
number. The Model 3174 module uses a single ring/segment number for the
frame-relay network and learns of other ring numbers by observing the Routing
Information Þeld of received frames. When the same ring number is used for
the frame-relay network among all of the bridges connected to the frame-relay
network, the route between bridge partners is seen as one hop. If the two
partners use different ring numbers, the frame-relay network will be seen as
two hops. If the ring numbers are different, the Model 3174 module must learn
of the ring number by receiving a frame from that remote partner. Therefore,
the Model 3174 module cannot bridge to that remote partner until the partner
attempts to bridge to the Model 3174 module. For complete connectivity via
bridging, the bridge partners should be fully meshed in the frame-relay
network.
Spanning Tree
In source-route bridging, the Spanning Tree Protocol is used to reduce the
number of broadcasts or explorer frames traveling in a network. The use of
Spanning Tree ensures that only one copy of a route request is received by a
destination station from a source. Manual Spanning Tree Explorer (STE)
frames are to be forwarded.
Multiport Bridge Restrictions
The following restrictions need to be considered when planning your network:
893-745-B
■
The number of multitailed bridge partners the Model 3174 module can
support across a frame-relay network is limited.
■
The maximum information Þeld size is 2052.
■
The Model 3174 module does not support Automatic Spanning Tree.
3-113
Customization Planning
■
LAN Network Manager for OS/2 Version 2 is required to support
multiport bridging.
■
The Model 3174 module does not support fragmented frames. All
fragmented bridge frames received from the frame-relay network are
discarded, not bridged.
Filters
To reduce network trafÞc and congestion, the Model 3174 module enables you
to control the type of trafÞc being bridged over a port.
Bridge Frames
A source device determines the path to a destination by sending a discovery
frame to the destination (single-route broadcast). The destination responds by
sending back a discovery response frame that is sent over all possible routes in
the network (all-routes broadcast). The Model 3174 module enables you to
conÞgure Þlters that can be applied to all-routes broadcast or explorer (ARE)
and single-route broadcast or explorer (SRE) or both.
Special care must be taken in designing mesh networks that contain bridges.
Each of the Þlters can be used to evaluate a different portion of a token-ring
frame. When the Þlters are applied to a frame, the values speciÞed for the Þlters
are compared against the contents of the frame. The result of these comparisons
determines whether the frame is rejected or bridged.
Port Filters
Each port Þlter can be deÞned for receive or transmit. Receive Þlters are
applied to frames ßowing into the bridge, and transmit Þlters are applied to
frames ßowing out of the bridge.
When the Þlter is applied to a frame, the outcome is based upon the type, mode,
and status:
3-114
■
Type indicates whether the Þlter is applied to single-route explorer (SRE)
frames, all-routes explorer (ARE) frames, or both types of frames.
■
Mode indicates whether the Þltering mode is set to permit or deny. Permit
Þlters allow frames to pass through the port if the contents of the Þlter and
the frame match. Deny Þlters do not allow frames to pass through the port
if the contents of the Þlters and the frame match.
893-745-B
Local Management Functions
■
Status indicates whether the Þlter is enabled or disabled.
You can deÞne and enable multiple Þlters on each port. When more than one
type of Þlter is deÞned, the order is as defaulted or the user can specify the Þlter
order. If the order number is speciÞed for one Þlter, it must be speciÞed for all
Þlters. Port Þlters are applied in sequence until the frame is rejected or until,
after passing through each Þlter, the frame is bridged. The following Þlters can
be deÞned when customizing the Model 3174 module:
■
Hop count
■
Source SAP
■
SNAP Ethertype
■
Route Designator
■
MAC Address
■
Frame Data and Offset
Local Management Functions
If the Model 3174 module is not customized for LAN Manager support
(question 652 = no) and is customized for Bridge Online Test Updates
(question 653 = yes), the Local Management functions allow full local
management of the Model 3174 module bridge through the online tests. If the
Model 3174 module is customized for LAN Manager support (question 652 =
yes) and is customized for Bridge Online Test Updates (question 653 = yes),
the online tests will allow you to change the passwords to the LAN Manager.
893-745-B
3-115
Customization Planning
LAN Manager Support
LAN Network Manager is a network management program and problem
determination aid for a LAN composed of one or more token-ring network
segments or various other types of LAN segments. It runs on a PS/2 under OS/
2 and can communicate with NetView at the host. The LAN Network Manager
monitors activity on the LAN segment to which it is attached and on remote
LAN segments connected by bridges.
The LAN Network Manager allows management of a LAN by maintaining
records, by monitoring the status of LAN segments and attaching devices, and
by determining the source of problems. Also, LAN Network Manager can test a
LAN segment to make sure that data is ßowing to it and remove those devices
found to be functioning incorrectly.
When functioning as a bridge between a token ring and 3174-Peer segment, the
Model 3174 module reserves four reporting links. A LAN Network Manager
may connect to any of the reporting links, allowing up to four LAN Network
Managers to be simultaneously supported. The LAN Reporting Mechanism
(LRM) is a server function that maintains and establishes the reporting links.
The following management server functions are supported across each
established reporting link:
■
LAN Bridge Server (LBS) (token-ring, frame relay, 3174-Peer segments)
■
Ring Parameter server (RPS) (token-ring and 3174-Peer segments)
■
ConÞguration Reporting Server (CRS) (3174-Peer segments only)
■
Ring Error Monitor (REM) (3174-Peer segments only)
If LAN Network Manager support is not customized (question 652 = no), and
Bridge support is customized (question 651 = yes), RPS support is provided for
the token ring.
LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 may be used for two-port bridges. LAN
Network Manager for OS/2 Version 2.0 or higher is required for multiport
bridge support. For more information on the LAN Network Manager, refer to
the IBM LAN Network Manager UserÕs Guide.
3-116
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile
Filling Out Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge ProÞle
Locate Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge ProÞle. Write your responses to the
questions on the worksheet.
670: Bridge Number
Response: A hexadecimal value in the range of X'0' to X'F'.
The default is 1.
The bridge number is required to perform source routing.
For more information about bridge numbers, refer to ÒMultiport Bridge
PlanningÓ earlier in this chapter.
671: Token-Ring Segment Number
Response: A hexadecimal value in the range of X'001' to X'FFF'.
There is no default; input is required.
■
The token-ring segment number is required to perform source routing.
■
LAN segments within the same network cannot have the same segment
number.
■
All bridges must know the Token Ring by the same segment number.
■
The token-ring segment number cannot be the same as the 3174-Peer
segment number.
NOTE: If the token ring to which your module is connected has a device
running the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program, its segment number
must match the segment number assigned on the 3174-Peer Bridge ProÞle
worksheet. If the numbers do not match, the 3174-Peer bridge does not
communicate on the token ring.
893-745-B
3-117
Customization Planning
672: 3174-Peer Segment Number
Response: A hexadecimal value in the range of X'001' to X'FFF'.
There is no default response; input is required.
■
The token-ring segment number is required to perform source routing.
■
LAN segments within the same network cannot have the same segment
number.
■
The 3174-Peer segment number cannot be the same as the token-ring
segment number.
673: Token-Ring Hop Count
Response: A value in the range from 1Ð7.
There is no default.
The Hop Count speciÞes the maximum number of bridges that a broadcast
frame can cross. For more information about hop counts, refer to ÒMultiport
Bridge PlanningÓ earlier in this chapter.
674: Frame Forwarding Active
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
W = Wrap mode
The default response is Y (Yes).
Enter:
Y
If you want the 3174-Peer bridge to forward frames and process frames
received from the token ring.
N
If you do not want the 3174-Peer bridge to forward frames received from
the token ring. Also, the 3174-Peer bridge will discard any frames it
receives and stop incrementing the discard counters.
W Wrap mode allows host communication for 3174-Peer devices without
requiring attachment to a token ring.
3-118
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile
675: Bridge Performance Threshold
Response: A value in the range from 0000 to 9999.
The default is 10.
The Bridge Performance Threshold allows speciÞcation of the maximum
percentage of Information Þelds that may be discarded by the bridge within 1
minute before a count is incremented. The number speciÞed is in hundredths of
a percentage (or frames per 10,000). A separate count is maintained for frames
received from the token ring and frames received from the 3174-Peer bridge.
For example, an entry of 0120 is equal to 1.2%.
676: Logging Interval
Response: A value in the range from 00 hours 00 minutes to 99 hours 59
minutes.
The default is 02 00 (every two hours).
This Þeld deÞnes the amount of time between detection of bridge congestion
and the logging of the congestion condition. During the logging interval, a
count is maintained of the number of 1-minute intervals that showed bridge
congestion. The value of this count is included in the log information.
The logging interval starts when congestion is Þrst detected and ends when the
interval is completed or the alert threshold is reached.
677: Alert Threshold
Response: A value in the range from 000Ð255.
The default is 010.
During a logging interval, the Alert Threshold deÞnes the number of 1-minute
intervals showing bridge congestion that are allowed to elapse before an alert is
sent for bridge congestion. If the number of minutes the bridge is congested
within the logging interval reaches the Alert Threshold, the logging interval is
treated as if it has been completed.
893-745-B
3-119
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management
Locate Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management.
The responses to questions 690 through 693 consist of a password for each of
your reporting links. The passwords are not required to be unique; however,
each password that is deÞned must be 6 to 8 characters in length.
652: LAN Manager Support
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is N.
Enter:
Y
If the Model 3174 module will be managed by LAN Network Manager.
N
If LAN Network Manager support is not required.
653: 3174-Peer Online Test Updates
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is N.
■
If question 98 (Online Test Password) is left blank or if LAN Manager
reporting links are active, you cannot use the 3174-Peer Online Test
Updates feature.
■
If question 653 (3174-Peer Online Test Updates) = Y, the operator is
allowed to provide updates from online test 19.
■
If question 652 = N and 653 = Y, the operator is allowed to provide
updates from the online test 19.
Enter:
3-120
Y
If you want to do 3174-Peer online test updates.
N
If you do not want to do 3174-Peer online test updates.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management
690: Reporting Link 0 Password
Response: An alphanumeric password with characters in the range of 0Ð9 and
AÐZ. Blanks preceding or embedded in the password are not permitted.
There is no default.
NOTE: You cannot enter any passwords unless question 652 = Y.
691: Reporting Link 1 Password
Response: An alphanumeric password with characters in the range of 0Ð9 and
AÐZ. Blanks preceding or embedded in the password are not permitted.
There is no default.
NOTE: You cannot enter any passwords unless question 652 = Y.
692: Reporting Link 2 Password
Response: An alphanumeric password with characters in the range of 0Ð9 and
AÐZ. Blanks preceding or embedded in the password are not permitted.
There is no default.
NOTE: You cannot enter any passwords unless question 652 = Y.
693: Reporting Link 3 Password
Response: An alphanumeric password with characters in the range of 0Ð9 and
AÐZ. Blanks preceding or embedded in the password are not permitted.
There is no default.
NOTE: You cannot enter any passwords unless question 652 = Y.
893-745-B
3-121
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24AÑFilter DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24AÑFilter DeÞnition.
You need to select the interface for your Þlters. If you are deÞning Þlters
for more than one interface, copy the worksheet in Appendix I,
ÒConÞguration Worksheets.Ó
2.
Select an interface to deÞne Þlters on the Bridge Filtering Interfaces
worksheet.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
3.
Circle the option numbers for the Þlters you will be deÞning for the
interface.
1
2
3
4
5
6
99
3-122
Hop count Þlter
Source SAP Þlter
SNAP Ethertype Þlter
Route designator (segment number and bridge number)
MAC address Þlter
Frame data and offset Þlter
Order for speciÞed Þlters
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filter
Filling Out Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filter
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filter.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þelds.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = All Routes Explorer (ARE)
S = Spanning Tree Explorer (STE)
B = Both
The default response is A.
The Frame Type Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE
frames, or both.
4.
Fill out the Hop Count Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð7.
The default response is 7.
The Hop Count Þeld represents the maximum number of bridges a
broadcast frame can cross. Because this is a multiport bridge, the user is
allowed to specify a hop count Þlter out of both the receive and transmit
sides of an interface. This feature allows the user ßexibility in limiting
trafÞc in all directions in a network.
The Peer Receive Hop count must be 1.
893-745-B
3-123
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = ARE (All Routes Explorer)
S = STE (Spanning Tree Explorer)
B = Both
There is no default.
The Frame Type Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE
frames, or both.
4.
Fill out the Filter Mode Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: P or D.
P = Permit
D = Deny
There is no default.
This Þeld represents bridging or not bridging the frames.
3-124
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters
5.
Fill out the Filter Status Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: E or D.
E = Enable
D = Disable
There is no default.
This Þeld enables or disables all Receive/Transmit Þlters of this type
deÞned. If no Þlters are deÞned, this question has no effect.
6.
Fill out the Source SAP Value Þelds for both receive and transmit.
These Þelds represent the SAP values that will match the source SAP
value of all frames to which the Þlter will be applied. The SAP value must
be an even number from X'00' to X' FE'.
All Receive Þlter values must be unique. If any Receive Þlter Þeld is
answered (Type, Status, Mode, or one of the Value Þelds), all other Þelds
must also be answered.
All Transmit Þlter values must be unique. If any Transmit Þlter Þeld is
answered (Type, Status, Mode, or one of the Value Þelds), all other Þelds
must also be answered.
Response: X'00' to X'FE' in increments of 2 (00, 02, 04, ...).
There is no default.
893-745-B
3-125
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = ARE (All Routes Explorer)
S = STE (Spanning Tree Explorer)
B = Both
There is no default.
The frame type Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE
frames, or both.
4.
Fill out the Filter Mode Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: P or D.
P = Permit
D = Deny
There is no default.
This Þeld represents bridging or not bridging the frames.
3-126
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters
5.
Fill out the Filter Status Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: E or D.
E = Enable
D = Disable
There is no default.
This Þeld enables or disables all Receive/Transmit Þlters of this type
deÞned. If no Þlters are deÞned, this question has no effect.
6.
Fill out the SNAP Value Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000ÐFFFF.
There is no default.
These Þelds represent the SNAP values that will match the SNAP value of
all frames to which the Þlter will be applied.
7.
Fill out the SNAP Value Mask Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000ÐFFFF.
The default response is FFFF.
This Þeld represents the mask that is combined with the SAP value to
identify a range of SAP values on which to Þlter. This mask is ANDed
with the SNAP Ethertype Þeld in the frame, and the result is compared
against the conÞgured SNAP Ethertype value. If a match occurs, the frame
is selected for Þltering.
893-745-B
3-127
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = ARE (All Routes Explorer)
S = STE (Spanning Tree Explorer)
B = Both
There is no default.
The frame type Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE
frames, or both.
4.
Fill out the Filter Mode Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: P or D.
P = Permit
D = Deny
There is no default.
This Þeld represents bridging or not bridging the frames.
3-128
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters
5.
Fill out the Filter Status Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: E or D.
E = Enable
D = Disable
There is no default.
This Þeld enables or disables all Receive/Transmit Þlters of this type
deÞned. If no Þlters are deÞned, this question has no effect.
6.
Fill out the Route Designator Value Þelds for both receive and
transmit.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000ÐFFFF.
There is no default.
These Þelds represent the route designator on which to Þlter.
7.
Fill out the Route Designator Mask Þelds for both receive and
transmit.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000ÐFFFF.
The default response is FFFF.
This Þeld represents the mask that is combined with the route designator
value to identify a range of route designators on which to Þlter. This mask
is ANDed with the route designator Þeld in the frame, and the result is
compared against the conÞgured route designator value. If a match occurs,
the frame is selected for Þltering.
893-745-B
3-129
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters.
You may deÞne a maximum of Þve Þlters on either the receive or the
transmit sides of the interface.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = ARE (All Routes Explorer)
S = STE (Spanning Tree Explorer)
B = Both
There is no default.
The frame type Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE
frames, or both.
4.
Fill out the Filter Mode Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: P or D.
P = Permit
D = Deny
There is no default.
This Þeld represents bridging or not bridging the frames.
3-130
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters
5.
Fill out the Filter Status Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: E or D.
E = Enable
D = Disable
There is no default.
This Þeld enables or disables all Receive/Transmit Þlters of this type
deÞned. If no Þlters are deÞned, this question has no effect.
6.
Fill out the Address Þelds for both source and destination.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000 0000 0000ÐFFFF FFFF FFFF.
This Þeld represents the source addresses on which to Þlter. If a
destination address is deÞned, then a source address must be deÞned. If a
source address Þeld is conÞgured, the corresponding destination address
Þeld must be conÞgured, and vice versa.
7.
Fill out the Mask Þelds for both source and destination.
Response: A hexadecimal value from 0000 0000 0000ÐFFFF FFFF FFFF.
These Þelds represent which bits of the MAC address given above should
be considered signiÞcant when using the Þlter. When a mask of all zeros is
used, then no bits in the MAC address are considered signiÞcant. The
interpretation of this is Òall addresses.Ó The mask is interpreted as follows:
for every bit equal to one in the mask, the same bit in the MAC address is
considered signiÞcant.
893-745-B
3-131
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters.
You may deÞne a maximum of Þve Þlters on either the receive or the
transmit sides of the interface.
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Frame Type Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: A, S, or B.
A = ARE (All Routes Explorer)
S = STE (Spanning Tree Explorer)
B = Both
There is no default.
This Þeld represents applying the Þlter to ARE frames, STE frames, or
both.
3-132
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters
4.
Fill out the Filter Mode Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: P or D.
P = Permit
D = Deny
There is no default.
This Þeld represents bridging or not bridging the frames.
Enter:
D
P
If you do not want to bridge the frames.
If you want frames meeting this criteria to be bridged.
All Receive Þlter values must be unique. If any Receive Þlter Þeld is
answered (Type, Status, Mode, one Value Þeld, or one Mask Þeld), all
other Þelds must also be answered.
All Transmit Þlter values must be unique. If any Transmit Þlter Þeld is
answered (Type, Status, Mode, one Value Þeld, or one Mask Þeld), all
other Þelds also must be answered.
5.
Fill out the Filter Status Þeld for both receive and transmit.
Response: E or D.
E = Enable
D = Disable
There is no default.
This Þeld enables or disables all Receive/Transmit Þlters of this type
deÞned. If no Þlters are deÞned, this question has no effect.
6.
Fill out the Filter Name Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: one to eight alphanumeric characters.
There is no default.
These Þelds represent the name of the frame data and offset Þlter. A
response to this question is required if a frame data and offset Þlter is
conÞgured.
893-745-B
3-133
Customization Planning
7.
Fill out the Value Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: A string of four to eight hexadecimal digits.
There is no default.
These Þelds represent the value on which to Þlter.
8.
Fill out the Offset Into Frame Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: A numeric value from 000Ð200 (decimal).
There is no default.
These Þelds represent a byte offset used in calculating where the frame
data and offset Þlter should be applied in a frame. If the default of 0 is
used, the Þlter is applied to frame data starting at the DSAP.
9.
Fill out the Mask Þelds for both receive and transmit.
Response: A string of four or eight hexadecimal digits.
The default response is X'FFFF FFFF'.
These Þelds are a mask that identiÞes the signiÞcant bits in the string
deÞned for the frame data value parameter. Each bit in the mask
corresponds to an identical bit in the frame data value. For every bit set to
one in the mask, the same bit in the frame data value is treated as
signiÞcant.
3-134
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order Definition
Filling Out Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order DeÞnition.
NOTE: When deÞning the order of the Þlters, the hop count Þlter must always
be Þrst.
The numbers must be in the range of 2 to 6. If a receive order number is
speciÞed for a receive Þlter, then a receive order number must be speciÞed
for all receive Þlters. If a transmit order number is speciÞed for a transmit
Þlter, then a transmit order number must be speciÞed for all transmit
Þlters.
Each Þeld controls when a Þlter type is to be applied to a bridge interface.
Source-route bridge Þlter types are applied in a predeÞned order, and that
order is determined by the setting of each Þeld. Each Þlter type works in
conjunction with all other Þlter types. The Þlter types include:
■
Hop Count
■
Source SAP Filter
■
SNAP Ethertype Filter
■
Route Designator Filter
■
MAC Address Filter
■
Frame Data and Offset Filter
For example, if the Source SAP Þlter is set to 2 under any column, then
receive and transmit Source SAP Þlters are applied second on the speciÞed
bridge interface.
A response to this question is optional.
The order in which Þlter types are applied can be conÞgured either for all
ports on the bridge or for individual interfaces. When you specify the
order of receive and transmit interface Þlters, you override the value
speciÞed for the bridge as a whole. If Þlter ordering is not speciÞed on an
interface, the values applied to the bridge as a whole are applied.
893-745-B
3-135
Customization Planning
2.
Fill out the Interface Þeld.
Response: A numeric value from 1Ð3.
1 = Peer
2 = Token Ring
3 = TP (Frame Relay)
There is no default.
This Þeld represents the interface for which you are deÞning Þlters for
bridging communications.
3.
Fill out the Source SAP Filter New Receive Order and New Transmit
Order Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 2Ð6.
The default response is 2.
A response of 2 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied second, and
6 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied last.
4.
Fill out the SNAP Ethertype Filter New Receive Order and New
Transmit Order Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 2Ð6.
The default response is 3.
A response of 2 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied second, and
6 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied last.
5.
Fill out the Route Designator Filter New Receive Order and New
Transmit Order Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 2Ð6.
The default response is 4.
A response of 2 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied second, and
6 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied last.
3-136
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order Definition
6.
Fill out the MAC Address Filter New Receive Order and New
Transmit Order Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 2Ð6.
The default response is 5.
A response of 2 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied second, and
6 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied last.
7.
Fill out the Frame Data and Offset Filter New Receive Order and New
Transmit Order Þelds.
Response: A numeric value from 2Ð6.
The default response is 6.
A response of 2 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied second, and
6 speciÞes that this Þlter type should be applied last.
893-745-B
3-137
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
Locate and make a copy of Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram. Read
all these steps before Þlling out the worksheet. Throughout these steps, an
example conÞguration is provided. The example is designed to show a variety
of connection possibilities and the resulting TCP/IP conÞguration. This
example conÞguration does not use multihost support.
The example conÞguration consists of the following hosts:
■
A host named VMSYS2
■
A TCP/IP host named TCP HOST
■
3270 display stations accessing IBM and TCP/IP hosts
■
3270 printers accessing the host
■
Use of the MLT function
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Fill out the host Station Set Name and Station Set Number columns.
In the response key on the top of the worksheet, Þll out a name for each
host you want your attached 3270 display stations and printers to be able
to access (see Figure 3-4).
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Station Set
Name
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
4413
Figure 3-4. The 3270 response key
3-138
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
NOTE: When multihost support is used, the 3270 Host station set is used for
all the 3270 hosts that have been conÞgured.
The name may be up to 24 characters long, and up to 28 TCP/IP hosts may
be deÞned as station sets. The station set for hosts has already been
numbered Station Set Number 1. Number each additional host
sequentially (for example, the next host would be Station Set Number 2).
Use the back of the photocopied worksheet for additional TCP/IP hosts.
When naming the hosts, use easily recognized names as they will appear
in the Connection Menu. Figure 3-5 gives an example of how to Þll out
these columns.
2.
Fill out the Station Type column.
Refer to the completed site planning worksheets to determine what kind of
device (display station, printer, or host) is attached to each of the ports.
Use the Station Type abbreviations listed in the response key to Þll out the
Station Type column for each port. The Station Type column is used to
indicate whether a printer or a display station is attached to the port.
Figure 3-5 gives an example of how to Þll out this column on the
worksheet.
893-745-B
3-139
Customization Planning
3270
Attachment
Diagram
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
PortSet
Name
Station Set
Name
Station Set
Number
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Default Destinations
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
Station
Type
3D
3P
3D
4414
Figure 3-5. Filling out the station type column on the 3270 Attachment Diagram
In Figure 3-5, ports 26-00 through 26-16 are all the same Station TypeÑ
3DÑwhich indicates they are 3270 display stations. Ports 26-17 through
26-19 are Station Type 3P, which indicates they are 3270 printers. Ports
26-20 through 26-31 are Station Type 3D, which indicates they are 3270
display stations.
3-140
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
3.
Fill out the Default Destination columns.
The Default Destination columns are used to indicate the initial default
destinations of the display stations and printers attached to the module. In
the case of 3270 display stations (when MLT has been conÞgured), they
list the concurrent default destinations. For printers, you must specify a
host. For display stations, you may or may not specify a host. If you do not
specify a host, write in CM for Connection Menu. CM indicates that the
3270 display will have the Connection Menu displayed after powering on.
If you specify a TCP/IP host as a default destination and the TCP/IP host
station set has a speciÞed IP address, the connection is attempted. If no IP
address is speciÞed, the LT reverts to Telnet local mode.
Fill out Default Destination column 1 with either a host station set number
(listed in the response key) to indicate a speciÞc host session or CM to
indicate the Connection Menu.
Fill out Default Destination columns 2 through 5 for display stations, only
if MLT has been conÞgured. Write in either a host station set number
(from the response key) to indicate a speciÞc host session or CM to
indicate the Connection Menu for each concurrent default destination.
NOTE: If you have 3270 display stations with more than one default
destination, Bay Networks recommends that you put host sessions Þrst,
because of Port Assignment restrictions.
For 3270 display sessions with an attached printer, the default destination for
the printer LT is ignored. Instead, a 3270 host connection is assumed.
Figure 3-6 gives an example of how to Þll out the Default Destination
columns on the 3270 Attachment Diagram.
893-745-B
3-141
Customization Planning
3270
Attachment
Diagram
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
PortSet
Name
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
Station Set
Name
Station Set
Number
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Default Destinations
LT1
LT2
1
CM
LT3
LT4
LT5
Station
Type
3D
1
3P
CM
3D
4415
Figure 3-6. Filling out the default destination columns
In Figure 3-6, display stations at ports 26-00 through 26-16 have been
given the host as their Þrst default destination and the Connection Menu as
their next default destination. The printers on ports 26-17 through 26-19
have been given the host as their default destination. The display stations
on ports 26-20 through 26-31 have been given the Connection Menu as
their Þrst default destination.
3-142
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
4.
Fill out the Station Set Name column.
To Þll out the Station Set Name column, sort the Station Types listed in the
Station Type column into two main types: printers and display stations.
The name may be up to 24 characters long.
a. Sort the printers into groups with the same default destination. Name
each group and put the corresponding name in the Station Set Name
column for each printer in the group.
When using line printer daemon (LPD), the Station Set Name will be
used as the printer queue name. It should match the deÞnition in the
TCP/IP host.
b. Sort the display stations into groups with the same default destinations
and in the same order. Name each group and put the corresponding
name in the Station Set Name column for each display station in the
group.
893-745-B
3-143
Customization Planning
Figure 3-7 gives an example of how to group the 3270 stations into station
sets.
3270
Attachment
Diagram
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
PortSet
Name
Station Set
Name
Station Set
Number
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Default Destinations
LT3
LT4
LT5
Station
Type
LT1
LT2
3270 Displays 1
1
CM
3270 Printers
1
3P
3270 Displays 2
CM
3D
3D
4416
Figure 3-7. Example of 3270 station sets
In Figure 3-7, display stations at ports 26-00 through 26-16 have been
given the host as their Þrst default destination and the Connection Menu as
their next default destination. This group has been named 3270 Displays 1.
The printers attached to ports 26-17 through 26-19 have the 3270 Host as
their default destination. This group has been named 3270 Printers. The
display stations on ports 26-20 through 26-31 have been given only the
Connection Menu. This group has been named 3270 Displays 2. The
display stations have been grouped and assigned to two different station
3-144
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
sets because one group has only one default destination and the other
group has a default destination and the Connection Menu (two host
sessions).
5.
Fill out the Port Set Name column.
The station sets you named can now be assigned to individual port sets.
Assign a port set name to each of the station sets and write the name in the
Port Set Name column for the station set assigned to that port set. The
name may be up to 8 characters long.
Figure 3-8 gives an example of how to sort the station sets and assign them
to port sets.
3270
Attachment
Diagram
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
PortSet
Name
Station Set
Name
Station Set
Number
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Default Destinations
LT1
LT2
CM
LT3
LT4
LT5
Station
Type
3270D1
3270 Displays 1
1
3270P
3270 Printers
1
3P
3270D2
3270 Displays 2
CM
3D
3D
4417
Figure 3-8. Example of 3270 port sets
893-745-B
3-145
Customization Planning
In Figure 3-8, station set 3270 Displays 1 becomes a port set named
3270D1. Station set 3270 Displays 2 becomes a port set named 3270D2;
this station set must be assigned to a different port set because it has only
one default destination (host session). The station set 3270 Printers has
been assigned to port set 3270P.
3-146
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure
Filling Out Worksheet 27ÑAEA and TCP/IP ConÞgure
The following sections describe the questions on the worksheet and the
possible responses. Read these descriptions and write your responses on the
worksheet.
700: ConÞgure the TCP/IP Feature
Response: First Þeld.
0 = Is the only valid response.
The default response is 0.
Response: Second Þeld.
0 = Turns off the TCP/IP feature
1 = Turns on the TCP/IP feature without SNMP
2 = Turns on the TCP/IP feature with SNMP
3= Turns on the TCP/IP feature with SNMP and SNMP extensions
The default response is 0.
Planner: Questions 702 through 713 are not applicable.
893-745-B
3-147
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 28ÑPort Set
The following list describes the different response areas for the worksheet and
provides information on where the responses can be found on the 3270
Attachment Diagram. Fill out the response areas for each unique port set name.
Name
Port Set Name column of the worksheets.
Be sure to list all the port set names you listed on
Worksheet 25A. A maximum of 16 is allowed.
Session Limit
Total number of default destinations (and CMs)
listed for the port sets on the 3270 Attachment
Diagram. Put the number of default destinations for
each port set beside the corresponding port set name
on Worksheet 28ÑPort Set.
If the number of host addresses is fewer than the
session limit when questions 117 and 118 are being
answered, those sessions without host addresses will
not be permitted to access the 3270 (host). However,
access to TCP/IP hosts will be permitted. If the
address defined for questions 117 and 118 exceeds
the session limit number, those addresses will be
unused by the module because no device will have a
session corresponding to those addresses.
NOTE: The 3270 port sets can have one to Þve session limits. If a port set is
deÞned without a session limit, the system defaults the limit to 1.
3-148
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 28ÑPort Set
Port Type
Port Type column of the ASCII Attachment
Diagram.
For 3270 port sets, respond with a 1.
1 = 3270 Port Set
2 = SwitchedÑConnection is made through
modems attached to the public telephone
network.
3 = DirectÑConnection is made through null
modems.
4 = NonswitchedÑConnection is made through
privately owned or leased lines.
893-745-B
Modem Type
This field is not applicable.
Password
This field is not applicable.
3-149
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map
Refer to the 3270 Attachment Diagram and determine which module ports
support each port set. On Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map, indicate these
ports by writing the number of the port set in the corresponding response area
for each module port. (The port sets are numbered on Worksheet 28ÑPort Set.)
Figure 3-9 gives an example of mapping (assigning) the module ports to the
port sets.
In Figure 3-9, port set 1 is named 3270D1, port set 2 is 3270P, and port set 3 is
3270D2. Using the numbers of the port sets, assign the module ports to the
speciÞc port sets.
In the example:
3-150
■
Ports 26-00 through 26-16 have been assigned to port set 1 (3270D1).
■
Ports 26-17 through 26-19 have been assigned to port set 2 (3270P).
■
Ports 26-20 through 26-31 have been assigned to port set 3 (3270D2).
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map
Port Set
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name
3270D1
3270P
3270D2
Session Limit
Port Type
2
1
1
Modem Type Password
1
1
1
Port to Port Set Map
0
3270 Ports
26-00 to 26-07
26-08 to 26-15
26-16 to 26-23
26-24 to 26-31
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
3
3
1
1
2
3
4
1
1
3
3
5
1
1
3
3
6
1
1
3
3
7
1
1
3
3
27-00 to 27-07
27-08 to 27-15
27-16 to 27-23
27-24 to 27-31
AEA Ports
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
21-00 to 21-07
22-00 to 22-07
23-00 to 23-07
4418
Figure 3-9. Example of port-to-port set mapping (assignment)
893-745-B
3-151
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
Each AEA and TCP/IP Station Set Worksheet represents a single station set.
Make copies of this worksheet, one worksheet for each station set. To Þll out
these worksheets, refer to the numbers you assigned each station set on the
3270 Attachment Diagram. The Þrst station sets are the host station sets
(numbered in the response key). Station sets must have only one number
assigned.
Using the numbers assigned to each station set, write the number in the
response area to the left of question 721 on the Station Set Worksheets. Fill out
the Station Set Worksheets in the order in which you numbered them.
Proceed to Table 3-19. This table contains the questions applicable for each
station type. Beginning with station set 1 (the host), answer the questions listed
under 3270 host; the questions can be found immediately following the table.
After you have completed all the AEA and TCP/IP Station Set Worksheets,
continue with ÒFilling Out Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default
DestinationÓ next in this chapter.
Table 3-19 lists the questions that must be answered for each type of display
station, host, and printer. If a 3 appears beneath the station type, answer that
question. For example, answer questions 721, 722, and 723 for a station set
made up of 3270 printers.
3-152
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
Table 3-19. TCP/IP station-type speciÞc questions
3270 stations
Display TCP/IP
station/ stations/
printer
host
Host
Display
station
Printer
721: Station Set Name
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
722: Station Type
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
723: Port Set Name
✓
✓
✓
✓
725: Host Connection Menu
Option
✓
✓
✓
Question
731: Flow Control
732: XON/XOFF
Transmission Resumption
733: Line Speed
734: Line Speed (Host
Upper Limit)
735: Parity
736: Stop Bits
737: Maximum Modem Line
Speed
741: Switched Disconnect
Timeout
✓
742: Inactivity Timeout
743: Prompt for Universal/
Specific Keyboard Map
744: Number of Bits per
Character
745: ASCII Display
Character Set
746: Translate Option
751: Data Stream
Supported by the ASCII or
TCP/IP Host
✓
752: ASCII Host Phone
Number
893-745-B
3-153
Customization Planning
Table 3-19. TCP/IP station-type speciÞc questions (continued)
3270 stations
Question
Host
Display
station
Printer
Display TCP/IP
station/ stations/
printer
host
761: Auto XON/XOFF (DEC
VT100/VT220)
762: Wraparound Option
(DEC VT100/VT220)
✓
763: New Line Option (DEC
VT100/VT220)
✓
764: Margin Bell Option
(DEC VT100/VT220)
✓
765: DEC Host ASCII
Character Set (DEC VT100/
VT220 Data Stream)
✓
771: Automatic Line Feed
for Cursor Control (IBM
3101)
✓
772: Carriage Return/
Carriage Return—Line
Feed Selection
✓
773: Automatic New Line
for Cursor Control (IBM
3101)
✓
774: Scrolling (IBM 3101)
✓
775: Line Turnaround
Character
✓
776: IBM ASCII Host
Character Set
✓
781: Shared Printer Prompt
782: Use of Form Feed
783: Page Length
784: Printer Character Set
✓
785: ASCII Printer Options
786: Page Width
3-154
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
Table 3-19. TCP/IP station-type speciÞc questions (continued)
3270 stations
Question
Host
Display
station
Printer
Display TCP/IP
station/ stations/
printer
host
787: LU 1 SCS
Transparency Translation
790: Default Host IP
Address
✓
✓
791: Non-standard TCP
Port Number
✓
✓
721: Station Set Name
Response: Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (blanks are permitted).
Fill out this response area with the station set name from the Station Set Name
column on the 3270 Attachment Diagram. This name represents a group of
display stations, printers, or hosts with the same attributes. When naming
station sets made up of displays, use a name the display station users can
recognize as representing their display stations.
When using LPD, the Station Set Name is used as the Printer Queue Name. It
should match the deÞnition in the TCP/IP host.
893-745-B
3-155
Customization Planning
722: Station Type
Response:
Station set type
Host
3270
respond with
TCP/IP
respond with
3H
TH
Plotter
Printer
3P
Display Station:
3D
ADDS Viewpoint A1 and A2
ADDS Viewpoint/78
Esprit Executive 10/78
Hailstone 1500
FTTERM Color
(IBM File Transfer/Terminal
Emulator Program)
FTTERM Monochrome
(IBM File Transfer/Terminal
Emulator Program)
Hewlett-Packard 2621B
IBM 3101
IBM 3151, 3161, 3162, 3163
IBM 3151, 3161, 3162, 3163
IBM 3164
IBM 3151, 3161, 3162, or 3163
with 3708 cartridge
IBM 3151 Model 31, 41, 51, 61
(Note 1)
IBM 3162 (27 x 132) (Note 2)
Lear Siegler ADM 11 or ADM 12
Lear Siegler ADM 3A or ADM 5
Lear Siegler ADM 11/78
IBM 3162 Model 870
Cypress, Cedar, and Juniper
terminals
ANSI 3.64 terminal
3-156
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
Station set type
3270
respond with
TCP/IP
respond with
TeleVideo 912
TeleVideo 970
DEC VT100
DEC VT241
DEC VT52
DEC VT220
DEC VT100 (43 x 80)
Tektronix 4205
Wyse 50/60
Minitel 1B
User-Defined Terminal Table 1
User-Defined Terminal Table 2
User-Defined Terminal Table 3
User-Defined Terminal Table 4
User-Defined Terminal Table 5
User-Defined Terminal Table 6
NOTE: These terminal types support 24 x 80 and 24 x 132 screen size.
Fill out this response area with the station type listed for this station set in the
Station Type column on the 3270 Attachment Diagram.
723: Port Set Name
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters (blanks permitted).
Fill out this response area with the port set name listed for this station set on the
3270 Attachment Diagram, except when the response to question 722 is for
3270 host (or 3H).
This name represents the port set to which this station set has been assigned.
893-745-B
3-157
Customization Planning
725: Host Connection Menu Option
Response:
0 = The display station users in this station set are not allowed to select
alternative host connections from the Host Connection Menu. They
can access only the connection defined in their Default Destination.
1 = The display station users in this station set are allowed to select
alternative host connections from the Host Connection Menu.
The default response is 1.
Planner: Questions 731 through 746 are not applicable.
751: Data Stream Supported by the TCP/IP Host
Response:
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
Host uses VT100 data stream.
Host uses 3101 data stream.
Host uses Data General D210 data stream (U.S.A. English only).
Host uses a VT220 data stream, 7-bit control.
Host uses a VT220 data stream 8-bit control.
Host uses a TN3270 data stream.
There is no default response for this question. This entry is required for TCP/IP
hosts.
NOTE: For TCP/IP hosts, 132-column is not supported.
A response of 6 causes the controller to perform 3270 data-stream processing
for connections to the host. A response of 6 is valid only when the station set
deÞnes a TCP/IP host (question 722 = TH).
Planner: Questions 752 and 761 are not applicable.
3-158
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
762: Wraparound Option (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream)
Planner: Questions 762 through 765 apply to TCP/IP host stations that use a
DEC VT100/VT220 data stream. They deÞne the VT100/VT220 setup options
the host expects the VT100/VT220 to use.
Refer to DEC VT100/VT220 setup information and to the supporting
documentation for currently operating local VT100/VT220 display stations.
The DEC VT100/VT220 host expects these options to have been set up on
the terminals. You may also want to refer to the IBM 3174 Terminal UserÕs
Reference for Expanded Functions manual.
Response:
0 = Wraparound option disabled
1 = Wraparound option enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether the wraparound option is operational. If you leave
this question set to its default (1), a new line will be generated when a character
is typed after the cursor has reached the right margin.
763: New Line Option (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream)
Response:
0 = New line option disabled
1 = New line option enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether carriage return alone or both carriage return and
line feed will occur.
If the new line option is enabled, pressing the Return key will result in a
carriage return and line feed. The receipt of a line feed will also result in a
carriage return and line feed.
For TCP/IP, the correct response is related to the type of TCP/IP application
used. If your response is incorrect, the placement of characters on the screen
may be incorrect. For connections to RISC System/6000 devices, the response
should be 0.
893-745-B
3-159
Customization Planning
764: Margin Bell (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream)
Response:
0 = Margin bell disabled
1 = Margin bell enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether the margin bell is operational. If you leave this
question set to its default (1), an audible alarm will be generated when the
cursor reaches the 72nd position.
765: DEC Host ASCII Character Set (DEC VT100/VT220 Data Stream)
Response:
0 = DEC NRC
1 = DEC MCS
The default response is 0.
This Þeld identiÞes the character set used by the TCP/IP host using the DEC
VT100 or DEC VT220 data stream.
771: Automatic Line Feed for Cursor Control (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
Planner: Questions 771 through 776 apply to TCP/IP host stations that use
the IBM 3101 data stream. They deÞne the 3101 setup option that the host
expects the 3101s to use.
Refer to the setup information for the currently functioning 3101 terminal and
to IBM 3101 Display Terminal Description for information to answer the
following questions.
Response:
0 = Automatic line feed disabled
1 = Automatic line feed enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether the automatic line feed is operational. If you leave
this question set to its default (1), the receipt of a carriage return will result in a
carriage return and line feed.
3-160
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
772: Carriage Return/Carriage ReturnÑLine Feed Selection (IBM 3101 Data
Stream)
Response:
0 = Carriage Return
1 = Carriage Return and Line Feed
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether carriage return alone, or both carriage return and
line feed, will occur.
773: Automatic New Line for Cursor Control (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
Response:
0 = Automatic new line disabled
1 = Automatic new line enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether the cursor will automatically move to the Þrst
character position on the next line after it reaches the 80th position.
774: Scrolling (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
Response:
0 = Scrolling disabled
1 = Scrolling enabled
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes whether scrolling will be supported for the display stations.
775: Line Turnaround Character (IBM 3101 Data Stream)
Response:
0=
1=
2=
3=
EOT (end of transmission)
CR (carriage return)
XOFF (transmitter off)
ETX (end of text)
The default response is 1.
This Þeld identiÞes the line turnaround character.
893-745-B
3-161
Customization Planning
776: IBM ASCII Host Character Set
Response:
1 = ISO - 8859/1.2
2 = IBM 3101 CS1
3 = IBM 316x CS1 and CS2
The default response is 1.
Planner: Questions 781 through 787 are not applicable.
790: Default IP Address
Response: Four Þelds of response, each containing a decimal number between
000 and 255.
For TCP/IP Host Stations (question 722 = TH): This question provides a
default address. The Model 3174 module attempts to connect to this IP address
as a default destination or when this station set is selected from the Connection
Menu.
For Printer Station Sets (question 722 = 3P): This question is optional. If this
printer station set is used for LPD and you want to reserve the printers for
output from a single TCP/IP host, enter that hostÕs IP address here. If you want
to restrict access to hosts on a particular subnet, enter that subnet address here.
791: Non-standard TCP Port Number
Response: Five digits
When question 722 = TH: When using automatic host connection (question
790 not equal to 0), this question allows you to select a destination TCP port
number other than the standard value of 23.
When question 722 = 3P: A TP must be entered in the default destination for
this station set for this question to have meaning. If this question is answered
with 00000, the printer will be used for LPD only. Any other answer will cause
this printer to also accept socket prints.
A printer that is used for socket printing will listen on a port that is determined
by adding this questionÕs value to the physical port number on the device. For
example, if you had a printer attached to Hardware group 26, port 7, and the
answer to this question for its associated station set was 01000, then the Model
3174 module would listen on port 1007 for data destined for this printer.
3-162
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
Filling Out Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
The LT1 at the top of this worksheet corresponds to the Default Destination 1
column on the 3270 Attachment Diagram. The default destinations for each
station set have already been speciÞed in the Default Destination column on the
3270 Attachment Diagram.
See Figure 3-10 for an example of how to complete the AEA and TCP/IP
worksheet.
3270
Attachment
Diagram
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
Station Set
Number
Station Set
Name
PortSet
Name
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Default Destinations
Station Set
Name
3270D1
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
LT1
LT2
1
CM
3270 Displays 1
LT3
LT4
LT5
Station
Type
3D
AEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
Station
Set
Station Set
Name
Session
Limit
LT1
LT2
Session
LT3 LT4
LT5
1
2
1
3
4
4419
Figure 3-10. Example of the AEA and TCP/IP Default Destination worksheet
893-745-B
3-163
Customization Planning
In Figure 3-10, the display stations in Station Set Number 2 have a 1 in the
Default Destination 1 column and CM in the Default Destination 2 column on
the 3270 Attachment Diagram. On the AEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
Worksheet, beside Station Set 2, a 1 is written in the LT1 column and nothing is
listed in the LT2 column; a blank represents CM.
To allow a 3270 printer to have one or more sessions with a 3270, enter the
station set number for the IBM host in the LT column corresponding to the host
and address that you want to use. If you have customized a station set for LPD
or socket printing, specify TP in one of the LT columns that will not be used by
the IBM host.
For example, the station set Ò3174TRQÓ is assigned to a port set that is mapped
to port 7, and the Port Assignment and TCP/IP default destination panels are set
up as shown in Figure 3-11.
3-164
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
__________ 117: Port Assignment __________
Port
26-00
26-02
26-04
26-06
26-08
26-10
26-12
26-14
26-16
26-18
26-20
26-22
26-24
26-26
26-28
26-30
Host addresses
IS 1
2
3
5 002 010 011
5 004 018 019
5 006 026 027
5 008 034 035
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
0 ___ ___ ___
4
012
020
028
036
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
5
013
021
029
037
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Port
26-01
26-03
26-05
26-07
26-09
26-11
26-13
26-15
26-17
26-19
26-21
26-23
26-25
26-27
26-29
26-31
IS
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Host addresses
1
2
3
003 014 015
005 022 023
007 030 031
009 038 039
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
4
016
024
032
040
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
5
017
025
033
041
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ TCP/IP Default Destination ___
Station
Set
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Station Set
Name
3270 HOST
3174PRTQ
Session
Limit
LT1
LT2
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
__
1_
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
TP
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Session
LT3 LT4
__
1_
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
LT5
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
5730
Figure 3-11. Example of the TCP/IP Default Destination worksheet
Then the printer attached to port 7 will be accessible from host addresses 09
and 39. It will appear to be powered off on addresses 38, 40, and 41. The printer
will also be enabled for LPD or socket printing.
893-745-B
3-165
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options
If you customize both a LAN IP address and a frame-relay IP address, the
addresses must be in different subnets. The Model 3174 module can be
customized to route IP trafÞc between the LAN and frame-relay interfaces.
052: LAN IP Address
Response: Four Þelds of response, each containing a decimal number between
000 and 255.
This question determines the IP address assigned to your module. The IP
address is the address of the module in the TCP/IP network. Obtain the address
from the TCP/IP network administrator.
If you do not want to use IP on your module, use 000.000.000.000.
054: LAN Subnet Mask
Response: Four Þelds of response, each containing a decimal number between
000 and 255.
This question determines the subnet mask that identiÞes the TCP/IP subnet or
network that contains the module. The subnet mask, when converted to
hexadecimal, speciÞes a 1 for each bit of the address that is part of the network
or subnet identiÞer. The module builds the subnet mask from the network
identiÞer in the IP address.
If you want to indicate that the module is not on a subnet, use 000.000.000.000.
057: IP Routing
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
This question enables IP routing. Enter Y if you will be using IP on both the
LAN and the WAN interface, and you want the Model 3174 module to route IP
trafÞc between them.
Enter:
Y
N
3-166
If you want IP routing.
If you do not want IP routing.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options
058: Maximum Telnet Connections
Response: Decimal number between 000 and 250.
There is no default.
This question determines the number of concurrent TCP/IP connections, or
sessions, you want available to users. Each connection requires 7 KB of
additional storage.
059: Maximum Printer Connections
Response: A decimal number from 00Ð99.
The default response value is 0.
Enter the number of connections you want to have available for printer jobs. It
is recommended that you include one connection for each printer that you have
customized for Line Printer Daemon (LPD) service. You may want to deÞne
additional connections, if you expect to receive LPD query requests from the
TCP/IP hosts that are using the printer. If a query is received while all
connections are in use for printing jobs, the query is queued until a connection
becomes available. Each connection requires additional storage. Also include
one additional connection for socket printing. If a printer will receive both LPD
and socket prints, then two connections should be included.
060: TCP/IP Buffer Space
Response: Decimal number between 0000 and 1024.
This question determines the amount of additional storage you want for data
buffers. When you conÞgure for TCP/IP, storage is assigned for 40 data buffers.
Each data buffer has approximately 100 bytes available for data.
Enter the amount of additional storage you want to allocate for TCP/IP data
buffers. Your response speciÞes the number of 1024-byte increments. Use
leading 0s where appropriate (for example, use 0050 for 50).
NOTE: When using the IP Routing function, you may need additional TCP/IP
buffer space.
893-745-B
3-167
Customization Planning
062: Routing Field Support
Response:
Y = Bridge communication enabled
N = Bridge communication disabled
The default response is Y.
This question determines if bridge access is allowed. Specifying Y indicates
that TCP/IP frames will use token-ring source route bridging (SRB).
064: All Routes Broadcast
Response:
Y = All routes broadcast
N = Single route broadcast
The default response is Y.
If question 064 is answered with a Y, the routing Þeld speciÞes an all routes
broadcast on the token-ring frame. If question 064 is answered with an N, the
routing Þeld speciÞes a single route broadcast.
This question is applicable only if question 062 = Y. This response is ignored if
question 062 = N.
066: Frame-Relay IP Address
Response: Four Þelds of response, each containing a decimal number between
000 and 255.
This question determines the IP address assigned to your moduleÕs frame-relay
interface. Obtain this address from the TCP/IP network administrator.
If you do not want to use IP on your frame-relay interface, use
000.000.000.000.
3-168
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options
068: Frame-Relay Subnet Mask
Response: Four Þelds of response, each containing a decimal number between
000 and 255.
This question determines the subnet mask that applies to the moduleÕs
frame-relay interface. The frame-relay subnet mask, when converted to
hexadecimal, speciÞes a 1 for each bit of the address that is part of the network
or subnet identiÞer. The module builds the subnet mask from the network
identiÞer in the IP address.
If you want to indicate that the module is not on a subnet, use 000.000.000.000.
893-745-B
3-169
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information
Using worksheet 31B, deÞne the routes and routers that you want the module to
use.
DeÞne the following routes or routers so that information from the module is
routed to a:
■
■
■
■
SpeciÞc network.
SpeciÞc subnet.
SpeciÞc host IP address.
Default router.
For a speciÞc network, subnet, or host IP address, follow these steps:
1.
Write the destination IP address of the speciÞc network, subnet, or
TCP/IP host. If you deÞne a route to a speciÞc subnet, it must be a
part of the same network as the module. There is no need to deÞne a
route to the network or subnet of the module.
2.
Specify the type of destination route.
Response:
N = Route to a specific network
S = Route to a specific subnet
H = Route to a specific host IP address
3.
Write the IP address of the router that will receive the destinationÕs
trafÞc. The Router IP Address must have the same network and
subnet values as the moduleÕs interfaces (LAN or WAN).
NOTE: When deÞning a speciÞc network, subnet, or host IP address, all Þelds
in a row must be completed.
For a default router, write the Router IP Address and specify D as the route
type. The Destination IP address must be blank. The default router is used for
all other destinations that do not have a deÞned route and are not on the
moduleÕs network or subnet. Only one default router can be deÞned. The IP
address of the router must have the same network and subnet values as one of
the moduleÕs interfaces.
3-170
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services
Filling Out Worksheet 31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services
Using worksheet 31C, deÞne the domain and name services for the module.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Write the TCP/IP name assigned to the module.
Response: Up to 63 characters using alphanumeric characters and a
hyphen (-). Embedded blanks are not allowed. This Þeld is required.
2.
Write the name of the moduleÕs domain.
Response: Up to 255 characters using alphanumeric characters and a
hyphen (-). Use blanks to separate the parts of the domain name. This Þeld
is required if any name server IP addresses are deÞned.
3.
893-745-B
Write the IP addresses of the name servers that the module will use to
resolve names to IP addresses, beginning with the primary name
server.
3-171
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 31DÑTCP/IP 3174 (Model 3174 Module)
DeÞned Nicknames
Using worksheet 31D, deÞne the nicknames you want associated with a
speciÞc IP address. If you are not using name servers, deÞning nicknames will
let the user make connections using an easily remembered nickname instead of
an IP address. Up to 16 nicknames can be deÞned.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Write the nickname of each IP address.
Response: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Embedded blanks are not
allowed.
2.
3-172
Write the IP address associated with the nickname.
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 31EÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements
Filling Out Worksheet 31EÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements
Using Worksheet 31E, deÞne the community names and IP addresses you want
associated with SNMP TRAP and SNMP GET. If no GET Community name is
provided, the PUBLIC Community name is used. If no TRAP Community
name and IP address are provided, no SNMP TRAPs are generated (no default
is assigned). If a TRAP Community name is assigned, an IP address for that
name must be provided and vice versa.
Up to two TRAP Community names can be assigned.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Fill in the TRAP Community name and IP address for each TRAP.
Response: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters, mixed case, and space or
underscore or period. Embedded blanks are allowed.
2.
Write the IP address associated with the TRAP Community name.
You can Þll in one or two names and addresses.
Only one GET Community name can be assigned.
■
Fill in the GET Community name.
Response: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters, mixed case, and space or
underscore or period. Embedded blanks are allowed.
893-745-B
3-173
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 38ÑDevice DeÞnition
Locate Worksheet 38ÑDevice DeÞnition. Using the following information,
write your responses to the questions on the worksheet.
800: Printer Authorization Matrix
Response:
00 = Do not define the PAM.
10 = Define the PAM.
The default response is 00.
NOTE:
¥ If you use the default, previously deÞned PAM data is not included when the
module is IMLed and the local copy function will be unavailable.
¥ If question 800 = 10, the end user will specify either a value (1Ð55) that
represents the HG 26 port number or a value (70Ð85) that represents the
printer class number.
801: Logical Terminal Assignment
Response:
0 = LTA will not be defined.
1 = Define the LTA for port 26-00; copy to the remaining ports.
2 = Define the LTA for individual ports.
The default response is 0.
802: Prompts for Extended Vital Product Data
Response:
0 = Disable Extended VPD.
1 = Enable Extended VPD.
The default response is 0.
803: Integrated Services Digital Network DeÞnition
This question is not applicable.
3-174
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM)
Filling Out Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM)
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM). Make
copies of this worksheet (one for every Þve printer assignments).
2.
Decide to which ports you are attaching the printers and displays.
3.
Enter your responses in these Þelds:
Ð Entry: Sequentially number the PAM Entries on the top half of the
worksheet. Transfer the same numbers to the entries on the bottom
half.
Ð Printer Port: Write the four-digit number of the port to which the
printer is attached (for example, 26-18 or 21-02). You cannot assign a
printer to port 26-00.
Ð Mode: Write the number of the mode in which the printer will operate.
Ð Class: Write an ÒXÓ under the number that identiÞes the classes
deÞned for the printer. If no class is deÞned, leave this blank.
Ð Display Port: Write an ÒXÓ under the ports of the displays authorized
to use this particular printer.
4.
893-745-B
Finish entering the information for those printers that you want to
authorize for local copy.
3-175
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment (LTA)
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate and make a copy of Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal
Assignment (LTA).
2.
Decide which ports will receive LTAs. Ports that are not deÞned will
receive default LTAs when the devices attached to them are turned on.
If you speciÞed that 801 = 1, then you need to deÞne the LTAs only to port
26-00; the control microcode will make the same assignments for the
remaining module ports.
3.
For each port that you want to make LT assignments to, write in the
identiÞers of the hosts that you want to have sessions with under the
LT1ÐLT5 columns.
4.
The order in which you assign these identiÞers determines the session
sequence of the attached terminal. For example, a host assigned to
LT1 will be the Þrst session of the terminal, and a host assigned to LT2
will be the second session. If you want to specify which address for a
host is to be used for the LT, write in the port assignment entry
number 1Ð5 next to the hostÕs identiÞer. (These optional port
assignment entries are assigned automatically during customizing if
you do not specify them here.)
When you assign host sessions to a port, do not skip LT entries. For
example, although making assignments to LT1, LT2, LT3, and LT4 is
valid, making assignments to LT1, LT3, and LT4 is not. Do not exceed the
port limitations of your module.
3-176
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (VPD)
Filling Out Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (VPD)
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (VDP). Make a
copy of this worksheet.
2.
Enter up to 8 labels. Each label is limited to 15 alphanumeric
characters.
NOTE: When the Extended Vital Product Data panel is Þrst displayed,
underscores appear in the label Þelds. If you leave any underscores in the
label, blanks will be displayed in place of the underscores when the label is
used to prompt a terminal user for Extended VPD.
893-745-B
3-177
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network
Locate Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network. Make a copy of this worksheet.
Using the following information, write your responses to the questions on the
worksheet.
Planner: As you step through token-ring gateway planning, if multihost
gateway is conÞgured, remember that the responses to questions 900, 905, 908,
and 911 must be the same for all hosts with the exception of the SAP.
The SAP Þeld is deÞned in question 900 and must be unique for each host.
900: LAN Address and SAP
Response: 12-character hexadecimal address and 2-character SAP.
Copy the address portion of this question from question 080 for token-ring
networks. This Þeld is automatically Þlled in during customization.
The default value for the SAP is 04; this must be replaced with your own value.
NOTE: The response for this question cannot be all 0s.
If 650 = Y (3174-Peer Support) and 651 = Y (Bridge Support), then the
3174-Peer Port Address Range deÞned under question 660 will be 4000 XXXX
XX00 to 4000 XXXX XX31 (where XXXX XX is the user-assigned portion of
the address). In such a case, question 900 cannot be set equal to any of the
values in this range or 4000 XXXX XX FF.
Ask your network planner for this address.
905: Token-Ring Error Alerts
Response:
0 = Critical Token-Ring Alerts
1 = Critical and Non-Critical Token-Ring Alerts
2 = Neither Critical nor Non-Critical Token-Ring Alerts reported
The default response is 1.
3-178
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network
For the ring that this module is on, the ring error monitor (REM) performs
integration and analysis of the nonrandom or error conditions on a real-time
basis. The REM then derives information indicating the fault domain (the two
consecutive adapters and the media between them) most likely to be causing
the failure, and it conditionally provides this information to the host
communication and systems management when error thresholds have been
exceeded.
Responding with a 0 would report the following errors:
■
■
■
Beaconing lasting more than one minute
Beaconing during adapter open
Auto-removal of adapter
Responding with a 1 would report the following errors:
■
■
■
Temporary beaconing
REM-detected status codes
Beaconing lasting less than one minute
Responding with a 2 would not report any errors. This response may be useful
to prevent duplicate alerts from being generated if more than one module is
connected to the same host and the same token ring.
908: LAN Link Subsystem Name
Response: Up to eight alphanumeric characters.
The default response is IBMLAN, which is automatically Þlled in during
customization.
The LAN link subsystem name identiÞes which device an alert is from when an
alert is sent to the host.
893-745-B
3-179
Customization Planning
912: Group Poll Address
Planner: Group polling is used only for SDLC attachments. Do not answer this
question if your host attachment is X.25 or frame relay.
Response: Two-character hexadecimal group poll address that is not in the
range speciÞed for questions 104 and 105, but not equal to XÕFFÕ.
The default response is 00 (no group polling).
Any address speciÞed must be coordinated with the host system programmer.
Group polling results in faster response times for end users by decreasing the
number of SDLC polls on the network.
Restrictions
As you plan for your group poll address, consider the following points:
■
At least one of these software products must be installed at the host:
Ð NCP Version 4 Release 3.1
Ð NCP Version 5 Release 2.1
Ð SSP Version 3 Release 4.1
Each of the above may require Small Programming Enhancements
(SPEs). Contact an IBM representative for the SPEs required.
■
SDLC-attached modules without the Gateway feature cannot use group
polling.
920: ISDN Link Subsystem Name
This question is not applicable.
925: Number of LAN DSPUs for Frame Relay
Response: A value in the range of 001Ð250 for primary and secondary hosts.
There is no default response. This question determines the number of
token-ring attached DSPUs that communicate to frame-relay hosts. Use leading
0s where appropriate (for example, use 020 for 20).
NOTE: This question is applicable to only frame-relay host attachments.
3-180
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment
Filling Out Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment. Depending on the
number of DSPUs, you may need to make from one to eight copies of
this worksheet.
2.
Copy the response from question 900 (gateway address) in the Þrst
address entry. During customization, the Þrst address entry is
automatically Þlled in with your response to question 900.
In the remaining address columns, Þll out from the left to right (to be
consistent with the cursor movement on the customizerÕs screen) the
12-character hexadecimal address of each attaching device.
3.
Fill out the SAP columns or circle the default response for each
attaching device.
Response: Two hexadecimal characters.
This must be a multiple of 4 in the range of hex 04 to hex EC.
The default is 04.
4.
Fill out the T columns or circle the default for each device.
Response:
0 = Workstation
1 = Module
2 = 8-KB RU devices
The default is 0.
893-745-B
3-181
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission DeÞnition
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission DeÞnition. Depending on
the number of DSPUs, you may need to make from one to eight copies
of this worksheet.
2.
Duplicate the address entries from the LAN Address Assignment
Worksheet.
3.
Duplicate the SAP responses from the LAN Address Assignment
Worksheet.
4.
Fill out the F columns for each attaching device.
Response:
0 = 265 bytes
1 = 521 bytes
2 = 1033 bytes
3 = 2042 bytes
4 = 4105 bytes
5.
In the W columns for each attaching device, enter the number of
transmits before waiting to receive an acknowledgment.
Response: One numeric character. A valid response ranges from 1 to a
maximum of 7.
Consult your network planner for this information.
3-182
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements
Filling Out Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements
Use Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements to plan for storage requirements.
You will need knowledge of the features and functions that will be included in
your conÞguration, including any RPQs, and the amount of storage installed in
your module. Base storage is the minimum amount of storage that can be
shipped in the module; maximum storage is the largest amount of storage that
can be reached using combinations of storage expansion features. The total
storage in the Model 3174 module is 6 MB (6144 KB).
Plan for module storage if your conÞguration includes the following:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
MLTs (Displays and Printers)
Central Site Change Management
Local Format Storage
Calculator Support
Copy Session-to-Session Support
Local Copy Print Queue Support
Multihost Support
APPN
Token-Ring Gateway
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
TCP/IP
Frame-Relay Communications
Personal System/55 (PS/55) Multistation-Model 3174 printer sharing
RPQs with additional storage requirements (refer to your RPQ
documentation to determine if additional storage is needed.)
If sufÞcient storage is not installed in the module to support the features and
functions for your planned conÞguration, then the support for the conÞguration
you planned is deconÞgured (function does not operate) once the module has
received an IML.
893-745-B
3-183
Customization Planning
A minimal conÞguration will be in effect to allow for the conÞgured SNA host
link, CSCM, alerts, and online test capability for RAS. In a minimal system,
the following items are deconÞgured if they are customized:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
MLT
Multihost Support
Token-Ring Gateway Support
Copy Session-to-Session Support
Local Copy Print Queue Support
Local Format Storage
3174-Peer Communication and Bridges
APPN (refer to note)
TCP/IP
Frame-Relay Communications (unless a host link is conÞgured)
Personal System/55 (PS/55) Multistation-Model 3174 printer sharing
NOTE: The requested APPN support is reduced to the point where only the 1A
Host link is serviced.
If you have not planned for microcode customization, you may want to do so
before planning your moduleÕs storage. While planning microcode
customization, identify the features and functions required for your
conÞguration.
Storage Planning Procedure
Planner: Use the following steps to determine how much storage is required
for your moduleÕs conÞguration
1.
Locate and make a copy of Worksheet 49.
2.
Determine the features, functions, and RPQs that your conÞguration
supports. A base conÞguration requires at least 2050 KB.
a. Refer to Ò179: Local Format StorageÓ earlier in this chapter for
information about local format storage.
b. If you are planning for 3174 gateway, refer to ÒStorage Requirements
for DSPUsÓ in the next section.
3-184
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements
c. For RPQs, write in the amount of storage required. Refer to the
documentation supplied with the RPQs.
d. If you are planning for APPN, Peer Communication, TCP/IP, frame
relay-communication, or PS/55-Model 3174 printer sharing, refer to
Worksheet 49 for storage amounts required.
3.
In the Totals column, write in the storage requirements for each
feature and function that is supported in your conÞguration.
4.
After entering all the storage requirements for your conÞguration in
the Totals column, add these Þgures and write the result next to Total
Storage Required at the bottom of the worksheet. (Ensure that you
have added in the 2050 KB required for Base.)
5.
Enter the result on the worksheet next to Storage Required in MB.
6.
Ensure that your module contains sufÞcient storage by comparing the
storage requirements for the functions you want conÞgured with the
physical amount of storage installed in the module, which is 6MB.
Storage Requirements for DSPUs
To determine the additional storage required for DSPUs for a gateway module,
the following steps should be taken:
1.
Determine if the selected number of DSPUs is supported by the ring
speed.
Ð 4 Mb/s ring speed supports up to 140 token-ring DSPUs.
Ð 16/4 Mb/s ring speed supports up to 250 token-ring DSPUs.
2.
893-745-B
Determine whether your conÞguration will include DSPUs on both
primary and secondary links, on the primary link only, or on the
secondary links only.
3-185
Customization Planning
3.
Find the line in Table 3-20 that contains the lowest range that includes
the number of DSPUs you have.
For example, suppose you plan for DSPUs on primary and secondary links.
Find the line in the table that encompasses the number of secondary link
DSPUs while still accommodating the number of primary link DSPUs. So, if
you were planning for 10 DSPUs on the primary link and 55 on the secondary
link, you would need 1016 KB of storage. Ten primary link DSPUs Þt into the
Þrst range of 1Ð40 under Primary, but 55 DSPUs do not Þt in the Þrst
Secondary range of 1Ð50. By going to the next line, you can meet both DSPU
requirements and determine that you need 1016 KB of storage.
Table 3-20. Storage requirements for DSPU combinations
(4-KB RU gateway support)
DPSU (KB)
SDLC Primary only
1–72
512
73–140
1016
141–250
1528
Frame Relay
3-186
Storage required
Storage required
1–28
512
29–72
1016
73–116
1528
117–140
2040
141–200
2552
201–250
3064
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions
Filling Out Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions
Use Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions to plan for end-user
productivity functions.
If the module is conÞgured for multihost support, all questions apply only for
the 1A host.
001: Local Copy Print Queue Buffer Size
Response: A range from 0000Ð1024 K, in multiples of 2 K.
The default response is 0000.
The response to this question indicates the amount of storage to hold buffered
local copy print requests. A response of 0000 will disable the Buffered Local
Copy Print function.
NOTE: Refer to ÒWorksheet 10AÑPresentation Space (MLT)Ó in Appendix I,
ÒConÞguration Worksheets.Ó
002: Calculator Function
Response:
0 = No Calculator function
1 = Reverse Polish mode
2 = Algebraic mode
The default response is 0.
The response to this question indicates which mode of the Calculator function
will be used. A response of 0 will disable the Calculator function.
Reverse Polish mode allows you to enter two numbers, delimited by + (plus) or
Ð (minus), followed by an operator. Algebraic mode will allow you to enter a
number, operator, and a number followed by a + (plus) or Ð (minus) or another
operator.
893-745-B
3-187
Customization Planning
003: 5250 Emulation for Field Exit
Response:
0 = No 5250 Emulation
1 = 5250 Emulation with Field Exit
2 = 5250 Emulation without Field Exit
The default response is 0.
The response to this question determines the type of 5250 Emulation for Field
Exit. A response of 0 will disable the 5250 Emulation for Field Exit.
004: LAN T1 Timer
Table 3-21 lists the T1 Timer ranges.
Table 3-21. T1 Timer ranges
T1 Timer range (seconds)
Response
Minimum
Maximum
0
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
5
4
5
6
5 (default response)
1.68
2.24
6
6.96
10.44
7
10.44
13.92
8
13.92
17.40
9
17.40
20.88
The default response is 5.
The response to this question indicates the amount of time the token-ring
adapter waits for an acknowledgment after transmitting a token-ring frame.
3-188
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions
In general, it is recommended that you keep the default response. However, if
the T1 value is not sufÞcient to allow communication between the attached link
stations, you might want to increase the T1 timerÕs waiting period. Choose a
value that is greater than the total delays that a frame might encounter on the
network. An excessively large value for the T1 Timer may result in noticeable
delays because the time between retransmissions will be increased.
005: LAN T1 Retry Count
Response: A range of 01Ð99.
The default response is 07. In general, use the default.
The response to this question indicates the maximum number of
retransmissions of a token-ring frame after the T1 Timer expires.
006: Copy from Session to Session
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is N (no).
The response to this question enables or disables the Copy Session to Session
function.
007: HAP Sharing for Local Copy
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is N (no).
The response to this question enables or disables the HAP Sharing for Local
Copy function.
893-745-B
3-189
Customization Planning
008: CSCF IML Password Required
Response:
Y = Yes
N = No
The default response is Y.
The response to this question indicates whether or not a CSCF IML password is
required.
009: Non-Standard Feature Options
The default response is 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000. Digits are
numbered from left to right. Currently, all digits are reserved.
Filling Out Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description
080: Token-Ring Address
Response: A 12-character hexadecimal address.
There is no default response.
The address can be a locally administered address, a universal address, or all
0s.
A locally administered address is in the following format:
XYYY YYYY YYYY
where X is hexadecimal 4, 5, 6, or 7, and YYY YYYY YYYY is the
user-deÞned portion of the locally administered address.
3-190
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description
A universal address is in the following format:
WWWW WWZZ ZZZZ
where WWWW WW is the ID of the adapter manufacturer (for example,
IBMÕs ID is 1000 5A), and where ZZ ZZZZ is the unique address portion of the
universal address for this adapter.
WARNING: Although the product permits you to enter either type of address,
the suggested choice is a locally administered address. If the universal address
is used and the module is replaced, the module and the gateway will have to be
recustomized with the new address.
The universal address is used if you respond with all 0s.
082: Ring Speed of the Token-Ring Network
Response:
0 = 4 Mbps with normal token release
1 = 16 Mbps with normal token release
2 = 16 Mbps with early token release
The default response is 0.
The response must match the ring speed set by the ring speed selection number
(JP1). Token release is determined from your answer to this question.
893-745-B
3-191
Customization Planning
Overview of Frame Relay
Before you start planning, you need:
■
Worksheet 54ÑFrame Relay Description
■
Worksheet 55ÑFrame Relay Optional DCLI DeÞnitions
■
Your frame-relay network subscription
Frame relay is a multiprotocol server that uses virtual circuits. Frame-relay
networks can be public or private. Data transported over a frame-relay network
is routed on a per-packet basis rather than on a per-call basis (as is the case with
circuit switching) and can multiplex multiple channels over a single physical
circuit.
Virtual Circuits
The preestablished path between one piece of frame-relay terminating
equipment (FRTE) and another FRTE is used only when the FRTEs are
communicating. The frame-relay service provider assigns an identiÞer to each
PVC when the frame-relay service is set up for the service requested. The PVC
identiÞer is called a data link connection identiÞer (DLCI). The Model 3174
module supports up to 254 DLCIs using the integrated communications
adapter.
NOTE: The Model 3174 module does not support frame-relay SVCs.
The DLCI is locally signiÞcant. It is known only between the FRTE and the
frame handler (FH). Therefore, there are two DLCIs associated with any virtual
circuitÑone DLCI between the local FRTE and the network and another DLCI
between the network and the remote FRTE. The FRTEs do not know the DLCI
used at the other FRTEÕs interface.
For SNA, you must deÞne a unique combination of DLCI and SAP for each
frame-relay host on the communications link and every DSPU that will be
communicating through the Model 3174 module with a frame-relay host.
3-192
893-745-B
Overview of Frame Relay
For TCP/IP over frame relay, you must deÞne an IP address for the Model 3174
module. You do not need to deÞne individual DLCIs for TCP/IP because
Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (InARP) is used on the active virtual
circuits to identify which virtual circuits can support IP protocols.
For remote bridging, no DLCIs need to be speciÞed.
Local Management Interface (LMI)
LMI is used to monitor PVC status. When an FRTE connected to a frame-relay
network becomes active, it uses LMI messages to determine which PVCs are
active. The FRTE periodically polls the network to conÞrm whether a PVC is
still active, to Þnd out when a PVC becomes inactive, and to Þnd out when a
new one is activated.
When an LMI Is Not Supported
If your network does not support an LMI or your Model 3174 module is
directly attached to a node that does not support bidirectional LMI (such as an
IBM 6611 Model), you can deÞne DLCIs on Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay
Optional DLCI DeÞnitions. The maximum number of DLCIs that can be
deÞned is 240. Duplicate DLCIs are not allowed.
The PVCs identiÞed by the DLCIs speciÞed on Worksheet 55ÑFrame Relay
Optional DLCI DeÞnitions are considered active when the physical link
becomes active. Also, PVCs that are not deÞned on Worksheet 55ÑFrame
Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions, up to the number speciÞed in question 552:
Maximum Number of DCLIs or 240 (whichever is less), become active when
data is received from them.
You do not have to repeat DLCIs that are already speciÞed in question 090:
Frame-Relay DLCI Number and Service Access Point, DLCIs speciÞed on
Worksheet 56ÑFrame Relay Index Assignment, and any DLCIs that identify
APPN nodes on Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources. For example, if your
network does not support an LMI, you could explicitly specify the DLCIs that
identify TCP/IP PVCs.
893-745-B
3-193
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheets 53ÑFrame Relay and 53SÑSecondary Frame
Relay
090: Frame-Relay DLCI Number and SAP
Response: XXX YY
where XXXX is a four-digit decimal DLCI in the range of 0016Ð1007, and YY
is a two-character hexadecimal SAP, which must be a multiple of 4, ranging
from X'04' to X'EC'.
There is no default response.
This question determines the DLCI number and SAP for this host.
Questions 108 through 220
Refer to ÒFilling Out Worksheets 4Ñ9SÓ earlier in this chapter for a
description of these questions and the possible responses.
250: Frame-Relay LLC Poll/Response Timer
Response: A number of seconds between 01 and 20.
The default response is 03.
This question indicates the time (in seconds) that the module waits for an
acknowledgment after transmitting a frame-relay LLC frame. Use leading 0s
where necessary (for example, use 03 for 3 seconds).
251: Frame-Relay LLC Idle Timer
Response: A number of seconds between 010 and 255.
The default response is 030.
This question indicates the time (in seconds) that the module waits in an
inactive state before the link to the frame-relay LLC partner is considered to
have failed. Use leading 0s where necessary (for example, use 030 for 30
seconds).
252: Frame-Relay LLC Retry Count
Response: A value in the range of 01Ð99.
The default response is 07.
3-194
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheets 53ÑFrame Relay and 53SÑSecondary Frame Relay
This question determines the maximum number of frame-relay LLC frame
retransmissions after the response time expires. Use leading 0s where
necessary (for example, use 07 for 7).
253: Frame-Relay LLC Transmit Window Size
Response: A value in the range of 001Ð127.
The default response is 002.
This question determines the number of transmits allowed before waiting to
receive an acknowledgment on a frame-relay LLC link. Use leading 0s where
necessary (for example, use 002 for 2).
260: Maximum Receive Basic Transmission Unit (BTU) Size
Response:
0 = 256-byte maximum BTU size
1 = 521-byte maximum BTU size
2 = 1033-byte maximum BTU size
3 = 2057-byte maximum BTU size
The default response is 1.
This question determines the maximum BTU size the module can receive on
this frame-relay link.
NOTE: This question is not applicable for the Gateway feature because the
gateway uses the frame size speciÞed for the LAN DSPU (941: LAN
Transmission Assignment).
261: Maximum Send Basic Transmission UNIT (BTU) Size
Response:
0 = 256-byte maximum BTU size
1 = 521-byte maximum BTU size
2 = 1033-byte maximum BTU size
3 = 2057-byte maximum BTU size
The default response is 1.
This question determines the maximum BTU size the module can send on this
frame-relay link.
893-745-B
3-195
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 54ÑFrame Relay Description
300: Enable Frame Relay over Communications Adapter
Response:
0 = Do not enable Frame-Relay Communications feature
1 = Enable Frame-Relay Communications feature
There is no default response.
This question determines whether frame-relay communication will be
supported.
313: NRZ or NRZI Encoding
Response:
0 = Use non-return-to-zero (NRZ) encoding
1 = Use non-return-to-zero inverted (NRZI) encoding
The default response is 0.
This parameter must be compatible with the IBM 3745 host system
communication controller and the modem. Ask the system programmer which
response you should specify.
552: Maximum Number of DLCIs
Response: A decimal number between 001 and 254.
The default response is 050.
This question determines the maximum number of DLCIs that are allowed for
frame-relay connections. This number must include the DLCIs speciÞed in
question 090, the DLCIs speciÞed on Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index
Assignment, and any DLCIs that identify APPN NNs on Worksheet 16Ñ
Network Resources. Do not include the DLCI (0 or 1023) used for the LMI.
NOTE: You can use a number greater than your current subscription address.
3-196
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 54ÑFrame Relay Description
554: Committed Information Rate
Response: A decimal number between 002048 and 256000.
There is no default response.
This question speciÞes the rate, in bits per second, that the frame-relay network
will transfer information over one DLCI under normal conditions. Refer to
your network subscription information to determine your response. Use leading
0s where appropriate (for example, 003050 for 3050).
558: Frame-Relay Congestion Control
Response:
0 = Ignore congestion notiÞcation from frame-relay network
1 = Receive congestion notiÞcation from frame-relay network
The default response is 0.
When question 558 = 1, non-SNA frames queued for transmission are
discarded, and SNA and APPN frames are slowed for a short interval (100
milliseconds or less) when a Backward Explicit Congestion NotiÞcation
(BECN) is received.
560: Discard Eligibility (DE) Bit Support
Response:
0 = DE bit is not turned on in transmitted frames
1 = DE bit is turned on in transmitted frames
The default response is 0.
This question determines whether frames are eligible to be discarded when
network congestion occurs.
562: Local Management Interface (LMI) Type
Response:
1 = None
2 = LMI Rev 1 (DLCI 1023)
3 = ANSI Annex D (DLCI 0)
4 = CCITT (DLCI 0)
The default response is 3.
893-745-B
3-197
Customization Planning
This question determines the LMI type active in the frame-relay network. Refer
to your network subscription information to determine your response.
563: Local Management Interface (LMI) Transmit Polling Interval
Response: A decimal number of seconds between 01 and 29.
The default response is 10.
This question determines the interval of seconds between LMI Status Enquiry
(also called T391 timer value parameter) message transmissions. Refer to your
network subscription information to determine your response. Use leading 0s
where appropriate (for example, 08 for 8 seconds).
566: Additional Receive Buffer Space
Response: A number of storage in KB between 0000 and 1024.
The default response is 0000.
This question allocates additional storage for receiving frames. Respond to this
question with a nonzero response if you have a large amount of frame-relay
fragmentation or an excessive amount of generic alerts being issued for buffer
pool empty conditions. Use leading 0s where appropriate (for example, 0050
for 50).
569: DeÞne DLCIs
Response:
N = No
Y = Yes
The default response is N.
This question allows you to deÞne DLCIs explicitly.
Respond to this question with Y only if question 562 (LMI Type) = 1 and
you want to deÞne DLCIs that have not been speciÞed elsewhere in the
conÞguration. When question 562 = 2, 3, or 5, the module uses the LMI
to determine the DLCIs.
3-198
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 54ÑFrame Relay Description
570: Virtual MAC Address
Response: A 12-character hexadecimal address. The Virtual MAC Address
must be unique.
There is no default response.
A response is required if question 656 = 1 (Multiport Bridging Enabled),
question 652 = Y (LAN Manager Support), and Source Route Bridging over
frame relay is selected.
This question deÞnes the Virtual MAC address, which will be used by LAN
Network Management. This is the locally administered address. The format for
the locally administered address is:
XYYY YYYY YYYY
where X is hexadecimal 4, 5, 6, or 7 and YYY YYYY YYYY is the
user-assigned portion of the locally administered address.
NOTE: All the MAC addresses in the network have to be unique.
893-745-B
3-199
Customization Planning
Filling Out Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions
The Frame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions Worksheet lets you deÞne DLCI
connections if your frame-relay network does not support an LMI.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions.
2.
Write the DLCIs that you want available to the module (up to 240
DLCIs) in the spaces provided.
You do not have to specify any DLCI that is already speciÞed in question
090, speciÞed on Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment, or any
DLCIs that identify APPN NNs on Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources.
The DLCIs must be a decimal value between 0016 and 1007. Use leading
0s where appropriate (for example, use 0016 for 16). Duplicate DLCIs are
not allowed.
3-200
893-745-B
Filling Out Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment
Filling Out Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheet:
1.
Locate Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment. Depending
on the number of DSPUs, you may need to make more than one copy
of this worksheet.
2.
For each DSPU index number on Worksheet 56, assign a DLCI.
Response: A four-character decimal DLCI.
3.
For each DLCI on Worksheet 56, assign a SAP.
Response: A two-character hexadecimal SAP that is a multiple of 4 and is
in the range of X'04' to X'C0'.
NOTE: Depending on your gateway controller, you can assign a different
DLCI for each DSPU or use the same DLCI and a different SAP for each
DSPU (up to 48) to the same gateway controller. The DLCI and SAP
combination must be unique. This allows the session trafÞc for up to 48
DSPUs to be multiplexed over a single DLCI to the gateway controller. For
example, a 3745 with NCP V7R1 or higher as a gateway controller allows you
to use the same DLCI and a different SAP for multiple DSPUs.
4.
For each DSPU index number on Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index
Assignment, transfer that number to the S column on Worksheet 46Ñ
LAN Address Assignment.
Planner: You have completed Worksheet 56. Continue with Worksheet 46Ñ
LAN Address Assignment.
893-745-B
3-201
Customization Planning
Filling Out the Keyboard Worksheets
Use the following steps to plan your modiÞed keyboards. Be sure to review
ÒRestrictionsÓ later in this chapter. The restrictions listed may apply to the
changes you want to make.
The following steps explain how to Þll out the worksheets:
1.
Locate the worksheets you plan to use.
There are Þve Keyboard Layout Worksheets as follows:
■
Converged Non-Katakana
■
Converged Katakana
■
Enhanced (U.S.)
■
Enhanced (World Trade)
■
Enhanced (Katakana)
The keyboard users will need copies of the completed worksheets to set up
their keyboards. Duplicate the worksheets as needed, but be sure to keep
one blank copy of each worksheet for future planning.
2.
At the top of the worksheet, circle the keyboard ID. The keyboard IDs
represent the modiÞed or unmodiÞed keyboards for which the Model
3174 module has been conÞgured.
To determine which IDs are to be supported, check the response to
conÞguration question 137 on your host-related worksheet.
3.
Specify whether this is a New Layout or an Update.
If you are planning changes to a keyboard that already exists in the Modify
Keyboard tables (within the microcode Þles), check the box indicating
ÒUpdate.Ó If you are planning to enter a new keyboard into the Modify
Keyboard tables, check the box indicating ÒNew Layout.Ó
Planner: This step does not apply to Enhanced keyboards. If you are
modifying an Enhanced keyboard, proceed to Step 5.
4.
3-202
Put a check in the ÒKeyboard TypeÓ box that applies to the keyboard
you are modifying: Typewriter, Data Entry, or APL.
893-745-B
Filling Out the Keyboard Worksheets
5.
Put a check in the ÒKeypad TypeÓ box that applies to the keyboard
you are modifying: National Language Numeric, Data Entry, or
Program Function (PF).
6.
Put in the appropriate language number (found in Table 3-22) on the
line beside ÒKeyboard Language,Ó which is located just above the
Keyboard Changes Chart on the worksheet.
WARNING: If you specify a keyboard language that has characters unique to
APL2 and CECP, you need to ensure that a device capable of supporting those
characters will be used. If you use a device that does not support those
characters, they may be misrepresented or displayed as blanks.
7.
Using the information in ÒKeyboard, Shift, and Function GroupsÓ
later in this chapter, Þll in the Keyboard Changes Chart (located at
the bottom of the worksheet) with the modiÞcations you plan to make.
a. Place a 3 in the Keyboard, Shift, and Function group columns. Using
the information in ÒKeyboard, Shift, and Function GroupsÓ as a
reference, determine which number applies for each group.
b. Place a 3 in the column under the appropriate numbers. You must
choose one number from each group.
c. Designate Upper Shift, Lower Shift, Alternate, or All in the From Key
Shift column. The From key is the key you will be moving, copying, or
deleting.
NOTE: In the case where you will be copying a character from the I/O
Interface Code Characters chart, refer to Step 7d.
After you have determined which shift of the character should be
changed, indicate the shift or All (in the case where you want to change
the entire key) in the Shift column for the From key.
893-745-B
3-203
Customization Planning
d. Write in the character or function for the From key. Write in the
appropriate character (for example, A) or function (for example, the
Forward function) in the Character column for the From key.
Planner: This step applies only if you are copying an I/O Interface
Code from the I/O Interface Code tables. If you are not copying an I/O
Interface Code, skip this step.
e. Write in the I/O Interface Code and character. The I/O Interface Code
Characters are characters that are not standard on the keyboard. To
allow the character to be used on the keyboard you are modifying, you
must copy the character from the I/O Interface Code Character tables.
These tables are located within the Modify Keyboard Þles, but must be
indicated to the Modify Keyboards program by a hexadecimal code.
(The hexadecimal codes can be found in the IBM 3174 Character Set
Reference manual.)
After determining which I/O interface code character you want to copy
from the I/O Interface Code Tables, write the hexadecimal code given
for that character, and the actual character you want copied, in the
applicable columns of the Keyboard Changes Chart.
f. Designate Upper Shift, Lower Shift, Alternate, or All in the To Key
Shift column. The To key is the key to which you are copying or
moving the character or function.
The shift indicates which shift position on the To key will receive the
From key character or the I/O interface code character.
NOTE: Be sure to review ÒRestrictionsÓ later in this chapter.
g. Write in the character or function for the To key. In the event that you
want to have characters, functions, or an entire key exchanged or
replaced, you will want to indicate which character, function, or entire
key you want to exchange with the From key. Write in the appropriate
character (for example, A) or function (for example, the Forward
function) in the Character column for the To key.
3-204
893-745-B
Filling Out the Keyboard Worksheets
NOTE: In the event that the To key does not have a character or function on
the shift position to which you plan to move the From key character, use one of
the characters or functions on the To key to identify the To keyÕs location.
8.
On the keyboard worksheet, indicate with an X which keys will be
affected by the Modify Keyboard changes; this will help the person
performing the actual procedure to locate the affected keys quickly.
9.
Give a copy of the completed worksheets to the customizer.
When you have completed Þlling in all the worksheets, give a copy of
each worksheet to the person who will perform the Modify Keyboard
procedure. Information on how to perform the actual procedure can be
found in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
893-745-B
3-205
Customization Planning
Restrictions
The restrictions are grouped into four categories:
■
General
■
Local Functions
■
APL
■
Nomenclature Presentation
General
If you modify a keyboard for the language used on the primary host link, the
display station will not get the modiÞed keyboard when operating in a logical
terminal session if the following conditions are true: (1) the logical terminal
session is on a secondary host and (2) the secondary host is not conÞgured for
the same language as the primary host on the primary link. If the secondary and
primary hosts on the same link are conÞgured for the same language, the
display station will get the modiÞed keyboard.
If you have a keyboard with the Numeric Lock feature and you are planning to
modify any of the following functions, consult the Numeric Lock feature
section of the IBM 3174 Functional Description manual:
3-206
■
Change Screen
■
Attention
■
System Request
■
Test Request
■
Device Cancel
■
Insert
■
Reset
■
Cursor Blink
■
Alternate Cursor
■
Clicker
■
Extended Select
893-745-B
Restrictions
This step is particularly important if you plan to move the function to a key that
will not be used in ALT shift or one that will not provide these functions in both
lower and upper shift modes.
A maximum of four keyboard layouts are identiÞed by this procedure.
The following mandatory key functions must be included on the modiÞed
keyboard layouts:
■
Alternate shift
■
Enter
■
Reset
■
Device cancel
■
Test
■
System request
■
Upshift or downshift
Exceptions
For the Katakana Converged keyboards: The Japanese English upper and lower
shift key functions are mandatory key functions and must be included on the
modiÞed keyboard layout.
For the Greek, Cyrillic, Cyrillic (Russian), Cyrillic (Bulgarian), Cyrillic
(Macedonian/Serbian), and Thai modiÞable keyboards: The Latin shift key
function is a mandatory key function and must be included on the modiÞed
keyboard layout.
A make/break key cannot be copied to a non-make/break key, nor can a
non-make/break key be copied to a make/break key.
893-745-B
3-207
Customization Planning
The make/break keys are:
■
Shift Lock
■
Upshift (two keys)
■
RESET/DEV CNCL
■
ALT (two keys)
■
Enter (on main keyboard only)
■
Downshift (Data Entry keyboard only)
■
CONTROL (3471/72 only)
Do not place any of the following functions anywhere on key 69 while
modifying Converged keyboards for Models 3179, 3180, 3191, and 3192.
(Refer to the keyboard worksheets in Appendix I, ÒConÞguration Worksheets,Ó
for the position of key 69.)
■
Shift Lock
■
Upshift
■
RESET/DEV CNCL
■
ALT
■
Downshift
■
CONTROL
Do not place any of the following functions anywhere on key 64 while
modifying a Converged keyboard for a Model 3180. (Refer to the keyboard
worksheets in Appendix I, ÒConÞguration Worksheets,Ó for the position of
key 64.)
3-208
■
Shift Lock
■
Upshift
■
RESET/DEV CNCL
■
ALT
■
Downshift
893-745-B
Restrictions
For CECP countries, when the Acute, Grave, Circumßex, Diaeresis, Cedilla,
and Degree/Overcircle accents are added to a Typewriter or APL keyboard,
they become nonescaping keys. A nonescaping key is a key that allows a
character to be typed without the imprint position being changed. These keys
are intended to be combined with other characters in a two-keystroke sequence
to create accented characters. If the accent is to be used by itself, the
two-keystroke sequence must be the accent and space.
For languages that have Extended Graphics support (all CECP languages,
except Icelandic), the Caps Lock and Shift Lock functions cannot be modiÞed
in full-key mode. The Caps Lock and Shift Lock functions can be moved
around within the original key in single-shift mode. They cannot be deleted,
copied, or exchanged with another key. All shifts of the modiÞed key must
contain the Caps Lock or Shift Lock function, in any arrangement.
NOTE: Modifying keyboards does not affect the Extended Select or Extended
Graphics keyboard functions.
For languages without Extended Graphics support, Caps Lock and Shift Lock
functions can be moved to another key in full-shift mode and moved around
within a key in single-shift mode. However, all shifts of the modiÞed key must
contain the Caps Lock or Shift Lock function, in any arrangement.
Reset and Device Cancel functions can be moved to another key in full-shift
mode and moved around within a key in single-shift mode. However, all shifts
of the modiÞed key must contain the Reset or Device Cancel function, in any
arrangement.
Fwd and Back (the scroll forward and backward functions) can be moved, but
they are not operative for all modiÞable keyboards.
For languages that have Extended Graphics support (all CECP languages,
except Icelandic), the Up-Shift, Down-Shift, and Alt-Shift keys cannot be
modiÞed.
For languages that do not have Extended Graphics support, the Up-Shift,
Down-Shift, and Alt-Shift keys cannot be modiÞed in a single shift change.
On Typewriter and APL keyboards with the keyboard numeric lock feature, the
keyboard is automatically downshifted when the cursor enters a numeric Þeld;
on Data Entry keyboards, the keyboard is automatically upshifted. You must
keep this in mind when modifying a keyboard with this feature, because the
893-745-B
3-209
Customization Planning
automatic shifting remains in effect regardless of keyboard layout modiÞcation.
For example, when a Typewriter keyboard layout has been modiÞed, if any
numbers are moved from downshift to upshift key locations, the operator must
override the automatic downshift in a numeric lock Þeld (by pressing the Shift
key) before keying in the upshift numbers.
Only characters resident in the I/O interface code page for the language that
was selected can be added to the keyboard. For example, only the characters
from the Cyrillic I/O interface code page can be used to add a character to the
keyboard while you are modifying Cyrillic keyboards.
When modifying a Converged keyboard for a Model 3471, 3472, or 3482,
change it so that only the following functions are listed on key 69 (refer to the
keyboard worksheets in Appendix I, ÒConÞguration Worksheets,Ó for the
position of key 69), or delete all functions from that key:
■
Shift Lock/Caps Lock
■
Upshift
■
RESET/DEV CNCL
■
ALT
■
Downshift (Data entry keyboard)
■
CONTROL
■
Enter
Local Functions
Keyboard local functions are not displayed and are not modiÞable.
Extended Select key functions (including Entry Assist and X.25) cannot be
modiÞed.
Local keys (for example, SETUP, RECORD, and PLAY keys) on modiÞable
keyboards do not send signals to the Model 3174 module. (Refer to the IBM
3174 Terminal UserÕs Reference for Expanded Functions manual to Þnd out if
your terminalÕs keyboard has local keys.) Any key functions that are moved to
these local key locations will not be recognized by the Model 3174 module.
This restriction does not apply to modiÞable keyboards that do not implement
these local keys.
3-210
893-745-B
Restrictions
The procedure will not prevent moving functions to or from the keys associated
with the local key functions. When a modiÞable keyboard is performing a local
function, however, all key functions revert to the positions of the standard
keyboard. For example, assume that the ALT key function was exchanged with
the Enter key. During setup mode, then, the original ALT key (now labeled
Enter) must be pressed when the Alternate function is required.
APL
Not all display stations with modiÞable keyboards support the APL keyboard.
The display station connected to port 26-00 must have an APL read-only
storage (ROS) to modify APL characters. A display station must have an APL2
ROS in order to display APL2 characters correctly.
APL key functions cannot be exchanged with Typewriter key functions.
Characters resident in an I/O interface code page cannot be added to the APL
layer on the Converged APL keyboard.
Nomenclature Presentation
When a key nomenclature of n characters (where n > 3) is moved to a key of
less-than-n characters, the nomenclature is truncated. For example, exchanging
the Print key with the letter Q key causes Pri to be displayed on the new print
key.
The display station connected to port 26-00 must have a primary language
read-only storage (ROS) to display the corresponding primary language
characters. However, these characters are modiÞable whether the primary
language ROS is present or not. (This note applies to Katakana, Greek, Turkish,
Icelandic, ROECE, Yugoslavic, Cyrillic, and Thai.)
For CECP characters to be supported, the Model 3174 module must be
customized for CECP, and displays that support CECP must be used. Refer to
the IBM 3174 Planning Guide for the devices that support CECP.
For any CECP language, characters that are unique to the CECP ROS may not
be displayed correctly unless the display being used has a CECP ROS.
For a list of languages supported on modiÞable keyboards, listed in terms of
enhanced or converged keyboards, see Table 3-22. For additional information
on keyboard restrictions, refer to the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
893-745-B
3-211
Customization Planning
Languages Supported on ModiÞable Keyboards
Table 3-22 lists the languages supported on modiÞable keyboards.
Table 3-22. ModiÞable keyboard languages
Converged
Keyboard
language
3-212
Enhanced
Typewriter
Data
entry
English (U.S.A.)
✓
✓
English (U.S.A.)
ASCII-7
✓
Austrian/German
✓
Belgian
✓
Danish
✓
✓
✓
✓
07
Finnish
✓
✓
✓
✓
09
Italian
✓
✓
✓
✓
15
Japanese Katakana
✓
✓
✓
✓
17
Spanish
✓
✓
✓
19
Spanish-Speaking
✓
✓
✓
✓
21
English (UK)
✓
✓
✓
✓
22
Norwegian
✓
✓
✓
✓
23
Swedish
✓
✓
✓
✓
24
Portuguese
✓
✓
✓
✓
28
Canadian Bilingual
✓
✓
✓
✓
29
French
✓
✓
✓
✓
30
English (U.S.A.)
ASCII-International
✓
English (U.S.A.)
ASCII-8
✓
✓
34 (refer to
notes)
Cyrillic
✓
✓
35
Greek
✓
✓
36
Icelandic
✓
✓
37
ROECE Latin
✓
✓
38
APL Typewriter Response
✓
✓
01
02 (refer to
notes)
✓
✓
✓
✓
03
04
33 (refer to
notes)
✓
893-745-B
Languages Supported on Modifiable Keyboards
Table 3-22. ModiÞable keyboard languages (continued)
Converged
Keyboard
language
Typewriter
Data
entry
Enhanced
APL Typewriter Response
Turkish
✓
✓
39
Yugoslavic
✓
✓
40
Swiss French (New)
✓
✓
✓
41
Swiss German (New)
✓
✓
✓
42
Belgian (New)
✓
✓
✓
43
✓
46
✓
47
Thai
Netherlands
✓
Greek (New)
✓
✓
48
Brazilian (New)
✓
✓
49
Turkish (New)
✓
✓
50
Polish
✓
51
Hungarian
✓
52
Romanian
✓
53
Czech
✓
54
Slovak
✓
55
Cyrillic (Russian)
✓
56
Cyrillic (Macedonian/
Serbian)
✓
57
✓
58
✓
59
✓
60
Croatian/Serbian/
Slovenian
✓
✓
✓
Cyrillic (Bulgarian)
English (New U.K.)
✓
Notes:
893-745-B
•
Does not support Extended Data Stream.
•
Available on BSC, Local SNA, and Local Non-SNA only.
•
Available on SDLC and X.25 only.
•
ROECE represents Regional Office for Eastern and Central Europe.
3-213
Customization Planning
NOTE: The IBM 3174 Character Set Reference manual contains the code
pages for the supported languages. Each of the languages supported by the
Modify Keyboard procedure uses the key function nomenclature of one of the
following languages:
English
Belgian
Croatian/Serbian/Slovenian
Cyrillic
Cyrillic (Bulgarian)
Cyrillic (Macedonian/Serbian)
Cyrillic (Russian)
Czech
Danish
Finnish
Greek
Hungarian
Icelandic
Netherlands
New Belgian
New English (U.K.)
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
ROECE
Romanian
Slovak
Swedish
Thai
Turkish
Yugoslavic
U.K. English
U.S. English
3-214
French
Canadian (Bilingual)
French (AZERTY 105)
New Swiss/French
German
Austrian/German
New Swiss/German
Italian
Italian
Spanish
Spanish
Spanish-speaking
Japanese
Katakana
893-745-B
Languages Supported on Modifiable Keyboards
For example, when a keyboard panel for a Finnish keyboard is displayed, the
key function is displayed in English. Table 3-23 lists the key functions and the
corresponding displays.
Table 3-23. Key function nomenclature
Key function display
893-745-B
Key function
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Attention
Attn
Attn
Abruf
Attn
Atenc
Clear
Clear
EfEcr
Losch
Annul
Borra
System Request
SysRq
Syst
S-Abf
Sist
PtSis
Cursor Select
CrSel
SelCr
AwPos
SelCr
SelCr
Erase Input
ErInp
EfEnt
E-Lo
ImCan
BorEn
Erase to End of Field
ErEOF
EfFZn
LoFld
FCCan
BrFDC
Extend Select
ExSel
2eSel
ErAus
EsSel
ExSel
Print
Print
Impr
Druck
Stamp
Impr
Ident
Ident
Ident
Ident
Ident
Ident
Test
Test
Test
Test
Prova
Prba
Shift Lock
ShLck
VrMaj
UmVer
FMaiu
BlMay
Up Shift
UpSh
Maj
UmObn
Maius
Mayus
Reset
Reset
Rest
Grdst
Ripr
Rest
Device Cancel
DvCnl
AnnOp
Eh-Lo
AnTrs
CancD
Alternate Shift
Alt
FnSel
Alt
Altrn
Altva
Space
Space
Esp
Leer
Spaz
Espac
Enter
Enter
Entr
DatFr
Invio
Intro
Home
CrHom
Posl
GrPos
Posiz
IncCr
Cursor Down
CrDwn
CrBas
UnPos
CrGiu
BajCr
Cursor Up
CrUp
CrHt
ObPos
CrSu
SubCr
Insert
Ins
Inser
Eifug
Inser
Inser
Delete
Del
Suppr
Z-Lo
Canc
Supr
Delete Word
WdDel
SpMot
W-Lo
PCanc
SupP1
Duplicate
Dup
Repro
Dup
Dup
Dup
Field Mark
FldMk
FinZn
FeldM
MC
MCamp
PA1—PA3
PA1—PA3 AP1—AP3 PA1—PA3 AP1—AP3 AP1—AP3
Cursor Blink
CrBnk
ClgCr
BlPos
IntCr
ParCr
3-215
Customization Planning
Table 3-23. Key function nomenclature (continued)
Key function display
3-216
Key function
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Alternate Cursor
CrAlt
TypCr
UPos
CAlt
CrALt
Clicker (On/Off)
Click
Clic
Klick
Segn
Clic
PF1—PF24
P1—P24
P1—P24
P1—P24
F1—F24
F1—F24
Down Shift
DwnSh
Min
UmUnt
Minus
Minus
Window Forward
Fwd
Avant
Vorw
Avant
Avnce
Change Screen
ChgSc
ChgSc
ChgSc
ChgSc
Chgsc
Window Back
Back
Arr
Ruck
Indtr
Retro
Backspace
<- -
<- -
<- -
<- -
<- -
Carrier Return
<-|
<-|
<-|
<-|
<-|
Tab Right
->|
->|
->|
->|
->|
Tab Left
|<-
|<-
|<-
|<-
|<-
Fast Cursor Left
<<- -
<<- -
<<- -
<<- -
<<- -
Fast Cursor Right
- ->>
- ->>
- ->>
- ->>
- ->>
Cursor Left
<-
<-
<-
<-
<-
Cursor Right
->
->
->
->
->
Capslock
CapLk
CapLk
CapLk
CapLk
CapLk
893-745-B
The Keyboard Changes Chart
The Keyboard Changes Chart
An example of a Keyboard Changes Chart can be seen in Figure 3-12. This
chart appears on keyboard worksheets 1 through 5. Use the procedure in
ÒFilling Out the Keyboard WorksheetsÓ earlier in this chapter to Þll out the
keyboard worksheets.
Keyboard Shift Function
0
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
From key
Shift
Char.
I/O interface
Code
Char.
To key
Shift
Char.
Figure 3-12. Example of a keyboard changes chart
The columns in the example are deÞned as follows:
893-745-B
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Numbers indicating the keyboard, shift,
and function groups (see ÒKeyboard,
Shift, and Function GroupsÓ later in this
chapter).
From Key Shift
Designates which shift positions of the
key should be moved, deleted, or copied.
From Key Character
Designates the character or function on
the From key that will be deleted, moved,
copied, or exchanged.
3-217
Customization Planning
I/O Interface Code
A hexadecimal code that represents a
character not normally on the keyboard.
These codes can be found in the I/O
Interface Code Character tables of the
IBM 3174 Character Set Reference
manual.
I/O Interface Code Character
A character that is not normally on the
keyboard, but that can be added through
the use of hexadecimal codes entered in
the Modify Keyboards files of the Model
3174 module.
To Key Shift
Designates which shift positions on the
To key will receive the From key
character or the I/O interface code
character.
To Key Character
Designates the character or function on
the To key that will be exchanged with
the From key character, that will be
replaced by the From key character or I/
O interface code character, or that
indicates the To key position on the
keyboard.
Keyboard, Shift, and Function Groups
The following is a description of the keyboard changes chart:
■
0,1, 2 Ð Keyboard Group
0 = The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data
Entry, Enhanced Typewriter, or the typewriter functions on a
Converged APL keyboard.
1 = The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a
Converged APL keyboard.
2 = The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions
on a Converged APL keyboard.
3-218
893-745-B
The Keyboard Changes Chart
■
3, 4 Ð Shift Group
3 = Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4 = Single-shift change.
■
5, 6, 7, 8 Ð Function Group
5 = Copy from I/O interface code table.
6 = Exchange two functions.
7 = Copy a function to another key.
8 = Delete a key function.
A Sample Keyboard Changes Chart
Use the following example when Þlling in the Keyboard Changes Chart.
Example
In this example, the planner has already speciÞed on the top portion of the
worksheet that the keyboard is Non-Katakana, Typewriter, PF, and a new layout
(see Figure 3-13).
In the following Keyboard Changes Chart, the planner has indicated on the Þrst
row that he wants to do the following:
893-745-B
■
Change a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, or Enhanced
Typewriter keyboard
■
Make a single-shift change
■
Exchange two functions
■
Perform an exchange of the X key (uppershift position) with the A key
(uppershift position)
3-219
Customization Planning
In the second row, the planner has indicated that he wants to do the following:
Keyboard
0
✓
✓
1
2
■
Change a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, or Enhanced
Typewriter keyboard
■
Make a single-shift change
■
Copy a character from the I/O interface code table
■
Copy the plus (+) key from the I/O Interface character table (hex 4E) to
replace the Z key (alternate position)
Shift
3
4
✓
✓
Function
5
6
✓
✓
7
From key
8
Shift Char.
Upper
I/O Interface
Code
Char.
X
4E
+
To key
Shift
Char.
Upper
A
Alternate
Z
Figure 3-13. Example of a completed keyboard changes chart
3-220
893-745-B
Chapter 4
Customization
This chapter explains how to:
■
Display the Master Menu.
■
View a table that lists the worksheets used to customize the Model 3174
module.
NOTE: The term ÒworksheetÓ corresponds to the term ÒchartÓ used
elsewhere in the System 3000 library.
■
Choose (verify) the disk drives you want to use.
■
Display the Customize Control Disk Menu.
■
View a table that will help you to determine the Customize Control Disk
Menu option you want to perform.
■
Customize the Control Disk.
■
Initialize the RAM disk.
You should have a set of completed worksheets from your network planner.
The worksheets will direct you to a Master Menu customizing utility. The
customizing utilities are described in ÒCustomizing UtilitiesÓ in Appendix A,
ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities.Ó
The Master Menu supports utility tasks that you want to perform. Support
utilities are listed in Table 4-2 and are described in ÒSupport UtilitiesÓ in
Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities.Ó
You will also need:
893-745-B
■
A Utility (UTL) diskette.
■
A Control Extension diskette.
■
The Control (CTL) diskette you want to customize. The Control diskette
must be the same microcode level as the Utility diskette. For example, if
the Control diskette is labeled Microcode Level C6.0, the Utility diskette
must be labeled Microcode Level C6.0. For more information, refer to the
IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
4-1
Customization
■
A customizing display station attached to terminal port address 26-00 of
the Model 3174 module. Refer to ÒWhich Display Stations Can You Use?Ó
in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó for a list of display
stations that can be used and ÒCustomizing UtilitiesÓ in Appendix A,
ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó for some additional information about the
customizing display station.
■
The identity of the customizing keyboard.
You may also need a copy of the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual.
NOTE: The customizing planning information can be found in Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó and in the IBM 3174 Planning Guide.
It is a good idea to keep records of the customization responses you will enter.
At any point in customization, you can preserve a record of your responses by
printing out the completed customization screen. If you would like more
information about this option, refer to ÒLocal CopyÓ in Appendix G, ÒKeeping
Records.Ó
It is also a good idea to make backup copies of your Model 3174 module
diskettes once customization has been completed. You may use either the Copy
Files utility or your PCÕs disk-copy procedure. Refer to Appendix C, ÒHow To
Copy Files,Ó or refer to your PCÕs supporting documentation.
Using this Guide
Attempting to customize without beneÞt of completed worksheets may produce
inoperable results. Completed worksheets lessen the possibility of entering
conßicting responses between the customizing procedures.
4-2
893-745-B
Displaying the Master Menu
Displaying the Master Menu
To begin any customizing or support utility procedure, you must Þrst display
the Master Menu shown in Figure 4-1. To display the Master Menu, perform
the following procedure:
1.
For information about the Model 3174 module indicators, push
buttons, and diskette drive, refer to ÒThe Front PanelÓ in Chapter 1,
ÒIntroduction and Functional Overview.Ó
2.
If the customizing display station is not already on, turn it ON.
3.
If the Model 3174 module is online, have the host operator take the
Model 3174 module ofßine. Be aware that taking the module ofßine
interrupts all services to all the terminals attached to the module.
4.
Insert the Utility diskette into the diskette drive.
5.
Press and hold ALT 1 on the operator panel.
6.
While holding ALT 1, press and release the recessed IML.
7.
Release ALT 1.
40 appears
8.
in the Status display.
Press and release the Enter key on the operator panel.
After approximately 30 seconds, the Master Menu appears on the
customizing display station screen. If the Master Menu does not appear,
refer to the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the
Model 3174 Workstation Controller Module. The title ÒMaster MenuÓ
should be highlighted. If it is not, adjust the contrast for the screen so that
the title is brighter than the other characters. You need to distinguish
highlighted characters during the customizing procedures.
9.
If you want to print copies of the customization panels as you
complete them, turn on your local copy printer and press the Print
key.
10. After you have received a copy, attach a label with information about
the serial number and location of the Model 3174 module, date of the
customization, and microcode release level.
For more information about this procedure, refer to ÒLocal CopyÓ in
Appendix G, ÒKeeping Records.Ó
893-745-B
4-3
Customization
11. Check the keyboard of the customizing display station. The default is
a QWERTY keyboard.
The QWERTY keyboard gets its name from the Þrst six characters on the
top row of alphabetic keys: Q-W-E-R-T-Y. A QWERTY keyboard used on
a customizing display station may have a Typewriter, Data Entry, APL
(with APL off), or Text (with Text off) layout. If the keyboard is not a
QWERTY layout, you must select the Identify Customizing Keyboard
procedure Þrst from the Master Menu. Refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To
Identify Customizing Keyboards.Ó
4420
Master Menu Displayed
Master Menu
(C)COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1986, 1994 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Licensed Internal Code - Property of IBM
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
K
Customize the Control Disk
Merge DSL
Copy Files
Diagnostics
Microcode Upgrade
Central Site Customizing
Media Management
Identify Customizing Keyboard
Select ===> __
4421.2
Figure 4-1. Master Menu
4-4
893-745-B
Using Worksheet and Task Tables
Using Worksheet and Task Tables
Now that the Master Menu is displayed, you are ready to determine the menu
option that you need to select as follows:
■
If you have customizing worksheets, go to Table 4-1 in the next section.
If you need help with the worksheets, see the planner who is responsible
for Þlling out the customizing worksheets or refer to Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó for information on planning the worksheet
customization.
■
If you have support utility tasks to perform, go to Table 4-2 later in this
chapter.
Worksheet Table
This section lists the worksheets that contain the customization information
you need. Follow these steps:
1.
Locate your worksheets in the worksheet table (see Table 4-1).
If you have a worksheet that is not listed in this table, set it aside. Only the
worksheets listed in this table are needed.
893-745-B
2.
Select Option 1 from the displayed Master Menu and press the Enter
key.
3.
Perform the procedure that is described in ÒVerifying the Control
Disk DriveÓ later in this chapter. (If you are familiar with the verify
drives procedure, go to ÒUsing the Customize Control Disk MenuÓ
later in this chapter and use Table 4-1 to match worksheets with
procedures.)
4-5
Customization
Table 4-1. Worksheet table
4-6
Worksheet
Worksheet
1
Host Attachment
25A
3270 Attachment Diagram
2
Multi-Host Definition
27
AEA and TCP/IP Configure
4
SDLC
28
Port Set
5
X.25
29
Port to Port Set Map
5S
Secondary X.25
30
AEA and TCP/IP Station Set
9
Local Area Network
31
AEA and TCP/IP Default
Destination
9S
Secondary Local Area Network
31A
TCP/IP Options
10A Presentation Space (MLT)
31B
TCP/IP Routing Information
10D Presentation Space Storage
31C
TCP/IP Domain Name Services
11A 117: Port Assignment
25A
3270 Attachment Diagram
12
128: RTM
27
AEA and TCP/IP Configure
13
X.25 Options
28
Port Set
13S Secondary X.25 Options
29
Port-to-Port Set Map
14
Common SNA
30
AEA and TCP/IP Station Set
15
APPN Node Definition
31
AEA and TCP/IP Default
Destination
16
Network Resources
31A
TCP/IP Options
16A Network Resources Qualifiers
31B
TCP/IP Routing Information
17
31C
TCP/IP Domain Name Services
17A X.25 APPN Nodes
31D
TCP/IP 3174 Defined Nicknames
18
COS Definition
38
Device Definition
19
COS Node Definition
39
Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM)
20A COS Transmission Group Definition
40A
Logical Terminal Assignment
(LTA)
20B COS Transmission Group Definition
41
Extended Vital Product Data
(VPD)
21
45
Common Network
22A 3174-Peer and Bridges Options
46
LAN Address Assignment
22B 3174-Peer Definition
47
LAN Transmission Definition
22C Source Route Bridge Definition
49
Storage Requirements
Associated LUs
Mode/COS Correlation
893-745-B
Using Worksheet and Task Tables
Table 4-1. Worksheet table (continued)
Worksheet
Worksheet
22D Source Route Bridge Interfaces
50
End User Productivity Functions
22E Manual Spanning Tree Mode
51A
Token-Ring Description
23A 3174-Peer Bridge Profile
52
X.25 Circuit Profiles
23B Bridge Management
53
Frame Relay
24A Filter Definition
53S
Secondary Frame Relay
24B Hop Count Filter
54
Frame-Relay Description
24C Source SAP Filters
55
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI
Definitions
24D SNAP Ethertype Filters
56
Frame-Relay Index Assignment
24E Route Designator Filters
Non-Katakana Converged
Keyboards
24F MAC Address Filters
Katakana Converged Keyboards
24G Frame Data and Offset Filters
Enhanced Keyboard (US)
24H Filter Order Definition
Enhanced Keyboard (World
Trade)
Enhanced Keyboard (Katakana)
NOTE: Worksheets 3, 3S, 4S, 6, 7, 7S, 8, 8S, 10B, 10C, 11B, 25B, 26, 32, 33A,
33B, 34, 35, 36, 37, 42, 43, 44, 48, and 51B are not listed and are not used to
do Model 3174 module procedures.
Task Table
The task table (Table 4-2) allows you to match a support utility task with an
option from the Master Menu and the appropriate procedure. Follow these
steps:
893-745-B
1.
Locate your task in this table.
2.
Select the option designated by the table from the displayed Master
Menu and press the Enter key.
3.
Locate the procedure description in the appropriate guide and
perform the procedure.
4-7
Customization
Table 4-2. Task table
Procedure
Master
Menu Go to:
Merge RPQs
Option 1 3174 Utilities Guide
Merge DSL
Option 2 Appendix B, “How To Merge DSL Code”
Copy Files
Option 3 Appendix C, “How To Copy Files”
Diagnostics
Option 4 SynOptics Problem Determination and Service
Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module
Microcode Upgrade
Option 5 Appendix D, “How To Upgrade Microcode”
Central Site Customizing Option 6 IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing User’s Guide
(refer to note)
Media Management
Option 7 Appendix E, “How To Perform Media Management”
Identify Customizing
Keyboard
Option K Appendix F, “How To Identify Customizing
Keyboards”
Note: Some CSCU functions operate differently in the Model 3174 module than in the IBM 3174 Establishment
Controller. Refer to “Option 6: Central Site Customizing” in Appendix A, “Model 3174 Module Utilities,” for
information about these differences.
Customizing the Control Diskette
If you have never customized a Control diskette and you would like an
overview of the customization process, refer to ÒCustomizing UtilitiesÓ in
Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities.Ó
4-8
893-745-B
Customizing the Control Diskette
Correcting Errors
During customization, the customization program checks for three types of
customization errors:
■
Errors on panels. Two types of errors can occur on a panel:
Ð An incorrect response on an individual question or Þeld
Ð Conßicting responses between two or more questions or Þelds on a
panel
Refer to ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module
Utilities,Ó for information on correcting panel errors.
■
Errors between utilities. Interutility checking occurs when you press the
PF9 or PF12 key from the Customize Control Disk Menu. Refer to the
section on interutility and interconÞgure checking in the IBM 3174
Utilities Guide for information on correcting interutility errors.
■
Errors between hosts. InterconÞgure error checking occurs during
multihost customization when you press the PF12 key from the
Multi-Host DeÞnition panel. Refer to ÒInter-utility and Inter-conÞgure
CheckingÓ in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide for information on correcting
interconÞguration errors.
Verifying the Control Disk Drive
If you have not already displayed the Master Menu, do so now by performing
the procedure that is described in ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ earlier in this
chapter. When you IML to display the Master Menu, select the drive for the
Utility diskette. Then you are asked to verify the drive you want to use for your
Control diskette. Follow these steps:
1.
Make sure the microcode level of the Control diskette matches the
microcode level of the Utility diskette you used to display the Master
Menu.
2.
If you have not already selected the Customize the Control Disk
option from the Master Menu (type 1 after Select ====> and press
the Enter key), do so now.
The Disk Drive Assignment panel is displayed on your screen (see
Figure 4-2).
893-745-B
4-9
Customization
3.
Verify drives.
Available drives: 1
Utility ====>
Control ====> 1
(Insert Cntl disk: press ENTER................................................)
PF: 3=Quit
4422
Figure 4-2. Disk drive assignment panel
4.
Press the Enter key and follow the prompts that appear on your
screen.
After completing the verify drives section, go to ÒUsing the Customize
Control Disk MenuÓ in the next section for the Customize Control Disk
Menu. The table there will direct you to the proper procedure for your
worksheets.
Using the 3174 Utilities Guide
Onscreen prompts and messages allow you to complete the procedure to verify
the Control diskette drive. Refer to the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide for help
interpreting the conÞguration screens that follow.
4-10
893-745-B
Using the Customize Control Disk Menu
Using the Customize Control Disk Menu
After you have veriÞed the drive and pressed the Enter key, the Control diskette
information is read, and you are prompted to insert the Utility diskette and
press the Enter key. The Customize Control Disk Menu is displayed (see
Figure 4-3).
______ Customize Control Disk Menu ______
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Configure
Define Devices
Merge RPQs
Modify Keyboards
Define AEA and TCP/IP
Define APPN Node
Define COS
Define 3174-PEER and Bridges
Define WAN Profiles
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
9= Check
12=File
4423.1
Figure 4-3. Customize Control Disk Menu
893-745-B
4-11
Customization
To determine the proper procedure for the worksheets you have, use Table 4-3
to match procedures with worksheets.
Table 4-3. Matching procedures and worksheets
You
want to:
If you have
worksheets:
Configure
1 through 14 or 45 through “Configuring the Control Diskette” in this
47, 50 through 51A, 52
chapter.
through 56
Define Devices
38 through 41
The section on defining devices in the
IBM 3174 Utilities Guide (refer to note).
Merge RPQs
N/A (you have RPQ
diskettes)
The section on merging RPQs in the
IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
Go to:
Modify Keyboards Keyboard Worksheets
The section on modifying keyboards in
the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
Define AEA
and TCP/IP
25A, 27 through 31D
The section on defining AEA and TCP/IP
in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide (refer to
note).
Define APPN
Node
15 through 17A
The section on defining Advanced
Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN node)
in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
Define COS
18 through 21
The section on defining Class of Service
(COS) in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
Define 3174-Peer 22A through 24H
and Bridges
The section on defining 3174-Peer
Communication in the IBM 3174 Utilities
Guide.
Define WAN
Profiles
The section on defining WAN profiles in
the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide.
52
Note: ISDN and AEA are not supported by the Model 3174 module.
4-12
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Diskette
ConÞguring the Control Diskette
Before you begin the conÞguration process, consult the following description
of the PF keys used in conÞguration and the ßow chart showing the
conÞguration panels. This information will help you bring up the conÞguration
panels and give you an overview of the sequence of these panels.
PF Keys for the ConÞgure Procedure
You can call up a speciÞc function of the customizing program by pressing a
PF key. As you follow the ConÞgure procedure, your choice of PF keys varies
from panel to panel. Some or all of these PF keys may appear on the panels
during the ConÞgure procedure. Use Table 4-4 to determine ConÞgure Control
Disk PF key functions.
Table 4-4. PF key functions for the ConÞgure procedure
PF key
Function
PF3
The PF3 (Quit) key is used to quit the procedure. Pressing it discards all the responses
you have entered on all the previous panels. Then the Customize Control Disk Menu
appears on your screen. If you press the PF3 key from the Customize Control Disk
Menu, your responses from the Configuration process are erased and you are returned
to the Master Menu.
PF4
The PF4 (Default) key erases your responses from the current panel on your screen.
The screen clears, and the same panel, filled with default responses, reappears.
For the 117: Port Assignment panel, default values will be entered on every screen. For
example, if you enter PF4 when you are displaying the second screen, both the first and
second screens will be erased and default values will be entered.
If you press the PF4 key, you will lose the information you have entered so far on the
panel or panels affected.
893-745-B
PF7
The PF7 (Back) key brings up the previous panel. When you press the PF7 key, the
responses you have entered on the current panel are saved temporarily, even if the
panel is not completed. When you return to the partially completed panel, you can
complete it.
PF8
The PF8 (Forward) key checks the responses on the current panel for errors and, if
there are none, causes the next panel to appear on the screen. If there are any errors,
an error message appears on the message line. If you get an error message telling you
that the information you have entered is in conflict with the response to a previous
configuration question, reaccess that question and check your entry against the
appropriate worksheet. If your response matches the worksheet, see the planner who
filled out the worksheet to correct the error. You cannot advance to the next panel until
all errors are corrected. When you press the PF8 key, the responses you have entered
on the current panel are saved temporarily, even if the panel is not completed.
4-13
Customization
Table 4-4. PF key functions for the ConÞgure procedure (continued)
PF key
Function
PF9
The PF9 (Return Host) key returns you to the host panel you have completed (titled
SDLC, X.25, Local Area Network, or Frame Relay). When you press the PF9 key, the
responses you entered on the current panel are saved temporarily, even if the panel is
not completed. After you return to the host panel, press the PF8 key to advance through
the subsequent panels. When you return to the partially completed panel, you can
complete it.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF9 key, use the attention (ATTN) key.The
PF9 key has a different meaning on the Customize Control Disk Menu. If you enter PF9
on that panel, inter-utility checking takes place. Refer to the section on interutility and
interconfigure checking in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide for more information about
interutility checking.
PF10
The PF10 (Page Back) key checks for errors the entire panel, which is made up of a
series of screens, and pages back to the previous screen while displaying any errors
that are encountered.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without the PF10 key, use the Cursor Select Key.
PF11
The PF11 (Page Forward) key checks for errors the entire panel, which is made up of a
series of screens, and pages forward to the next screen while displaying any errors that
are encountered.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without the PF11 key, use the PA1 key.
PF12
The PF12 (Done) key, when pressed at the end of the Configure procedure, saves on
the Utility diskette all the responses you have entered on all the previous panels. The
Customize Control Disk Menu appears on your screen. The responses for the Configure
procedure are not permanently saved until the PF12 key is pressed from the Customize
Control Disk Menu and the Master Menu reappears.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF12 key, use the PA2 key.
NOTE: The PF13 through PF24 keys, on keyboards that contain them, are
mapped into the PF1 through PF12 keys. For example, PF13 is PF1, and
PF15 is PF3.
4-14
893-745-B
Configuring Panel Flow
ConÞguring Panel Flow
Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 show the panel sequence for the ConÞgure procedure
for the 1A host. Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 show the panel sequence for any
additional hosts that are conÞgured if multihost support is chosen.
Start
configuring
Model/Attach
panel
1A host
of multiple
hosts
?
Yes
101=m
Multi-host
definition
panel
Host unique
panel
SDLC,
T/R network,
or X.25
?
Yes
Common
SNA panel
No
No
Token ring
network gateway
or APPN not attached
to host by
token ring
?
No
Yes
Common
network panel
T/R
network
gateway
?
Yes
940:
ring address
assignment
panel
941:
ring
transmission
definition panel
C
4424
Figure 4-4. ConÞgure panel sequence (1 of 4)
893-745-B
4-15
Customization
C
Individual
port
assignment
?
Yes
117:
port assignment
panel
118:
port address
panel
No
Response
time
monitor
?
Yes
128:
RTM panel
No
Yes
X.25?
332:
X.25 options
panel
No
End user
productivity
functions panel
Multiple
hosts
?
Yes
Multi-host
definition
panel
E
See next page
No
Configure
procedure
complete panel
Customize
control disk
menu
Go to what's next
4425
Figure 4-5. ConÞgure panel sequence (2 of 4)
4-16
893-745-B
Configuring Panel Flow
E
Secondary host
panel
SDLC etc.
T/R network
gateway
?
Yes
Common
network panel
No
T/R network
gateway
Individual
port
assignment
?
Yes
117:
port assignment
panel
Yes
940:
ring address
assignment panel
940:
ring transmission
definition panel
118:
port address
panel
No
Response
time
monitor
?
Yes
128:
RTM panel
Yes
332:
X.25 options
panel
No
X.25
?
No
F
4426
Figure 4-6. ConÞgure panel sequence (3 of 4)
893-745-B
4-17
Customization
F
Configure
host complete
panel
Multi-host
definition
panel
Additional
host IDs to
configure
?
Yes
E
See previous page
No
Configure
procedure
complete panel
Customize
control disk
menu
Go to what's next
4427
Figure 4-7. ConÞgure panel sequence (4 of 4)
4-18
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
ConÞguring the Control Disk
Before you perform this procedure, you need to have previously selected the
Customize the Control Disk option from the Master Menu and identiÞed the
keyboard. If you have not:
■
Refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ earlier in this chapter for
Master Menu instructions.
■
Refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing Keyboards,Ó for
Identifying Keyboard instructions.
You may also need a copy of the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual.
The Customize Control Disk Menu is displayed on your screen (see
Figure 4-8).
______ Customize Control Disk Menu ______
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Configure
Define Devices
Merge RPQs
Modify Keyboards
Define AEA and TCP/IP
Define APPN Node
Define COS
Define 3174-PEER and Bridges
Define WAN Profiles
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
9= Check
12=File
4423.1
Figure 4-8. Customize Control Disk Menu
893-745-B
4-19
Customization
To conÞgure the control disk, perform the following steps:
1.
To select the conÞguration option, type 1 after Select ===>.
2.
Press the Enter key.
After you press the Enter key, the Model/Attach panel (see Figure 4-9)
appears on your screen.
______ Model/Attach ______
Online Test Password 098 - ________
Product Assistance Data
099 3174 Model
100 - XXX
Host Attachment
101 - X (1-BSC
2-SDLC
3-X.25
4-Non-SNA Channel
5-SNA Channel
LAN Adapter Type
102 - 0
NSO Selection
103 - 0000000000000000
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
6-SDLC, X.21 Switched
7-Token-Ring
8-Ethernet
9-Frame-Relay
M-Multi-Host)
(0-None
1-Token-Ring
2-Ethernet)
8=Fwd
4429.1
Figure 4-9. Model/Attach panel
3.
Locate the Þrst conÞguration worksheet (Worksheet 1ÑHost
Attachment). Type in each response that is recorded on the worksheet
into the Þelds following the question numbers on the panel.
4.
Press the Enter key.
Any incorrect responses (those highlighted) can be corrected as described
in ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module
Utilities.Ó
4-20
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
NOTE: A printed copy of the customized panel is useful for future
reference and is easily obtained. After completing correct responses for
the panel, make sure your local printer is turned on and press the Print
key. For more information about this option, refer to ÒLocal CopyÓ in
Appendix G, ÒKeeping Records.Ó
5.
Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Token-Ring Description panel appears
“Token-Ring Description Panel” in this
chapter
Multi-Host Definition panel appears
“Multi-Host Definition Panel” in this chapter
Host panel appears
“Host Panel” in this chapter
Token-Ring Description Panel
6.
Locate Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description. Type in the
responses recorded on the worksheet (see Figure 4-10).
______Token-Ring Description ______
CU@/ATTACH
Token-Ring Address
080 - XXXX XXXX XXXX
Token-Ring Speed
082 - 0
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
(0 - 4 Mbps
1 - 16 Mbps
2 - 16 Mbps with Early Token Release)
8=Fwd
5606
Figure 4-10. Token-Ring Description panel
893-745-B
4-21
Customization
7.
Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Multi-Host Definition panel appears
“Multi-Host Definition Panel” in this chapter
Host panel appears
“Host Panel” in this chapter
Multi-Host DeÞnition Panel
8.
Locate Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition and type in the responses
written on the worksheet.
Note that Host IDs 1A, 2A, and 3A appear automatically on the
Multi-Host DeÞnition panel, although 2A and 3A are not applicable to the
Model 3174 module (see Figure 4-11).
______ Multi-Host Definition ______
Entry XX of YY
Fill in a new host, change a host, or select a host configuring
Host
Adapter
Host
Hardware Include
Host Descriptor
ID
Type
Attach
Group
in IML
1A
2A
_
3A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Select ===>
PFL 3=Quit
_
_
_
7=Back
__
__
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
11=PageFwd 12=Done
4430
Figure 4-11. Multi-Host DeÞnition panel example
4-22
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
9.
Type in 1A after Select ====> and press the Enter key to advance
to the next panel.
NOTE: The 1A host must be conÞgured before any other host.
The host panel appears next.
Host Panel
Figure 4-12 is an example of a typical host panel. Note that this is only an
example; the panel you see may differ. You may have an SDLC, X.25, Local
Area Network, or Frame-Relay host panel. The question numbers, placement of
questions, and number of questions that appear on the panel may be different
from the panel shown in Figure 4-12.
______ Local Area Network ______
CU@/ATTACH
106 - XXX XXX XXX 04 107 - XXX XXX XXX 04 108 - 0000000
110 - 0 0000
121 - 01
116 - 00 00
125 - 0000000
126 - 00000000 127 - 0 0
132 - 0 0 0 0
136 - 0 0 0 0
137 - 0 0 0 0
138 - 0
141 - A
165 - 0
166 - A
168 - 0
173 - 00000000
175 - 000000
179 - 0 0 0
213 - 1
215 - 00000
220 - 0
382 - 0 5 2 1
383 - 2
384 - 0
385 - IBMLAN
386 - 1
PF: 3=Quit
123 - 0
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
4431.1
Figure 4-12. Layout of a typical host panel
893-745-B
4-23
Customization
10. The title of the panel (SDLC, X.25, Local Area Network, or Frame
Relay) appears at the top of the panel.
Compare this title with the title of the worksheet that has responses
recorded on it. If the titles do not match, have the planner who completed
Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment check the response to question 101 or
have the planner who completed Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition
check the entries in the Host Attach Þeld. These responses determine
which host panel is displayed.
11. Type in the responses recorded on the conÞguration worksheet. Press
the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Common SNA panel appears
“Common SNA Panel” in this chapter
117: Port Assignment panel appears “117: Port Assignment Panel” in this
chapter
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel “Frame-Relay Description Panel” in this
appears
chapter
4-24
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity Functions
panel appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel” in
this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this chapter
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
Common SNA Panel
Figure illustrates the Common SNA panel.
______ Common SNA ______
CU@/ATTACH
500 - 0
501 - _______
502 - _______
511 - _______
512 - _______
APPN Support FIelds:
510 - 0
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
4432
Figure 4-13. Common SNA panel
12. Locate Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA. Type in the responses recorded
on the worksheet.
13. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Common Network panel appears
“Common Network Panel” in this chapter
117: Port Assignment panel appears “117: Port Assignment Panel” in this
chapter
893-745-B
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
Frame-Relay Description panel
appears
“Frame-Relay Description Panel” in this
chapter
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity Functions
panel appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel” in
this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this chapter
4-25
Customization
Common Network Panel
The Common Network panel (see Figure 4-14) appears if the module has been
conÞgured as a token-ring gateway or is using APPN and is not attached to the
host by means of a token ring. The figure shows an example of this panel with
all questions shown. Not all of these questions may appear on your screen
because any questions not required for your particular conÞguration will be
suppressed.
______ Common Network ______
CU@/ATTACH
900 - 4000 0000 0000 04
905 - 1
908 - IBMLAN
912 - 00
920 - IBMISDN
925 - 000
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
4433.1
Figure 4-14. Example of the Common Network panel
14. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network.
15. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
4-26
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
If the:
Go to:
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel
appears
“Frame-Relay Index Assignment Panel”
in this chapter
940: LAN Address Assignment panel
appears
“Token-Ring Gateway Panels” in this
chapter
117: Port Assignment panel appears
“117: Port Assignment Panel” in this
chapter
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
End User Productivity Functions panel
appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel”
in this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
Frame-Relay Index Assignment Panel
The Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel for this host appears (see
Figure 4-15).
______ Frame-Relay Index Assignment______
1A - XXXXXXXX
xx/xxxx
Entry xxx of yyy
S
DLCI
PF: 3=Quit
SAP
4=Default
S
7=Back
8=Fwd
DLCI
SAP
9=RtnH
5607
Figure 4-15. Example of a Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel
893-745-B
4-27
Customization
16. Type in the responses recorded on WorksheetÑFrame-Relay Index
Assignment for this host.
17. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panels. Refer to ÒCorrecting
ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó if you
need help correcting errors.
Token-Ring Gateway Panels
The Token-Ring Gateway panels for this host appear (see Figure 4-16 and
Figure 4-17).
S
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
______ 940: LAN Address Assignment ______ CU@ATTACH
ENTRY XXX of YYY
Address
SAP T
S
Address
SAP T
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04 0
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
4434.1
Figure 4-16. Example of 940: LAN Address Assignment panel
4-28
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
S
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
______ 941: LAN Address Assignment ______ CU@ATTACH
ENTRY XXX of YYY
Address
SAP F W S
Address
SAP F W
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
4435.1
Figure 4-17. Example of 941: LAN Transmission DeÞnition panel
The F and W Þelds contain defaults that depend on the response to the T (type)
Þeld speciÞed in 940: LAN Address Assignment panel.
On these two panels, the symbol CU@ stands for the response to question 080,
the beginning address for the token ring. The word ATTACH stands for the
response to question 101, Host Attachment. The size of the screen determines
how much of these panels you see.
18. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address
Assignment and Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission DeÞnition
Worksheet. Press the PF8 key after you complete each panel to
advance to the next panel (see Figure 4-18).
If there is a one-digit response for a two-digit Þeld, or a three-digit
response for a four-digit Þeld, use a leading zero (for example 02 for 2, or
0356 for 356). You cannot use blanks.
893-745-B
4-29
Customization
If the:
Go to:
117: Port Assignment panel
appears
“117: Port Assignment Panel” in this chapter
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
Frame-Relay Description
panel appears
“Frame-Relay Description Panel” in this chapter
332: X.25 Options panel
appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity
Functions panel appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel” in this
chapter
Configure Complete panel
appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this chapter
117: Port Assignment Panel
NOTE: The size of the screen you are using to customize determines how much
of the panel you see.
LT
Port
26-00
26-02
26-04
26-06
26-08
26-10
26-12
26-14
26-16
26-18
26-20
26-22
26-24
26-26
26-28
26-30
IS
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
PF: 3=Quit
______ 117: Port Assignment _____
CC/HOST
116=sn an Host Addresses
Host Addresses
1
2
3
4
5
Port
IS 1
2
3
4
5
__ __ __ __ __
26-01 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-03 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-05 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-07 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-09 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-11 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-13 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-15 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-17 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-19 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-21 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-23 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-25 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-27 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-29 __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __
26-31 __ __ __ __ __ __
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=FtnH
11=Page Fwd
4436
Figure 4-18. 117: Port Assignment panel (24 lines displayed)
4-30
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
19. Locate Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment.
20. Type in the responses recorded on the worksheet.
Depending on the answer to question 116, Individual Port Assignment,
your worksheet may have numbers either in the IS column or in the
address columns, but not both. Follow these instructions to Þll in one or
the other:
Ð Filling in the IS columnÑThe IS columns are preset with a response of
0 or 1. Type over the preset response with the desired value (0, 1, 2, 3,
4, or 5).
Ð Filling in the address columns (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)ÑEnter digits anywhere in
the three-digit response Þeld. You do not need to use leading zeros.
NOTE: If you press the PF4 key, all the screens of this panel will be
restored to their default values and all the information you have entered
on all the screens will be removed.
21. Press the Enter key. The customizing program checks the responses
on the panel.
If all the responses are correct, the panel reappears, complete with new
information (see Figure 4-19 and Figure 4-20).
117: Port Assignment
LT=
Host Addresses
Port
IS 1
2 3
4
26-00 1
02
26-02 1
03
26-04 4
04 05 06 07
5
116=sn an
CC/HOST
Host Addresses
Port IS
1
2 3
4
5
26-00 0
26-03 0
26-05 0
4437
Figure 4-19. 117: Port Assignment panel when responses are typed in
the IS column
893-745-B
4-31
Customization
117: Port Assignment
LT=
Host Addresses
Port
IS 1
2 3
4
26-00 1
02
26-02 1
03
26-04 4
04 05 06 07
5
116=sn an
CC/HOST
Host Addresses
Port IS
1
2 3
4
5
26-00 0
26-03 0
26-05 0
4437
Figure 4-20. 117: Port Assignment panel when responses are typed in
the address columns
If you typed correct responses in the IS column, the panel reappears with
the addresses Þlled in sequentially.
If you typed correct addresses in the address columns, the panel reappears
with the IS Þelds Þlled in. The addresses will appear as you entered them.
If a response on the 117: Port Assignment panel is incorrect, it is
highlighted. If you need information about correcting responses, refer to
ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities.Ó
22. Press the PF8 key to advance to the 118: Port Address panel.
You do not enter data on this panel. It displays the addresses in
hexadecimal characters that have now been assigned. Press the PF7 key if
you want to return to the 117: Port Assignment panel.
Use the PF11 and PF10 keys to display ports that are not already
displayed. (You do not need to press the Enter key to check the 118 panel.)
4-32
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
23. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
Frame-Relay Description panel appears “Frame-Relay Description Panel” in this
chapter
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
End User Productivity Functions panel
appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel”
in this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
128: RTM Panel
Version A (see Figure 4-21) of the 128 panel appears on the screen if your
Þrst-digit response to question 127 was 1 or 2. Version B (see Figure 4-22) of
the 128 panel appears on the screen if your Þrst-digit response to question 127
was 3, 4, or 5.
______ 128: RTM ______
127 = X Y @CU/HOST
B1 - 00 : 01 . 0
B2 - 00 : 02 . 0
B3 - 00 : 05 . 0
B4 - 00 : 10 . 0
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=TrnH
4439
Figure 4-21. Version A of the 128 panel
893-745-B
4-33
Customization
______ 128: RTM ______
127 = X Y @CU/HOST
F1 - 00000000
B1 - 00 : 01 . 0
B2 - 00 : 02 . 0
B3 - 00 : 05 . 0
B4 - 00 : 10 . 0
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=TrnH
4440
Figure 4-22. Version B of the 128 panel
24. Locate the responses recorded on Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM. The
responses are written in one of three areas:
■
Default Values
■
Version A
■
Version B
25. Look at the name that is circled on the worksheet.
4-34
■
If Default Values is circled, press the PF4 key.
■
If Version A or B is circled, type in the responses recorded on the
worksheet.
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
26. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Frame-Relay Description panel appears “Frame-Relay Description Panel” in this
chapter
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity Functions panel
appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel”
in this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
Frame-Relay Description Panel
The Frame-Relay Description panel appears on your screen (see Figure 4-23) if
your response to question 101 on the Model/Attach panel was:
■
101 = 9 (Frame-Relay)
■
101 = 7 (Token-Ring) and 100 = 43R
______ Frame-Relay Description ______
00/FR
300 313 - 0
552 - 050
554 558 - 0
560 - 0
562 - 3
563 - 10
566 - 0000
569 - N
Enable Frame Relay (0-No, 1-Yes)
NRZ (0-NRZ, 1-NRZI)
Maximum Number of DLCIs (001-254)
Committed Information Rate (002048-256000)
Congestion Control (0-No support, 1-support)
DE Bit Support (0-No support, 1-support)
LMI Type (1-None, 2-LMI Rev-1, 3-Annex D, 5-CCITT)
LMI Transmit Polling Interval (1-29)
Additional Buffer Space (0000-1024)
Define Optional DLCIs (N-No, Y-Yes)
570 - 4000 3174 0001 Virtual MAC Address
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
5608
Figure 4-23. Frame-Relay Description panel
893-745-B
4-35
Customization
27. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 54ÑFrame-Relay
Description.
28. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions “Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
panel appears
Panel” in this chapter
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity Functions panel
appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel”
in this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions Panel
The Frame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions panel appears on your screen (see
Figure 4-24) if your response to question 569 on the Frame-Relay Description
panel was Y.
______ Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions ______
00/FR
DLCI Range: 0016 - 1007
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
5609
Figure 4-24. Frame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions panel
4-36
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
29. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay
Optional DLCI DeÞnitions.
30. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
332: X.25 Options panel appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this chapter
End User Productivity Functions panel
appears
“End User Productivity Functions Panel”
in this chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
332: X.25 Options Panel
The 332: X.25 Options panel appears on your screen (see Figure 4-25) if your
response to question 101 on the Model/Attach panel was 3.
______ 332: X.25 Options ______
400 - 00 0 0
401 - 4
421 - ____
409 - 10100100
420 - 00000000
423 - ________
CC/CCC/ATTACH
421 - 00000000
424 - _________
430 - 1
431 - 0
434 - 1
435 - 02
440 - 9
441 - ___
442 - ____
450 - XXXX
451 - XX
452 - ____
453 - 00000000
461 - _____
462 - _____
463 - ____
464 - ____
465 - _____
466 - _____
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
432 - 02
7=Back
8=Fwd
433 - 2
9=RtnH
4441
Figure 4-25. 332: X.25 Options panel
893-745-B
4-37
Customization
31. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options.
If there is a one-digit response for a two-digit Þeld or a three-digit
response for a four-digit Þeld, use a leading zero (for example, 02 for 2, or
0356 for 356). You cannot use blanks.
NOTE: Responses to questions 423, 424, and 452 may not Þll the entire
Þeld. You may leave underscores wherever you have not typed an
alphanumeric character.
End User Productivity Functions Panel
32. Press the PF8 key to advance to the End User Productivity Functions
panel (see Figure 4-26).
______ End User Productivity Functions ______
Local Copy print queue buffer size
001 - 0000
Calculator function
002 - 0
(0000 - 1024K
use multiples of 2K)
(0 - 2)
5250 emulation
003 - 0
(0 - 2)
LAN T1 timer
004 - 5
(0 - 9)
LAN retry count
005 - 07
(01 - 99)
Copy from session to session
006 - N
(Y,N)
HAP sharing for local copy
007 - Y
(Y,N)
CSCF IML passsword required?
008 - Y
(Y,N)
Non-standard feature options
009 - 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
9=RtnH
4442.1
Figure 4-26. End User Productivity Functions panel
4-38
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
33. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 50ÑEnd User
Productivity Functions.
ConÞgure Complete Panel
34. To advance to the next panel, press the PF8 key (see Figure 4-27).
______ Configure Complete _____
Press PF12 to save all responses
and return to the selection Menu
PF: 3=Quit
7=Back
9=RtnH
12=Done
4443
Figure 4-27. ConÞgure Complete panel
35. Press the PF12 key to keep the responses you have entered.
WARNING: If you press the PF3 key, all the new conÞgure responses on
all the panels will be erased. Press the PF3 key only if you want to start
over.
893-745-B
If the:
Go to:
Multi-Host Definition panel appears
“Multi-Host Definition Panel” in this
chapter
Customize Control Disk Menu appears
“What’s Next?” in this chapter
4-39
Customization
Multi-Host DeÞnition Panel
The Multi-Host DeÞnition panel is displayed, Þlled in for the host already
conÞgured (see Figure 4-28).
______ Multi-Host Definition ______
Fill in a new host, change a host, or select a host for configuring
Entry XX of YY
Host
Adapter
Host
Hardware Include
Host Descriptor
ID
Type
Attach
Group
in IML
1A
2A
_
3A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Select ===>
PFL 3=Quit
_
_
_
__
__
7=Back
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
11=PageFwd 12=Done
4444
Figure 4-28. Multi-Host DeÞnition panel example
36. Locate the worksheets for the next Host ID you must conÞgure.
You must completely conÞgure one host before you proceed to the next.
The possible additional Host IDs are 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, 1G, or 1H.
37. Fill in the information required for the appropriate Host ID; type in
the Host ID after Select ====> and press the Enter key.
A secondary host panel appears next.
4-40
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
NOTE: If you have previously completed the Multi-Host DeÞnition panel
and are now changing it, you must still process only one host at a time:
¥ Type in the changes for one host.
¥ Type the Host ID after Select ====>.
¥ Press the Enter key.
¥ Do NOT type in the changes and press the PF12 key. If you do, your
changes will not be accepted.
¥ After pressing the Enter key, continue with the instructions in this step.
Figure 4-29 is an example of a typical secondary host panel. Note that the
illustration is only an example; the panel you see will depend on responses
entered on the Multi-Host DeÞnition panel. Also observe that the Host ID
appears on the second line of your screen. In this example, the Host ID is 1B.
______ Local Area Network _____
1B = LOCAL AREA NETWORK HOST SYSTEMS
106 - XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
ATTACH
106 - XXXX XXXX XXXX 04
116 - 00
121 - 01
125 0000000
127 - 0 0
165 - 0
179 - 0 0 0
215 - 00000
382 - 0 5 2 1
PFL 3=Quit
220 - 0
383 - 2
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
4445.1
Figure 4-29. Layout of a typical secondary host panel
893-745-B
4-41
Customization
The title of the panel (X.25, Local Area Network, or Frame Relay) appears at
the top of the panel. The questions, question placement, and number of
questions that appear on the panel may also be different from the panel shown
in Figure 4-29.
NOTE: Secondary worksheets such as Secondary X.25, Secondary Local
Area Network, and Secondary Frame Relay are comparable to X.25,
Local Area Network, and Frame Relay worksheets, respectively.
38. Compare the title of the panel on your screen with the title of the
worksheet. (If the titles do not match, the planner who completed the
worksheet should check the response for this host on the Multi-Host
DeÞnition Worksheet. This response determines which host panel is
displayed.)
39. Type in the responses recorded on the conÞguration worksheet, and
press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
NOTE: At this point, secondary host panels appear. Only the tops of
these panels will be shown because the same panels have already been
shown in this procedure for the primary host.
4-42
If the:
Go to:
Common Network panel appears
“Common Network Panel” in this
chapter
117: Port Assignment panel appears
“117: Port Assignment Panel” in this
chapter
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
332: Secondary X.25 Options panel
appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
Common Network Panel
The Common Network panel (see Figure 4-30) appears if the module has been
conÞgured to act as a token-ring gateway for this host or if the module using
APPN is not attached to the host through a token-ring network. Only those
questions needed for the particular conÞguration of this module on this host
will appear on this panel.
______ Common Network ______
CU@/ATTACH
4446
Figure 4-30. Common Network panel (partial representation)
40. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network
for this host. Press the PF8 key after you complete this panel to
advance to the next panel. If you need help to correct any errors, refer
to ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó (see
Figure 4-32).
893-745-B
If the:
Go to:
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel
appears
“Frame-Relay Index Assignment
Panel” in this chapter
940: LAN Address Assignment panel
appears
“Token-Ring Gateway Panels” in this
chapter
4-43
Customization
Frame-Relay Index Assignment Panel
The Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel for this host appears (see
Figure 4-31).
______ Frame-Relay Index Assignment ______
1B - XXXXXXXX
xx/xxxx
Entry xxx of yyy
5610
Figure 4-31. Example of a Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel (partial
representation)
41. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index
Assignment for this host.
42. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel. Refer to ÒCorrecting
ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities,Ó if you
need help correcting any errors.
Token-Ring Gateway Panels
These two panels are the 940: Ring Address Assignment panel and the 941:
LAN Transmission DeÞnition panel for this host. Use Worksheet 46Ñ940:
LAN Address Assignment for this host to enter the correct responses on the
following panel (see Figure 4-32).
______ 940: LAN Address Assignment ______
CU@/ATTACH
ENTRY XXX of YYY
4447.1
Figure 4-32. 940: LAN Address Assignment panel (partial representation)
When Þlling in this panel, use a leading zero if you have a one-digit response
for a two-digit Þeld or a three-digit response for a four-digit Þeld (for example,
02 for 2 or 0356 for 356). You cannot use blanks.
4-44
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
43. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel. If you have any
incorrect responses, you can correct them as described in ÒCorrecting
ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module Utilities.Ó
44. Use Worksheet 47Ñ941: LAN Transmission DeÞnition for this host to
enter the responses on the 941: LAN Transmission DeÞnition panel
(see Figure 4-33).
______ 941: LAN Transmission Definition ______
CU@/ATTACH
ENTRY XXX of YYY
4448.1
Figure 4-33. 941: LAN Transmission DeÞnition panel (partial
representation)
The F and W Þelds contain defaults that depend on the response to the T
(type) Þeld speciÞed in the 940: LAN Address Assignment panel.
117: Port Assignment Panel
45. Press the PF8 key to bring up the next panel (see Figure 4-34). Refer
to ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174 Module
Utilities,Ó if you need help correcting any incorrect responses.
893-745-B
If the:
Go to:
117: Port Assignment panel appears
“117: Port Assignment Panel” in this
chapter
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
332: Secondary X.25 Options panel
appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
4-45
Customization
LT=
Port
IS
1
117: Port Assignment
116=sn an
Host Addresses
2 3
4
5
Port
IS
CC/ATTACH
Host Addresses
1
2 3
4
5
4449
Figure 4-34. 117: Port Assignment panel (partial representation)
46. Locate Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment for this host. (The
worksheet will be identiÞed by the Host ID.) Type in any responses
recorded on the worksheet.
Use the PF11 and PF10 keys to display ports that are not displayed and to
page back.
47. Press the Enter key.
The customizing program checks the responses on the panel. If all the
responses are correct, the panel reappears, complete with new
information. If you have any incorrect responses, you can correct them as
described in ÒCorrecting ResponsesÓ in Appendix A, ÒModel 3174
Module Utilities.Ó
48. Press the PF8 key to advance to the 118: Port Address panel.
(If you want to return to the 117: Port Assignment panel, press the PF7
key. To see the responses that have been assigned, press the Enter key.)
49. Use the PF11 and PF10 keys to display ports that are not already
displayed. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
4-46
If the:
Go to:
128: RTM panel appears
“128: RTM Panel” in this chapter
332: Secondary X.25 Options panel
appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
128: RTM Panel
Version A (see Figure 4-35) of the 128 panel appears on the screen if your
Þrst-digit response to question 127 was 1 or 2. Version B (see Figure 4-36) of
the 128 panel appears on the screen if your Þrst-digit response to question 127
was 3, 4, or 5.
128: RTM
127 =X Y @CU/HOST
B1 - 00 - : 01 . 0
4450
Figure 4-35. Version A of the 128 panel (partial representation)
128: RTM
127 =X Y @CU/HOST
F1 - 00000000
4451
Figure 4-36. Version B of the 128 panel (partial representation)
893-745-B
4-47
Customization
50. Locate the responses recorded on Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM for this
host.
The responses are written in one of three areas:
■
Default Values
■
Version A
■
Version B
51. Look at the name that is circled on the worksheet.
a. If Default Values is circled, press the PF4 key.
b. If Version A or B is circled, type in the responses recorded on the
worksheet.
52. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel.
If the:
Go to:
332: Secondary X.25 Options panel
appears
“332: X.25 Options Panel” in this
chapter
Configure Complete panel appears
“Configure Complete Panel” in this
chapter
332: X.25 Options Panel:
The 332: X.25 Options panel (see Figure 4-37) appears on your screen if your
response to question 101 on the Model/Attach panel was 3.
______ 332: X.25 Options ______
@CU/ATTACH
4452
Figure 4-37. 332: X.25 Options panel (partial representation)
53. Type in the responses recorded on Worksheet 13SÑSecondary X.25
Options for this host. Press the PF8 key to advance to the next panel
(see Figure 4-38).
4-48
893-745-B
Configuring the Control Disk
ConÞgure Complete Panel
______ Configure Complete _____
Press PF12 to save all responses
and return to the selection Menu
PF: 3=Quit
7=Back
9=RtnH
12=Done
4443
Figure 4-38. ConÞgure Complete panel
54. Press the PF12 key to save the conÞguration responses for this host.
WARNING: If you press the PF3 key, all the new conÞgure responses will
be erased. Press the PF3 key only if you want to start over. If you press
the PF12 key, the Multi-Host DeÞnition panel appears.
a. If you have additional Host IDs to conÞgure, return to Step 36. (You
have additional Host IDs to conÞgure if you have any of the
worksheets ending in S, such as 3S, or any worksheets numbered
45Ð47 that you have not yet used.)
b. If you have conÞgured all of the required Host IDs, press the PF12 key
again twice to bring up the Customize Control Disk Menu. Then go to
ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó in the next section. If you get a panel of error
messages after you press the PF12 key from the Multi-Host DeÞnition
panel, correct the errors as described in the section on interutility and
interconÞgure checking in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide or see the
planner who Þlled in the conÞguration worksheets.
893-745-B
4-49
Customization
WhatÕs Next?
With the Customize Control Disk Menu on your screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
■
Continue customizing by selecting a different customizing procedure.
Use Table 4-5 to locate the procedure for the option you want.
Table 4-5. Matching procedures with options
If you
want to:
You have
worksheets:
Define Devices
38 through 41
The section on defining devices—PAM,
LTA, VPD, and ISDN—in the IBM 3174
Utilities Guide
Merge RPQs
N/A (you have an
RPQ diskette)
The section on merging RPQs in the
IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Modify Keyboards
Keyboard Worksheets
The section on modifying keyboards in
the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Define AEA and
TCP/IP
25A, 27 through 31D
The section on defining AEA and TCP/
IP in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Define APPN
Node
15 through 17A
The section on defining Advanced
Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN node)
in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Define COS
18 through 21
The section on defining Class of Service
(COS) in the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Define 3174-Peer
and Bridges
22A through 24H
The section on defining 3174-Peer
Communication and Bridging in the IBM
3174 Utilities Guide.
Define WAN
Profiles
52
The section on defining WAN profiles in
the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide
Go to:
Note: ISDN and AEA are not supported by the Model 3174 module
4-50
■
Make the Model 3174 module operational by initializing the RAM disk.
Refer to ÒInitializing the RAM DiskÓ later in this chapter.
■
Complete customization of the Control diskette.
893-745-B
Initializing the RAM Disk
WARNING: To complete customizing the Control diskette, the responses
you made must be transferred from the Utility diskette to the Control
diskette, or they will not be permanently saved.
To complete the transfer, press the PF12 key. When the Master Menu
appears, transfer is complete.
It is a good idea to make backup copies of all your Model 3174 module
diskettes, once you have completed customization. You may use either the
Copy Files utility or your PCÕs diskcopy procedure. Refer to Appendix C,
ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó or refer to your PCÕs supporting documentation for
information on how to copy your diskettes.
Initializing the RAM Disk
Before you can make the Model 3174 module operational, you must initialize
the RAM disk by transferring the microcode from the Control Extension (DSL)
diskette shipped with the Model 3174 module to the RAM disk.
There are two ways to transfer microcode from a Control Extension diskette:
■
Using the Full Copy function to copy a Control Extension diskette to the
RAM disk. (Refer to ÒFull CopyÓ in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó
for instructions on how to perform this function.)
■
Using the DSL Merge function to selectively merge necessary Control
Extension Þles onto the RAM disk. (Refer to ÒMerge DSL Code
ProcedureÓ in Appendix B, ÒHow To Merge DSL Code,Ó for instructions
on how to perform this function.)
The Þrst time after installation that you initialize the RAM disk, you must use
the Full Copy function. After that, you can use either the DSL Merge function
or the Full Copy function to maintain the RAM diskÕs microcode.
893-745-B
4-51
Customization
Making the Model 3174 Module Operational
A customized Control diskette is required to make the module operational. For
instructions on customizing a diskette, refer to ÒCustomizing the Control
DisketteÓ earlier in this chapter.
An IML sequence runs some basic module tests. If these tests run without error,
microcode is then loaded from the diskette and RAM disk.
You can start a normal IML in one of four ways:
■
Pressing IML while the hub power is on
■
Powering on the hub
■
Issuing a reset command from the management module
■
Having the host site do a remote IML using NetView Distribution
Manager
If you get unexpected results at any time, refer to the SynOptics Problem
Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174 Workstation Controller
Module.
How to IML the Model 3174 Module
To IML the module, follow these steps:
4-52
1.
Insert a properly customized Control diskette into the diskette drive.
2.
Press and release IML. This starts a normal IML. After about three
minutes, 3174 normally appears in the Status display.
3.
Does 3174 appear in the Status display?
Yes
The module is operational.
No
Refer to the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual.
893-745-B
Appendix A Model 3174 Module Utilities
The utilities provided with the Model 3174 module allow you to customize and
manage the module microcode. The 3174 microcode must be customized
before you can operate the Model 3174 module.
NOTE: The 3174 microcode contains some utilities options that are not valid
for the Model 3174 module.
You start all Model 3174 module utilities by loading the Utility diskette and
then selecting the utility you want to perform from a menu called the Master
Menu.
Two types of utilities are available: customizing utilities and support utilities.
Customizing Utilities
Customizing utilities consist of the following utilities:
■
Customize the Control Disk
■
Central Site Customizing
■
Identify Customizing Keyboard
Customize the Control Disk
Customize the Control Disk is a utility that you must perform before you can
use your Model 3174 module. This utility tailors the microcode for each Model
3174 module and its attached devices and consists of the following procedures:
893-745-B
■
ConÞgure
■
DeÞne devices
■
Merge RPQs
■
Modify keyboards
■
DeÞne AEA and TCP/IP
■
DeÞne APPN Node
■
DeÞne COS
A-1
Model 3174 Module Utilities
■
DeÞne 3174-Peer and Bridges
■
DeÞne WAN ProÞles
NOTE: The Model 3174 module does not support AEA. You can deÞne only
TCP/IP.
Central Site Customizing
Central Site Customizing is a utility that allows you to control the
customization data for all of your Model 3174 modules from one central point.
Using this utility is described in the IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs
Guide.
Identify Customizing Keyboard
Identify Customizing Keyboard allows you to use keyboards with layouts other
than QWERTY when you are doing customization utilities.
A detailed description of these utilities is provided in ÒCustomizing UtilitiesÓ
later in this appendix.
Support Utilities
Support utilities consist of the following utilities:
A-2
■
Merge DSL
■
Copy Files
■
Diagnostics
■
Microcode Upgrade
■
Media Management
893-745-B
Support Utilities
Merge DSL
Merge DSL is a utility that allows you to maintain the moduleÕs microcode by
selectively adding (merging) and deleting data Þles on diskettes and the RAM
disk. DSL Merge options include the following procedures:
■
Merge diskette to diskette
■
Merge RAM disk to diskette
■
Merge Control Extension (DSL) diskette to RAM disk
■
Merge Optional Feature (DSL) diskette to RAM disk
Refer to Appendix B, ÒHow To Merge DSL Code,Ó for more information about
the Merge DSL procedure.
Copy Files
Copy Files allows you to copy complete diskettes or speciÞc Þles from
diskettes onto another diskette or the RAM disk. Copy options include the
following procedures:
■
Full Copy
■
Modify and Copy
■
Copy Customizing Data
■
Copy Device DeÞnition
■
Copy Patches
■
Copy ModiÞed Keyboards
■
Copy RPQs
■
Copy User Data
The Þrst time you initialize the RAM disk after module installation, you must
use Full Copy to copy the Control Extension diskette image to the RAM disk.
Refer to ÒFull CopyÓ in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for the Full Copy
procedure.
The complete Copy Files utility is explained in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy
Files.Ó
893-745-B
A-3
Model 3174 Module Utilities
Diagnostics
This utility allows you to verify the correct operation of the Model 3174
module hardware. Diagnostics are used when the module is Þrst set up. After
the module becomes operational, diagnostics are used to help isolate a problem
when module failures occur. Using the diagnostics is described in the
SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model 3174
Workstation Controller Module.
Microcode Upgrade
Microcode Upgrade allows you to migrate from your current release of Model
3174 module microcode to a newer release. Periodically, IBM and Bay
Networks make available upgraded versions of the Utility, Control, and other
diskettes that include new functions, such as the ability to handle a new type of
display station. Each upgrade is assigned a microcode release level, for
example, ConÞguration Support C Release 3.6. A diskette label identiÞes the
microcode release level.
Refer to Appendix D, ÒHow To Upgrade Microcode,Ó for more information.
Media Management
This utility allows you to create dump and trace diskettes from your Model
3174 module. Media Management options include the following procedures:
■
Select/Deselect IML Source
■
Delete Subdirectory
■
Display Disk Information
■
Create Dump/Trace Diskette
NOTE: Only Display Disk Information and Create Dump/Trace Diskette
are valid options for the Model 3174 module.
Refer to Appendix E, ÒHow To Perform Media Management,Ó for the
procedure and a detailed description.
A-4
893-745-B
Which Display Stations Can You Use?
Which Display Stations Can You Use?
The following terminals can be used as the customizing display station:
■
3178
■
3179 Model 1 operating in native or 3279-emulation mode
■
3180 operating in native or 3278-emulation mode
■
3191
■
3192
■
3194 operating in CUT mode
■
3270 Personal Computer with 3278/3279 emulation, operating in CUT
mode
■
3278 (except Model 1)
■
3279
■
3471
■
3472
■
5550 family operating in CUT mode
■
5578 operating in CUT mode
■
6150 RT Personal Computer
■
6151 RT Personal Computer
Customizing Utilities
Customizing consists of tailoring the Model 3174 moduleÕs microcode to
support the various types of display stations and printers. Customizing
identiÞes the methods and protocols of host attachment that a particular module
will provide.
893-745-B
A-5
Model 3174 Module Utilities
For ConÞguration Support C Release 6.0, three diskettes arrive with the Model
3174 module: a Control diskette, the Control Extension diskette, and a Utility
diskette. These diskettes contain the microcode necessary to perform routine
diagnostic tests before the module goes into operation and then to direct
module operations.
During customizing, you tailor the microcode as required for operation of your
particular module. After the Control diskette has been customized, you can use
it to IML the module, enabling it to communicate with the display stations,
printers, and host.
Whenever you customize a Control diskette, you need to perform the ConÞgure
procedure. In addition, you may need to perform one or more of these optional
customizing procedures:
■
Merge DSL
■
Copy Files
■
Microcode Upgrade
■
Media Management
■
Identify Customizing Keyboard
■
DeÞne Devices
■
Merge RPQs
■
Modify Keyboards
■
DeÞne AEA and TCP/IP
■
DeÞne APPN Node
■
DeÞne COS
■
DeÞne 3174-Peer and Bridges
■
DeÞne WAN ProÞles
NOTE: AEA is not supported for the Model 3174 module; you can conÞgure
for TCP/IP only.
A-6
893-745-B
Customizing Utilities
Customizing a Control Disk
To customize the Control diskette, you should be familiar with working at a
3270-type display station. You should also have previously prepared
conÞguration worksheets.
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó illustrates how to perform the ALT 1 IML
procedure and display the Master Menu. Tables help you to determine which
of the procedures to choose and where to Þnd them.
To customize the Model 3174 module, you must load the Utility microcode by
issuing an ÒALT 1 IMLÓ to the module. The microcode is loaded from a
diskette.
When you turn on the module and perform the ALT 1 IML procedure, you
customize at a customizing display station attached to terminal port address
26-00 of the module (see Figure A-1)
.
4428
Figure A-1. Example of a customizing display station
As you work, a series of panels appearing on the screen ask you a number of
questions. You type in responses to those questions from the ConÞguration
Worksheets. These responses are written onto the Control diskette. In the IBM
3174 Utilities Guide, the customizing procedures are described in detail. After
a Control diskette has been customized, you can reconÞgure it if you change
the hardware or software conÞguration.
893-745-B
A-7
Model 3174 Module Utilities
Only certain display stations can be used for customizing. If you are unsure
about your display station, refer to ÒWhich Display Stations Can You Use?Ó
earlier in this appendix for a list of stations you can use.
The Customizing Panels
After you select a customizing procedure from the Master Menu, various
panels for that procedure will appear on the screen of your display station. The
panels guide you through the procedure. Though each panel is unique, they all
share a common design. The standard panel layout is illustrated in Figure A-2,
although all the features illustrated here do not appear on every panel. For
example, not all panels display PF keys.
NOTE: The size of the screen you are using determines how much information
you will see. For example, a 3278 Model 2 shows only 24 lines of information,
while a 3278 Model 4 displays 43 lines of information.
Number of panels
in the procedure
This panel
The name of
the procedure
Title
Instruction on
what to do with
the panel
Panel X of Y
. . Instruction area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body of information
Area where you
enter information
Select===>
System messages
on the progress
of the procedure
(. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .)
PF: 3=Quit
PF7=Back
PF8=Fwd
Applicable Program
Function keys
4455
Figure A-2. Standard panel layout
A-8
893-745-B
Customizing Utility Options
Customizing Utility Options
The Customizing Utilities are shown in bold type in the Master Menu shown in
Figure A-3.
Master Menu
(C)COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1986, 1994 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Licensed Internal Code - Property of IBM
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
K
Customize the Control Disk
Merge DSL
Copy Files
Diagnostics
Microcode Upgrade
Central Site Customizing
Media Management
Identify Customizing Keyboard
Select ===> __
4421.1
Figure A-3. Master Menu
Option 1: Customize the Control Disk
The Customize the Control Disk option allows you to tailor the instructional
microcode required for operation of your particular Model 3174 module.
Some customizing requires that hardware and software conÞguration
information be either speciÞed or modiÞed on the Control diskette that will be
used to make a Model 3174 module operational (for example, deÞning host,
device, and printer attachments; modiÞable-keyboard types; and RPQs). Refer
to ÒCustomize Control Disk MenuÓ later in this appendix for a detailed
explanation. Refer to the IBM 3174 Utilities Guide for the procedures.
893-745-B
A-9
Model 3174 Module Utilities
Option 6: Central Site Customizing
Central Site Customizing allows you to tailor the module microcode for each
Model 3174 module in a network at a central location. The tailored microcode
can then be sent electronically (if you are using the NetView Distribution
Manager software package) or physically (on a diskette) to the various Model
3174 modules in the network, while a copy of the customization is stored at the
central site for future reference.
The IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide contains more
information on Central Site Customizing Management, but, because the Model
3174 module utilizes 3.5-inch diskettes instead of the 5.25-inch diskettes used
by the IBM 3174 controller, the Generate Labels and Label DeÞnition
functions operate differently in the Model 3174 module than in the IBM 3174
controller. The following sections describe these differences.
Parameter Assignments Panel
The Parameter Assignments panel enables you to deÞne some of the CSCU
parameters. This panel is used by both the Model 3174 module and the IBM
3174 controller, so you must choose the diskette size (3.5-inch or 5.25-inch).
The label generation options are used both when you are deÞning and when
you are generating labels for library members. Figure A-4 shows an example of
the Parameter Assignments panel.
A-10
893-745-B
Customizing Utility Options
____________ Parameter Assignments ____________
Utility Level: C3.6
Verify Selections
Disk Drive Assignments (Available 1 2 3 4 )
Drive for Control Diskette
===> 1
Drive for Library Disk
===> 1
Label Generation Options
Generate Address Labels (Y/N)
Generate Diskette Labels (Y/N)
Form Feed before each Label (Y/N)
Select Label Size (1=3.5" 2=5.25")
===> N
===> N
===> Y
===> 1
Electronic Distribution
Default Version Number (Y/N)
===> Y
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
4=Default
7=Back
8=Fwd
4457.1
Figure A-4. Example of a Parameter Assignments panel
Label Generation Options
You identify which labels you want printed when you use either the Generate
Labels function or the Generate Diskettes Labels function. The Form Feed
Before Each Label option should be set to Y (yes), unless the label printer
features are already set so that a form feed occurs after each label prints. The
Select Label Size should be set to 1 (3.5 inches).
CSCU lets you print mailing address labels and diskette labels from the
network library. You can print both label types, one type after the other, for each
library member speciÞed, on a printer attached to the central site module.
You can also use two printers: one for printing labels and one for local copy.
This way, you do not have to change forms when switching from local copy to
generating labels. You can select which printer to activate (only one printer can
function at a time) using the Print Ident key. Refer to ÒLocal CopyÓ in
Appendix G, ÒKeeping Records.Ó
893-745-B
A-11
Model 3174 Module Utilities
Although the choice of printer forms is yours, labels should be printed on
single-label-wide continuous forms. The label should be plain, with a gummed
backing. You are responsible for setting the printer forms controls properly (for
example, lines per page and characters per line). For printing an
IBM-equivalent diskette label, the character spacing should be 15 characters
per inch (cpi).
The diskette label information is stored on each Model 3174 module diskette
and is accessible to CSCU. CSCU accepts a label consisting of a maximum of 6
lines, 40 characters per line for the Model 3174 module (68 characters for the
IBM 3174 controller). The Þrst line of the Control diskette label contains
information you specify during the DeÞne Labels function, such as a building
number or a control number.
A-12
893-745-B
Customizing Utility Options
Figure A-5 shows the minimum and maximum dimensions of the Model 3174
module diskette label.
Maximum-size label
2-3/4
inches
2-4/5 inches
Minimum-size label
15/16
inch
2-3/4 inches
4458
Figure A-5. Maximum and minimum dimensions of diskette label
Label DeÞnition Panel
The Label DeÞnition panel lets you enter the following information:
893-745-B
■
The mailing address of a module
■
A line of information to appear with the Diskette Label data
■
Two lines of notes
A-13
Model 3174 Module Utilities
This information is used for printing address mailing labels and diskette labels,
as well as for record-keeping. Figure A-6 shows an example of the Label
DeÞnition panel.
______ Label Definition ______
Utility Level: C3.6
Create/Modify Labels and Notes; press ENTER
Address Label:
3.5" Limit ==>|
5.25" Limit==>|
Diskette Label:
3.5" Limit==>|
5.25" Limit==>|
Notes:
PF: 3=Quit
4=Default
5=Cancel
7=Back
8=Fwd
12= Done
4459
Figure A-6. Label DeÞnition panel
Panel Processing
The Address Label area can occupy up to 6 lines, each 40 characters long for
the Model 3174 module (68 characters long for the IBM 3174 controller).
Below is an address label example:
BAY NETWORKS, INC.
4401 GREAT AMERICA PARKWAY
SANTA CLARA CA
95054
The Diskette Label area displays the information contained on the label of the
library memberÕs Control diskette. The member name on the diskette label is
not contained in the working copy. The name is Þlled in, however, by CSCU
when the label data is put to a member. The diskette label data cannot be
modiÞed except for the Þrst line, where you can enter up to 40 characters of
information for the Model 3174 module (68 characters for the IBM 3174
controller).
A-14
893-745-B
Customizing Utility Options
The Notes area consists of two lines. You can enter notes pertaining to a
particular library member to remind you of things you must do when
generating diskettes, such as NEEDS A DOWNSTREAM LOAD FILE.
These notes are not printed on the diskette label, so the two note lines allow 68
characters, regardless of diskette size.
To type information on the Label DeÞnition panel, use:
■
Uppercase alphabetic characters (AÐZ).
■
Numeric characters (0Ð9).
■
Space or null.
Refer to the IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide for more
information.
Option K: Identify Customizing Keyboard
NOTE: If you need to select this procedure, select it before any other
customizing procedure.
During this procedure, identify on a Utility diskette the keyboard of the display
you are using to customize. The keyboard you specify is supported on that
diskette for all other customizing procedures and any time you recustomize
using that diskette. Select this procedure if you do not know what keyboard
type was used during previous customizing or if you want to change the
keyboard type.
If you do not select this procedure the Þrst time a diskette is used, you will get
the default. The default is a QWERTY layout in one of these keyboards:
Typewriter, Data Entry, APL (with APL off), or Text (with Text off). (Refer to
the IBM 3174 Character Set Reference manual for examples of these
QWERTY keyboard layouts.)
NOTE: QWERTY keyboards get their name from the Þrst six characters on the
top row of alphabetic keys: Q-W-E-R-T-Y. Other types of keyboards get their
names in a similar way. On AZERTY keyboards, for instance, the Þrst six
characters are A-Z-E-R-T-Y.
893-745-B
A-15
Model 3174 Module Utilities
If the keyboard is in one of the following languages, you must select the
Identify Customizing Keyboard procedure the Þrst time that a diskette is
customized:
■
Austrian/German
■
Belgian
■
French, AZERTY layout
■
Italian
■
Japanese English
■
Japanese Katakana
■
New Turkish
Refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing Keyboards,Ó for the
procedure.
A-16
893-745-B
Customize Control Disk Menu
Customize Control Disk Menu
Select option 1 from the Master Menu to display the Customize Control Disk
Menu (see Figure A-7). From it, you can select several customizing utilities.
The options are described in the following paragraphs.
______ Customize Control Disk Menu ______
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Configure
Define Devices
Merge RPQs
Modify Keyboards
Define AEA and TCP/IP
Define APPN Node
Define COS
Define 3174-PEER and Bridges
Define WAN Profiles
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
9= Check
12=File
4423.1
Figure A-7. Customize Control Disk Menu
Option 1: ConÞgure
During this procedure, you type in responses to the numbered questions that
describe the conÞguration of hardware and software. This is the one
customizing procedure that must be selected whenever you initially customize
a Control diskette. You also select this procedure when you want to reconÞgure
or modify some of the responses you entered when you Þrst followed the
ConÞgure procedure. ÒCustomizing the Control DisketteÓ in Chapter 4,
ÒCustomization,Ó describes the procedure for conÞguring and reconÞguring.
893-745-B
A-17
Model 3174 Module Utilities
ConÞguration Option Overview
When you select Configure from the Customize Control Disk Menu, a series of
panels are displayed, each of which is Þlled with numbers representing
conÞguration questions. You type in your responses to these questions by
referring to the previously prepared ConÞguration Worksheets. These
worksheets are prepared during the planning process by a designated planner or
yourself using Chapter 3, ÒCustomization Planning.Ó
If the worksheets have not been carefully Þlled out, the functions you want may
not operate properly. In addition, the Model 3174 modules must be customized
in the ofßine mode; having to make decisions about customizing at this time
could cause the module to be unavailable for a longer period of time.
When you reconÞgure, you also need completed worksheets. ReconÞguring
means modifying some of the responses that you entered when you initially
conÞgured the Control diskette. The planning information for reconÞguring is
in Chapter 3, ÒCustomization Planning.Ó
Typing in Responses to the ConÞguration Questions
Many of the conÞguration questions have default responses displayed in the
response Þeld. (The area where you type a response is called the response
field.) A default response is one that is supplied for you, which you can change
or leave unchanged. To enter or change a response, use the tab or cursor
movement keys to move your cursor to the question and type over the previous
response.
On the worksheet, many response boxes or blanks have a default response
printed beneath them. The default responses printed on the worksheets match
the default responses displayed on your screen.
If a response box is left empty and the default response is circled, leave that
default response unchanged on the screen. Some questions on the worksheets
have Xs displayed in the response Þeld. For the panel to be correct, you must
type a response to these questions. (You will receive an error message if you do
not.)
A-18
893-745-B
Customize Control Disk Menu
Correcting Responses
Once responses are entered on the customization panels, the customizing
program checks the responses before allowing you to continue to the next
panel.
If a response is incorrect, the question number and the response are highlighted.
A four-digit status code and message displayed on the message line explain
why the response is incorrect. (Refer to the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual for
more information.)
If several questions are highlighted, the status code refers to the questions in
numeric order, from higher to lower number. In some cases, all incorrect
responses of the same type (for example, duplicate addresses) are highlighted
at once. After you correct one type of response, another type of incorrect
response is highlighted.
Use the following procedure to correct any incorrect responses:
1.
Contact the planner or see Chapter 3, ÒCustomization Planning,Ó for
response information. For additional details, refer to the IBM 3174
Planning Guide.
2.
Correct the incorrect response to the highest-numbered question or
type that is highlighted.
3.
Press the Enter key.
The status code changes to explain the next incorrect response. Continue
correcting the responses until none are highlighted.
After the Enter key is pressed, a message indicates when all responses are
correct.
Option 2: DeÞne Devices
On the DeÞne Devices panel, you deÞne the Printer Authorization Matrix
(PAM) and the Logical Terminal Assignment (LTA) data, as well as Extended
VPD.
PAM matches (deÞnes) the displays to printers for local copy, host copy, or
shared copy operations. Select this procedure to deÞne the PAM initially or to
change an existing one.
893-745-B
A-19
Model 3174 Module Utilities
The LTA deÞnes the host address for each host session that is conÞgured for
your attached terminals. Chapter 3, ÒCustomization Planning,Ó contains the
necessary planning information. Refer to the IBM 3174 Planning Guide for
more details. Refer to the section on deÞning devicesÑPAM, LTA, VPD, and
ISDN in the 3174 Utilities Guide providing instructions for the procedure.
NOTE: Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is not available in the
Model 3174 module.
Prompts for Extended VPD present panels with information relating to the
Model 3174 module and each attached device.
Option 3: Merge RPQs
During this procedure, you can select RPQs to be included in the operational
IML. This procedure also allows you to delete RPQs. For this procedure, see
ÒCustomizing the Control Diskette.Ó
Option 4: Modify Keyboards
Some display stations have modiÞable keyboards that allow you to create
keyboard layouts for speciÞc user applications. During this procedure, you
deÞne the unique keyboard layouts for these modiÞable keyboards. Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó contains the planning information. Refer to the IBM
3174 Planning Guide if you need more details.
Option 5: DeÞne AEA and TCP/IP
During this procedure, you enter responses in the input Þelds of several panels,
as well as respond to questions that describe the conÞguration of hardware
and software for 3270-type devices. You also select this procedure when
you want to reconÞgure or to modify some of the responses you entered when
you Þrst followed the AEA and TCP/IP ConÞgure procedure. Chapter 3,
ÒCustomization Planning,Ó contains the planning information you need to read
before conÞguring for the AEA and TCP/IP or reconÞguring for it, including
information about Port Assignment and PAM requirements that must be
considered when conÞguring for the AEA and TCP/IP. Refer to the IBM 3174
Planning Guide if you need additional details about this procedure.
A-20
893-745-B
Customize Control Disk Menu
NOTE: Although DeÞne AEA and TCP/IP appears as an option on the
Customize Control Disk Menu, the Model 3174 module does not support AEA.
You can conÞgure the module for TCP/IP only.
DeÞne AEA and TCP/IP provides you with three options:
■
ConÞgure AEA and TCP/IP
■
DeÞne UDT
■
DeÞne UDX
Only ConÞgure AEA and TCP/IP is valid for the Model 3174 module.
ConÞgure AEA and TCP/IP
Select ConÞgure AEA and TCP/IP if you want to type in the responses to the
numbered questions on the AEA and TCP/IP ConÞgure Worksheets 27 through
31D.
Option 6: DeÞne APPN Node
This procedure allows you to answer questions to conÞgure the Model 3174
module for use in an APPN. You may perform this procedure and save the
values, but the values will not take effect online until conÞguration question
510 is answered with a 1 to activate the APPN feature.
Option 7: DeÞne COS
If your module is conÞgured for APPN, the DeÞne Class of Service (COS)
procedure allows you to specify characteristics to help determine the best route
selection for each session in the APPN Network. If you do not deÞne COS,
default values supplied by IBM will be provided and the selection will be made
according to these defaults. As a result, in many cases it is not necessary to
deÞne COS. If you do deÞne COS, the values you enter will not take effect
online until conÞguration question 510 is answered with a 1 to activate the
APPN feature.
893-745-B
A-21
Model 3174 Module Utilities
Option 8: DeÞne 3174-Peer and Bridges
Use this option to conÞgure a Model 3174 module for 3174-Peer
communication, which enables intelligent devices attached to the Model 3174
module to communicate with one another as peers. The devices operate as
stations on a single 3174-Peer segment of the LAN. The Model 3174 module
may also act as a bridge to allow the 3174-Peer devices to communicate with a
token-ring network and may be conÞgured for LAN Manager support or locally
managed through online tests.
Use this option also to conÞgure a Model 3174 module for source-route remote
bridging. Source-route remote bridging expands networking opportunities by
interconnecting token-ring LANs across a WAN. Multiport bridging expands
the Model 3174 module bridging function to allow source-routed trafÞc access
to any combinations of three ports: token ring, frame relay, and 3174-Peer
Communications. Source-route remote bridging uses frame relay to enable the
Model 3174 module bridge to attach token-ring and Peer segments to remote
token-ring and Peer segments.
Option 9: DeÞne WAN ProÞles
Use this option to conÞgure virtual circuit characteristics for X.25 WAN
communication. A maximum of 16 proÞles can be deÞned that can, in turn, be
used by the X.25 APPN Node deÞnition.
A-22
893-745-B
Appendix B How To Merge DSL Code
Some of the base code for the release is shipped on the Control Extension
diskette, a type of DSL diskette. This Control Extension diskette must be
loaded in the RAM disk before the Model 3174 module receives its Þrst IML.
A DSL diskette derives its name from the term downstream-load. Microcode
for the functions TCP/IP, APPN (with COS), and 3174-Peer, and microcode for
DSL devices are shipped on the Control Extension diskettes. (A DSL device
requires the module to downstream-load its microcode when it is turned onÑ
for example, a 3290 information panel.)
If DSL diskettes in addition to the Control Extension diskette are used (for
example, the Optional Feature diskette containing the Frame-Relay
Communications feature), the microcode on those DSL diskettes must be
merged to the RAM disk. If the DSL diskettes are not merged to the RAM disk,
the DSL devices and features that depend on the DSL microcode will not be
activated when the module is IMLed.
You must be aware of microcode release levels when merging DSL code. DSL
code associated with DSL devices will IML on your module regardless of the
release level of the Control diskette. However, the DSL code for any of the
microcode features must be at the same level as the release level of the
microcode on the Control diskette.
PF Keys for Merge
You call up a speciÞc function of the customizing program by pressing a PF
key. A PF key is operational only if it appears on the panel you are using.
Use the following information to reference Merge DSL Code PF key functions.
PF key
Function
PF3
The PF3 (Quit) key quits the procedure without saving any responses
since the last Enter key was pressed. Then the Master Menu appears on
your screen.
PF12
The PF12 (Process) key processes the options specified during this
procedure.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF12 key, use the PA2 key.
893-745-B
B-1
How To Merge DSL Code
Merge DSL Code Procedure
If you are not familiar with the Merge DSL Code procedure, you should review
the introductory material and PF key functions. This material begins on page 1.
Before you start, you need to make a backup copy of the Control Extension
diskette. Refer to ÒFull CopyÓ in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for
instructions on how to copy this diskette to another diskette.
■
You should have a From diskette: a Control Extension or Optional Feature
diskette or a RAM disk. This disk is the one from which you are merging.
■
You should also have the To diskette: the Control Extension or Optional
Feature diskette or the RAM disk.
Use the following steps to merge DSL code from one disk to another:
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, do so now.
Refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing Keyboards,Ó for
instructions.
If you do not have a QWERTY keyboard (see the drawing), you must
identify the customizing keyboard before you merge DSL code. Refer to
Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing Keyboards,Ó for instructions;
then return to this procedure.
4420
2.
On the Master Menu, type 2 after Select ===>.
3.
Press the Enter key.
The DSL Merge panel appears on your screen (see Figure B-1).
B-2
893-745-B
Merge DSL Code Procedure
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
1= Merge
From disk:
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
______ DSL Merge ______
2= Delete
To disk:
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
Available drives: 1 2
From===> 1 To===> 2
Drives: 1=Diskette Drive 2= RAM Disk
Verify drive selection; press ENTER
PF: 3=Quit
4462
Figure B-1. Example of the DSL Merge panel for selecting drives
4.
Select the From and To disk drives.
There are three combinations of drives you can select:
From = 1, To = 1 (merge diskette to diskette)
From = 2, To = 1 (mergeÑcopyÑRAM disk to diskette)
From = 1, To = 2 (merge Control Extension or Optional Feature diskette to
RAM diskÑthe default)
NOTE: You can merge only a Control Extension or Optional Feature diskette
to the RAM disk. Attempts to merge any other type of diskette (for example, a
Utility diskette) result in an error message.
5.
893-745-B
Press the Enter key, and follow the prompts on the screen until the
Þlenames appear on the DSL Merge panel (see Figure B-2).
B-3
How To Merge DSL Code
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
1= Merge
'From' disk:
FC3174-C03.06
FACCCC-C03.06
FBAAAA-C03.06
003290-052.00
013179-040.50
023193-004.20
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
Available drives: 1 2
______ DSL Merge ______
2= Delete
'To' disk:
__ FC3174-C03.06
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
From ===> 1 To ===> 1
Select Options
PF: 3=Quit
12=Process
4463.1
Figure B-2. Example of the DSL Merge panel with Þlenames shown
If the DSL code is for a display station, the name, conÞguration level, and
microcode level of the product code are displayed. If the DSL code is for a
microcode feature (as in Figure B-2), the code that represents that feature
and its release level are shown. For example, FBAAAA-C03.06 represents
the APPN (with COS) microcode feature at release level C3 or higher.
6.
Select the Merge/Delete Option.
To merge a Þle from the From diskette, you must Þrst determine whether
any microcode on the To diskette must be deleted in order to make room
for the microcode from the From diskette. Deletion must be performed in
two cases:
B-4
■
You are merging DSL microcode from a Control Extension or
Optional Feature diskette onto another Control Extension or Optional
Feature diskette or the RAM disk that already has the same device
microcode but with a different microcode level of product code.
■
You are merging DSL microcode from a Control Extension or
Optional Feature diskette onto another Control Extension or Optional
Feature diskette or the RAM disk that already has the same microcode
feature but with a different release level.
893-745-B
Merge DSL Code Procedure
If you want to delete some microcode and replace it with some other
microcode, you must delete the microcode you plan to replace either
before or during the merge process. If you want to delete some microcode
and not replace it, you can do a deletion at any time. To delete some
microcode, go to Step 9.
If you only need to merge, not delete, continue with Step 7 (see
Figure B-3).
7.
Type a 1 next to the Þlename.
__
1
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
1= Merge
'From' disk:
FC3174-C03.06
FACCCC-C03.06
FBAAAA-C03.06
003290-052.00
013179-040.50
023193-004.20
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
Available drives: 1 2
Select Options
PF: 3=Quit
______ DSL Merge ______
2= Delete
'To' disk:
__ FC3174-C03.06
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
From ===> 1
To ===> 1
12=Process
4464.1
Figure B-3. Selecting an option on the DSL Merge panel
8.
Press the PF12 key and follow any prompts.
The DSL Þle of the From diskette is merged or copied to the To diskette.
When the merge is completed, the panel shows an asterisk in the Þeld
where you typed in the option number (see Figure B-4).
893-745-B
B-5
How To Merge DSL Code
__
*
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
1= Merge
'From' disk:
FC3174-C03.06
FACCCC-C03.06
FBAAAA-C03.06
003290-052.00
013179-040.50
023193-004.20
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
______ DSL Merge ______
2= Delete
'To' disk:
__ FC3174-C03.06
__ FACCCC-C03.06
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
Available drives: 1 2
From ===> 1 To ===>
1
Task done. Another? Insert disks; press ENTER
PF: 3=Quit
12=Process
4465.1
Figure B-4. The DSL Merge panel: merge complete
If you have another Control Extension or Optional Feature diskette to
merge, go to Step 10. If you are Þnished:
a. Remove any Control Extension or Optional Feature diskettes.
b. Insert the Utility diskette in the IML drive.
c. Press the PF3 key. The Master Menu appears on your screen.
d. Go to ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó
9.
Delete or merge microcode.
To delete microcode from and merge microcode to a Control Extension or
Optional Feature To diskette, or to delete microcode from a Control
Extension or Optional Feature To diskette:
a. Type a 2 next to the Þlenames on the To diskette that you want to
delete. To delete only, not merge, press the PF12 key. The marked Þles
are deleted.
If you want to merge as well as delete, continue with Step b.
B-6
893-745-B
Merge DSL Code Procedure
b. Type a 1 next to the Þlenames you want to merge. Press the PF12 key.
The Þles marked 2 are deleted and the Þles marked 1 are merged (see
Figure B-5).
1
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
1= Merge
From disk:
003290-052.00
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
.............-..........
Available drives: 1 2
PF: 3=Quit
______ DSL Merge ______
2= Delete
To disk:
__ FC3174-C03.06
2 013179-040.50
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
__ .............-..........
From ===> 1 To ===> 1
12=Process
4466.1
Figure B-5. Example of the DSL Merge panel with the delete and merge options
In this example, the From and To diskettes have DSL code for a 3290 on
the From diskette and a 3179G on the To diskette. To replace the device
code on the To diskette with the device code from the From diskette, you
must delete the microcode on the To diskette before or during the merge
procedure.
When the merge is completed, the panel will show that the DSL device
code that previously appeared in the To heading has been deleted. The
DSL device code that previously appeared under the From heading will
now appear under the To heading.
If you had not entered a 1 in front of the microcode feature identiÞer on
the left-hand side, the DSL device code for the 3179G would have been
deleted, and no other change would have occurred.
893-745-B
B-7
How To Merge DSL Code
10. Make Multiple Merges/Deletes.
After the merge/delete is completed, a message appears that prompts you
to perform more DSL merge functions.
If you want to perform a merge or delete (for each), go to Step 4.
If you do not want to perform any additional merge options:
a. Remove any Control Extension or Optional Feature diskettes.
b. Insert the Utility diskette in the IML drive.
c. Press the PF3 key. The Master Menu appears on your screen.
d. Continue with ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó
WhatÕs Next?
The Master Menu with Select ===> is displayed on your screen.
You can:
■
Select a different customizing or utility procedure.
Refer to ÒWorksheet TableÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó to locate the
information for the procedure you have chosen or to determine the next
procedure to perform.
■
Terminate Ofßine Utility action.
To put the module online, ensure that the Control diskette is loaded in the
diskette drive and the Control Extension diskette for Release C3.6 or
higher is loaded in the RAM drive. Then perform an IML. Refer to ÒHow
to IML the Model 3174 ModuleÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for
instructions.
B-8
893-745-B
Appendix C How To Copy Files
From the Copy Menu panel, you can choose whether you want to duplicate a
diskette, modify certain conÞguration data while copying a Control diskette, or
copy speciÞc portions of a diskette or the entire RAM disk. (The Copy Menu
shown in Figure C-1 is only an example; you will be directed to display the
Copy Menu later in this procedure.)
______ Copy Menu ______
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Full Copy
Modify and Copy
Copy Customizing Data
Copy Device Definition
Copy Patches
Copy Modified Keyboards
Copy RPQs
Copy User Data
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
4467
Figure C-1. Copy Menu
Select a copy option on this screen.
893-745-B
C-1
How To Copy Files
Creating Backup Diskettes
Depending on your situation, you can use either the Full Copy option or the
Copy Customizing Data option to create a backup diskette.
The Full Copy option duplicates the entire disk (Þles and customizing data)
regardless of microcode release level. The Copy Customizing Data option is
faster and copies only customizing data from one Control diskette to another
Control diskette at the same microcode release level. Therefore, if you are
customizing the Control diskette and want to make a backup copy of the
customized Control diskette after you have Þnished customizing it, you can use
the Copy Customizing Data option and a second Control diskette at the same
microcode level (if you received one with your microcode release) to create
your backup diskette. If you did not receive a second Control diskette with your
microcode release, you can use the Full Copy procedure to make a backup.
For more information about the Full Copy option, refer to ÒFull CopyÓ later in
this appendix. For more information about the Copy Customizing Data option,
refer to ÒCopy Customizing DataÓ later in this appendix.
Copy File Options
If you are undecided on which copy option to choose, review the copy option
information later in this appendix.
If you have decided on the copy option to perform, the following information
will direct you to the appropriate starting point.
C-2
If you want to perform:
Go to:
Full Copy
“Full Copy” in this chapter
Modify and Copy
“Modify and Copy” in this chapter
Copy Customizing Data
“Copy Customizing Data” in this chapter
Copy Device Definition
“Copy Device Definition” in this chapter
Copy Patches
“Copy Patches” in this chapter
Copy Modified Keyboards
“Copy Modified Keyboards” in this chapter
Copy RPQs
“Copy RPQs” in this chapter
Copy User Data
“Copy User Data” in this chapter
893-745-B
Full Copy
Full Copy
During a Full Copy, you can copy:
■
The entire contents of a CTL, UTL, Control Extension, Optional Feature,
RPQ, or LIB diskette onto a 4-MB diskette.
■
The entire contents of a Control Extension diskette onto the RAM disk.
■
The entire contents of the RAM disk onto a diskette.
Diskettes not formatted by the Model 3174 module are automatically formatted
during the Copy procedure.
WARNING: Make sure that both the Source and Target diskettes are 4 MB.
You can also copy the customizing responses of a Control diskette by using the
Copy Customizing Data option. This procedure is faster than a Full Copy
because only the regular conÞguration responses, patches, RPQs, modiÞed
keyboards, PAM, APPN deÞnition, COS deÞnition, 3174-Peer deÞnition, and
Frame-Relay Communications deÞnition responses are copied.
The logs from the original Control diskette are copied during a Full Copy. It is
recommended that you IML the copied diskette and perform a Reset Log/Test 4
on it to reset all the logs. The following procedure can be performed from any
3278 or similar display station:
1.
Press and hold the ALT key; press TEST.
2.
Type in /4,2.
3.
Press the Enter key.
To perform the Full Copy procedure, you will need the following items:
893-745-B
■
From diskette: A Utility, Control, Control Extension, Optional Feature,
RPQ, or LIB diskette. This is the diskette from which you are copying.
■
To diskette: A 4-MB diskette. This is the diskette to which you are
copying.
■
A label indicating the new microcode level of the To diskette.
C-3
How To Copy Files
Full Copy Procedure
NOTE: Before beginning this procedure, you need to have previously
identiÞed the keyboard (refer to Step 11 on page 4-4).
Use the following steps when you are performing the Full Copy procedure:
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, do so now.
Refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for
instructions.
2.
On the Master Menu, type 3 after Select ===>.
Select ===> 3
4468
3.
Press the Enter key.
The Copy Menu (see Figure C-2) appears on your screen.
______ Copy Menu ______
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Full Copy
Modify and Copy
Copy Customizing Data
Copy Device Definition
Copy Patches
Copy Modified Keyboards
Copy RPQs
Copy User Data
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
4467
Figure C-2. Copy Menu
C-4
893-745-B
Modify and Copy
4.
Type 1.
5.
Press the Enter key.
The prompt appears at the bottom of the screen. Available drives
appears in place of Select ===>.
Available drives: 1 2
From ===> 1
To ===> 2
The Available drive Þelds identify the default drive selections for the From
and To diskettes.
6.
Verify drives by pressing the Enter key, and follow the prompts that
appear on your screen.
NOTE: You can copy only a Control Extension or Optional Feature
diskette to the RAM disk; attempts to copy any other type of diskette (for
example, a Utility diskette) result in an error message.
A message to insert the diskette for copying appears on the message line
near the bottom of your screen. Insert the From or To diskette, and press
the Enter key. To complete the procedure, follow the prompts as they
appear on screen.
When the procedure is completed, the Copy Menu appears on your screen.
Go to ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó later in this appendix.
Modify and Copy
During a Modify and Copy procedure, you can modify certain conÞguration
responses of a Control diskette as you copy it to another diskette. The diskette
you copy to can serve as the Control diskette for another Model 3174 module.
This modiÞcation does not change the original Control disketteÕs information;
instead it modiÞes certain responses for the new Control diskette.
NOTE: Your cannot use the Modify and Copy option if you have conÞgured
the module for multiple hosts (conÞguration question 101 = M).
893-745-B
C-5
How To Copy Files
You can modify the responses to these conÞguration questions:
■
099: Assistance Data
■
104: Module Address
■
105: Upper Address Limit (the Token-Ring Network 3270 Gateway
feature)
■
106: LAN Address of the Model 3174 module (Token-Ring Network)
■
107: LAN Gateway Address (Token-Ring Network)
■
108: Unique Machine IdentiÞer
■
215: Physical Unit IdentiÞcation
NOTE:
¥ Question 105 appears only if you are modifying the Token-Ring Network
3270 Gateway feature conÞguration data.
¥ Questions 106 and 107 appear only if you are modifying token-ring
conÞguration data.
¥ If you have the Token-Ring Network Gateway feature, the new address range
(questions 080 and 105) cannot be greater than the previously deÞned
range.
To perform the Modify and Copy procedure, you will need the following items:
■
■
■
From diskette: A customized Control diskette, from which you are
copying, with the same microcode level as the Utility diskette that was
IMLed.
To diskette: A 4-MB diskette to which you are copying.
A label indicating the new microcode level of the To diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Modify and
Copy.
C-6
893-745-B
Copy Customizing Data
Copy Customizing Data
This procedure copies only the regular conÞguration responses; patches; RPQs;
modify keyboard tables; Device DeÞnition; TCP/IP conÞguration responses;
APPN; COS, 3174-Peer, and WAN ProÞles deÞnition responses from one
Control diskette to another of the same microcode level.
During this procedure, all existing conÞguration responses, patches, RPQs,
modiÞed keyboards, and the Device DeÞnition on the To diskette are replaced
by the conÞguration responses (regular and TCP/IP), patches, RPQs, modiÞed
keyboards, and the Device DeÞnition on the From diskette. This method of
duplicating customized Control diskettes is faster than the Full Copy.
To perform the Copy Customizing Data procedure, you will need the following
items:
■
From diskette: A customized Control diskette, from which you are
copying, of the same microcode level and maintenance level as the To
diskette and the same microcode level as the IMLed Utility diskette.
■
To diskette: A Control diskette, to which you are copying, of the same
microcode level and maintenance level as the From diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy
Customizing Data.
Copy Device DeÞnition
During a Copy Device DeÞnition, you copy only the Device DeÞnition Þle
from one Control diskette to another of the same conÞguration and release
levels.This step will erase any Device DeÞnition data found on the To diskette.
To perform the Copy Device DeÞnition procedure, you will need the following
items:
■
893-745-B
From diskette: A Control diskette, from which you are copying, with the
Device DeÞnition deÞned and of the same microcode level as the IMLed
Utility diskette.
C-7
How To Copy Files
■
To diskette: A Control diskette, to which you are copying, of the same
conÞguration and release levels as the From diskette and the IMLed
Utility diskette. The To diskette must be conÞgured for the Device
DeÞnition either before or after the copy is made.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy DeÞne
Devices.
Copy Patches
During a Copy Patches procedure, you copy only the patch Þles from one
Control diskette to another Control diskette of the same microcode level or
from one Utility diskette to another Utility diskette of the same microcode
level. Doing this will erase any patches found on the To diskette.
To perform the Copy Patches procedure, you will need the following items:
■
From diskette: A Control diskette, from which you are copying, with patch
data merged onto it and of the same microcode level and maintenance
level as the To diskette and of the same microcode level as the IMLed
Utility diskette.
■
To diskette: A Control diskette, to which you are copying, of the same
microcode level and maintenance level as the From diskette and the same
microcode level as the IMLed Utility diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy Patches.
Copy ModiÞed Keyboards
During a Copy ModiÞed Keyboards procedure, you copy only the ModiÞed
Keyboard tables from one Control diskette to another Control diskette of the
same conÞguration and release level. This procedure will erase any ModiÞed
Keyboard tables found on the To diskette.
C-8
893-745-B
Copy RPQs
To perform the Copy ModiÞed Keyboards procedure, you will need the
following items:
■
From diskette: A Control diskette, from which you are copying, with
ModiÞed Keyboard tables deÞned on it and of the same microcode level as
the IMLed Utility diskette.
■
To diskette: A Control diskette, to which you are copying, of the same
conÞguration and release levels as the From diskette and the IMLed
Utility diskette. The To diskette must be conÞgured for the Modify
Keyboards procedure either before or after the tables are copied; language
speciÞcations within the ModiÞed Keyboards tables may differ from the
From diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy ModiÞed
Keyboards.
Copy RPQs
During Copy RPQs, you copy only the RPQ Þles from one Control diskette to
another Control diskette. This procedure will erase any RPQs found on the To
diskette.
To perform the Copy RPQs procedure, you will need the following items:
■
From diskette: A Control diskette, from which you are copying, with RPQ
data merged on it. This diskette must have the same microcode level as the
IMLed Utility diskette.
■
To diskette: A Control diskette, to which you are copying, of the same
conÞguration level as the IMLed Utility diskette and a release level that is
equal to or greater than the IMLed Utility diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy RPQs.
893-745-B
C-9
How To Copy Files
Copy User Data
During Copy User Data, you copy Vital Product Data and the 3174-Peer
parameters from one Control diskette to another. The Vital Product Data is
entered to the Control Diskette via Online Test 5, Options 2 and 4. The
3174-Peer parameters may be entered through Online Test 9, Options 10 and
12; changed by the updates received from the LAN Network Manager; or
speciÞed during customization. For more information about the online tests,
refer to the SynOptics Problem Determination and Service Guide for the Model
3174 Workstation Controller Module; refer to the IBM 3174 Planning Guide
for information about customizing for the 3174-Peer Bridge conÞguration.
To perform the Copy User Data procedure, you will need the following items:
■
From diskette: A Control diskette for copying Vital Product Data.
■
To diskette: A Control diskette. If this diskette has Vital Product Data or
the 3174-Peer parameters, these Þles will be overlaid.
■
The From diskette and the To diskette must be at the same microcode
level, or the From diskette must be at a lower level than the To diskette.
Go to ÒCopy Files ProcedureÓ later in this appendix to perform Copy User
Data.
C-10
893-745-B
How to Determine Maintenance and Microcode Lev-
How to Determine Maintenance and Microcode Levels
When a copy procedure involves a diskette, you will need to know the
maintenance and microcode levels of the diskette. (The exception to this rule is
the Full Copy procedure. Refer to ÒFull CopyÓ earlier in this appendix.) A label
in the upper portion of a diskette identiÞes the diskette type by name, IBM part
number, validation number, and maintenance and microcode levels. The
maintenance and microcode levels appear in the format shown in Figure C-3.
NAME: SAMPLE 2.8 MB 3174 CONTROL
LICENSED INTERNAL CODE - PROPERTY OF IBM
MACHINE 3174 P/N 73G7522 E/C C98439 0035
ML 93282 MICROCODE LVL C3.6 (C) COPYR.
IBM CORP. 1986, 1993 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Maintenance level
Julian year
Julian day
Microcode level:
Configuration level
Release level
Suffix level
4470
Figure C-3. Example of a diskette label showing maintenance and microcode
levels
The maintenance level represents the Julian date, where 95 is the year and 003
is the day of the year (95003 is January 3, 1995). The microcode level consists
of conÞguration, release, and sufÞx levels.
To determine the microcode level of a diskette, compare the sequence of letters
and numbers. For example, a diskette with a microcode level of C3 has a lower
level of microcode than a diskette with a microcode level of C4.
893-745-B
C-11
How To Copy Files
Copy Files Procedure
Use the following steps when you are performing any of the Copy procedures
except Full Copy. (Refer to ÒFull Copy ProcedureÓ earlier in this appendix for
information on the Full Copy procedure.) If you have not already done so, go to
the description of the type of copy you want to perform, and review the items
you need before starting. This information is found earlier in this appendix.
NOTE: Before beginning this procedure, you need to have previously
identiÞed the keyboard (refer to Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for information).
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, do so now.
Refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for
instructions.
2.
On the Master Menu, type 3 after Select ===>
.
Select ===> 3
4468
C-12
893-745-B
Copy Files Procedure
3.
Press the Enter key.
The Copy Menu appears on your screen (see Figure C-4).
______ Copy Menu ______
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Full Copy
Modify and Copy
Copy Customizing Data
Copy Device Definition
Copy Patches
Copy Modified Keyboards
Copy RPQs
Copy User Data
Select ===>
PF: 3=Quit
4467
Figure C-4. Copy Menu
4.
Select and type an option number after Select===>.
5.
Press the Enter key.
The prompt appears at the bottom of the screen with the option you
selected. Available drives appears in place of Select ===>.
Available drives: 1
From ====> 1
To ====> 1
The Available drives Þeld identiÞes the default drive selections for the From
and To diskettes.
6.
Press the Enter key, and follow the prompts that appear on your
screen.
A message to insert the diskette for copying appears on the message line
near the bottom of your screen. Insert the From or To diskette, and press
the Enter key. To complete the procedure, follow the prompts as they
appear on the screen.
893-745-B
C-13
How To Copy Files
For Modify and Copy Only
After you verify your From and To drives for the Modify and Copy procedure,
another panel appears (see Figure C-5). On this Modify and Copy panel, you
can modify the responses entered on the From diskette.
______ Modify and Copy ______
'From' drive (n) responses
099 - XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
104 - XXXXX
105 - XXXX
108 - XXXXXXX
215 - XXXXX
'To' drive (n) responses
099 - XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
104 - XXXXX
105 - XXXX
108 - XXXXXXX
215 - XXXXX
PF: 3=Quit
4472
Figure C-5. The Modify and Copy panel
On this example panel, you can modify responses to Þve conÞguration
questions. Here the Xs represent the responses from the From diskette that
appear on the panel. The n represents the number of the drive that appears on
the panel. In the top half of the panel, the responses previously entered on the
From diskette are displayed. In the bottom half of the panel, you enter only the
responses you want to change.
To change responses, follow these steps:
1.
In the To drive Þelds, type over the responses you want to modify.
If you want, you can leave a response unchanged.
2.
Press the Enter key.
A message appears on the message line while the copying is being
performed.
C-14
893-745-B
WhatÕs Next?
This message indicates the processing of the Copy procedure. You will
receive a message when copying is completed.
After the Copy procedure is completed, a message prompts you to make
another copy.
3.
Insert a To diskette for each additional copy you want to make, and
press Enter.
When you do not want to make any more copies of this From diskette, the
Copy Menu appears on your screen.
WhatÕs Next?
The Copy Menu is displayed on your screen.
You can:
■
Select a different Copy procedure from the Copy Menu.
NOTE: Be sure to refer to the description of the type of Copy you want to
perform, and review the items you will need before starting.
■
Remove any diskettes from the drives if you have completed performing
all the Copy procedures you wanted to perform.
NOTE: Identify any diskettes copied by writing a unique designation
on the label. You must include the ConÞguration and Release level
information on the label, and you may want to identify the speciÞc
Model 3174 module in which the diskette is to be used.
■
Return to the Master Menu by pressing the PF3 key and choose another
customizing procedure. Refer to ÒWorksheet TableÓ to locate the
information for the procedure you have chosen or to determine the next
procedure to perform.
If this is the last customizing procedure you are performing and you are ready
to put the module online, refer to ÒHow to IML the Model 3174 ModuleÓ in
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization.Ó
893-745-B
C-15
Appendix D How To Upgrade Microcode
Periodically, upgraded Utility, Control, and Control Extension or Optional
Feature diskettes may be issued. An upgraded diskette incorporates new
maintenance enhancements, new function, or both for the Model 3174 module.
However, a new, upgraded Control diskette does not contain your current
customization data. The Microcode Upgrade procedure enables you to transfer
customization data from an existing Control diskette to a new Control diskette.
Only customization information will be transferred. Use the Copy Procedure
(Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy FilesÓ) to copy a new microcode release to a
diskette.
The Microcode Upgrade procedure transfers only the customizing data
(conÞguration responses, device deÞnition data) from a previously customized
Control diskette (OLD diskette) to the new, upgraded Control diskette (NEW
diskette). The transferred customizing responses replace the corresponding
responses (if any) on the NEW diskette. The diskette you are transferring the
customizing data to must have the same or higher release, sufÞx, and
maintenance level of microcode as the diskette from which you are transferring
the customizing data.
After the Microcode Upgrade
You may need to perform one or both of the following procedures after the
Microcode Upgrade procedure.
Merge RPQ Procedure
The Microcode Upgrade procedure transfers the names of existing RPQs from
the OLD diskette to the NEW diskette and erases any RPQs that were on the
NEW diskette. However, the Microcode Upgrade procedure does not upgrade
the NEW diskette with the RPQs. You must perform the Merge RPQ procedure
after the Microcode Upgrade procedure if merged RPQs are present on the
OLD Control diskette.
893-745-B
D-1
How To Upgrade Microcode
Customize the Control Diskette Procedure
Some of the customization questions found on the NEW diskette may not exist
on the OLD diskette because the new release of microcode often involves
added conÞguration data. In this case, the Microcode Upgrade utility uses the
default responses to these questions. If you do not want to use the default
responses to these new questions, you must specify responses to the new
questions by customizing the Control diskette after the Microcode Upgrade
procedure. You need to specify responses to the new questions only; the
responses to the other questions are copied by the Microcode Upgrade utility.
See Table D-1 for a list of procedures that may have to be performed after
Microcode Upgrade.
Table D-1. Procedures performed after Microcode Upgrade
Customizing data type
Procedure
Refer to
RPQ
Merge RPQs
The section on merging
RPQs in the IBM 3174
Utilities Guide in this chapter
Modify Keyboard Tables
Modify Keyboards
The section on modifying
keyboards in the IBM 3174
Utilities Guide in this chapter
Enter Configuration Question
Responses (New Questions)
Customize the
Control Disk
“Customizing the Control
Diskette” in Chapter 4,
“Customization”
A few other facts will help you perform a successful Microcode Upgrade:
D-2
■
Patches are not moved during the Microcode Upgrade procedure. Patches
on the NEW (To) diskette remain intact.
■
The Vital Product Data is copied from the OLD diskette to the NEW
diskette.
893-745-B
PF Keys for Microcode Upgrade
PF Keys for Microcode Upgrade
You call up a speciÞc function of the customizing program by pressing a PF
key. A PF key is operational only if it appears on the panel you are using.
Use the following information to reference Upgrade Microcode PF key
functions.
PF
key
Function
PF3
The PF3 (Quit) key quits the procedure without saving any responses since
the last Enter key was pressed. Then the Master Menu appears on your
screen.
PF12
The PF12 (Process) key processes the options specified during this
procedure.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF12 key, use the PA2 key.
Upgrading the Microcode
NOTE: Microcode Upgrade only updates the customization information. If
you need to install a new release of microcode on a diskette, use the Copy
procedure. (Refer to Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for information.)
NOTE: The Microcode Upgrade procedure transfers only customization
information. Do not upgrade the NEW Control diskette, or you could erase
current conÞguration data. Also, if you will be using the Full Copy option of
the Copy Files utility to copy the NEW Control diskette to another diskette
(refer to ÒFull CopyÓ in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy FilesÓ), make sure that
you have used the Microcode Upgrade utility Þrst to transfer your current
conÞguration data to the NEW Control diskette.
If you do want to use the Microcode Upgrade procedure, go to page 1 for a
description of microcode upgrade; then continue.
893-745-B
D-3
How To Upgrade Microcode
Getting Started
Before you start, you need:
■
The identity of the customizing keyboard. If you do not have this
information, refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing
Keyboards.Ó
■
The From disketteÑA customized Control diskette that is referred to as
the OLD diskette. The customizing data on the OLD diskette will be
transferred to the NEW diskette.
■
The To disketteÑA Control diskette that is referred to as the NEW
diskette. This diskette must have the same or higher release, sufÞx, and
maintenance levels as the OLD diskette.
■
A Utility diskette. This diskette must have the same microcode level as the
NEW (To) diskette.
If the sufÞx levels of the OLD and NEW diskettes are equal, the maintenance
level of the NEW diskette must be equal to or higher than the maintenance level
of the OLD diskette. (Refer to ÒHow to Determine Maintenance and Microcode
LevelsÓ in Chapter C, ÒHow To Copy Files.Ó)
Microcode Upgrade Procedure
When you are prepared to begin the procedure, follow these steps:
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, follow the
procedure in ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in Chapter 4,
ÒCustomization.Ó Use a Utility diskette that has the same microcode
level as the NEW (To) diskette.
Refer to ÒHow to Determine Maintenance and Microcode LevelsÓ in
Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for help in determining the microcode
level).
2.
On the Master Menu, type 5 after Select ===>.
Select ===> 5
D-4
3.
Press the Enter key.
4.
Verify drives.
4473
893-745-B
Upgrading the Microcode
The Microcode Upgrade panel is on your screen (see Figure D-1).
______ Microcode Upgrade ______
OLD disk
(Previous Level):
Configuration Level - C
Release Level
- 03
Suffix Level
- 06
Maintenance Level - 933112
Available drives : 1
PF: 3=Quit
NEW disk
(Latest Level):
Configuration Level - C
Release Level
- 06
Suffix Level
- 00
Maintenance Level - 94186
OLD ===> 1 NEW ===> 1
12=Process
4474
Figure D-1. Example of Microcode Upgrade panel for selecting drives
The conÞguration, release, sufÞx, and maintenance levels of the diskettes are
displayed. (The diskette must be inserted before any information will be
displayed.)
The Available drives Þeld on the panel identiÞes the drives available in the
module and the default drive selections for the OLD and NEW diskettes. \If
you do not want to use the default drive selections:
After OLD ===>, type the number for the old drive.
After NEW ===>, type the number for the new drive.
a. Press the Enter key. The OLD and NEW drives that you selected are
highlighted on your screen.
893-745-B
D-5
How To Upgrade Microcode
b. If you speciÞed a diskette drive for OLD, NEW, or both, a message to
insert the diskettes for upgrading appears on the message line near the
bottom of your screen. Insert the appropriate diskettes, and press the
Enter key.
NOTE: Make sure that you are copying your current conÞguration data to the
NEW Control diskette, or you could erase your current conÞguration data.
This procedure checks to ensure that the diskette is valid. If so, the product
level information appears on the panel under the appropriate Þelds.
5.
Upgrade the microcode.
Press the PF12 key to initiate the upgrade of the microcode.
A message appears near the bottom of the screen, indicating when the
upgrading is completed.
6.
If you want to perform another microcode upgrade, continue to
Step 7, next. If you want to quit and not perform another microcode
upgrade, continue to Step 8.
7.
Continue with another microcode upgrade:
a. Insert another OLD or NEW diskette for each upgrade you want to
make.
NOTE: If the microcode level and maintenance levels of the multiple
Control diskettes are the same, use the Copy Customizing Data option
of the Copy procedure. Refer to Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for
more information about the copy option.
b. Press the Enter key. The conÞguration, release, sufÞx, and
maintenance levels of the diskette you inserted are displayed.
c. Press the PF12 key to initiate the upgrade of the microcode. A message
informs you the upgrade is completed.
Repeat this step for as many upgrades as are needed. When you do not
want to upgrade any more diskettes, continue to Step 8.
D-6
893-745-B
WhatÕs Next?
8.
Perform the following steps if you do not want to upgrade any more
diskettes:
a. Remove any diskettes.
b. Ensure that the original Utility diskette is in the drive used to IML.
c. Press the PF3 key. The Master Menu appears on your screen.
d. Go to ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó later in this appendix.
WhatÕs Next?
The Master Menu is displayed on your screen.
You can:
893-745-B
■
Review ÒAfter the Microcode UpgradeÓ and Table 1 for a list of the
procedures performed after a Microcode Upgrade, and perform the
appropriate procedures.
■
Select a different customizing procedure from the Master Menu. Refer to
ÒUsing Worksheet and Task TablesÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó to
locate the information for the procedure you have chosen or to determine
the next procedure to perform.
■
Exit customizing. Remove any diskettes used for the Upgrade procedure
from the drives.
■
Create a backup copy of the Control diskette. Refer to ÒCreating Backup
DiskettesÓ in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files,Ó for information about
creating backup diskettes.
■
Identify any diskettes by writing a unique designation on the label; for
example, you could identify the conÞguration of the diskette and the
Model 3174 module in which it is to be used.
■
IML with the Control diskette that you use for normal operations (perhaps
the one you just upgraded) to put the module online.
D-7
How To Upgrade Microcode
Upgrading the RAM Disk
When upgraded Control diskettes are issued, upgraded Control Extension and
Optional Feature diskettes that contain any new DSL features or improvements
to the existing DSL microcode are also issued. After you upgrade the Control
diskette, you need to merge the upgraded DSL Þles on the Control Extension
and Optional Feature diskette onto your RAM disk to match the microcode
level of the upgraded Control diskette. Refer to Appendix B, ÒHow To Merge
DSL Code,Ó for the procedure and a detailed description.
D-8
893-745-B
Appendix E How To Perform Media Management
Before you start, you will need:
■
Copies of the Utility and Control diskettes.
■
The identity of the customizing keyboard. If you do not have this
information, refer to Appendix F, ÒHow To Identify Customizing
Keyboards.Ó
■
Possibly a copy of the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual.
If you need to perform a Copy procedure, refer to Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy
Files,Ó for information. (Choose the Full Copy option.)
The Media Management procedure provides you with a tool for managing the
data on your diskettes. It allows you to display information about the diskettes
in your module, such as microcode levels and maintenance levels. The Media
Management procedure also allows you to create dump and trace diskettes.
Media Management Options
The Media Management Menu (see Figure E-1) provides you with four
options, but only options 3 and 4 are supported by the Model 3174 module:
■
Display Disk Information option
Allows you to display information about the diskettes in the module, such
as microcode levels and release levels. Selecting option 3, ÒDisplay Disk
Information,Ó presents the Display Disk Information panel, which contains
information about the microcode on the diskette drive and the RAM drive.
■
Create Dump/Trace Diskette option
Allows you to create dump and trace diskettes from the module.
893-745-B
E-1
How To Perform Media Management
____________ Media Management Menu ____________
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
Select/Deselect IML Source
Delete Subdirectory
Display Disk Information
Create Dump/Trace Diskette
Select ===> 1
PF: 3=Quit
4475
Figure E-1. Media Management Menu displayed
PF Keys for Media Management
You call up a speciÞc function of the customizing program by pressing a PF
key. A PF key is operational only if it appears on the panel you are using.
Use the following table to reference Media Management PF key functions.
PF
key
Function
PF3
The PF3 (Quit) key quits the procedure without saving any responses since
the last Enter key was pressed. Then the Master Menu appears on your
screen.
PF12
The PF12 (Process) key processes the options specified during this
procedure.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF12 key, use the PA2 key.
NOTE: The PF13 through 24 keys, on keyboards that contain them, are
mapped into the PF1 through PF12 keys. For example, PF13 is PF1 and PF15
is PF3.
E-2
893-745-B
Display Disk Information Procedure
Display Disk Information Procedure
If you are not familiar with Media Management, you may want to review
introductory material and PF key functions before performing the following
procedure. That material begins earlier in this appendix.
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, do so now. (If
you have the Media Management Menu displayed, go to Step 4.)
To display the Master Menu, refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for instructions.
2.
On the Master Menu, type 7 after Select ===>.
Select ===> 7
4476
3.
Press the Enter key.
The Media Management Menu appears on the screen (see Figure E-2).
____________ Media Management Menu ____________
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
Select/Deselect IML Source
Delete Subdirectory
Display Disk Information
Create Dump/Trace Diskette
Select ===> 3
PF: 3=Quit
4477
Figure E-2. Media Management Menu
893-745-B
E-3
How To Perform Media Management
4.
Type 3 after Select ====> and press the Enter key.
The Media Management Menu appears on the screen with the Available
drives prompt displayed.
Available drives:
5.
1
Select Drive ===>
Type 1 after Select Drive ====> and press the Enter key.
The panel shown in Figure E-3 is displayed. The panel shown here is an
example.
______ Display Disk Information ______
Drive 2
Disk
UTILITY
Microcode
Level
C06.00
Maintenance
Level
91200
Product
Name
3174
Comments
................................
PF: 3=Quit
4478
Figure E-3. Example of a diskette information panel
6.
After viewing the panel, press the PF3 key to return to the Media
Management panel.
Refer to ÒWhatÕs Next?Ó later in this appendix.
E-4
893-745-B
Create Dump/Trace Diskette Procedure
Create Dump/Trace Diskette Procedure
If you are not familiar with Media Management, you may want to review the
introductory material and PF key functions before performing the following
procedure. That material begins on page 1.
1.
If you have not previously displayed the Master Menu, do so now. (If
the Media Management Menu is displayed, go to Step 4.)
To display the Master Menu, refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for instructions.
2.
On the Master Menu, type 7 after Select ===>.
3.
Press the Enter key.
The Media Management Menu appears on the screen (see Figure E-1).
____________ Media Management Menu ____________
Select Option; press ENTER
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
Select/Deselect IML Source
Delete Subdirectory
Display Disk Information
Create Dump/Trace Diskette
Select ===> 4
PF: 3=Quit
4479
Figure E-4. Media Management Menu
893-745-B
E-5
How To Perform Media Management
4.
Type 4 after Select ====> and press the Enter key.
The Available drives prompt appears at the bottom of the screen.
Available drives: Utility ===>
Target ===>
If the Target ====> Þeld is not already completed, choose the drive you
want to be the target.
5.
Press the Enter key.
The insert diskette prompt appears at the bottom of the screen.
6.
Insert the Target diskette into the chosen drive, and press the Enter
key.
The Diskette Creation panel appears (see Figure E-5).
________ Diskette Creation ________
Type an X to select which diskette is to be created.
Drive 2
_ Dump Diskette
_ Trace Diskette
PF: 3=Quit
PF: 12=Process
4480
Figure E-5. Diskette Creation panel
7.
E-6
Type an X to select the diskette to be created.
893-745-B
WhatÕs Next?
8.
9.
Press the Enter key.
■
If there are no errors, a message indicates that responses
are correct.
■
If there are errors, the highlighted error message is presented in the
message area of the screen. Correct any errors according to the
displayed error messages. Refer to the IBM 3174 Status Codes manual
for more information.
Press the PF12 key.
A message appears at the bottom of the screen when processing is
completed.
WhatÕs Next?
You can:
893-745-B
■
Select another option from the Media Management Menu.
■
Press the PF3 key again to return to the Master Menu. Refer to ÒUsing
Worksheet and Task TablesÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó to locate the
information for the procedure you have chosen or to determine the next
procedure to perform.
E-7
Appendix F How To Identify Customizing Keyboards
If your keyboard has the QWERTY layout (see the drawing), you do not need
to select this procedure. If you do not have the QWERTY layout, you need to
identify the customizing keyboard when you Þrst customize or recustomize
with a Utility diskette.
When You First Customize with a Utility Diskette
If the keyboard of the display station being used for customizing is in one of
these languages, you must identify it before you begin any other customizing
procedure:
■
Austrian/German
■
Belgian
■
French, AZERTY
■
Italian
■
Japanese English
■
Japanese Katakana
The default is a QWERTY keyboard layout, which is available in many
languages. On a QWERTY layout, the Þrst six characters on the left side of the
top row of alphabetic characters are Q-W-E-R-T-Y. The same naming scheme
is also used for other types of layouts (for example, the AZERTY layout).
After you complete the Identify Customizing Keyboard procedure later in this
appendix, the customizing keyboard you specify will be supported on that
Utility diskette for all the other customizing procedures.
893-745-B
F-1
How To Identify Customizing Keyboards
When You Recustomize with a Utility Diskette
If you want to change keyboards, or if you do not know what keyboard was
used when the Utility diskette was previously customized, select the Identify
Customizing Keyboard procedure. On the Customizing Keyboard panel, the
keyboard layout that is currently identiÞed on the Utility diskette is highlighted
and the cursor is next to it. If necessary, you can select a different type of
keyboard layout.
The following IBM terminals can be used as the customizing display station:
F-2
■
3178
■
3179 Model 1 operating in native or 3279-emulation mode
■
3180 operating in native or 3278-emulation mode
■
3191
■
3192
■
3194 operating in control unit terminal (CUT) mode
■
3270 Personal Computer with 3278/3279 emulation, operating in CUT
mode
■
3278 (except Model 1)
■
3279
■
5550 family operating in CUT mode
■
5578 operating in CUT mode
■
6150 RT Personal Computer
■
6151 RT Personal Computer
893-745-B
When You Recustomize with a Utility Diskette
PF Keys for Identifying the Customizing Keyboard
You call up a speciÞc function of the customizing program by pressing a PF
key.
Use the following information to reference Customizing Keyboard PF key
functions.
These two PF keys appear on the panel you use during the Identify
Customizing Keyboard procedure.
PF
key
Function
PF3
The PF3 (Quit) key quits the procedure without saving any responses
since the last Enter key was pressed. Then the Master Menu appears on
your screen.
PF12
The PF12 (Process) key processes the options specified during this
procedure.
Note: If you are using a keyboard without a PF12 key, use the PA2 key.
NOTE: The PF13 through PF24 keys, on keyboards that contain them, are
mapped into the PF1 through PF12 keys. For example, PF13 is PF1 and PF15
is PF3.
Procedure for Identifying the Customizing Keyboard
If you have not already done so, you may want to review the introductory
material earlier in this appendix.
1.
Display the Master Menu. (Refer to ÒDisplaying the Master MenuÓ in
Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó for directions.)
2.
Type K after Select ====> and press the Enter key.
NOTE: If you are using a New Turkish keyboard, type M instead of K after
Select ====> and press the Enter key.
893-745-B
F-3
How To Identify Customizing Keyboards
The panel used to identify the customizing keyboard appears on your
screen (see Figure F-1).
________ Customizing Keyboard Type ________
Move cursor to desired keyboard type; press ENTER
_ Austrian/German
_ Belgian
_ French AZERTY
_ Italian
_ Japanese English
_ Japanese Katakana
_ New Turkish
_ QWERTY
PF: 3=Quit
12=Done
4481
Figure F-1. Panel to identify the Customizing Keyboard
The cursor is in front of the current keyboard choice, which is highlighted.
If no other keyboard type has been speciÞed, the cursor is in front of
QWERTY, the default selection.
3.
Put the cursor in front of the selection you want to use and press the
Enter key.
Your selection is highlighted on the screen.
4.
Press the PF12 key to save your input and to return to the Master
Menu.
WhatÕs Next?
Refer to ÒUsing Worksheet and Task TablesÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization,Ó to
locate the information for the procedure you have chosen or to determine the
next procedure to perform.
F-4
893-745-B
Appendix G Keeping Records
There are several methods of record keeping, including duplicating diskettes,
making local copies of the customizing panels, and making copies of the
customizing worksheets. Setting up a record-keeping system now can save you
time later.
If you do the customizing for dozensÑor hundredsÑof Model 3174 modules,
it is recommended that you keep several records of the module customizations,
including using the Central Site Customizing procedure. The IBM 3174
Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide describes that procedure. This appendix
explains other module functions designed to assist you with record keeping.
When there is a problem with the module, the operator or service representative
looks for a record of the customization. Store a set of your local copy
customization records with your other System 3000 documentation.
Local Copy
The Local Copy function is an easy-to-use tool for keeping records. You can
print a copy of each customization panel on your display screen as soon as you
have entered your responses and veriÞed them. Then you can organize a set of
these customization records in module serial-number order and keep them
together in a binder or in a Þle drawer. Perform the Local Copy procedure as
follows.
NOTE: Only printers attached to a terminal port other than port 0-7 can be
used for the Local Copy at customization time.
1.
Turn on the printer.
For Local Copy, a default Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM) is in
operation and authorizes all printer port addresses for all displays.
Therefore, the Þrst authorized available printer you turn on before or
during a customization session can be used for local copies, but only
during that session.
893-745-B
G-1
Keeping Records
On the screen of the customizing display station, the printer assignment
indicator (see Figure G-1) appears in the lower right corner of the screen;
nn is the printer authorized for Local Copy. The number nn, when it is
between 1 and 31, represents the printerÕs port address number on HG 26.
When nn is 70, the default PAM selects the printer. The Local Copy goes
to the printer at the port address with the lowest number. You can specify a
different printer by using the Ident function. (Refer to the documentation
that describes the display station you are using to Þnd the Ident function.)
Printer assignment number
4482
Figure G-1. The Printer Assignment Indicator
2.
Request a Local Copy.
After you complete a customization panel:
a. Press the Enter key to verify your responses.
b. Press the Print key to make a copy of the customization panel that is on
the screen.
G-2
893-745-B
Using the Copy Procedure to Manage Customization
If you request a second copy while the printer is still busy with your Þrst
request, the second copy is queued. If a third copy request is made while
the printer is still busy with the Þrst, the Operator Retry indicator is
displayed in the operator information area. You will have to wait and then
retry the third Local Copy request.
If you want to stop a Local Copy after it has been sent but not yet printed,
press the Device Cancel key. (Refer to the documentation that describes
the display station you are using for this key.)
3.
Attach labels to the printed copies.
Attach labels to the printed copies of the customization panels giving:
Ð The serial number of the module. If you use the module serial number
as your response to conÞguration question 108 (Unique Machine
IdentiÞer), you already have a printed record of the serial number.
Ð The location of the hub.
Ð The date of the customization.
Ð The microcode release level.
Using the Copy Procedure to Manage Customization Data
You can manage your customization data or microcode in several ways: by the
suggested method of electronic distribution (requires the NetView DM
software package), by using the Central Site Customizing Utility (refer to the
IBM 3174 Central Site Customizing UserÕs Guide for more information), or by
using the Copy utility and mailing the diskettes.
If you distribute your customization data on diskettes, there are several
situations when you will be concerned with the management of the diskettes in
your network. Among these are:
■
When modules are initially installed.
You have to provide a customized Control diskette for each of the
Model 3174 modules in your network. Therefore, you must perform the
procedures described in ÒCustomizing the Control DisketteÓ in Chapter 4,
ÒCustomization.Ó
893-745-B
G-3
Keeping Records
■
When diskettes containing upgraded microcode are received.
You may need to perform the procedure in Appendix D, ÒHow To
Upgrade Microcode.Ó If you want to provide new enhancements as well,
you also have to perform procedures described in ÒUsing the Customize
Control Disk MenuÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization.Ó
■
When changes are made to existing conÞgurations.
You must perform the ConÞgure procedure in ÒCustomizing the Control
DisketteÓ in Chapter 4, ÒCustomization.Ó
The following method is suggested if you have one or more of the above
situations and want to use the Copy procedure to manage customization data:
1.
Prepare a master Control diskette at the central site.
If possible, test the master Control diskette by performing a successful
IML.
2.
Use the Copy utility to make copies for the other Model 3174 modules
in your network.
3.
Use a reusable shipping container to send the customized diskettes to
the Model 3174 module for which they were made.
You should enclose a note to the location personnel telling them to insert
the diskette and perform an IML on their Model 3174 module. Also,
instruct them to return the reusable shipping container, with the old
diskettes, to the central site machine location.
4.
Maintain a record of the diskettes in your network to show the
diskette type and release level and the date that the diskette was
installed.
For additional information about the Copy Files procedures, refer to
Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files.Ó
G-4
893-745-B
Duplicate Diskettes
Duplicate Diskettes
Making a duplicate of each Utility, Control, and Control Extension diskette is
highly recommended. The duplicate diskette can be used as a backup for the
original diskette.
To make a duplicate Utility, Control, or Control Extension diskette, use the Full
Copy or Copy Customizing Data option. The planning and procedural
information for these copy options is in Appendix C, ÒHow To Copy Files.Ó
You should identify any diskette that you duplicate. AfÞx a label to the upper
portion of the diskette. The label identiÞes the diskette type by name. In
addition, you may want to write a unique designation of your own on the label.
For example, you could speciÞcally identify the conÞguration and the hub and
Model 3174 module for which the diskette is to be customized and used.
893-745-B
G-5
Appendix H SpeciÞcations
This appendix lists speciÞcations for the Model 3174 module. There are four
subsections:
■
General speciÞcations
■
Electrical speciÞcations
■
Environmental speciÞcations
■
Physical speciÞcations
General SpeciÞcations
Data rate:
4 or 16 Mb/s
Terminal port connectors: 4 DPCs (dual-purpose connectors)
Terminal port cabling:
Coaxial or ICS Types 1, 2, 3, and 9
Maximum number of
Category A devices:
32
Communication (Comm)
port connector:
25-pin D-shell
Comm port cabling:
CCITT V.24/V.28 (EIA 232-D) or CCITT V.35
Installation attachment:
Two thumbscrews on the front panel
Electrical SpeciÞcations
Backplane interface:
Maximum current
requirements:
Watts:
893-745-B
Two 95-pin DIN male connectors, compatible with
SynOptics System 3000 and 3030 concentrators.
+ 5V dc at 5.00 Amps
Ð 5V dc at 0.030 Amps
+12V dc at 0.140 Amps
Ð12V dc at 0.200 Amps
25.0 (maximum)
H-1
Specifications
Environmental SpeciÞcations
Operating temperature: 0¼ to 45¼ C (32¼ to 113¼ F)
Storage temperature:
-40¼ to 60¼ C (-40¼ to 140¼ F)
Relative humidity:
8% to 80%
Wet bulb:
23¼C (73¼ F)
Noise level:
2 bels (idle)
Starting current:
5.0 Amps
Physical SpeciÞcations
H-2
Dimensions:
(L) 8.6 by (W) 2.0 by (H) 10.6 in
(L) 21.7 by (W) 5.1 by (H) 26.9 cm
Weight:
3.06 lbs (1.39 kg)
893-745-B
Appendix I ConÞguration Worksheets
Permission to Copy: You are authorized to copy the worksheets in this
appendix. Make as many copies of these worksheets as you need to plan for
customizing. Save the blank originals for later planning.
Worksheet Introduction
See Chapter 3, ÒCustomization Planning,Ó for information on completing the
worksheets. If you need more detailed information, use the following list for
pointers to the appropriate chapters in the IBM 3174 Planning Guide:
893-745-B
For worksheets
Detailed information
is found in
1–10D, 51A, 53-53S
Chapter 6
11A
Chapter 7
12
Chapter 9
13–13S, 52
Chapter 10
14
Chapter 12
15–21
Chapter 13
22A–24H
Chapter 14
25A–31D
Chapter 15
38–41
Chapter 16
45–47
Chapter 17
49
Chapter 3
50
Chapter 19
54-56
Chapter 11
Keyboards
Chapter 18
I-1
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 1ÑHost Attachment
Date: ____________
Serial: ____________
Customized by: ____________
Model: ____________
Location: ____________
Telephone: ____________
Common Network
Online Test Password
098-
Product Assitance Data
099-
3174 Model
100X X X
Host Attachment
101X
LAN Adapter Type
1020
NSO Selection
(1-BSC
2-SDLC
3-X.25
4-Non-SNA Channel
5-SNA Channel
6-SDLC, X.21 Switched
7-Token-Ring Network
8-Ethernet Network
9-Frame-Relay Network
M-Multi-Host)
(0-None
1-Token-Ring
2-Ethernet)
1030 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5714
I-2
098:
Online Test Password
099:
Product Assistance Data
100:
3174 Model Designation
101:
Host Attachment
102:
LAN Adapter Type
103:
Non-Standard Operation Selection
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 2ÑMulti-Host DeÞnition
Multi-Host Definition
Host
ID
Adapter
type
Host
attach
Hardware
group
Include
In IML
Host descriptor
1A
2A
3A
4484
893-745-B
I-3
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 4ÑSDLC
Host ID: ______
_
SDLC
104-
105-
121-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
123-
1250
0 1
0
141-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
150A
172-
213310-
0
0
0
168-
166-
0
A
179-
1900
0 0
0 0
220-
313-
365-
0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0 0 0 0 0
0
0
175-
215-
1270 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0
165-
1730
0
1380
0
0 0 0 0
126-
1370
1160
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
136-
132--
110-
1080 0
X X
318-
3170
0
3400
0
3700
0
4485
I-4
104:
Controller (Model 3174 module) Address
105:
Upper Limit Address
108:
Unique Machine Identifier
110:
MLT Configuration Level
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
123:
CECP Support
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
126:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
127:
RTM Definition
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
893-745-B
132:
Alternate Keyboard Selection
136:
Standard Keyboard Layouts
137:
Modified Keyboard Layouts
138:
Standard Keypad Layouts
141:
Magnetic Character Set
150:
LAN/ISDN Network Gateway Controller
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
166:
Attribute Select Keypad
168:
Additional Extension-Mode Key Definition
172:
PS/55ÐModel 3174 Module Printer Sharing
173:
DFT Options
175:
DFT Password
179:
Local Format Storage
190:
Number of ISDN DSPUs
213:
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
215:
Physical Unit Identification
220:
Alert Event Report Function
310:
Connect-Data-Set-to-Line Operation
313:
NRZ or NRZI Encoding
317:
Telecommunication Facilities
318:
Full- or Half-Speed Transmission
340:
RTS Control Options
365:
X.21 Switched Host DTE Connection
370:
Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size
I-5
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 5ÑX.25
Host ID: ______
X.25
104-
108X X
110-
121-
123-
0
0
0
0
1370
0
0
165-
141-
213-
0
1680
1790 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
365-
2200 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
175-
215-
370--
0
A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0
166-
1730
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
138-
0
1
A
172-
0
127-
1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
136-
132-
0
0 0 0 0
1250
0 1
1160
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
3720
0
0
4486
I-6
104:
Controller (Model 3174 module) Address
108:
Unique Machine Identifier
110:
MLT Configuration Level
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
123:
CECP Support
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
126:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
893-745-B
127:
RTM Definition
132:
Alternate Keyboard Selection
136:
Standard Keyboard Layouts
137:
Modified Keyboard Layouts
138:
Standard Keypad Layouts
141:
Magnetic Character Set
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
166:
Attribute Select Keypad
168:
Additional Extension-Mode Key Definition
172:
PS/55ÐModel 3174 Printer Sharing
173:
DFT Options
175:
DFT Password
179:
Local Format Storage
213:
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
215:
Physical Unit Identification
220:
Alert Event Report Function
365:
X.21 Data Transfer Delay
370:
Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size
372:
Autocall/Autodisconnect
I-7
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 5SÑSecondary X.25
Host ID: ______
X.25
110-
104X X
1160
0 0 0 0
0
125-
121-
1270 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1
0
0
1390 0
165-
1791
213-
0
2151
2200 0 0 0 0
0
0
221-
0
3650
3700
3720
0
0
4487
I-8
104:
Controller (Model 3174 module) Address
110:
MLT Configuration Level
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
127:
RTM Definition
139:
CCA Keyboard Language
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
172:
PS/22ÐModel 3174 Module Printer Sharing
179:
Local Format Storage
213:
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
215:
Physical Unit Identification
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
893-745-B
220:
Alert Event Report Function
221:
3174 (Model 3174 module) Alert Control Point
365:
X.21 Data Transfer Delay
370:
Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size
372:
Autocall/Autodisconnect
*
Responses cannot be entered. Responses provided on the worksheet
for the primary host on the primary link fill these fields automatically
during the customizing procedures. If you are configuring for
secondary hosts or links, some of the questions shown on this
worksheet may not apply to your configuration.
I-9
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 9ÑToken-Ring Network
Host ID: ______
Token Ring Network
106-
107-
108X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X 0 4
X X X X
0 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
116-
1100
0
0 0 0 0
121-
1230
1250
1
1260 0 0 0 0 0 0
136-
1320
0
0
0
0
0
0
165-
0
173-
172-
213-
0
0
0
179-
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
2200 0 0 0 0
382-
0
168-
175-
2151
0
A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1660
A
0
138-
1370
141-
1270 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
3830 5 2 1
2
385-
386I
B
M
L
A
N
1
4488
I-10
106:
LAN Address and SAP
107:
Gateway Address and SAP
108:
Unique Machine Identifier
110:
MLT Configuration level
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
893-745-B
123:
CECP Support
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
126:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
127:
RTM Definition
132:
Alternate Keyboard Selection
136:
Standard Keyboard Layouts
137:
Modified Keyboard Layouts
138:
Standard Keypad Layouts
141:
Magnetic Character Set
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
166:
Attribute Select Keypad
168:
Additional Extension-Mode Key Definition
172:
PS/55ÐModel 3174 Printer Sharing
173:
DFT Options
175:
DFT Password
179:
Local Format Storage
213:
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
215:
Physical Unit Identification
220:
Alert Event Report Function
382:
Transmit I-Frame Size
383:
LAN Maximum Out
385:
Link Subsystem Name
386:
Receive I-Frame Size
I-11
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 9SÑSecondary Token-Ring Network
Host ID: ______
Token Ring Network
106- * * * *
X X X X
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
107X X X X X X X X X X X X 0
X X X X X X X X 0 4
4
1160
125-
121-
* * * * *
0 0
1270
0
0
1650
1790
215-
382-
0
221-
2200 0 0 0 0
0
0
3830 5 2 1
2
4489
I-12
106:
LAN Address and SAP
107:
Gateway Address and SAP
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
127:
RTM Definition
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
179:
Local Format Storage
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
893-745-B
215:
Physical Unit Identification
220:
Alert Event Report Function
221:
3174 (Model 3174 module) Alert Control Point
382:
Transmit I-Frame Size
383:
LAN Maximum Out
*
Responses cannot be entered. Responses provided on the worksheet
for the primary host attachment for the primary link fill these fields
automatically during the customizing procedures.
I-13
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 10AÑPresentation Space (MLT)
Controller Port Number
Device Type/Screen Size
EAB? Number of
Y/N
Sessions
PS Storage
Required
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
Subtotal (amount for HG 26 devices only) required: Move total to Worksheet 10D
I-14
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 10DÑPresentation Space Storage
Storage Space Subtotal Source
Subtotal
Worksheet 10A—HG 26
Question 001: Local Copy Print Queue Presentation Space
See “Determining PS Storage Requirements” in Chapter 3, “Customization Planning.”
Question 006: Copy Session-to-Session Presentation Space
4K x number of ports configured (See Worksheet 10A)
Split Screen Function with TCP/IP
2K x number of LTs without EABs
_____
4K x number of LTs with EABs
_____
Total (use for Worksheet 49):
893-745-B
I-15
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 11AÑ117: Port Assignment
Host ID: ______
117: Port assignment
Host addresses
Port
IS
1
2
3
Host addresses
4
5
Port
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
2611
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
27-00
27-01
27-02
27-03
27-04
27-05
27-06
27-07
27-08
27-09
27-10
27-11
27-12
27-13
27-14
27-15
27-16
27-17
27-18
27-19
27-20
27-21
27-22
27-23
27-24
27-25
27-26
27-27
27-28
27-29
27-30
27-31
IS
1
2
3
4
5
4490
I-16
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
NOTE: Remember that the Þrst column (1) represents the hostÕs primary
address.
893-745-B
I-1
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 12Ñ128: RTM
Host ID: ______
Circle the name that indicates the response you want to specify. If you circle
Version A or Version B, write your responses on the corresponding panel.
Default Values
Version A
128: RTM Definition
B1
00
01
0
00
02
0
00
05
0
00
10
0
B2
B3
B4
5785
Version B
128: RTM Definition
F10 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
B1
00
01
0
00
02
0
00
05
0
00
10
0
B2
B3
B4
4491
I-2
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 13ÑX.25 Options
Host ID: ______
332:X.25 Options
400-
402-
4010 0
0
4
0
409-
420-
4210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
423-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
424-
430-
431-
434-
433-
4320 2
1
1
2
4351
0 2
440-
441-
442-
9
451-
450-
461-
453-
452-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X X
X X X X
462-
463-
464-
465-
466-
4492
893-745-B
400:
Network Type
401:
Circuit Type
402:
Logical Channel Identifier
409:
X.25 Keyboard Support Options
420:
Incoming Call Options
421:
Outgoing Call Options
423:
Host DTE Address
424:
3174 (Model 3174 module) DTE Address
430:
Negotiated Packet Size
I-3
Configuration Worksheets
I-4
431:
Packet Sequence Numbering
432:
Negotiated Window Size
433:
K-Maximum Out
434:
Nonstandard Default Packet Size
435:
Nonstandard Default Window Size
440:
Throughput Class Negotiation
441:
Closed User Group
442:
Recognized Private Operating Agency
450:
Link Level Transmit Timeout
451:
Number of Retries
452:
Connection Identifier Password
453:
Connection Options
461:
Lowest Incoming Channel
462:
Highest Incoming Channel
463:
Lowest Two-Way Channel
464:
Highest Two-Way Channel
465:
Lowest Outgoing Channel
466:
Highest Outgoing Channel
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 13SÑSecondary X.25 Options
Host ID: ______
332:X.25 Options
401-
4024
409-
X X X X
4201 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
4210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
423-
430-
4320 2
1
440-
441-
442-
9
452-
4530 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4493
893-745-B
401:
Circuit Type
402:
Logical Channel Identifier
409:
X.25 Keyboard Support Options
420:
Incoming Call Options
421:
Outgoing Call Options
423:
Host DTE Address
430:
Negotiated Packet Size
432:
Negotiated Window Size
I-5
Configuration Worksheets
I-6
440:
Throughput Class Negotiation
441:
Closed User Group
442:
Recognized Private Operating Agency
452:
Connection Identifier Password
453:
Connection Options
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 14ÑCommon SNA
Common SNA
500-
501-
502-
511-
512-
0
5100
4494
893-745-B
500:
CSCM Unique
501:
Network ID (NETID)
502:
Logical Unit Name (LUNAME)
510:
APPN Network Controller
511:
APPN Control Point Name (CPNAME)
512:
APPN Virtual Node Name (VNODE)
I-7
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 15ÑAPPN Node DeÞnition
APPN Node Definition
610- Sessions
611-Nodes/Links
1
0
612- Wildcard
613-Host/Link
1
1A
Alert Focal Point Name (614-615):
614 FP Name
615 FP NETID
Report to Alert Focal Point (616):
616 Host Links
DLUS Primary Host Name (620-621):
620 CPNAME
621 NETID
DLUS Backup Host Name (622-623):
622 CPNAME
623 NETID
4495
I-8
610:
APPN Sessions
611:
APPN Nodes/Links
612:
APPN Wildcard Option
613:
APPN Wildcard Host Link
614:
Alert Focal Point Name
615:
Alert Focal Point NETID
616:
Report to Alert Focal Point (host links)
620:
Primary DLUS Host CPNAME
621:
Primary DLUS Host NETID
622:
Backup DLUS Host CPNAME
623:
Backup DLUS Host NETID
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 16ÑNetwork Resources
Network Resources
CPNAME
NODETYPE LUs
(1-4)
(X)
DLCTYPE
(1-6)
ADDRESS
DLCI
4496
893-745-B
I-9
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 16AÑNetwork Resources QualiÞers
Network Resources Qualifiers
CPNAME
NETID
PUNAME
4497
I-10
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 17ÑAssociated LUs
Associated LUs
CPNAME
LUNAME
LUNAME
LUNAME
LUNAME
SERVING NN
4498
NOTE: If your customizing keyboard is not (U.S. English) QWERTY
Typewriter, press the Dup key to enter an asterisk (*). For more information
about customizing your keyboard, refer to the 3174 Utilities Guide.
893-745-B
I-11
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes
X.25 APPN Nodes
CPNAME
PROFILE
(01-16)
(1A-1H)
CONNECTION
ID
LCN
DTE ADDR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5732
I-12
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 18ÑCOS DeÞnition
COS Definition
COS Definition Number(1-14)
Model Definition Number(0-14)
Definition Numbers
0. Clear Definition
1. #BATCH
8.
2. #BATCHSC
9.
3. #INTER
10.
4. #INTERSC
11.
5. #CONNECT
12.
6.
13.
7.
14.
When using models 1-5, IBM-supplied defaults will always be invoked.
4499
893-745-B
I-13
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 19ÑCOS Node DeÞnition
COS Node Definition
COS Name=
Transmission Priority (1,2,3)=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Node Weight
(0-255)
Route Addition
Min
Resistance
Max
(0-255)
Congestion
Min
(0,1)
Max
4500
I-14
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 20AÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition
COS Transmission Group Definition
COS Name=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TG Weight (0-255)
Cost/Connect
Min
(0-255)
Max
Cost/Byte
Min
(0-255)
Max
User-Defined 1
Min
(0-255)
Max
User-Defined 2
Min
(0-255)
Max
User-Defined 3
Min
(0-255)
Max
4501
893-745-B
I-15
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 20BÑCOS Transmission Group DeÞnition Continued
COS Transmission Group Definition Continued
COS Name=
Link Speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Min
Max
(0-MIN 1=1.2K 2=2.4K 3=4.8K 4=7.2K 5=9.6K 6=14.4K 7=19.2K 8=48K
9=56K 10=64K 11=4M 12=16M 13=MAX)
Security
Min
Max
(0=NONSECURE 1=PUBSWTNET 2=UNDRGRDCB 3=SECURECND 4=GUARDCND 5=ENCRYPTED
6=MAX)
Propagation
Min
Delay
Max
(0=MIN 1=LAN 2=TELEPHONE 3=PKTSWTNET 4=SATELLITE 5=MAX)
4502
I-16
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 21ÑMode/COS Correlation
Mode/COS Correlation
Mode Name
#
COS Name
#BATCH
#BATCH
#BATCHSC
#BATCHSC
#INTER
#INTER
#INTERSC
#INTERSC
blank
#CONNECT
Mode Name
#
COS Name
Define Mode/COS pairs. To specify IBM-supplied COS names, place 1-5 in
the #-column. 1=#BATCH 2=#BATCHSC 3=#INTER 4=#INTERSC 5=#CONNECT
4503
893-745-B
I-17
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Options
_______________________________________________________________________________
_________ 3174-Peer and Bridges Options _________
650 Ð __
DeÞne 3174-Peer Support
(Y,N)
656 Ð __
Multiport Bridging
(O-None
1-Source Route Bridging
_________________________________________________________________________________
I-18
650:
Define 3174-Peer Support
656:
Multiport Bridging
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 22BÑ3174-Peer DeÞnition
3174-Peer Definition
3174-Peer Options
651 -
3174-Peer Bridge Support
656 -
Multiport Bridging (0=none, 1=Source Route Bridging)
3174-Peer Parameters
660 - 4000
PN 3174-Peer Port Address Range
661 -
Percentage of Discard Threshold
5611
893-745-B
651:
3174-Peer Bridge Support
656:
Multiport Bridging
660:
PN 3174-Peer Port Address Range
661:
Percentage of Discard Threshold
I-19
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 22CÑSource Route Bridge DeÞnition
Source Route Bridge Definition
Bridge Parameters
680 -
Bridge Number (0-F)
681 -
Bridge Maximum Frame Forward Size
(1=516 bytes, 2=1500 bytes, 3=2052 bytes)
682 -
Bridge Performance Threshold
683 -
Logging Interval
(00 Hours 00 Minutes to 99 Hours 59 Minutes)
684 -
Alert Threshold (000 to 255)
685 -
Token Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode (Y, N)
5612
I-20
680:
Bridge Number
681:
Bridge Maximum Frame Forward Size
682:
Bridge Performance Threshold
683:
Logging Interval
684:
Alert Threshold
685:
Token Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces
Source Route Bridge Interface
Interface
––––––
Segment
Number
––––––
Frame Forwarding
Active (Y, N)
––––––––––––
Peer
Token Ring
TP (Frame Relay)
5613
893-745-B
I-21
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode
Manual Spanning Tree Mode
Interface
––––––
Forward
STE Frames
(Y, N)
––––––––
Peer
Token Ring
TP (Frame Relay)
5614
I-22
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge ProÞle
_______________________________________________________________________________
_________ 3174-Peer Bridge ProÞle _________
670 Ð __
Bridge Number (0ÐF)
671 Ð __ __ __
Token-Ring Segment Number (001ÐFFF)
672 Ð __ __ __
3174-Peer Segment Number (001ÐFFF)
673 Ð __
Token-Ring Hop Count (1Ð7)
674 Ð __
Frame Forwarding Active (Y, N, W)
675 Ð __ __ __ __ Bridge Performance Threshold (0000Ð9999)
(Frames Discarded Per 10,000)
676 Ð ____ ____ Logging Interval (00-99 hours 00Ð59 minutes)
677 Ð __ __ __
Alert Threshold (000Ð255)
_______________________________________________________________________________
893-745-B
670:
Bridge Number
671:
Token-Ring Segment Number
672:
3174-Peer Segment Number
673:
Token-Ring Hop Count
674:
Frame Forwarding Active
675:
Bridge Performance Threshold
676:
Logging Interval
676:
Alert Threshold
I-1
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 23BÑBridge Management
Bridge Management
652 653 -
LAN Manager Support
3174 Online Test Updates
LAN Manager Profile
690 -
Reporting Link 0 Password (0-9, A-Z)
691 -
Reporting Link 1 Password (0-9, A-Z)
692 -
Reporting Link 2 Password (0-9, A-Z)
693 -
Reporting Link 3 Password (0-9, A-Z)
5615
I-2
652:
LAN Manager Support
653:
3174 Online Test Updates
690:
Reporting Link 0 Password
691:
Reporting Link 1 Password
692:
Reporting Link 2 Password
693:
Reporting Link 3 Password
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 24AÑFilter DeÞnition
Filter Definition
Interface:
Select Option; press Enter.
To save the filter definition, press PF8, then press PF12.
Option
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Hop Count
Source SAP
SNAP Ethertype
Route Designator
MAC Address
Frame Data and Offset
99
Filter Order Definiton
Select==>
5616
893-745-B
1:
Hop Count
2:
Source SAP
3:
SNAP Ethertype
4:
Route Designator
5:
MAC Address
6:
Frame Data and Offset
99:
Filter Order DeÞnition
I-3
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 24BÑHop Count Filters
Hop Count Filter
Interface:
Receive
Transmit
Type:
Type:
Hop Count (1-7):
Hop Count (1-7):
5617
I-4
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 24CÑSource SAP Filters
Source SAP Filters
Interface:
Receive
Type:
Mode:
Status:
Transmit
Type:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Mode:
Status:
5618
893-745-B
I-5
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters
SNAP Ethertype Filters
Interface:
Receive
Type:
Mode:
Status:
Transmit
Type:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Mode:
Status:
5619
I-6
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 24EÑRoute Designator Filters
Route Designator Filters
Interface:
Receive
Type:
Transmit
Mode:
Status:
Type:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Value:
Mask:
Mode:
Status:
5620
893-745-B
I-7
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 24FÑMAC Address Filters
MAC Address Filters
Interface:
Receive
Type:
Mode:
Status:
Destination
Address:
Mask:
Source
1. Address:
Mask:
2. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
3. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
4. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
5. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
Transmit
Type:
Source
1. Address:
Mask:
Mode:
Status:
Destination
Address:
Mask:
2. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
3. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
4. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
5. Address:
Mask:
Address:
Mask:
5621
I-8
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters
Frame Data and Offset Filters
Interface:
Receive
Type:
Mode:
Status:
1. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
2. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
3. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
4. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
5. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
Frame Data and Offset Filters
Interface:
Transmit
Type:
Mode:
Status:
1. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
2. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
3. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
4. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
5. Value:
Offset into Frame:
Value:
Mask:
5622
893-745-B
I-9
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 24HÑFilter Order DeÞnition
Filter Order Definition
Interface:
Default
Order
Hop Count Filter
Source SAP Filter
SNAP Ethertype Filter
Route Designator Filter
MAC Address Filter
Frame Data and Offset Filter
1
2
3
4
5
6
New
Receive
Order
New
Transmit
Order
1
1
5623
I-10
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram
Station Set
Name
IBM Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
ASCII or TCP/IP Host
Note:
For 3270 Stations
Port Type=Coax=1
Terminal
Adaptor
HG-26
Port Set
Name
Station Set
Name
Station Set
Number
= VMSYS2
= TCP HOST
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
= 1
= 2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Default Destinations
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
3270
Display=3D
Printer=3P
Station
Type
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
4504
893-745-B
I-11
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 27ÑAEA and TCP/IP ConÞgure
AEA and TCP/IP Configure
7000
0
7021
7030
710-
712-
7110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4505
I-12
700:
Configure the AEA and TCP/IP Feature
702:
Control Key Assignment
703:
Request MLT for AEA
710:
Miscellaneous ASCII Feature Options (A)
711:
Miscellaneous ASCII Feature Options (B)
712:
Miscellaneous ASCII Feature Options (C)
713:
Miscellaneous ASCII Feature Options (D)
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 28ÑPort Set
Port Set
Name
Session Limit
Port Type
Modem Type
Password
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4506
893-745-B
I-13
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map
Port to Port Set Map
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3270 Ports
26-00 to 26-07
26-08 to 26-15
26-16 to 26-23
26-24 to 26-31
27-00 to 27-07
27-08 to 27-15
27-16 to 27-23
27-24 to 27-31
AEA Ports
21-00 to 21-07
22-00 to 22-07
23-00 to 23-07
5733
I-14
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set
AEA and TCP/IP Station Set
722-
721-
723-
7251
731-
7321
741-
7331
7420 0 0
751-
734-
735-
0
743-
0 1 5
7360
7441
7450
7371
7460
0
0
752-
761-
763-
7621
1
772-
7711
7731
0
1
7830
0
7741
782-
781-
765-
7641
7751
7840 6 6
790-
7761
785-
7861 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1
1
787132
0
7910 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4508
893-745-B
721:
Station Set Name
722:
Station Type
723:
Port Set Name
725:
Host Connection Menu Option
731:
Flow Control Type
732:
XON/XOFF Transmission Resumption Trigger
733:
Line Speed
734:
Line Speed (Host Upper Limit)
735:
Parity
736:
Stop Bits
I-15
Configuration Worksheets
I-16
737:
Maximum Modem Line Speed
741:
Switched Disconnect Timeout
742:
Inactivity Timeout
743:
Prompt for Universal/Specific Keyboard Map
744:
Number of Bits Per Character
745:
ASCII Display Character Set
746:
Translate Option
751:
Terminal Type Supported by the ASCII Host
752:
ASCII Host Phone Number
761:
Auto XON/XOFF
762:
Wraparound Option
763:
New Line Option
764:
Margin Bell
765:
DEC Host ASCII Character Set
771:
Automatic Line Feed for Cursor Control
772:
Carriage Return/Carriage Return - Line Feed Selection
773:
Automatic New Line for Cursor Control
774:
Scrolling
775:
Line Turnaround Character
776:
IBM ASCII Host Character Set
781:
Attached Printer Prompt
782:
Use of Form Feed
783:
Page Length
784:
Printer Character Set
785:
AEA Printer Options
786:
Page Width
787:
LU1 SCS Transparency Translation
790:
Default IP Address
791:
Non-standard Port Number
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
893-745-B
I-17
Configuration Worksheets
AEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
Station
Set
1
Station Set
Limit
Session
Limit
LT1
LT2
Session
LT3
LT4
LT5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
4509
I-18
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 31AÑTCP/IP Options
TCP/IP Options Menu
LAN IP Address
LAN Subnet Mask
052 054 -
Maximum Telnet Connections
TCP/IP Buffer Space
057
058
059
060
Routing Field Support
All Routes Broadcast
062 064 -
Frame Relay IP Address
Frame Relay Subnet Mask
066 068 -
-
(Y,N)
(000-250)
(00-99)
K(K=1024 bytes)
(Y,N)
(Y,N)
4510
893-745-B
052:
LAN IP Address
054:
LAN Subnet Mask
057:
IP Routing
058:
Maximum Telnet Connections
059:
Maximum Printer Connections
060:
TCP/IP Buffer Space
062:
Routing Field Support
064:
All Routes Broadcast
066:
Frame-Relay IP Address
068:
Frame-Relay Subnet Mask
I-19
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information
TCP/IP Routing Information
Destination IP Address
Type
(N,S,H,D)
Router IP Address
4511
I-20
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services
TCP/IP Domain Name Services
3174 Hostname
3174 Domain Name
Domain Nameserver IP Addresses
4512
NOTE: If your customizing keyboard is not (U.S. English) QWERTY Typewriter, press the Dup
key to enter a hyphen (-). For more information about customizing your keyboard, refer to the
3174 Utilities Guide.
893-745-B
I-21
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 31DÑTCP/IP 3174 DeÞned Nicknames
TCP/IP 3174 Defined Nicknames
Nickname
IP Address
4513
I-22
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 31EÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements
TCP/IP SNMP Enhancements
Community Name
TRAP:
IP Address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
GET:
4514
893-745-B
I-23
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 38ÑDevice DeÞnition
Device Definition
800 Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM)-
0 0
801 Logical Terminal Assignment (LTA)0
802 Prompts for Extended VPD0
803 ISDN Definition0
4515
I-24
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM)
PAM Definition
Entry
Printer
Port
Mode
Class
7
8
01234
56789
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
012345
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ASCII Displays Ports
3270 Displays Ports
Entry
0
HG 01234
56789
1
01234
56789
01234
56789
01
26
27
26
27
26
27
26
27
26
27
26
27
26
27
26
27
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
HG 21
01234567
HG 22
01234567
HG
23
01234567
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
4516
893-745-B
I-25
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment (LTA)
Logical Terminal Assignment
Port
LT1 LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
Port
26-00
26-01
26-02
26-03
26-04
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-10
2611
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-25
26-26
26-27
26-28
26-29
26-30
26-31
27-00
27-01
27-02
27-03
27-04
27-05
27-06
27-07
27-08
27-09
27-10
27-11
27-12
27-13
27-14
27-15
27-16
27-17
27-18
27-19
27-20
27-21
27-22
27-23
27-24
27-25
27-26
27-27
27-28
27-29
27-30
27-31
LT1 LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
4517
I-26
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (EVPD)
Extended Vital Product Data
Label Descriptions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4518
893-745-B
I-27
Configuration Worksheets
I-28
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 45ÑCommon Network
Common Network
900-
905X X X X X X X X X X X X
0
9081
4
I
B
M
L
A
N
9120
0
920I
B M
I S
D
N
925-
4519
893-745-B
900:
LAN Address and SAP
905:
Token-Ring Error Alerts
908:
LAN Link Subsystem Name
912:
Group Poll Address
920:
Link Subsystem Name for ISDN Network
925:
Number of LAN DSPUs for Frame Relay
I-1
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 46ÑLAN Address Assignment
940: Ring Address Assignment
S
Ring
Address
S
T
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
0 4
0
Ring
Address
SAP
T
SAP
4520
I-2
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 47ÑLAN Transmission DeÞnition
941: Ring Transmission Definition
S
Ring
Address
SAP
F
W
S
Ring
Address
SAP
F
W
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
0 4
4521
893-745-B
I-3
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 49ÑStorage Requirements
Values are in KB (1024 bytes). Select only one value from each group.
Function
Base
Multi-Host Support (Single-Link Multi-Host Support)
Single-Link Multi-Host Support
Requires
Totals:
2050
159
2 Hosts on the link
54
3 Hosts on the link
108
4 Hosts on the link
162
5 Hosts on the link
216
6 Hosts on the link
270
7 Hosts on the link
324
8 Hosts on the link
Presentation Space Storage Requirement (MLT
Level or Exact Amount)
378
Level 1
64
Level 2
128
Level 3
512
Level 4
896
Level 5
1152
Level 6
1536
Level 7
2048
Level 8
2688
Exact Amount (from Worksheet 10D)
Local Format Storage
________
Level 1
77
Level 2
141
Level 3
269
Level 4
525
Level 5
1037
Level 6
3174-Peer Communication
1548
3174-Peer
3174-Peer and Bridge Support
I-4
2050
________
________
________
________
82
181
________
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Function
Requires
Totals:
Bridging Options (in addition to any storage required
for 3174-Peer Communications)
69
LAN Network Manager
150
Optional LAN Adapter (see Note 5)
Multiport Bridging
When 3174-Peer Segment is selected
150
When 3174-Peer Segment is not selected (remote
bridging only)
Central Site Change Management without APPN
200
Network Site Controller
248
Central Site Controller port
248
________
Central Site Change Management with APPN
Network Site Controller
155
Central Site Controller
APPN Support
155
Sessions
Nodes
225
20
968
225
75
1188
225
150
1666
225
225
1966
500
20
1408
500
75
1628
500
150
2106
500
225
2406
750
20
1808
750
75
2028
750
150
2506
750
225
2806
1000
20
2208
1000
75
2428
1000
150
2906
1000
Additional APPN Support
225
3206
Frame Relay without frame-relay host
90
Opt. LAN Adapter without Gateway or TCP/IP over
LAN
80
893-745-B
________
________
________
I-5
Configuration Worksheets
Function
Requires
Totals:
TCP/IP Support
Base
362
TCP/IP over LAN without LAN host or LAN Gateway
150
TCP/IP over frame relay
25
YCP/IP Feature with SNMP and SNMP Extensions
Additional TCP/IP Functions
50
Number of sessions
________
7 x W (see Note 1)
(W= Sum of responses to questions 058 + 059)
SNMP
50
TCP/IP data buffers
Frame-Relay Support
X (see Note 2)
Additional receive buffer space
________
Y (see Note 3)
DLCIs specified
.2 (Z) (see Note 4)
With frame-relay host attachment
130
Without frame-relay host attachment
LAN Gateway Support
Calculator Function
PS/55–3174 Printer Sharing Function
RPQ Storage
DSPU Combinations—Remote Models
195
58
25
25
See the table on storage requirements for DSPU
combinations (4KB RU Gateway Support) in the IBM
3174 Planning Guide.
Total Storage Required:
Storage Required in MBs:
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Notes:
1. W = Number of sessions (response to question 058)
2. X = Additional TCP/IP data buffer storage (response to question 060)
3. Y = Number of additional frame-relay buffers (response to question 566)
4. Z = Number of DLCIs (response to question 552)
5. For models other than x3R without LAN Gateway or TCP/IP over LAN or APPN over LAN
I-6
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions Worksheet
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________ End-User Productivity Functions _________
001 - __
__
__
__
Local Copy print queue buffer size
002 - __
Calculator function
003 - __
5250 emulation
004 - __
LAN T1 timer
005 - __
LAN retry count
006 - __
Copy from session to session
007 - __
HAP sharing for local copy
008 - __
CSCF IML password required?
009 - _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _
Non-standard feature options
_ _ _ _ _ _
_________________________________________________________________________________
893-745-B
I-7
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 51AÑToken-Ring Description
Token-Ring Description
Token-Ring Address
080 XXXX XXXX XXXX
Token-Ring Speed
082 0
(0 - 4 Mbps
1 - 16 Mbps
2 - 16 Mbps with Early Token Release)
5624
I-8
080:
Token-Ring Address
082:
Token-Ring Speed
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 52ÑX.25 Circuit ProÞles
X.25 Circuit Profiles
401_
420-
4210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
430-
4321
0 2
440-
441-
442-
9
4530 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
401_
420-
4210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
430-
4321
0 2
440-
441-
442-
9
4530 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5684
893-745-B
401:
Circuit Type
420:
Incoming Call Options
421:
Outgoing Call Options
430:
Packet size
432:
Window size
440:
Throughput Class Negotiation (TCLS)
I-9
Configuration Worksheets
I-10
441:
Closed User Group (CUG)
442:
Recognized Private Operating Agency (RPOA)
453:
Connection Options
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 53ÑFrame Relay
Frame Relay
090-
108X X X X
1100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X X
121-
1230 1
0
0
1
0
0
1
150-
141A
172-
215-
250-
0
166-
168A
0
1790
0
0
220-
251-
260-
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 3
0
1750 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0
0
173-
213-
0
165-
0
1270 0 0 0 0 0 0
1380
0
_ _
126-
137-
0
0 _
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1360
0 0 0 0
1250
132-
1160
0
252-
0 3 0
2530 7
0 0 2
2611
1
5685
893-745-B
090:
DLCI Number and SAP
108:
Unique Machine Identifier
110:
MLT Storage Support
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
123:
CECP Support
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
126:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
127:
RTM Definition
132:
Alternate Base Keyboard Selection
I-11
Configuration Worksheets
I-12
136:
Standard Keyboard Layouts
137:
Modified Keyboard Layouts
138:
Standard Keypad Layouts
141:
Magnetic Character Set
150:
Gateway (LAN and ISDN)
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
166:
Attribute Select Keypad
168:
Additional Extension-Mode Key Definition
172:
PS/55Ð3174 Printer Sharing
173:
DFT Options
175:
DFT Password
179:
Local Format Storage
213:
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
215:
PU Identification (Controller)
220:
Alert/CMIP Event Report
250:
Frame-Relay LLC Poll/Response Timer
251:
Frame-Relay LLC Idle Timer
252:
Frame-Relay LLC Retry Count
253:
Frame-Relay LLC Transmit Window Size
260:
Maximum Receive BTU Size
261:
Maximum Send BTU Size
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 53SÑSecondary Frame Relay
Frame Relay
090-
116X X X X
0 _
X X
121-
125-
150-
127-
* * * * *
0 0
_ _
0
0
0
1650
0
1790
215-
2510 3
260-
0
2200 0 0 0 0
250-
0
2210
2520 3 0
0
253-
0 7
0 0 2
2611
1
5686
893-745-B
090:
DLCI Number and SAP
116:
Individual Port Assignment
121:
Keyboard Language
125:
Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
127:
RTM Definition
150:
Gateway (LAN and ISDN)
165:
Compressed Program Symbols
179:
Local Format Storage
215:
PU Identification (Controller)
220:
Alert/CMIP Event Report
I-13
Configuration Worksheets
I-14
221:
3174 Alert Control Point
250:
Frame-Relay LLC Poll/Response Timer
251:
Frame-Relay LLC Idle Timer
252:
Frame-Relay LLC Retry Count
253:
Frame-Relay LLC Transmit Window Size
260:
Maximum Receive BTU Size
261:
Maximum Send BTU Size
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 54ÑFrame-Relay Description
Frame Relay Description
300-
Enable Frame Relay (0 - No, 1 - Yes)
313-
NRZ (0 - NRZ, 1 - NRZI)
0
552-
Maximum Number of DLCIs (001 -254)
0 5 0
554-
Committed Information Rate (002048 - 256000)
558-
Congestion Control (0 - No Support, 1 - Support)
0
560-
DE Bit Support (0 - No Support, 1 - Support)
0
562-
LMI Type (1 - None, 2 - LMI Rev-1, 3 - Annex D, 5 - CCITT)
3
563-
LMI Transmit Polling Interval (01 - 29)
1 0
566-
Additional Receive Buffer Space (0000 - 1024)
0 0 0 0
569-
Define DLCIs (N - No, Y - Yes)
N
570-
Virtual MAC Address
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5687
893-745-B
300:
Enable Frame Relay
313:
NRZ or NRZI Encoding
552:
Maximum Number of DLCIs
554:
Committed Information Rate
558:
Congestion Control
I-15
Configuration Worksheets
I-16
560:
DE Bit Support
562:
LMI Type
563:
LMI Transmit Polling Interval
566:
Additional Receive Buffer Space
569:
Define DLCIs
570:
Virtual MAC Address
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Worksheet 55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI DeÞnitions
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
DLCI Range: 0016 - 1007 (Decimal)
5625
893-745-B
I-17
Configuration Worksheets
Worksheet 56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment
Frame-Relay Index Assignment
S
DLCI
SAP
S
DLCI
SAP
5626
I-18
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Non-Katakana Converged Keyboards
Keyboard
Shift
Function
0
3
5
1
2
893-745-B
4
6
7
8
From Key
I/O Interface
To Key
Shift
Code
Shift
Char.
Char.
Char.
I-19
Configuration Worksheets
0, 1, 2ÑKeyboard Group
0=
The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, Enhanced Typewriter,
or the typewriter functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
1=
The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
2=
The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions on a Converged APL
keyboard.
3, 4ÑShift Group
3=
Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4=
Single-shift change.
5, 6, 7, 8ÑFunction Group
5=
Copy from I/O interface code table.
6=
Exchange two functions.
7=
Copy a function to another key.
8=
Delete a key function.
I-20
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Katakana Converged Keyboards
Keyboard
Shift
Function
0
3
5
1
893-745-B
2
4
6
7
8
From Key
I/O Interface
To Key
Shift
Code
Shift
Char.
Char.
Char.
I-21
Configuration Worksheets
0, 1, 2ÑKeyboard Group
0=
The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, Enhanced Typewriter,
or the typewriter functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
1=
The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
2=
The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions on a Converged APL
keyboard.
3, 4ÑShift Group
3=
Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4=
Single-shift change.
5, 6, 7, 8ÑFunction Group
5=
Copy from I/O interface code table.
6=
Exchange two functions.
7=
Copy a function to another key.
8=
Delete a key function.
I-22
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Enhanced Keyboard (U.S.)
Keyboard
Shift
Function
0
3
5
1
893-745-B
2
4
6
7
8
From Key
I/O Interface
To Key
Shift
Code
Shift
Char.
Char.
Char.
I-23
Configuration Worksheets
0, 1, 2ÑKeyboard Group
0=
The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, Enhanced Typewriter,
or the typewriter functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
1=
The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
2=
The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions on a Converged APL
keyboard.
3, 4ÑShift Group
3=
Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4=
Single-shift change.
5, 6, 7, 8ÑFunction Group
5=
Copy from I/O interface code table.
6=
Exchange two functions.
7=
Copy a function to another key.
8=
Delete a key function.
I-24
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Enhanced Keyboard (World Trade)
Keyboard
Shift
Function
0
3
5
1
893-745-B
2
4
6
7
8
From Key
I/O Interface
To Key
Shift
Code
Shift
Char.
Char.
Char.
I-25
Configuration Worksheets
0, 1, 2ÑKeyboard Group
0=
The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, Enhanced Typewriter,
or the typewriter functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
1=
The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
2=
The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions on a Converged APL
keyboard.
3, 4ÑShift Group
3=
Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4=
Single-shift change.
5, 6, 7, 8ÑFunction Group
5=
Copy from I/O interface code table.
6=
Exchange two functions.
7=
Copy a function to another key.
8=
Delete a key function.
I-26
893-745-B
Worksheet Introduction
Enhanced Keyboard (Katakana)
Keyboard
Shift
Function
0
3
5
1
893-745-B
2
4
6
7
8
From Key
I/O Interface
To Key
Shift
Code
Shift
Char.
Char.
Char.
I-27
Configuration Worksheets
0, 1, 2ÑKeyboard Group
0=
The desired change is on a Converged Typewriter, Converged Data Entry, Enhanced Typewriter,
or the typewriter functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
1=
The desired change applies only to the APL key functions on a Converged APL keyboard.
2=
The desired change applies to both the typewriter and APL functions on a Converged APL
keyboard.
3, 4ÑShift Group
3=
Full-key change (includes alternate, upper, and lower shifts).
4=
Single-shift change.
5, 6, 7, 8ÑFunction Group
5=
Copy from I/O interface code table.
6=
Exchange two functions.
7=
Copy a function to another key.
8=
Delete a key function.
I-28
893-745-B
Appendix J Abbreviations
A
ACF/TCAM. Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method.
ACF/VTAM. Advanced Communications Function for the Virtual Telecommunications Access Method.
AEA. Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.
AID. Attention identiÞer.
Alt. Alternate.
A/N. Alphanumeric.
ANSI. American National Standards Institute.
APL. A Programming Language.
APPN. Advanced peer-to-peer networking.
ARE. All routes Explorer.
ASCII. American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.
ATTN. Attention.
B
BECN. Backward explicit congestion notiÞcation.
BIU. Basic information unit.
bps or b/s. Bits per second.
BSC. Binary synchronous communication.
BTU. Basic transmission unit.
893-745-B
J-1
Abbreviations
C
C. Celsius.
C&D. Cause and diagnostic (codes)
CCA. Concurrent Communication Adapter.
CCITT. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
CECP. Country extended code page.
char. Character.
ChgSc. Change screen.
CICS. Customer Information Control System.
CID. Connection identiÞer.
CLIST. Command list.
CMS. Conversational monitor system.
cncl. Cancel.
CNM. Communication network management.
coax. Coaxial (cable).
Comm. Communication.
COS. Class of service.
CP. Control point.
cpi. Characters per inch.
CP-SVR. Control point-to-server pipe.
CRS. ConÞguration reporting server.
CSCF. Central Site Control Facility.
CSCM. Central Site Change Management.
CSCU. Central Site Customizing Utility.
CTL. Control.
J-2
893-745-B
CU. Control unit.
CUG. Closed user group.
CUT. Control unit terminal.
D
DCE. Data circuit-terminating equipment.
dec. Decimal.
DEL. The delete character.
DES. Data Encryption Standard.
dev. Device.
Dev Cncl. Device Cancel.
DFT. Distributed function terminal.
DISC. Disconnect.
DLC. Data link control.
DLCI. Data link connection identiÞer.
DLUR. Dependent logical unit requester.
DLUS. Dependent logical unit server.
DOS. Disk Operating System.
dot. One point in a printer or display block matrix.
DM. Distribution Manager.
DPC. Dual-purpose connector.
DSL. Downstream load.
DSPU. Downstream physical unit.
DSR. Data set ready.
DTE. Data terminal equipment.
DTR. Data terminal ready.
dup, DUP. Duplicate.
893-745-B
J-3
Abbreviations
E
EAB. Extended Attribute Buffer.
EBCDIC. Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
ECMA. European Computer ManufacturersÕ Association.
EIA. Electronic Industries Association.
EN. End node.
ESCON. Enterprise Systems Connection.
ENCP. End node control point.
EOT. End-of-transmission character.
ESCON. Enterprise Systems Connection.
ETR. Early Token Release.
ETX. End-of-text character. (A)
EVPD. Extended Vital Product Data.
F
F. Fahrenheit.
FCC. Federal Communications Commission.
FRFH. Frame relay frame handler.
FRTE. Frame relay terminal equipment.
FRSE. Frame relay switching equipment.
fs. Fail safe.
FTA. Fiber Optic Terminal Adapter.
H
HAP. Host addressable printer.
HDLC. High-level data link control.
hex. Hexadecimal.
J-4
893-745-B
HG. Hardware group.
HNAD. Host network (DTE) address.
I
ID. IdentiÞer.
Ident. IdentiÞcation.
IEEE. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
IML. Initial microcode load.
in. Inch (or inches).
INS. Insert.
I/O. Input/output.
IOCP. Input/output control program.
ISDN. Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISO. International Organization for Standardization.
K
K. 1.024.
Kb. Kilobit.
KB. Kilobyte.
KDU. Keyboard DeÞnition Utility.
kg. Kilogram.
L
LAN. Local area network.
LBS. LAN bridge server.
LED. Light-emitting diode.
LEN. Low-entry networking.
LFS. Local Format Storage.
LFU. Limited Function Utility.
893-745-B
J-5
Abbreviations
LIB. Library.
LLC. Logical link control.
LMI. Local management interface.
LRM. LAN reporting mechanism.
LT. Logical terminal.
LTA. Logical terminal assignment.
LU. Logical unit.
M
MAC. (1) Medium access control. (2) Message authentication code.
MAP. Manufacturing Automation Protocol.
max. Maximum.
MB. Megabyte.
Mbps or Mb/s. Megabits per second.
MHS. Magnetic hand scanner.
min. Minimum. Minute.
MLT. Multiple Logical Terminals.
mm. Millimeter (or millimeters).
modem. Modulator-demodulator.
MS. Management services.
N
NAUN. Nearest active upstream neighbor.
NCP. Network Control Program.
NETID. Network identiÞer.
NMVT. Network Management Vector Transport.
NN. Network node.
NNCP. Network node control point.
J-6
893-745-B
NPKT. Negotiated packet size.
NRZ. Non-return-to-zero.
NRZI. Non-return-to-zero inverted.
NTRI. NCP Token-Ring Interconnection.
NUM. Numeric.
NWND. Negotiated window size.
O
OEM. Original equipment manufacturer.
OIA. Operator information area.
P
PAM. Printer authorization matrix.
PAST. port assignment speciÞcation table.
PC. Personal computer.
PF. Program function.
PIU. Path information unit.
PN. Port number.
PU. Physical unit.
PUCP. Physical unit control point.
PUID. Physical unit identiÞcation.
PVC. Permanent virtual circuit.
R
RAM. Random access memory.
RAR. Route Addition Resistance.
REM. Ring error monitor.
RFI. Radio-frequency interference.
RH. Request/response header.
893-745-B
J-7
Abbreviations
ROS. Read-only storage.
RPOA. Recognized Private Operating Agency.
RPQ. Request for price quotation.
RPS. Ring parameter server.
RTM. Response Time Monitor.
RTS. Request to send.
RU. Request/response unit.
S
SAA. Systems Application Architecture.
SAP. Service access point.
SCS. SNA character string.
SDLC. Synchronous Data Link Control.
SELV. Safety extra low voltages.
SIMM. Single in-line memory module.
SNA. Systems Network Architecture.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNBU. Switched network backup.
SPC. Set Printer Characteristics.
SSCP. System services control point.
STE. Spanning Tree Explorer.
SUB. Substitute.
SVC. Switched virtual circuit.
SYSGEN. System generation.
J-8
893-745-B
T
TCLS. Throughput class negotiation.
TCU. Transmission control unit.
TG. Transmission group.
TH. Transmission header.
TMA. Terminal Multiplexer Adapter.
TTP TMA. Telephone Twisted-Pair Terminal Multiplexer Adapter.
U
UDT. User-deÞned terminal tables.
UDX. User-deÞned translate tables.
V
V. Volt.
VPD. Vital Product Data.
VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method.
W
WAN. Wide area network.
X
X.25. Packet-switched networks.
XID. Exchange identiÞcation.
XOFF. Transmitter off.
XON. Transmitter on.
893-745-B
J-9
Glossary
A
access method
A technique for moving data between main storage and input/
output devices.
access unit
A unit that allows multiple attaching devices access to a
token-ring network at a central point such as a wiring closet or
in an open area.
acknowledgment
The transmission, by a receiver, of acknowledge characters as an
afÞrmative response to a sender.
active
(1) Able to communicate on the network. A token-ring network
adapter is active if it is able to transmit and receive on the
network. (2) Operational. (3) Pertaining to a node or device that
is connected or is available for connection to another node or
device. (4) Currently transmitting or receiving.
adapter
(1) A general term for a device that provides some transitional
function between two or more devices. (2) In a local area
network, within a communicating device, a circuit card with its
associated software that enables the device to communicate over
the network.
adapter address
Twelve hexadecimal digits that identify a LAN adapter.
address
(1) A value that identiÞes a register, a particular part of storage,
a data source, or a data sink. The value is represented by one or
more characters. (2) The location in the storage of a computer
where data is stored. (3) In data communication, the unique
code assigned to each device or workstation connected to a
network.
893-745-B
Glossary-1
Advanced Communications Function for the Telecommunications Access Method (ACF/TCAM).
(1) An IBM licensed program that provides single-domain
network capability and, optionally, multiple-domain capability.
ACF/TCAM runs under MVS and OS/VS1 and provides
message queuing. (2) An IBM licensed program that provides
queued message handling.
NOTE: TCAM, Versions 1 and 2, are telecommunications access methods, but
TCAM, Version 3, is a message-handling subsystem.
advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN)
An extension to SNA featuring (a) greater distributed network
control that avoids critical hierarchical dependencies, thereby
isolating the effects of single points of failure; (b) dynamic
exchange of network topology information to foster ease of
connection and reconÞguration, adaptive route selection, and
simpliÞed network deÞnition; and (c) automated resource
registration and directory lookup. APPN extends the LU 6.2
peer orientation for end-user services to network control; APPN
also uses LU 6.2 protocols on its own control point sessions that
provide the network control.
advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) end node
A type 2.1 end node that provides full SNA end-user services
and supports sessions between its local control point (CP) and
the CP in an adjacent network node, to dynamically register its
resources with the adjacent CP (its network node server), to
send and receive directory search requests, and to obtain
management services; it can also attach to a subarea network as
a peripheral node.
advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) network
A type 2.1 network having at least one APPN node.
advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) network node
A type 2.1 node that, besides offering full SNA end-user
services, provides intermediate routing services within a T2.1
network and network services to its local LUs and attached T2.1
end nodes in its domain; it can also attach to a subarea network
as a peripheral node.
Glossary-2
893-745-B
AEA
See Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.
AEA port
A communication connector on the Asynchronous Emulation
Adapter (AEA).
AEA port set
(1) One or more 3174 ports that support individual AEA station
sets; they must have the same port (connection) type and
modem type but different station types. (2) One or more 3174
station sets that have different station types but the same port
type, modem type, and number of default destinations.
alert
(1) For IBM LAN management products, a notiÞcation
indicating a possible security violation, a persistent error
condition, or an interruption or potential interruption in the ßow
of data around the network. See also network management
vector transport. (2) In SNA, a record sent to a system problem
management focal point to communicate the existence of an
alert condition. (3) In the NetView program, a high-priority
event that warrants immediate attention. This database record is
generated for certain event types that are deÞned by
user-constructed Þlters.
alert transport frame
A special frame that carries an application-program-generated
alert from a LAN device to a LAN management program for
forwarding to a NetView host. See also network management
vector transport.
alternate 1 initial microcode load (ALT 1 IML)
The initiating procedure for running speciÞc adapter tests,
starting customizing, or doing a normal IML.
alternate 2 initial microcode load (ALT 2 IML)
The initiating procedure for running a general Model 3174
module test.
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
The standard code, using a coded character set consisting of
7-bit coded characters (8 bits including parity check), used for
information interchange among data processing systems, data
communication systems, and associated equipment. The ASCII
set consists of control characters and graphics characters.
analog
893-745-B
Pertaining to data consisting of continuously variable physical
quantities. Contrast with digital.
Glossary-3
application
A collection of software components used to perform speciÞc
types of work on a computer.
application program
(1) A program written for or by a user that applies to the userÕs
work. Some application programs receive support and services
from a special kind of application program called a network
application program. (2) A program used to connect and
communicate with stations in a network, enabling users to
perform application-oriented activities.
APPN end node
See advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) end node.
APPN network node
See advanced peer-to peer networking network node.
architecture
A logical structure that encompasses operating principles
including services, functions, and protocols. See computer
architecture, network architecture, Systems Application
Architecture (SAA), Systems Network Architecture (SNA).
ASCII emulation
The ability of a 3270 display station or printer to communicate
with an ASCII host using the DEC VT100, DEC VT220, Data
General D210, or IBM 3101 data stream.
asynchronous
(1) Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon
the occurrence of a speciÞc event such as a common timing
signal. (2) In Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) rings, a
type of data trafÞc that does not need bounded access delay to
the medium and guaranteed throughput.
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter (AEA)
In the 3174 controller, an adapter that enables an ASCII terminal
to communicate with a 3270 host using the 3270 data stream; an
ASCII terminal to communicate with an ASCII host through the
3174; and a 3270 terminal to communicate with an ASCII host
using data streams such as the DEC VT100, DEC VT220, Data
General D210, or IBM 3101 data streams.
attach
To make a device part of a network logically.
attaching device
Any device that is physically connected to a network and can
communicate over the network.
attention (ATTN)
An occurrence external to an operation that could cause an
interruption of the operation.
Glossary-4
893-745-B
attention identiÞer (AID)
(1) A code in the inbound 3270 data stream that identiÞes the
source or type of data that follows. (2) A character in a data
stream indicating that the user has pressed a key, such as
ENTER, that requests an action by the system.
attribute
(1) A characteristic. (2) A terminal display language or
transformation deÞnition language (TDL) keyword that
speciÞes a particular quality for the TDL object with which it is
associated.
attribute value
In the 3270 data stream, a code immediately following the
attribute type that speciÞes a particular property from the set
deÞned by the attribute type.
audible alarm
(1) An alarm that is sounded when designated events occur that
require operator attention or intervention before system
operation can continue. (2) A special feature that sounds a short,
audible tone automatically when a character is entered from the
keyboard into the next-to-last character position on the screen.
The tone can also be sounded under program control.
automatic single-route broadcast
A function used by some IBM bridge programs to determine the
correct settings for and to set the bridge single-route broadcast
conÞguration parameters dynamically, without operation
intervention. As bridges enter and leave the network, the
parameter settings may need to change to maintain a single path
between any two LAN segments for single-route broadcast
messages. See also single-route broadcast.
auto-removal
The removal of a device from data-passing activity without
human intervention. This action is accomplished by the adapter
in the device and can be initiated by a network management
program.
B
backup copy
A copy, usually of a program or of a library member, that is kept
in case the original or the working copy is altered or destroyed.
backup diskette
A diskette that contains information copied from another
diskette. It is used in case the original information is
unintentionally altered or destroyed.
893-745-B
Glossary-5
backup path
In the IBM Token-Ring Network, an alternative path for signal
ßow through access units and their main ring path cabling. The
backup path allows recovery of the operational portion of the
network while problem determination procedures are being
performed.
bandwidth
(1) The difference, expressed in hertz, between the highest and
the lowest frequencies of a range of frequencies. For example,
analog transmission by recognizable voice telephone requires a
bandwidth of about 3000 hertz (3 kHz). (2) The bandwidth of an
optical link designates the information-carrying capacity of the
link and is related to the maximum bit rate that a Þber link can
support.
baseband
(1) A frequency band that uses the complete bandwidth of a
transmission medium. Contrast with broadband and
carrierband. (2) A method of data transmission that encodes,
modulates, and impresses information on the transmission
medium without shifting or altering the frequency of the
information signal.
basic information unit (BIU)
The unit of data and control information that is passed between
half-sessions. It consists of a request/response header followed
by a request/response unit.
basic link unit (BLU)
The unit of data and control information transmitted over a link
by data link control.
basic transmission unit (BTU)
The unit of data and control information passed between path
control components. A BTU can consist of one or more path
information units (PIUs).
batch
A program or operation that is performed with little or no
interaction between the user and the system. Contrast with
interactive.
baud
The rate at which signal conditions are transmitted per second.
Contrast with bits per second (b/s).
beaconing
An error-indicating function of token-ring adapters that assists
in locating a problem causing a hard error on a token-ring
network.
Glossary-6
893-745-B
binary
(1) Pertaining to a system of numbers to the base two; the binary
digits are 0 and 1. (2) Pertaining to a selection, choice, or
condition that has two possible different values or states.
binary synchronous communication (BSC)
A form of telecommunication line control that uses a standard
set of transmission control characters and control character
sequences, for binary synchronous transmission of binary-coded
data between stations. Contrast with synchronous data link
control (SDLC).
BIND command
A command used to start a session and to deÞne the
characteristics of that session. Contrast with UNBIND
command.
bit
Either of the binary digits: a 0 or 1.
bits per second (bps or b/s)
The rate at which bits are transmitted per second.
bracket
One or more chains of request units and their responses that are
exchanged between two session partners and that represent a
transaction between them. A bracket must be completed before
another bracket can be started. Examples of brackets are
database inquiries/replies, update transactions, and remote job
entry output sequences to workstations.
bridge
(1) An attaching device that connects two LAN segments to
allow the transfer of information from one LAN segment to the
other. A bridge may connect the LAN segments directly by
network adapters and software in a single device or may connect
network adapters in two separate devices through software and
use of a telecommunications link between the two adapters. (2)
A functional unit that connects two LANs that use the same
logical link control (LLC) procedures but may use the same or
different medium access control (MAC) procedures. Contrast
with gateway and router.
bridge ID
The bridge label combined with the adapter address of the
adapter connecting the bridge to the LAN segment with the
lowest LAN segment number; it is used by the automatic
single-route broadcast function in IBM bridge programs.
bridge label
A 2-byte hexadecimal number that the user can assign to each
bridge. See bridge ID.
893-745-B
Glossary-7
bridge number
The identiÞer that distinguishes parallel bridges (that is, bridges
spanning the same two rings).
broadband
A frequency band divisible into several narrower bands so that
different kinds of transmissions such as voice, video, and data
transmission can occur at the same time. Synonymous with
wideband. See also baseband.
broadband LAN
A local area network (LAN) in which information is encoded,
multiplexed, and transmitted through modulation of a carrier.
broadcast
Simultaneous transmission of data to more than one destination.
broadcast frame
A frame that is simultaneously transmitted to more than one
destination. A broadcast frame is forwarded by all bridges,
unless otherwise restricted.
buffer
(1) A portion of storage used to hold input or output data
temporarily. (2) A routine or storage used to compensate for a
difference in data rate or time of occurrence of events, when
transferring data from one device to another.
buffer storage
(1) A storage device that is used to compensate for differences
in the rate of ßow of data between components of a data
processing system or for the time of occurrence of events in the
components. (2) In word processing, a temporary storage in
which text is held for processing or communication.
building cable
The permanently installed cable within a building that
interconnects ofÞces to wiring closets, wiring closets to wiring
closets, and wiring closets to computer rooms.
bus
(1) In a processor, a physical facility on which data is
transferred to all destinations but from which only addressed
destinations may read in accordance with appropriate
conventions. (2) A network conÞguration in which nodes are
interconnected through a bidirectional transmission medium. (3)
One or more conductors used for transmitting signals or power.
bus network
A network conÞguration that provides a bidirectional
transmission facility to which all nodes are attached. A sending
node transmits in both directions to the ends of the bus. All
nodes in the path examine and may copy the message as it
passes.
Glossary-8
893-745-B
byte
(1) A string that consists of a number of bits, treated as a unit,
and representing a character. (2) A binary character operated
upon as a unit and usually shorter than a computer word. (3) A
string that consists of a particular number of bits, usually 8, that
is treated as a unit and that represents a character. (4) A group of
8 adjacent binary digits that represent one extended
binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC) character.
C
cable loss (optical)
The loss in an optical cable equals the attenuation coefÞcient for
the cabled Þber times the cable length.
cable segment
A section of cable between components or devices on a
network. A segment may consist of a single patch cable,
multiple patch cables connected together, or a combination of
building cable and patch cables connected together. See LAN
segment, ring segment.
call establishment
The complete sequence of events necessary to establish a data
connection.
card
In the Model 3174 module, a unit of electronic circuitry
contained in a plastic casing (or cassette) and providing the
controller with a specialized function (for example, a Terminal
Adapter or an Encrypt/Decrypt Adapter).
carrier
A wave or pulse train that may be varied by a signal bearing
information to be transmitted over a communication system.
carrierband
A frequency band in which the modulated signal is
superimposed on a carrier signal (as differentiated from
baseband), but only one channel is present on the medium (as
differentiated from broadband). Contrast with baseband and
broadband.
central directory
A repository for storing resource location information centrally
registered by network nodes or cached as the result of network
searches.
893-745-B
Glossary-9
central site change management (CSCM)
A function of the 3174 microcode that tracks the microcode for
each Model 3174 module in a network and, in conjunction with
NetView DM, electronically distributes and retrieves microcode
changes for each Model 3174 module.
central site control facility (CSCF)
A function of the NetView program that allows a network
operator to execute the test facilities of the Model 3174 module
remotely from the NetView console.
Central Site Controller
The Model 3174 module that contains the central site library for
all of the Model 3174 modules in a network.
central site customizing
The process of tailoring the 3174 Licensed Internal Code for
each Model 3174 module in a network, at the central site.
central site library
One or more Library diskettes that contain customizing data and
label information for the Model 3174 modules in a network.
chain
(1) A group of logically linked user data records processed by
LU 6.2. (2) A group of request units delimited by begin-chain
and end-chain. Responses are always single-unit chains.
channel
(1) A functional unit, controlled by a host computer, that
handles the transfer of data between processor storage and local
peripheral equipment. (2) A path along which signals can be
sent. (3) The portion of a storage medium that is accessible to a
given reading or writing station. (4) In broadband transmission,
a designation of a frequency band 6 MHz wide.
channel-attached
Pertaining to attachment of devices directly by data channels (I/
O channels) to a computer. Synonym for local-attached.
Contrast with link-attached.
character position
(1) A location on the screen at which one character can be
displayed. (2) An addressed location in the buffer at which one
character can be stored.
character set
(1) A deÞned collection of characters. (2) A group of characters
used for a speciÞc reason (for example, the set of characters a
printer can print). (3) The collection of graphic characters
required to support a speciÞc language.
circuit
(1) A logic device. (2) One or more conductors through which
an electric current can ßow.
Glossary-10
893-745-B
Class of service (COS)
A designation of the transport network characteristics, such as
route security, transmission priority, and bandwidth, needed for
a particular session. The class of service is derived from a mode
name speciÞed in the bind by the initiator of a session.
Class of service (COS) database
A database maintained independently by each network node
and, optionally, by APPN end nodes. It contains one entry per
class-of-service name; each database entry contains:
■
A deÞnition of the acceptable values for transmission
group (TG) and node characteristics for routes described
by that class-by-service name and the weight function to be
used to compute the weights of nodes and TGs that meet
the acceptable values.
■
The transmission priority to be used for trafÞc that ßows on
routes described by that class-of-service name.
closed network
Synonym for closed path.
closed path
A network in which all the cable paths and wiring closets are
directly or indirectly connected. Synonymous with closed
network.
cluster
A station that consists of a control unit (a cluster controller) and
the terminals attached to it.
cluster controller
A device that can control the input/output operations of more
than one device connected to it. A cluster controller may be
controlled by a program stored and executed in the unit, for
example, the Model 3174 module. See also cluster and cluster
controller node. Synonymous with cluster control unit.
cluster controller node
A peripheral node that can control a variety of devices. See also
host node, Network Control Program (NCP) node, and terminal
node.
coaxial cable
A cable consisting of one conductor, usually a small copper tube
or wire, within and insulated from another conductor of larger
diameter, usually copper tubing or copper braid.
code page
An assignment of graphic characters and control function
meanings to all code points.
893-745-B
Glossary-11
command
(1) A request for performance of an operation or execution of a
program. (2) A character string from a source external to a
system that represents a request for system action.
communication adapter
(1) A circuit card with associated software that enables a
processor, controller, or other device to be connected to a
network. (2) See EIA communication adapter and V.35
communication adapter.
communication controller
(1) A device that directs the transmission of data over the data
links of a network; its operation may be controlled by a program
processed in a processor to which the controller is connected or
by a program executed within the device. (2) A type of
communication control unit whose operations are controlled by
one or more programs stored and executed in the unit. It
manages the details of line control and the routing of data
through a network.
communication controller node
A subarea node that does not contain a system services control
point (SSCP).
communication controller unit
A communication device that controls transmission of data over
lines in a network.
communication network management (CNM)
The process of designing, installing, operating, and managing
distribution of information and control among users of
communication systems.
component
(1) Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit. (2) A
functional part of an operating system, for example, the
scheduler or supervisor. (3) See terminal component and solid
state component.
computer architecture
The organizational structure of a computer system, including
hardware and software.
Concurrent Communication Adapter (CCA)
In the Model 3174 module, a communication adapter that, along
with the necessary microcode, provides terminals attached to
the Model 3174 module the ability to concurrently access an
additional 3270 host.
Glossary-12
893-745-B
conÞguration
The arrangement of a computer system or network as deÞned by
the nature, number, and chief characteristics of its functional
units. More speciÞcally, the term conÞguration may refer to a
hardware conÞguration or a software conÞguration. See also
system conÞguration.
conÞguration Þle
The collective set of deÞnitions describing a conÞguration.
conÞguration parameters
Variables in a conÞguration deÞnition, the values of which
characterize the relationship of a product, such as a bridge, to
other products in the same network.
connect
In a LAN, to physically join a cable from a station to an access
unit or network connection point. Contrast with attach.
Connection Menu
A menu on the screen of a display station attached to the Model
3174 module, from which a user can select an available host.
connection network
A representation within an APPN network of a shared-access
transport facility, such as a token ring, that reduces the
system-deÞnition burden on each APPN end node attached to
the facility. Each such node may represent its connectivity to the
other real nodes on the facility generically, by a single virtual
routing node, which each reports to its network node server in
the APPN network. The report includes local signaling
information needed by any partner wanting to contact it over the
facility. The transport facility represented this way, and the
assemblage of nodes using the same virtual routing node
representation, are collectively referred to as a connection
network. By matching references to the same virtual routing
node during its route selection, the network node server passes
the required DLC signaling information in the search reply to
the node originating a session over the connection network.
connector
A means of establishing electrical ßow.
contention
(1) In a LAN, a situation in which two or more data stations are
allowed by the protocol to start transmitting concurrently and
thus risk collision. (2) In a session, a situation in which both
NAUs attempt to initiate the same action at the same time, such
as when both attempt to send data in a half-duplex protocol
(half-duplex contention). At session initiation, one NAU is
893-745-B
Glossary-13
deÞned to be the contention winner; its action will take
precedence when contention occurs. The contention loser must
get explicit or implicit permission from the contention winner to
begin its action.
Control (CTL) diskette
A customized diskette containing the microcode that describes
a particular moduleÕs attached terminals, and its method of
attachment to the host.
control character
(1) A character whose occurrence in a particular context
speciÞes a control function. (2) A character used to specify that
a control unit is to perform a particular operation.
control codes
(1) Code points and their assigned control function meanings.
(2) The hexadecimal values hex 00 through hex 3F, and hex
FF in the 3270 data stream. ASCII control codes are the
hexa-decimal values hex 00 through hex 1F and 7F.
control function
Synonym for control operation.
controller
A unit that controls input/output operations for one or more
devices.
control operation
An action that affects the recoding, processing, transmission,
or interpretation of data; for example, starting or stopping a
process, carriage return, font change, rewind, and end of
transmission. Synonymous with control function.
control point (CP)
(1) A component of a node that manages resources of that node
and optionally provides services to other nodes in the network.
Examples are a system services control point (SSCP) in a type
5 node, a physical unit control point (PUCP) in a type 4 node, a
network node control point (NNCP) in a type 2.1 (T2.1)
network node, and an end node control point (ENCP) in a T2.1
end node. An SSCP and an NNCP can provide services to
other nodes. (2) A component of a T2.1 node that manages the
resources of that node. If the T2.1 node is an APPN node, the
CP is capable of engaging in CP-CP sessions with other APPN
nodes. If the T2.1 node is a network node, the CP also provides
services to adjacent end nodes in the T2.1 network.
control unit
A general term for any device that provides common functions
for other devices or mechanisms. Synonymous with controller.
Glossary-14
893-745-B
control unit terminal (CUT)
A terminal that relies on the Model 3174 module to interpret the
data stream. Examples are the 3178, 3179, 3278 Model 2, and
3279 Model S2A.
control unit terminal (CUT) mode
A host-interactive mode that enables an IBM 3270 Personal
Computer customized in this mode to run only one session
emulating a 3178, 3179, 3278 Model 2, or 3279 Model S2A.
conversion
(1) In programming languages, the transformation between
values that represent the same data item but belong to different
data types. Information may be lost as a result of conversion
because accuracy of data representation varies among different
data types. (2) The process of changing from one method of data
processing to another or from one data processing system to
another. (3) The process of changing from one form of
representation to another (for example, to change from decimal
representation to binary representation).
converter
In an IBM Token-Ring Network, a device that converts
electronic signals to light pulses or vice versa for use in an
optical Þber subsystem.
copy control character (CCC)
A character used in conjunction with the Copy command to
specify the type of data to be copied.
copy operation
An operation that copies the contents of the buffer from one
terminal to another terminal attached to the same controller.
country extended code page (CECP) A function of the 3174 microcode that provides a code page
containing additional code points beyond those available with
Table 5A code pages. CECP is supported by a universal
character set, Character Set 697, which contains 190 characters.
CP-CP sessions
The parallel sessions between two control points, using LU 6.2
protocols and a mode name of CPSVCMG, on which network
services requests and replies are exchanged. Each CP of a given
pair has one contention-winner session and one contention-loser
session with the other.
CP name
A network-qualiÞed name of a control point (CP), consisting of
a network ID qualiÞer identifying the network (or name space)
to which the CPÕs node belongs, and a unique name within the
scope of that network ID identifying the CP. Each T2.1 node has
one CP name assigned to it at system-deÞnition time. Within an
893-745-B
Glossary-15
APPN network, all network nodes share a common network ID.
End nodes may have distinct network IDs; this allows them to
connect to separate APPN networks and to manage their own
name spaces independently of the rest of the network.
CP-to-server (CP-SVR) pipe
The two LU 6.2 sessions between a DLUS node and a DLUR
node used to carry SSCP-PU and SSCP-LU session ßows.
create
In central site customizing, to create a library member for a
network module and to store the customizing data for that
library member on a Library diskette.
cursor
(1) A movable, visible mark used to indicate the position at
which the next operation will occur on a display surface. (2) A
unique symbol that identiÞes a character position in a screen
display, usually the character position at which the next
character to be entered from the keyboard will be displayed.
Customer Information Control System (CICS)
An IBM licensed program that enables transactions entered at
remote terminals to be processed concurrently by user-written
application programs. It includes facilities for building, using,
and maintaining databases.
customization
Procedures that tailor the controller microcode to Þt the various
types of display stations and printers and the method of host
attachment that a particular controller will handle.
customizing display station
A display station used to perform the customizing procedures;
this display station must be attached to port 26-00 of the
controller. Only these display stations can be used for
customizing: a 3178, a 3179 Model 1 operating in native or
3279-emulation mode, a 3180 operating in native or
3278-emulation mode, a 3191, a 3192, a 3194 operating in
control unit terminal (CUT) mode, a 3270 Personal Computer
with 3278/3279 emulation operating in CUT mode, a 3278
(except Model 1), a 3279, a 5550 family operating in CUT
mode, a 6150 RT Personal Computer, and a 6151 RT Personal
Computer.
Glossary-16
893-745-B
customizing keyboard
A keyboard used to type in the customizing responses; this
keyboard must be a Typewriter, Data Entry, APL (with APL off),
or Text (with Text off) keyboard with a QWERTY layout. (On a
QWERTY layout, the Þrst six characters on the left side of the
top row of alphabetic characters are Q, W, E, R, T, Y.)
D
data
(1) A representation of facts, concepts, or instructions in a
formalized manner suitable for communication, interpretation,
or processing by human or automatic means. (2) Any
representations such as characters or analog quantities to
which meaning is or might be assigned.
database
A set of data, part or the whole of another set of data, that
consists of at least one Þle and that is sufÞcient for a given
purpose or for a given data processing system.
data circuit
(1) A pair of associated transmit and receive channels that
provide a means of two-way data communication. (2) In SNA,
see also link connection.
NOTE: Between data switching exchanges, the data circuit may include data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE), depending on the type of interface used
at the data-switching exchange.
Between a data station and a data-switching exchange or data concentrator,
the data circuit includes the data-terminating equipment at the data station
end. It may also include equipment similar to a DCE at the data-switching
exchange or data-concentrator location.
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
In a data station, the equipment that provides the signal
conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment
(DTE) and the line.
data communication
(1) Transfer of information between functional units by means
of data transmission according to a protocol. (2) The
transmission, reception, and validation of data.
data concentrator
A functional unit that permits a common transmission medium
to serve more data sources than there are channels currently
available with the transmission medium.
893-745-B
Glossary-17
data entry keyboard
A keyboard layout designed for data entry applications.
data frame
See frame.
data integrity
(1) The condition that exists as long as accidental or intentional
destruction, alteration, or loss of data does not occur. (2) The
preservation of data for its intended use.
data link
(1) Any physical link, such as a wire or a telephone circuit, that
connects one or more remote terminals to a communication
control unit or connects one communication control unit with
another. (2) The assembly of parts of two data terminal
equipment (DTE) devices that are controlled by a link protocol,
and the interconnecting data circuit, that enable data to be
transferred from a data source to a data sink. (3) In SNA, see
also link.
NOTE: A telecommunication line is only the physical medium of transmission.
A data link includes the physical medium of transmission, the protocol, and
associated devices and programs; it is both physical and logical.
data link connection identiÞer (DLCI)
A numeric identiÞer that is used in a frame-relay network to
identify the next segment of a permanent virtual circuit over
which a frame is to be relayed.
data link control (DLC)
The process responsible for performing communication over a
link using a speciÞc data link control protocol, such as SDLC or
token ring.
data link control (DLC) layer
(1) In SNA or Open Systems Interconnection (OSI), the layer
that schedules data transfer over a link between two nodes and
performs error control for the link. Examples of DLC are
synchronous data link control (SDLC) for serial-by-bit
connection and DLC for the System/370 channel. (2) See
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). (3) See also logical link
control (LLC) sublayer and medium access control (MAC)
sublayer.
NOTE: The DLC layer is usually independent of the physical transport
mechanism and ensures the integrity of data reaching the high layers.
Glossary-18
893-745-B
data link layer (or level)
(1) In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model, the
layer that provides services to transfer data between entities in
the network layer over a communication link.
NOTE: The data link layer can detect and possibly correct errors that may
occur in the physical layer. (2) See the Open Systems Interconnection
reference model.
data network
An arrangement of data circuits and switching facilities for
establishing connections between data terminal equipment.
data processing (DP)
The systematic performance of operations upon data; for
example, handling, merging, sorting, and computing.
data rate
See data transfer rate, line data rate.
data station
See station.
data stream
(1) All data transmitted through a data channel in a single read
or write operation. (2) A continuous stream of data elements
being transmitted, or intended for transmission, in character or
binary-digit form, using a deÞned format.
data stream format
In SNA, the format of the data elements (end-user data) in the
request unit (RU). See also 3270 data stream and SNA character
string (SCS).
data terminal equipment (DTE)
(1) That part of a data station that serves as a data source, data
receiver, or both. (2) Equipment that sends or receives data, or
both.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) ßow control
A procedure for a communicating device to signal its readiness
to receive data by raising the DTR lead on an EIA 232D
interface.
data transfer
(1) The result of the transmission of data signals from any data
source to a data receiver. (2) The movement, or copying, of data
from one location and the storage of the data at another location.
data transfer rate
The average number of bits, characters, or blocks per unit of
time passing between equipment in a data-transmission session.
The rate is expressed in bits, characters, or blocks per second,
minute, or hour.
893-745-B
Glossary-19
data transmission
The conveying of data from one place for reception elsewhere
by means of telecommunications.
decrypt
To convert encrypted data into clear data. Contrast with encrypt.
default
Pertaining to an attribute, value, or option that is assumed when
none is explicitly speciÞed.
default destination
A destination for display stations and printers that is deÞned in
TCP/IP customization.
default response
A response supplied by the customizing utility if a different
response is not speciÞed during customization.
default value
A value assumed when no value has been speciÞed.
delimiter
(1) A character used to indicate the beginning or end of a
character string. (2) A bit pattern that deÞnes the beginning or
end of a frame or token on a LAN.
dependent logical unit
See SSCP-dependent logical unit.
dependent logical unit requester (DLUR)
An optional component in an APPN end node or network node
that supports dependent secondary LUs local to its node or in
adjacent type 2.0 or 2.1 nodes by obtaining SSCP services for
the LUs over an APPN network from the appropriate dependent
LU server (DLUS). The support is obtained using SSCP-PU and
SSCP-LU sessions whose ßows are encapsulated on LU 6.2
session ßows between the DLUR node and the DLUS node. See
also CP-to-server (CP-SVR) pipe.
dependent logical unit requester (DLUR) node
An APPN end node or network node that includes the DLUR
component.
dependent logical unit server (DLUS)
An optional component in an APPN network node that provides
SSCP services over an APPN network to remote secondary
dependent LUs by using SSCP-PU and SSCP-LU sessions
whose ßows are encapsulated on LU 6.2 session ßows between
the DLUS node and the appropriate dependent LU requester
(DLUR) nodes. See also CP-to-server (CP-SVR) pipe.
Glossary-20
893-745-B
dependent logical unit server (DLUS) node
An APPN network node that includes the DLUS component.
destination
Any point or location, such as a node, a station, or a particular
terminal, to which information is to be sent.
device
(1) A mechanical, electrical, or electronic contrivance with a
speciÞc purpose. (2) An input/output unit such as a terminal,
display, or printer.
diagnostics
Modules or tests used by computer users and service personnel
to diagnose hardware problems.
dielectric
Nonconductor of direct electric current.
digital
(1) Pertaining to data in the form of digits. Contrast with
analog. (2) Pertaining to data consisting of numerical values or
discrete units.
directory
A database in an APPN node that lists names of resources (in
particular, logical units) and records the CP name of the node
where each resource is located.
directory services (DS)
A component of an APPN node that maintains a directory and
manages searches of that directory.
disabled
(1) Pertaining to a state of a processing unit that prevents the
occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (2) Pertaining to the
state in which a transmission control unit or audio response unit
cannot accept incoming calls on a line.
disconnect (DISC) character
In data communication, the part of the binary synchronous
communication (BSC) transmission control sequence for ending
the connection on a switched line.
disk
A direct-access data storage medium, which may be either
ßexible (diskette) or hard (Þxed disk).
diskette
A ßexible magnetic disk enclosed in a protective container.
diskette drive
The mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes.
diskette formatting
Establishing and identifying the number and size of sectors on a
diskette and preparing it for use with a particular computer.
893-745-B
Glossary-21
Disk Operating Systems (DOS)
An operating system for computer systems that use disks and
diskettes for auxiliary storage of programs and data.
display Þeld
(1) An area in the display buffer that contains a set of characters
that can be manipulated or operated upon as a unit. (2) A group
of consecutive characters (in the buffer) that starts with an
attribute character (deÞning the characteristics of the Þeld) and
contains one or more alphanumeric characters. The Þeld
continues to, but does not include, the next attribute character.
display station
An input/output device containing a display screen and an
attached keyboard that allows a user to send information to or
receive information from the system.
distributed function terminal (DFT) A programmable terminal that can perform operations
previously performed by the control unit. These terminals can
interpret the 3270 data stream themselves. Examples are the
IBM 3270 Personal Computer and the 3290 Information Panel.
distributed function terminal (DFT) mode
A host-interactive mode that enables an IBM 3270 Information
Display System customized in this mode to run as many as four
host sessions. The sessions can emulate a 3178, 3179, 3278
Model 2, or 3279 Model S2A.
downstream
(1) In the direction of data ßow or toward the destination of
transmission. (2) From the processor toward an attached unit or
end user. (3) Contrast with upstream.
downstream load (DSL)
The capability of a distributed function terminal to receive its
control program from the control unit to which it is attached. A
diskette containing the terminalÕs control program is loaded into
the control unit.
downstream physical unit (DSPU)
A controller or a workstation downstream from a gateway that is
attached to a host.
dump
(1) To write at a particular instant the contents of storage, or part
of storage, onto another data medium for the purpose of
safeguarding or debugging the data. (2) Data that has been
dumped.
Glossary-22
893-745-B
duplex
Pertaining to communication in which data can be sent and
received at the same time. Synonymous with full-duplex.
Contrast with half-duplex.
E
Early Token Release (ETR)
In token-ring networks, a function that allows a transmitting
adapter to release a new token as soon as it has completed frame
transmission, whether or not the frame header has returned to
that adapter.
EBCDIC
Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. A coded
character set consisting of 8-bit coded characters.
EIA communication adapter
A communication adapter conforming to EIA standards that can
combine and send information on two lines at speeds up to 19.2
kbps.
EIA 232D
An electrical interface deÞned by the Electronics Industries
Association for establishing connections and controlling data
ßow between data terminal equipment and data communication
equipment. The interface has been adapted to allow
communication between DTEs.
element
(1) In a set, an object, entity, or concept having the properties
that deÞne a set. (2) A parameter value in a list of parameter
values.
emulate
To imitate one system with another, primarily by hardware, so
that the imitating system accepts the same data, executes the
same computer programs, and achieves the same results as the
imitated computer system.
emulation
(1) The imitation of all or part of one system by another,
primarily by hardware, so that the imitating system accepts the
same data, executes the same programs, and achieves the same
results as the imitated computer system. (2) The use of
programming techniques and special machine features to permit
a computing system to execute programs written for another
system. (3) Imitation; for example, imitation of a computer or
device. (4) See terminal emulation.
893-745-B
Glossary-23
enabled
(1) On a LAN, pertaining to an adapter or device that is active,
operational, and able to receive frames from the network. (2)
Pertaining to a state of a processing unit that allows the
occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (3) Pertaining to the
state in which a transmission control unit or an audio response
unit can accept incoming calls on a line.
encrypt
To scramble data or convert it, before transmission, to a secret
code that masks the meaning of the data to any unauthorized
recipient. Contrast with decrypt.
end delimiter
The last byte of a token or frame, consisting of a special,
recognizable bit pattern.
end node
A T2.1 node that supports sessions between its own control
point (CP) and the CP in an adjacent network node, to
dynamically register its resources with the adjacent CP, to send
and receive directory search requests, and to obtain network
services and management services.
enterprise
A business or organization that consists of two or more sites
separated by a public right-of-way or a geographical distance.
Contrast with establishment.
establishment
A userÕs premises that do not extend across public rights-of-way
(for example, single ofÞce building, warehouse, or campus).
Contrast with enterprise.
event
(1) An occurrence or happening. (2) An occurrence of
signiÞcance to a task; for example the completion of an
asynchronous operation, such as an input/output operation.
Exchange IdentiÞcation (XID)
A speciÞc type of basic link unit that is used to convey node and
link characteristics between adjacent nodes. XIDs are
exchanged between link stations before and during link
activation to establish and negotiate link and node
characteristics, and after link activation to communicate
changes in these characteristics.
execute
To perform the actions speciÞed by a program or a portion of a
program.
execution
The process of carrying out an instruction or instructions of a
computer program by a computer.
Glossary-24
893-745-B
exit
To execute an instruction or statement within a portion of a
program in order to terminate the execution of that program.
NOTE: Such portions of programs include loops, routines, subroutines, and
modules.
extended attribute buffer (EAB)
The buffer in which the extended Þeld attributes are stored.
Examples of extended Þeld attributes are:
■
Extended highlighting
■
Color (blue, red, pink, green, turquoise, yellow, white)
■
Character sets
■
Transparency
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)
See EBCDIC.
F
faceplate
A wall-mounted or surface-mounted plate for connecting data
and voice connectors to a cabling system.
fault
An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail to
perform its required function.
fault domain
(1) In IBM LAN problem determination, the portion of a
network that is expected to be involved with an indicated error.
(2) The segment of a token-ring network between a station and
its nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN).
feature
A part of an IBM product that may be ordered separately by the
customer.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
A board of commissioners appointed by the President under the
Communications Act of 1934, having the power to regulate all
interstate and foreign communications by wire and radio
originating in the United States.
Þber
893-745-B
See optical Þber.
Glossary-25
Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
A high-performance, general-purpose, multistation network
designed for efÞcient operation with a peak data transfer rate of
100 Mb/s. It uses token-ring architecture with optical Þber as
the transmission medium over distances of several kilometers.
Þber optics
The branch of optical technology concerned with the
transmission of radiant power through Þbers made of
transparent materials such as glass, fused silica, and plastic.
NOTE: Telecommunications applications of Þber optics use optical Þbers.
Either a single discrete Þber or a nonspatially aligned Þber bundle may be
used for each information channel. Such Þbers are often called optical Þbers
to differentiate them from the Þbers used in a noncommunication application.
Various industrial and medical applications use (typically high-loss) ßexible
Þber bundles in which individual Þbers are spatially aligned, permitting
optical relay of an image.
Some specialized industrial applications use rigid (fused) aligned Þber
bundles for image transfer.
Fiber Optic Terminal Adapter (FTA) In the Model 3174 module, this adapter allows a 3299 Model
032 to be attached to the Model 3174 module using optical Þber
cable.
Þeld
See display Þeld.
Þle
A named set of records stored or processed as a unit.
Þlename
(1) A name assigned or declared for a Þle. (2) The name used by
a program to identify a Þle.
Þle server
A high-capacity disk storage device or a computer that each
computer on a network can access to retrieve Þles that can be
shared among the attached computers.
Þxed disk
A rigid magnetic disk used in a Þxed disk drive.
Þxed disk drive
A disk storage device that reads and writes on rigid magnetic
disks. Synonymous with hard disk drive.
Glossary-26
893-745-B
ßag
(1) An indicator or parameter that shows the setting of a switch.
(2) A character that signals the occurrence of some condition,
such as the end of a word.
ßow control
(1) In data communication, control of the data transfer rate. (2)
In SNA, the process of managing the rate at which data trafÞc
passes between components of the network. The purpose of ßow
control is to optimize the rate of ßow of message units with
minimum congestion in the network, that is, neither to overßow
the buffers at the receiver or at intermediate routing nodes nor to
leave the receiver waiting for more message units. (3) The
methods used to control the ßow of information across a
network.
focal point
See management services focal point.
frame
(1) The unit of transmission in some LANs, including the IBM
Token-Ring Network and the IBM PC Network. It includes
delimiters, control characters, information, and checking
characters. On a token-ring network, a frame is created from a
token when the token has data appended to it. On a token bus
network (IBM PC Network), all frames including the token
frame contain a preamble, start delimiter, control address,
optional data and checking characters, and end delimiter, and
they are followed by a minimum silence period. (2) In
synchronous data link control (SDLC), the vehicle for every
command, every response, and all information that is
transmitted using SDLC procedures. Each frame begins and
ends with a ßag.
frame handler (FH)
Synonym for frame-relay frame handler (FRFH).
frame relay
(1) An interface standard describing the boundary between a
userÕs equipment and a fast-packet network. In frame-relay
systems, ßawed frames are discarded; recovery comes
end-to-end rather than hop-by-hop. (2) A technique derived
from the integrated services digital network (ISDN) D channel
standard. It assumes that connections are reliable and dispenses
with the overhead of error detection and control within the
network.
893-745-B
Glossary-27
frame-relay frame handler (FRFH) A router function that uses the address Þeld in a frame-relay
frame. Synonymous with frame handler (FH). See also
frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE) support and
frame-relay terminal equipment (FRTE).
frame-relay network
A network that consists of frame-relay frame handlers (FRFH)
and in which frames are passed from one frame-relay terminal
equipment (FRTE) station to another through a series of one or
more FRFHs.
frame-relay switch
Synonym for frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE) support.
frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE)
See frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE) support.
frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE) support
A set of NCP frame-relay functions that include the frame-relay
frame handler (FRFH) function, which is deÞned by American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards T1.617 and
T1.618. Other functions, which are not part of the ANSI
standards, include performance measurement and enhanced
reliability. Synonymous with frame-relay switch.
frame-relay terminal equipment (FRTE)
A device capable of connecting to a frame-relay network. An
FRTE adds a frame header when sending data to the frame-relay
network and removes the frame header when receiving data
from the frame-relay network. See also frame-relay frame
handler (FRFH) and frame-relay switching equipment (FRSE)
support.
frequency
The rate of signal oscillation, expressed in hertz (cycles per
second).
From diskette
The diskette that provides the data to be transferred.
From drive
The drive that provides the data to be transferred.
full-duplex
Synonym for duplex.
function
In NetView DM, a function is the speciÞcation of a transmission
activity on a resource or group of resources. Functions are
grouped into phases. In CSCM, resources are known as data
objects.
Glossary-28
893-745-B
functional unit
An entity of hardware, software, or both, capable of
accomplishing a speciÞed purpose.
function key
A key that can signal or initiate the performance of various
actions or functions selected by the user or determined by an
application program.
G
gateway
A device and its associated software that interconnect networks
or systems of different architectures. The connection is usually
made above the reference model network layer. For example, a
gateway allows LANs access to System/370 host computers.
Contrast with bridge and router.
generate
In central site customizing, to write a Control diskette
containing the customizing data for a particular controller. Also,
to print a mailing address label and a diskette label for a
particular controller.
get
In central site customizing, to select the type of data you want
and store it in working copy.
group
(1) A set of related records that have the same value for a
particular Þeld in all records. (2) A collection of users who can
share access authorities for protected resources. (3) A list of
names that are known together by a single name.
H
half-duplex
In data communication, pertaining to transmission in only one
direction at a time. Contrast with duplex.
hard error
An error condition on a network that requires that the source of
the error be removed or that the network be reconÞgured before
the network can resume reliable operation. See also beaconing.
Contrast with soft error.
hardware
Physical equipment as opposed to programs, procedures, rules,
and associated documentation.
893-745-B
Glossary-29
header
The portion of a message that contains control information for
the message such as one or more destination Þelds, name of the
originating station, input sequence number, character string
indicating the type of message, and priority level for the
message.
hexadecimal
(1) Pertaining to a selection, choice, or condition that has 16
possible values or states. (2) Pertaining to a Þxed-radix
numeration system, with radix of 16. (3) Pertaining to a
numbering system with base of 16; valid numbers use the digits
0 through 9 and characters A through F, where A represents 10
and F represents 15.
hexadecimal number
The 1-byte hexadecimal equivalent of an EBCDIC character.
hop
In APPN, a portion of a route that has no intermediate nodes. It
consists of only a single transmission group connecting adjacent
nodes.
hop count
(1) On a token ring, the number of bridges through which a
frame has passed on the way to its destination. (2) In APPN, the
number of network nodes traversed by a Locate search, or the
number of APPN nodes traversed by a bind for session
establishment.
NOTE: Hop count applies to all broadcast frames except single-route
broadcast frames.
host access method
The access method that controls communication with a domain.
host-addressable printer (HAP)
A workstation-attached printer that a host can communicate
with and to which other devices can local copy.
host attachment
A mode of SNA communication in which the processor acts as a
secondary SNA device.
host computer
(1) In a computer network, a computer that provides end users
with services such as computation and databases and that
usually performs network control functions. (2) The primary or
controlling computer in a multiple-computer installation. (3) A
Glossary-30
893-745-B
computer used to prepare programs for use on another computer
or on another data processing system; for example, a computer
used to compile, link edit, or test programs to be used on
another system. (4) Synonym for host processor.
host logical unit (LU)
An SNA logical unit (LU) located in a host processor (for
example, an ACF/VTAM application program).
host node
(1) A node at which a host processor is located. (2) In SNA, a
subarea node that contains a system services control point
(SSCP); for example, a System/370 computer with OS/VS2 and
ACF/TCAM.
host processor
(1) A processor that controls all or part of a user application
network. (2) In a network, the processing unit in which resides
the access method for the network. (3) In an SNA network, the
processing unit that contains a system services control point
(SSCP). (4) A processing unit that executes the access method
for attached communication controllers. (5) The processing unit
required to create and maintain PSS. (6) Synonymous with host
computer.
host system
(1) A data processing system used to prepare programs and
operating environments for use on another computer or
controller. (2) The data processing system to which a network is
connected and with which the system can communicate. (3) The
controlling or highest-level system in a data communication
conÞguration; for example, a System/38 is the host system for
the workstations connected to it.
I
IBM Cabling System
A permanently installed wiring system that eliminates the need
to rewire when terminals are moved from one location to
another within an ofÞce complex. It allows transmission of data
at very high speeds and is the foundation for installing a local
area network.
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operation System (DOS)
A disk operating system based on MS-DOS.
893-745-B
Glossary-31
inactive
(1) Not operational. (2) Pertaining to a node or device not
connected or not available for connection to another node or
device. (3) Pertaining to a station that is only repeating frames
or tokens, or both.
individual address
An address that identiÞes a particular network adapter on a local
area network.
initialize
In a LAN, to prepare the adapter (and adapter support code, if
used) for use by an application program.
initial microcode load (IML)
The action of loading the operational microcode.
input/output (I/O)
(1) Pertaining to a device whose parts can perform an input
process and an output process at the same time. (2) Pertaining to
a functional unit or channel involved in an input process, output
process, or both, concurrently or not, and to the data involved in
such a process. (3) Pertaining to input, output, or both.
insert
To make an attaching device an active part of a LAN.
integrated services digital network (ISDN)
A digital end-to-end telecommunication network that supports
multiple services including, but not limited to, voice and data.
NOTE: ISDNs are used in public and private network architectures.
interaction
A basic unit used to record system activity, consisting of the
acceptance of a line of terminal input, processing of the line, and
a response, if any.
interactive
Pertaining to a program or system that alternately accepts input
and then responds. An interactive system is conversational, that
is, a continuous dialog exists between user and system. Contrast
with batch.
interface
(1) A shared boundary between two functional units, deÞned by
functional characteristics, common physical interconnection
characteristics, signal characteristics, and other characteristics
as appropriate. (2) A shared boundary. An interface may be a
Glossary-32
893-745-B
hardware component to link two devices or a portion of storage
or registers accessed by two or more computer programs. (3)
Hardware, software, or both linking systems, programs, or
devices.
interference
(1) The prevention of clear reception of broadcast signals. (2)
The distorted portion of a received signal.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
An organization of national standards bodies from various
countries established to promote development of standards to
facilitate international exchange of goods and services and to
develop cooperation in intellectual, scientiÞc, technological, and
economic activity.
J
jack
A connecting device to which a wire or wires of a circuit may be
attached and which is arranged for insertion of a plug.
jumper
A connector between two pins on a network adapter that enables
or disables an adapter option, feature, or parameter value.
K
keyboard deÞnition
A customizing procedure for deÞning a maximum of four
modiÞed keyboard layouts for modiÞable keyboards only. Most
characters, symbols, and functions can be relocated, duplicated,
or deleted from almost any keyboard position. Synonym for
modify keyboard.
kilobit (Kb)
One thousand binary digits.
kilobyte (KB)
1024 bytes for processor and data storage (memory) size;
otherwise, 1000 bytes.
893-745-B
Glossary-33
L
LAN adapter
The circuit card within a communicating device (such as a
personal computer) that, together with its associated software,
enables the device to be attached to a LAN.
LAN segment
(1) Any portion of a LAN (for example, a single bus or ring) that
can operate independently but is connected to other parts of the
establishment network via bridges. (2) An entire ring or bus
network without bridges.
LAN Segment Number
The identiÞer that uniquely distinguishes a LAN segment in a
multisegment LAN.
layer
(1) One of the seven levels of the Open Systems Interconnection
reference model. (2) In open systems architecture, a collection
of related functions that comprise one level of hierarchy of
functions. Each layer speciÞes its own functions and assumes
that lower-level functions are provided. (3) In SNA, a grouping
of related functions that are logically separate from the
functions of other layers. Implementation of the functions in one
layer can be changed without affecting functions in other layers.
LEN end node
See low-entry networking end node.
Library (LIB) diskette
A diskette that contains customizing data for some or all of the
controllers in a network.
library member
A Þle located on a Library diskette that contains customizing
information for a controller in a network.
line data rate
The rate of data transmission over a telecommunications link.
line speed
(1) The rate at which data is transmitted from one point to
another over a telecommunication line. (2) The number of
binary digits that can be sent over a telecommunication line in 1
second, expressed in bits per second (b/s).
link
(1) The logical connection between nodes including the
end-to-end link control procedures. (2) The combination of
physical media, protocols, and programming that connects
devices on a network. (3) In computer programming, the part of
a program, in some cases a single instruction or an address, that
passes control and parameters between separate portions of the
Glossary-34
893-745-B
computer program. (4) To interconnect items of data or portions
of one or more computer programs. (5) In SNA, the
combination of the link connection and link stations joining
network nodes.
link-attached
Pertaining to the attachment of devices to a central computer
through a communication control unit. Contrast with
channel-attached. Deprecated term for
telecommunication-attached.
link connection
(1) All physical components and protocol machines that lie
between the communicating link stations of a link. The link
connection may include a switched or leased physical data
circuit, a LAN, or an X.25 virtual circuit. (2) In SNA, the
physical equipment providing two-way communication and
error correction and detection between one link station and one
or more link stations.
link station
(1) A speciÞc place in a service access point (SAP) that enables
an adapter to communicate with another adapter. (2) A protocol
machine in a node that manages the elements of procedure
required for the exchange of data trafÞc with another
communicating link station. (3) A logical point within a SAP
that enables an adapter to establish connection-oriented
communication with another adapter. (4) In SNA, the
combination of hardware and software that allows a node to
attach to and provide control for a link.
local
Pertaining to a device accessed directly without use of a
telecommunication line. Synonym for channel-attached.
Contrast with remote.
local area network (LAN)
A computer network located on a userÕs premises within a
limited geographical area.
NOTE: Communication within a local area network is not subject to external
regulations; however, communication across the LAN boundary may be
subject to some form of regulation.
local format storage
893-745-B
In the Model 3174 module, this function allows the module to
store predeÞned formatted screens and subsequently be viewed
by a terminal user. The formatted screens are downloaded from
the host into the module.
Glossary-35
locally administered address
An adapter address that the user can assign to override the
universally administered address.
logical connection
In a network, devices that can communicate or work with one
another because they share the same protocol.
logical terminal (LT)
In MLT, one of Þve sessions available to share one display
station.
logical unit (LU)
A type of network accessible unit that enables end users to
communicate with each other and gain access to network
resources.
loop
A closed unidirectional signal path connecting input/output
devices to a network.
low-entry networking (LEN)
A capability in type 2.1 nodes allowing them to be directly
attached to one another using peer-to-peer protocols and
allowing them to support multiple and parallel sessions between
logical units.
low-entry networking end node
A type 2.1 end node that:
■
Provides SNA end-user services.
■
Attaches directly to other T2.1 nodes using peer protocols.
■
Derives network services implicitly from an adjacent
network node when attached to an APPN network without
a session between its local control point (CP) and another
CP.
A low-entry networking end node can also attach to a subarea
network as a peripheral node.
M
MAC frame
Medium access control frame. A frame used to carry
information to maintain the ring protocol and for exchange of
management information.
MAC protocol
(1) In a local area network, the protocol that governs
communication on the transmission medium without concern
for the physical characteristics of the medium, but taking into
account the topological aspects of the network, in order to
enable the exchange of data between data stations. See also
Glossary-36
893-745-B
logical link control protocol (LLC protocol). (2) The LAN
protocol sublayer of data link control (DLC) protocol that
includes functions for adapter address recognition; copying of
message units from the physical network; and message unit
format recognition, error detection, and routing within the
processor.
MAC sublayer
In a local area network, the part of the data link layer that
applies medium access control and supports
topology-dependent functions. The MAC sublayer uses the
services of the physical layer to provide services to the logical
link control sublayer and all higher layers.
main ring path
In the IBM token-ring network, the part of the ring made up of
access units, repeaters, converters, and the cables connecting
them. See also backup path.
main storage
Program-addressable storage from which instructions and other
data can be loaded directly into registers for subsequent
processing.
management services (MS)
One of the types of network services in control points and
physical units. Management services are the services provided
to assist in the management of SNA networks, such as problem
management, performance and accounting management,
conÞguration management, and change management.
Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP)
A broadband LAN with a bus topology that passes tokens from
adapter to adapter on a coaxial cable.
mark
A symbol or symbols that indicate the beginning or the end of a
Þeld, a word, an item of data, or a set of data such as a Þle,
record, or block.
Master Control diskette
A diskette that contains the base microcode and any necessary
patches, RPQs, and modiÞed keyboard tables.
medium
A physical carrier of electrical or optical energy.
893-745-B
Glossary-37
medium access control (MAC) frame (1) In a ring network, an address resolution request frame that
has the unique part of a destination address and an Òall ringsÓ
address. A sender issues this request to determine the ring where
the destination node is located and whether or not the node is
active. (2) In a ring network, a response from an active
destination node to the requesting source node that has its
complete address and ring number.
medium access control sublayer (MAC sublayer)
In a local area network, the part of the data link layer that
applies medium access control and supports
topology-dependent functions. The MAC sublayer uses the
services of the physical layer to provide services to the logical
link control sublayer and all higher layers.
megabit (Mb)
A unit of measure for throughput. 1 megabit = 1,048,576 bits.
megabyte (MB)
A unit of measure for data. 1 megabyte = 1,048,576 bytes.
memory
Program-addressable storage from which instructions and other
data can be loaded directly into registers for subsequent
execution or processing.
message
(1) A logical partition of the user deviceÕs data stream to and
from the adapter. (2) A group of characters and control bits
transferred as an entity.
message unit (MU)
The unit of data processed by any layer; for example, a basic
information unit, a path information unit, or a request/response
unit.
metropolitan area network (MAN)
An interconnection of two or more networks that may operate at
higher speeds and cross administrative boundaries and may use
multiple access methods.
Glossary-38
893-745-B
microcode
(1) One or more microinstructions. (2) A code, representing the
instructions of an instruction set, that is implemented in a part of
storage that is not program addressable. (3) To design, write,
and also test one or more microinstructions. (4) See also
microprogram. (5) See also licensed internal code.
NOTE: The term microcode represents microinstructions used in a product as
an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to implement functions of a processor or
other system component. The term microprogram means a dynamic
arrangement of one or more groups of microinstructions for execution to
perform a certain function.
microprogram
A sequence of microinstructions that when executed performs a
preplanned function.
mode name
The name used by the initiator of a session to designate the
characteristics wanted for the session, such as trafÞc pacing
values, message-length limits, sync point and cryptography
options, and the class of service within the transport network.
modem (modulator/demodulator)
A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog
signal that can be transmitted on a telecommunication line and
converts the analog signal received to data for the computer.
modify keyboard
Synonym for keyboard deÞnition.
monitor
(1) A functional unit that observes and records selected
activities for analysis within a data processing system. Possible
uses are to show signiÞcant departures from the norm, or to
determine levels of utilization of particular functional units. (2)
Software or hardware that observes, supervises, controls, or
veriÞes operations of a system.
multidrop network
A network conÞguration in which there are one or more
intermediate nodes on the path between a central node and an
end point node.
multihost support
In the Model 3174 module, the ability of a terminal to access
more than one host at a time.
multiple logical terminal (MLT)
In the Model 3174 module, a function that provides a
CUT-attached, Þxed-function display station with the ability to
interact with as many as Þve host sessions. Each session is
processed as though it were a separate display station.
893-745-B
Glossary-39
multipoint
Pertaining to communication among more than two stations
over a single telecommunication line.
N
n-bit byte
A string that consists of n bits.
name
An alphanumeric term that identiÞes a data set, statement,
program, or cataloged procedure.
native mode
A 3179 or 3180 operational mode that uses the full capabilities
of those modelsÕ displays and keyboards.
nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN)
For any given attaching device on an IBM token-ring network,
the attaching device that is sending frames or tokens directly to
it.
NetView
Host-based IBM licensed program providing communication
network management (CNM) or communications and systems
management (C&SM) services. It supersedes NCCF, NPDA,
NLDM, and NPM.
network
(1) A conÞguration of data processing devices and software
connected for information interchange. (2) An arrangement of
nodes and connecting branches. Connections are made between
data stations.
network accessible unit (NAU)
A logical unit (LU), physical unit (PU), control point (CP), or
system services control point (SSCP). It is the origin or the
destination of information transmitted by the path control
network. Synonymous with network addressable unit.
network administrator
A person who manages the use and maintenance of a network.
network architecture
The logical structure and operating principles of a computer
network. See also systems network architecture (SNA) and Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) architecture.
NOTE: The operating principles of a network include those of services,
functions, and protocols.
Glossary-40
893-745-B
Network Control Program (NCP) node
In SNA products, a subarea node that contains an ACF/NCP
program but not a system services control point (SSCP).
network layer
(1) In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model, the
layer that provides for the entities in the transport layer the
means for routing and switching blocks of data through the
network between the open systems in which those entities
reside. (2) The layer that provides services to establish a path
between systems with a predictable quality of services. See
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).
network management
The conceptual control element of a station that interfaces with
all of the architectural layers of that station and is responsible
for the resetting and setting of control parameters, obtaining
reports of error conditions, and determining if the station should
be connected to or disconnected from the network.
network management vector transport (NMVT)
The portion of an alert transport frame that contains the alert
message.
network manager
A program or group of programs that is used to monitor,
manage, and diagnose the problems of a network.
network node (NN)
A node that can deÞne the paths or routes, control route
selection, and handle directory services for APPN.
network node server
An APPN network node that provides network services for its
local LUs and adjacent end nodes.
Network Site Controller
Any Model 3174 module that is conÞgured for central site
change management but does not contain the central site library.
Contrast with central site controller.
network status
The condition of the network.
node
An endpoint of a link or junction common to two or more links
in a network. Nodes can be processors, communication
controllers, cluster controllers, or terminals. Nodes can vary in
routing and other functional capabilities.
893-745-B
Glossary-41
node type
A designation of a node according to the protocols it supports
and the network accessible units that it can contain. Five types
are deÞned: 1, 2.0, 2.1, 4, and 5. Within a subarea network, type
1, type 2.0, and type 2.1 nodes are peripheral nodes, while type
4 and type 5 nodes are subarea nodes.
noise
(1) A disturbance that affects a signal and that can distort the
information carried by the signal. (2) Random variations of one
or more characteristics of any entity, such as voltage, current, or
data. (3) Loosely, any disturbance tending to interfere with
normal operation of a device or system.
NRZI
(1) Non-return-to-zero inverted transmission. (2)
Non-return-to-reference transmission in which the zeros are
represented by a bit cell boundary transition in the information
signal, and ones are represented by the absence of a bit cell
boundary transition.
nonescaping key
A key that allows a character to be typed without the imprint
position being changed.
nonswitched line
(1) A connection between systems or devices that does not have
to be made by dialing. Contrast with switched line. (2) A
telecommunication line on which connections do not have to be
established by dialing. Synonymous with leased line.
O
online test
A diagnostic test or data collection program that is run without
interrupting the normal operation of the Model 3174 module
and its associated terminals.
open
(1) A break in an electrical circuit. (2) To make a Þle ready for
use.
open systems architecture (OSA)
A model that represents a network as a hierarchical structure of
layers of functions; each layer provides a set of functions that
can be accessed and that can be used by the layer above it.
NOTE: Layers are independent in the sense that implementation of a layer can
be changed without affecting other layers.
Glossary-42
893-745-B
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) (1) The interconnection of open systems in accordance with
speciÞc ISO standards. (2) The use of standardized procedures
to enable the interconnection of data processing systems.
NOTE: OSI architecture establishes a framework for coordinating the
development of current and future standards for interconnection of computer
systems. Network functions are divided into seven layers. Each layer
represents a group of related data processing and communication functions
that can be carried out in a standard way to support different applications.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) architecture
Network architecture that adheres to a particular set of ISO
standards relating to Open Systems Interconnection.
operating system
Software that controls the execution of programs. An operating
system may provide services such as resource allocation,
scheduling, input/output control, and data management.
operation
(1) A deÞned action, namely, the act of obtaining a result from
one or more operands in accordance with a rule that completely
speciÞes the result for any permissible combination of operands.
(2) A program step undertaken or executed by a computer. (3)
An action performed on one or more data items, such as adding,
multiplying, comparing, or moving.
operator information area (OIA)
The area below the line near the bottom of the display area
where graphics and alphanumeric characters are displayed to
deÞne the status of the terminal or the system to the operator.
optical cable
A Þber, multiple Þbers, or a Þber bundle in a structure built to
meet optical, mechanical, and environmental speciÞcations.
optical Þber
Any Þlament made of dielectric materials that guides light,
regardless of its ability to send signals. See also Þber optics and
optical waveguide.
optical Þber cable
Synonym for optical cable.
option
(1) A speciÞcation in a statement, a selection from a menu, or a
setting of a switch, that may be used to inßuence the execution
of a program. (2) A hardware or software function that may be
selected or enabled as part of a conÞguration process. (3) A
piece of hardware (such as a network adapter) that can be
installed in a device to modify or enhance device function.
893-745-B
Glossary-43
original equipment manufacturer (OEM)
A manufacturer of equipment that may be marketed by another
manufacturer.
output device
A device in a data processing system by which data can be
received from the system. Synonymous with output unit.
output unit
Synonym for output device.
overßow exception
A condition caused by the result of an arithmetic operation
having a magnitude that exceeds the largest possible number.
See also underßow exception.
P
pacing
(1) A technique by which a receiving station controls the rate of
transmission of a sending station to prevent overrun. (2) In
SNA, a technique by which a receiving component controls the
rate of transmission of a sending component to prevent overrun
or congestion.
packet
(1) In data communication, a sequence of binary digits,
including data and control signals, that is transmitted and
switched as a composite whole. (2) Contrast with frame.
panel
The complete set of formatted information that appears in a
single display on a visual display unit.
parallel
(1) Pertaining to a process in which all events occur within the
same interval of time, each handled by a separate but similar
functional unit; for example, the parallel transmission of the bits
of a computer word along the lines of an internal bus. (2)
Pertaining to concurrent or simultaneous operation of two or
more devices or to concurrent performance of two or more
activities in a single device. (3) Pertaining to concurrent or
simultaneous occurrence of two or more related activities in
multiple devices or channels. (4) Pertaining to the simultaneity
of two or more processes. (5) Pertaining to the simultaneous
processing of the individual parts of a whole, such as the bits of
a character and the characters of a word, using separate facilities
for the various parts. (6) Contrast with serial.
Glossary-44
893-745-B
parallel sessions
Two or more concurrently active sessions between the same two
network accessible units using different pairs of network
addresses or local-form session identiÞers. Each session can
have independent session parameters.
parameter
(1) A variable that is given a constant value for a speciÞed
application and that may denote the application. (2) An item in a
menu for which the user speciÞes a value or for which the
system provides a value when the menu is interpreted. (3) Data
passed between programs or procedures.
parity
(1) A transmission error-checking scheme in which an extra bit
is added to some unit of data, usually a byte, in order to make
the total number of one bits even or odd. (2) The state of being
either even-numbered or odd-numbered.
party (even)
A condition when the sum of all of the digits in an array of
binary digits is even.
parity (odd)
A condition when the sum of all of the digits in an array of
binary digits is odd.
parity bit
A binary digit appended to a group of binary digits to make the
sum of all the digits, including the appended binary digit, either
odd or even as preestablished.
parity check
(1) A redundancy check by which a recalculated parity bit is
compared to the pregiven parity bit. (2) A check that tests
whether the number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary
digits is odd or even.
password
In computer security, a string of characters known to the
computer system and a user, who must specify it to gain full or
limited access to a system and to the data stored within it.
path
(1) In a network, a route between any two nodes. (2) The route
traversed by the information exchanged between two attaching
devices in a network.
path control
The function that routes message units between network
accessible units in the network and provides the paths between
them. It converts the BIUÕs from transmission control into path
information units (PIUs) and exchanges basic transmission units
containing one or more PIUs with data link control.
893-745-B
Glossary-45
path information unit (PIU)
A message unit consisting of a transmission header (TH) alone,
or of a TH followed by a basic information unit (BIU) or a BIU
segment. See also transmission header.
peripheral node
A node that uses local addresses for routing and therefore is not
affected by changes in network addresses. A peripheral node
requires boundary-function assistance from an adjacent subarea
node. A peripheral node is a type 1, 2.0, or 2.1 node connected
to a subarea node with boundary function within a subarea.
permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
In X.25 and frame-relay communications, a virtual circuit that
has a logical channel permanently assigned to it at each data
terminal equipment (DTE). Call-establishment protocols are not
required. Contrast with switched virtual circuit (SVC).
physical connection
(1) A connection that establishes an electrical circuit. (2) In
ACF/VTAM, a point-to-point connection or multipoint
connection.
physical layer
In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model, the layer
that provides the mechanical, electrical, functional, and
procedural means to establish, maintain, and release physical
connections over the transmission medium.
physical unit (PU)
The component that manages and monitors the resources (such
as attached links and adjacent link stations) associated with a
node, as requested by an SSCP via an SSCP-PU session. An
SSCP activates a session with the physical unit in order to
indirectly manage, through the PU, resources of the node such
as attached links. This term applies to type 2.0, type 4, and type
5 nodes only.
point-to-point connection
A connection established between two data stations for data
transmission. The connection may include switching facilities.
polling
(1) On a multipoint connection or a point-to-point connection,
the process whereby data stations are invited one at a time to
transmit. (2) Interrogation of devices for such purposes as to
avoid contention, to determine operational status, or to
determine readiness to send or receive data.
port
(1) An access point for data entry or exit. (2) A connector on a
device to which cables for other devices such as display stations
and printers are attached.
Glossary-46
893-745-B
printer authorization matrix (PAM) A matrix stored in the controller that establishes printer
assignment and classiÞcation.
procedure
A set of instructions that gives a service representative a
step-by-step procedure for tracing a symptom to the cause of
failure.
processor
In a computer, a functional unit that interprets and executes
instructions.
program function (PF) key
On a display device keyboard, a key that passes a signal to a
program to call for a particular display operation.
protocol
(1) A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the
behavior of functional units in achieving communication. (2) In
SNA, the meanings of and the sequencing rules for requests and
responses used for managing the network, transferring data, and
synchronizing the states of network components. (3) A
speciÞcation for the format and relative timing of information
exchanged between communicating parties.
put
In central site customizing, to store data from the working copy
into a library member.
R
random access memory (RAM)
A computerÕs or adapterÕs volatile storage area into which data
may be entered and retrieved in a nonsequential manner.
receive
To obtain and store information transmitted from a device.
random access memory (RAM) disk In the Model 3174 module, a pluggable storage device used as if
it were a disk device into which data may be entered and
retrieved in a nonsequential manner.
remote
Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed
through a telecommunication line.
remove
To take an attaching device off a network.
repeater
In a network, a device that ampliÞes or regenerates data signals
in order to extend the distance between attaching devices.
request for price quotation (RPQ)
An alteration or addition to the functional capabilities that the
controller provides.
893-745-B
Glossary-47
request header (RH)
Control information preceding a request unit.
request unit (RU)
A message unit that contains control information, end-user data,
or both.
response Þeld
On a display device, a speciÞed area on the display space where
the user can enter, modify, or erase response data.
response header (RH)
A header, optionally followed by a response unit, that indicates
whether the response is positive or negative and that may
contain a pacing response.
Response Time Monitor (RTM)
A network management tool that measures and records the
transaction times of inbound host attention (AID) operations
from display stations that communicate with the host.
response unit (RU)
A message unit that acknowledges a request unit; it may contain
preÞx information received in a request unit. If positive, the
response unit may contain additional information (such as
session parameters in response to a bind), or if negative,
contains sense data deÞning the exception condition.
ring error monitor (REM)
A function that compiles error statistics reported by adapters on
a network, analyzes the statistics to determine probable error
causes, sends reports to network manager programs, and
updates network status conditions. It assists in fault isolation
and correction.
ring in (RI)
In the IBM Token-Ring Network, the receive or input receptacle
on an access unit or repeater. Contrast with ring out.
ring network
A network conÞguration in which a series of attaching devices
is connected by unidirectional transmission links to form a
closed path. A ring of an IBM Token-Ring Network is referred
to as a LAN segment or as a Token-Ring Network segment.
ring out (RO)
In an IBM Token-Ring Network, the transmit or output
receptacle on an access unit or repeater. Contrast with ring in.
ring segment
A ring segment is any section of a ring that can be isolated (by
unplugging connectors) from the rest of the ring. A segment can
consist of a single lobe, the cable between access units, or a
combination of cables, lobes, and/or access units.
Glossary-48
893-745-B
ring topology
A logically circular, unidirectional transmission path without
deÞned ends. Control can be distributed or centralized.
route
An ordered sequence of nodes and transmission groups (TGs)
that represent a path from an origin node to a destination node
traversed by the trafÞc exchanged between them.
router
An attaching device that connects two LAN segments, which
use similar or different architectures, at the reference model
network layer. Contrast with bridge and gateway.
routine
Part of a program, or a sequence of instructions called by a
program, that may have some general or frequent use.
routing
(1) The assignment of the path by which a message will reach
its destination. (2) In SNA, the forwarding of a message unit
along a particular path through a network, as determined by
parameters carried in the message unit, such as the destination
network address in a transmission header.
S
scroll
To move all or part of the display image vertically or
horizontally to display data that cannot be observed within
a single display image.
segment
A section of cable between components or devices on the
network. A segment may consist of a single patch cable,
multiple patch cables connected, or a combination of building
cable and patch cables connected.
serial
(1) Pertaining to a process in which all events occur one after
the other; for example, serial transmission of the bits of a
character according to V24 CCITT protocol. (2) Pertaining to
the sequential or consecutive occurrence of two or more related
activities in a single device or channel. (3) Pertaining to the
sequential processing of the individual parts of a whole, such
as the bits of a character or the characters of a word, using the
same facilities for successive parts. (4) Contrast with parallel.
server
(1) A device, program, or code module on a network dedicated
to providing a speciÞc service to a network. (2) On a LAN, a
data station that provides facilities to other data stations.
Examples are a Þle server, print server, and mail server.
893-745-B
Glossary-49
service access point (SAP)
(1) A logical point made available by an adapter where
information can be received and transmitted. A single SAP can
have many links terminating in it. (2) In Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) architecture, the logical point at which an
n + 1-layer entity acquires the services of the n-layer. For LANs,
the n-layer is assumed to be data link control (DLC). A single
SAP can have many links terminating in it. These link end
points are represented in DLC by link stations.
session
(1) A connection between two application programs that allows
them to communicate. (2) In SNA, a logical connection between
two network addressable units that can be activated, tailored to
provide various protocols, and deactivated as requested. (3) The
data transport connection resulting from a call or link between
two devices. (4) The period of time during which a user of a
node can communicate with an interactive system, usually the
elapsed time between log on and log off. (5) In network
architecture, an association of facilities necessary for
establishing, maintaining, and releasing connections for
communication between stations.
session limit
(1) In SNA, the maximum number of concurrently active
LU-LU sessions that a particular logical unit (LU) can support.
(2) For the 3174 AEA, the total number of logical terminals or
deÞned AEA default destinations for an AEA port set.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The network management protocol of choice for TCP/IP-based
internetworks.
simulation
(1) The representation of selected characteristics of the behavior
of one physical or abstract system by another system. In a
digital computer system, simulation is done by software. For
example, (a) the representation of physical phenomena by
means of operations performed by a computer system, and (b)
the representation of operations of a computer system by those
of another computer system. (2) Contrast with emulation.
single-link multihost support
In the Model 3174 module, the ability of a terminal to access
multiple hosts over a single physical link connected to the IBM
Token-Ring Network or an X.25 Network.
Glossary-50
893-745-B
single-route broadcast
The forwarding of specially designated broadcast frames only
by bridges that have single-route broadcast enabled. If the
network is conÞgured correctly, a single-route broadcast frame
will have exactly one copy delivered to every LAN segment in
the network.
SNA character string (SCS)
A character string composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally
intermixed with end-user data, that is carried within a request/
response unit.
soft error
An intermittent error on a network that causes data to have to be
transmitted more than once to be received. A soft error affects
the networkÕs performance but does not, by itself, affect the
networkÕs overall reliability. If the number of soft errors
becomes excessive, reliability is affected. Contrast with hard
error.
NOTE: A soft error by itself does not affect overall reliability of the network,
but reliability may be affected if the number of soft errors reaches the ring
error limit.
sort
In central site customizing, to arrange a list of library members
according to date, name, or microcode level.
SSCP-dependent logical unit
An LU that requires assistance from a system services control
point (SSCP) in order to initiate an LU-LU session. It requires
an SSCP-LU session.
star
A wiring arrangement in which an individual cable runs from
each work area to a concentration point.
start delimiter
The Þrst byte of a token or frame, consisting of a special,
recognizable bit pattern.
station
(1) An input or output point of a system that uses
telecommunication facilities; for example, one or more systems,
computers, terminals, devices, and associated programs at a
particular location that can send or receive data over a
telecommunication line. (2) A location in a device at which an
operation is performed, for example, a read station. (3) In SNA,
a link station.
893-745-B
Glossary-51
storage
A unit into which recorded text can be entered, in which it can
be retained and processed, and from which it can be retrieved.
See also memory.
structured Þeld
A data stream format that permits variable-length data and
controls to be parsed into its components without having to scan
every byte.
subarea
A portion of the SNA network consisting of a subarea node, any
attached peripheral nodes, and their associated resources.
Within a subarea node, all network accessible units, links, and
adjacent link stations (in attached peripheral or subarea nodes)
that are addressable within the subarea share a common subarea
address and have distinct element addresses.
subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system, or programming support,
usually capable of operating independently of a controlling
system or asynchronously with a controlling system. The Model
3174 module and its attached terminals are an example of a
subsystem.
switch
On an adapter, a mechanism used to select a value for, enable, or
disable a conÞgurable option or feature.
switched line
A telecommunication line in which the connection is established
by dialing. Contrast with nonswitched line.
synchronous
(1) Pertaining to two or more processes that depend on the
occurrences of a speciÞc event such as common timing signal.
(2) Occurring with a regular or predictable timing relationship.
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC)
A discipline conforming to subsets of the Advance Data
Communication Control Procedures (ADCCP) of the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) and High-level Data Link
Control (HDLC) of the International Organization for
Standardization, for managing synchronous, code-transparent,
serial-by-bit information transfer over a link connection.
Transmission exchanges may be duplex or half-duplex over
switched or nonswitched links. The conÞguration of the link
connection may be point-to-point, multipoint, or loop. See also
binary synchronous communication (BSC).
Glossary-52
893-745-B
system conÞguration
A process that speciÞes the devices and programs that form a
particular data processing system.
system generation (SYSGEN)
The process of selecting optional parts of an operating system
and of creating a particular operating system tailored to the
requirements of a data processing installation. System
generation enables a host computer to identify and communicate
with the I/O devices connected to it.
system services control point (SSCP)
In SNA, the focal point within an SNA network for managing
the conÞguration, coordinating network operator and problem
determination requests, and providing directory support and
other session services for end users of the network. Multiple
SSCPs, cooperating as peers, can divide the network into
domains of control, with each SSCP having a hierarchical
control relationship to the physical units (PUs) and logical units
(LUs) within its domain.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
The description of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and
operational sequences for transmitting information units
through, and controlling the conÞguration and operation of,
networks.
NOTE: The layered structure of SNA allows the ultimate origins and
destinations of information, that is, the end users, to be independent of and
unaffected by the speciÞc SNA network services and facilities used for
information exchange.
T
telecommunication-attached
Pertaining to the attachment of devices by teleprocessing lines
to a host processor. Synonym for remote. Contrast with
channel-attached.
telecommunication control unit
See communication controller unit.
893-745-B
Glossary-53
telecommunication line
(1) Any physical medium, such as a wire, that is used to
transmit data. (2) The portion of a data circuit external to
data-circuit terminating equipment (DCE) that connects the
DCE to a data-switching exchange (DSE), that connects a DCE
to one or more DCEs, or that connects a DSE to another DSE.
NOTE: A telecommunication line is the physical medium. A data link includes
the physical medium of transmission, the protocol, and associated devices and
programs; it is both physical and logical.
telephone twisted pair
One or more twisted pairs of copper wire in the unshielded
voice-grade cable commonly used to connect a telephone to its
wall jack. Also referred to as Òunshielded twisted pairÓ (UTP).
TELNET
In TCP/IP, an application protocol that allows a user at one site
to access a remote system as if the userÕs display station were
locally attached. TELNET uses the Transmission Control
Protocol as the underlying protocol.
terminal
In data communication, a device, usually equipped with a
keyboard and display device, capable of sending and receiving
information.
terminal emulation
The capability of a microcomputer, personal computer, 3270
CUT mode display station, 3270 printer, ASCII display station,
or ASCII printer to operate as if it were a particular type of
terminal linked to a processing unit and to access data.
terminal multiplexer
A device, such as the 3299 Terminal Multiplexer, for
interleaving the signals for many devices onto a single cable.
terminal port
(1) In a network, the functional unit of a node through which
data can enter or leave the network. (2) The part of a processor
that is dedicated to a single data channel for the purpose of
receiving data from or transferring data to one or more external
or remote devices.
Glossary-54
893-745-B
threshold
(1) A level, point, or value above which something is true or will
take place and below which it is not true or will not take place.
(2) In IBM bridge programs, a value set for the maximum
number of frames that are not forwarded across a bridge due to
errors, before a Òthreshold exceededÓ occurrence is counted and
indicated to network management programs. (3) An initial value
from which a counter is decremented to zero, or a value to
which a counter is incremented or decremented from an initial
value. When the counter reaches zero or the threshold value, a
decision is made and/or an event occurs.
To diskette
The diskette that receives the transferred data.
To drive
The drive that receives the transferred data.
token
A sequence of bits passed from one device to another on the
token-ring network that signiÞes permission to transmit over the
network. It consists of a starting delimiter, an access control
Þeld, and an end delimiter. The access control Þeld contains a
bit that indicates to a receiving device that the token is ready to
accept information. If a device has data to send along the
network, it appends the data to the token. When data is
appended, the token then becomes a frame. See frame.
token-bus network
A bus network in which a token-passing procedure is used.
token-passing
In a token-ring network, the process by which a node captures a
token; inserts a message, addresses, and control information;
changes the bit pattern of the token to the bit pattern of a frame;
transmits the frame; removes the frame from the ring when it
has made a complete circuit; generates another token; and
transmits the token on the ring where it can be captured by the
next node that is ready to transmit.
token ring
A network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one
attaching device (node) to another. A node that is ready to send
can capture a token and insert data for transmission.
893-745-B
Glossary-55
token-ring network
(1) A ring network that allows unidirectional data transmission
between data stations by a token-passing procedure over one
transmission medium so that the transmitted data returns to and
is removed by the transmitting station. The IBM Token-Ring
Network is a baseband LAN with a star-wired ring topology that
passes tokens from network adapter to network adapter. (2) A
network that uses a ring topology, in which tokens are passed in
a sequence from node to node. A node that is ready to send can
capture the token and insert data for transmission. (3) A group
of interconnected token rings.
topology
The physical or logical arrangement of nodes in a computer
network. Examples include ring topology and bus topology.
trace
(1) A record of the execution of a computer program. It exhibits
the sequences in which the instructions were executed. (2) A
record of the frames and bytes transmitted on a network.
transaction
In an SNA network, an exchange between two programs that
usually involves a speciÞc set of initial input data that causes the
execution of a speciÞc task or job.
transfer rate
See data transfer rate.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
A set of protocols that allow cooperating computers to share
resources across a heterogeneous network.
transmission control unit (TCU)
A communication control unit whose operations are controlled
solely by programmed instructions from the computing system
to which the unit is attached. Contrast with communication
controller. Synonymous with telecommunication control unit.
transmission group (TG)
A group of links between adjacent subarea nodes appearing as a
single logical link for routing of messages. A transmission
group may consist of one or more SDLC links (parallel links) or
of a single System/370 channel. In APPN, transmission group is
synonymous with link.
transmission header (TH)
Control information, optionally followed by a basic information
unit (BIU) or a BIU segment, that is created and used by path
control to route message units and to control their ßow within
the network. See also path information unit.
Glossary-56
893-745-B
transmission medium
(1) A physical carrier of electrical energy or electromagnetic
radiation. (2) The physical medium that conveys data between
data stations; for example, twisted-pair wire, optical Þber,
coaxial cable.
transmission priority
A rank assigned to a message unit that determines its
precedence for being selected by the path control component in
each node along a route for forwarding to the next node in the
route.
transparency
See transparent.
transparent
(1) Pertaining to operations or data that are of no signiÞcance to
the user. (2) In data transmission, pertaining to information not
recognized by the receiving program or device as transmission
control characters.
twisted pair
A transmission medium that consists of two insulated
conductors twisted together to reduce noise.
type
In the 3174, the identifying number of a card.
type 2.1 (T2.1) node
An SNA node that can be conÞgured as an end point or
intermediate routing node in a T2.1 network, or as a peripheral
node attached to a subarea network.
type 4 node
A subarea node containing a PUCP rather than an SSCP and
controlled by one or more type 5 nodes.
type 5 node
A subarea node containing an SSCP and having hierarchical
control of peripheral nodes and type 4 subarea nodes.
U
unbind
In SNA, to deactivate a session between logical units.
UNBIND command
A command used to reset the protocols for a session. Contrast
with BIND command.
underßow exception
A condition caused by the result of an arithmetic operation
having a magnitude less than the smallest possible nonzero
number.
universally administered address
The address permanently encoded in an adapter at the time of
manufacture. All universally administered addresses are unique.
893-745-B
Glossary-57
universal receiver-transmitter
A circuit used in asynchronous, synchronous, or synchronous/
asynchronous data communication applications to provide all
the necessary logic to recover data in a serial-in parallel-out
fashion and to transmit data in a parallel-in serial-out fashion. It
is usually duplex; that is, it can transmit and receive
simultaneously with the option to handle various data word
lengths.
unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
See telephone twisted pair.
update
In central site customizing, to tailor a library memberÕs
customizing data, in working copy, and put it back to the library
diskette.
upgrade
In central site customizing, to select a library member and
upgrade its data to the microcode level of the Central Site
Customizing Utility diskette.
upstream
(1) In the direction opposite to data ßow or toward the source of
transmission. (2) Toward the processor from an attached unit or
end user. (3) Contrast with downstream.
Utility (UTL) diskette
A diskette that contains the microcode necessary to run various
utilities, for example, to copy portions of a diskette for a backup
diskette.
Utility disk
In the Model 3174 module, a diskette or Þxed disk that contains
the microcode necessary to run various utilities, for example, to
copy portions of a diskette for a backup diskette.
V
V.35 communication adapter
A communication adapter that conforms to the CCITT V.35
standard.
variable
(1) In computer programming, a character or group of
characters that refers to a value and, in the execution of a
computer program, corresponds to an address. (2) A quantity
that can assume any of a given set of values.
vector
One or more related Þelds of data, in a speciÞed format. A
quantity usually characterized by an ordered set of numbers.
Glossary-58
893-745-B
version
A separate IBM-licensed program, based on an existing
IBM-licensed program, that usually has signiÞcant new code or
new function.
virtual circuit
(1) In packet switching, the facilities provided by a network that
give the appearance to the user of an actual connection. See also
data circuit. Contrast with physical circuit. (2) A logical
connection established between two DTEs. (3) In a
packet-switching data network, a logical end-to-end
transmission channelÑas opposed to a physical connectionÑ
that connects X.25 users. Virtual circuits allow physical
transmission facilities to be shared by many users
simultaneously. A virtual circuit is a logical connection
established between two data terminal equipment (TE) devices.
See also permanent virtual circuit (PVC).
virtual routing node
A representation of an end nodeÕs connectivity to a connection
network deÞned on a shared-access transport facility, such as a
token ring.
virtual storage (VS)
(1) The storage space that may be regarded as addressable main
storage by the user of a computer in which virtual addresses are
mapped into real addresses. The size of virtual storage is limited
by the addressing scheme of the computer system and by the
amount of auxiliary storage available, not by the actual number
of main storage locations. (2) Addressable space that is apparent
to the user as the processor storage space, from which the
instructions and the data are mapped into the processor storage
locations.
W
wide area network (WAN)
893-745-B
A network that provides communication services to a
geographic area larger than that served by a local area network
or a metropolitan area network, and that may use or provide
public communication facilities. Contrast with local area
network (LAN).
Glossary-59
workstation
(1) An I/O device that allows either transmission of data or the
reception of data (or both) from a host system, as needed to
perform a job (for example, a display station or printer). (2) A
conÞguration of I/O equipment at which an operator works. (3)
A terminal or microcomputer, usually one connected to a
mainframe or network, at which a user can perform tasks.
wraparound
The continuation of an operation (for example, a read operation
or a cursor movement operation) from the last character position
in a buffer to the Þrst character position in the buffer.
write
To make a permanent or transient recording of data in a storage
device or on a data medium.
X
X.21
In data communication, a recommendation of the International
Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT)
that deÞnes the interface between data terminal equipment
and public data networks for digital leases and circuit switched
synchronous services.
X.21 communication adapter
A communication adapter that conforms to CCITT X.21
standards.
X.25
In data communication, a recommendation of the CCITT that
deÞnes the interface between data terminal equipment and
packet switching networks.
3
3174-Peer Communication (3174-Peer)
A network of personal computers, with adapter support and
associated program interfaces, attached with 3270 wiring to a
Model 3174 module that has the associated microcode installed.
The personal computers attached to the Model 3174 module
communicate as if they were token-ring LAN devices.
Glossary-60
893-745-B
3270 data stream
(1) The commands, control codes, orders, attributes, and data or
structured Þelds for 3270 devices that are transmitted inbound to
an application program or outbound to a terminal. (2) Data
being transferred from or to an allocated primary or tertiary
device, or to the host system, as a continuous stream of data and
3270 Information Display System control elements in character
form.
3270 emulation
The use of a program that allows a device or system such as a
personal computer or a System/38 to operate in conjunction
with a host system as if it were a 3270-series display station or
control unit.
893-745-B
Glossary-61
Index
Numerics
22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces worksheet
080 Token-Ring Address 3-190
10AÑPresentation Space (MLT) worksheet
22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode worksheet
Ia-14
10DÑPresentation Space Storage worksheet
Ia-15
117 Port Assignment 3-19
117 Port Assignment panel
entering responses 4-30, 4-46
118 Port Address 3-19
11AÑ117 Port Assignment worksheet Ia-16
12Ñ128 Response Time Monitor worksheet Ib-2
128 Response Time Monitor worksheet Ib-2
128 RTM panel
entering responses 4-33
13SÑSecondary X.25 Options worksheet Ib-5
13ÑX.25 Options worksheet Ib-3
14ÑCommon SNA worksheet Ib-7
15ÑAPPN Node Definition worksheet Ib-8
16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers worksheet
Ib-10
16ÑNetwork Resources worksheet Ib-9
17ÑAssociated LUs worksheet Ib-11
18ÑCOS Definition worksheet Ib-13
19ÑCOS Node Definition worksheet Ib-14
1ÑHost Attachment worksheet Ia-2
20AÑCOS Transmission Group Definition
worksheet (Part 1) Ib-15
20BÑCOS Transmission Group Definition
worksheet (Part 2) Ib-16
21ÑMode/COS Correlation worksheet Ib-17
22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Option worksheet
Ib-18
22BÑ3174-Peer Definition worksheet Ib-19
22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition worksheet
Ib-20
893745B
Ib-21
Ib-22
23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile worksheet Ic-1
23BÑBridge Management worksheet Ic-2
25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram worksheet
Ic-11
27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure worksheet
Ic-12
28ÑPort Set worksheet Ic-13
29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map worksheet Ic-14
2ÑMulti-Host Definition worksheet Ia-3
30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set worksheet
Ic-15
3174-Peer and Bridges Option worksheet Ib-18
3174-Peer bridge profile 3-117
3174-Peer Bridge Profile worksheet Ic-1
3174-Peer bridge support (651) 3-103
3174-Peer communication and bridges 1-15
3174-Peer Definition
description of A-22
3174-Peer Definition worksheet Ib-19
3174-Peer online test updates (653) 3-120
3174-Peer parameters transfer C-10
3174-Peer port address range (660) 3-103
3174-Peer segment number (672) 3-118
3174-Peer support (650) 3-102
3179G options (173) 3-35
3179G password (175) 3-37
31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default Destination
worksheet Ic-17
31AÑTCP/IP Options worksheet Ic-19
31AÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements worksheet
Ic-23
31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information worksheet
Ic-20
Index-1
31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services worksheet
Ic-21
31DÑTCP/IP 3174 Defined Nicknames
worksheet Ic-22
3270 Attachment Diagram worksheet Ic-11
3290 options (173) 3-35
3290 password (175) 3-37
332 X.25 Options
entering responses 4-37, 4-48
38ÑDevice Definition worksheet Ic-24
39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix (PAM)
worksheet Ic-25
40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment (LTA)
worksheet Ic-26
41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (EVPD)
worksheet Ic-27
45ÑCommon Network worksheet Id-1
46ÑLAN Address Assignment worksheet Id-2
47ÑLAN Transmission Definition worksheet
Id-3
49ÑStorage Requirements worksheet Id-4
4ÑSDLC worksheet Ia-4
5250 emulation (003) 3-188
5SÑX.25 Secondary worksheet Ia-8
5ÑX.25 worksheet Ia-6
9SÑSecondary Token-Ring Network worksheet
Ia-12
9ÑToken-Ring Network worksheet Ia-10
A
abbreviations, list of J-1
adapter type, LAN 3-10
additional
extension-mode key definition for personal
computers (168) 3-33
storage requirements
central site change management 3-183
multiple logical terminals 3-183
single-link multihost support 3-183
token-ring gateway 3-183
Index-2
worksheet Id-4
address
controller (Model 3174) (104) 3-13
gateway, token-ring network (900) 3-178
labels A-10
port (118) 3-19
token-ring attached Model 3174s (106) 3-14
token-ring gateway (107) 3-15
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking. See APPN
AEA and TCP/IP
configuration questions
098 Online Test Password 3-8
179 Local Format Storage 3-38
700 Configure the TCP/IP Feature 3-147
Configure worksheet Ic-12
Default Destination worksheet Ic-17
Station Set worksheet Ic-15
alert
function (220) 3-40
Model 3174 alert control point (221) 3-41
threshold (677) 3-119
threshold (684) 3-107
alerts, token-ring error (905) 3-178
all routes broadcast (064) 3-168
ALT2/ADV push button 1-9
ALT2/ENTER push button 1-9
alternate base keyboard selection (132) 3-28
APL keyboard, restrictions 3-211
APL2, warning 3-203
APPN
control point name (511) 3-83
defining node A-21
dependent LU server (DLUS) backup host
name (622) 3-89
dependent LU server (DLUS) backup host
name (623) network ID 3-89
dependent LU server (DLUS) primary host
name (620) 3-88
dependent LU server (DLUS) primary host
name (621) network ID 3-89
893745B
description of 1-12
feature (510) 3-83
focal point name 3-87
focal point network ID (615) 3-88
module not attached to a token ring
entering responses on the Common
Network panel 4-26
network controller (510) 3-83
node definition A-21
worksheet Ib-8
nodes/links (611) 3-85
report to alert focal point (host links) (616)
3-88
sessions (610) 3-85
token-ring error alerts (905) 3-178
virtual node name (VNODE) (512) 3-84
wildcard host link (613) 3-87
wildcard option (612) 3-86
assignment
individual port (116) 3-18
port (117) 3-19
assignment of
parameters A-10
port 3-56
assignment panel, disk drive 4-9
assistance data, product (099) 3-8
Associated LUs worksheet Ib-11
attachment
host (101) 3-9
remote to host 2-7
attribute select keypad (166) 3-33
auto XON/XOFF (761) 3-158
autocall/autodisconnect (372) 3-46
automatic
line feed for cursor control (771) 3-160
new line for cursor control (773) 3-161
AZERTY keyboard layout F-1
893745B
B
backplane
connection support 1-1
initialize 2-12
interface 1-10, H-1
setting 2-4
backup diskettes, creating C-2
bell, margin (764) 3-160
between bracket printer sharing (213) 3-39
bit support, discard eligibility 3-197
bridge
maximum frame forward size (681) 3-106
number (670) 3-117
performance counter threshold (682) 3-106
performance threshold (675) 3-119
profile, 3174-Peer 3-117
support (651) 3-103
Bridge Management worksheet Ic-2
bridging, multiport (656) 3-102
buffer space, TCP/IP (060) 3-167
C
cable, signal 2-9
cabling 1-1, 1-8
carriage return/carriage return line feed selection
(772) 3-161
Central Site Change Management. See CSCM
Central Site Control Facility. See CSCF
Central Site Customizing panels A-10
Label Definition panel A-13
Parameter Assignments panel A-10
Central Site Customizing Utility. See CSCU
character set, magnetic (141) 3-32
circuit boards 2-1
circuit type (401) 3-70
closed user group (441) 3-78
code, DSL B-1
codes, status 1-5
COMM port 1-1
committed information rate 3-197
Index-3
Common Network worksheet Id-1
Common SNA
entering responses on panel 4-24
worksheet Ib-7
communication port 1-1
completing, configure procedure 4-48
compressed program symbols (165) 3-33
CompuServe xxxii
configuration
completion, warning 4-50
level C-11
options, overview A-18
panel flow 4-15
procedure 4-13
questions
001 Local Copy Print Queue Buffer Size
3-187
002 Calculator Function 3-187
003 5250 Emulation for Field Exit 3-188
004 T1 LAN Timer 3-188
005 LAN T1 Retry Count 3-189
006 Copy from Session to Session 3-189
007 HAP Sharing for Local Copy 3-189
008 CSCF IML Password Required
3-190
009 Non-Standard Feature Options
3-190
052 Model 3174 IP Address 3-166
054 Subnet Mask 3-166
058 Maximum Telnet Connections
3-167
060 TCP/IP Buffer Space 3-167
062 Routing Field Support 3-168
064 All Routes Broadcast 3-168
068 Frame-Relay Subnet Mask 3-169
080 Token-Ring Address 3-190
082 Ring Speed of the Token-Ring
Network 3-191
090 Frame-Relay DLCI Number and
SAP 3-194
Index-4
098 Online Test Password 3-8
099 Product Assistance Data 3-8
100 Model Designation 3-9
101 Host Attachments 3-9
103 Nonstandard Operation Selection
3-10
104 Controller (Model 3174) Address
3-13
105 Upper Limit Address 3-13
106 Token-Ring Network Address and
SAP of the Model 3174 3-14
107 Token-Ring Network Address and
SAP of the Gateway 3-15
108 Unique Machine Identifier 3-16
116 Individual Port Assignment 3-18
117 Port Assignment 3-19
118 Port Address 3-19
121 Keyboard Language and Character
Set 3-19
123 Country Extended Code Page
(CECP) Support 3-21
125 Miscellaneous Feature Options (A)
3-22
126 Miscellaneous Feature Options (B)
3-25
127 Response Time Monitor (RTM)
Definition 3-27
128 RTM Boundaries and Definition
3-28
132 Alternate Base Keyboard Selection
3-28
136 Standard Keyboard Layouts 3-29
137 Modified Keyboard Layouts 3-30
138 Standard Keypad Layouts 3-31
139 Concurrent Communication
Keyboard Language 3-31
141 Magnetic Character Set 3-32
150 Token-Ring Network Gateway 3-32
165 Compressed Program Symbols 3-33
166 Attribute Select Keypad 3-33
893745B
168 Additional Extension-Mode Key
Definition (personal computers) 3-33
172 PS/55 Printer Sharing 3-34
173 DFT Options 3-35
175 3179G Password 3-37
175 3290 Password 3-37
179 Local Format Storage 3-38
190 ISDN DSPUs 3-38
213 Between Bracket Sharing 3-39
215 Physical Unit Identification 3-39
220 Alert Event Report Function 3-40
221 Alert Control Point 3-41
250 Frame-Relay LLC Poll/Response
Timer 3-194
251 Frame-Relay LLC Idle Timer 3-194
252 Frame-Relay LLC Retry Count
3-194
253 Frame-Relay LLC Transmit Window
Size 3-195
260 Maximum Receive Basic
Transmission Unit (BTU) Size 3-195
261 Maximum Send Basic Transmission
Unit (BTU) Size 3-195
300 Enable Frame Relay over
Communications Adapter 3-196
310 Connect-Data-Set-to-Line Operation
3-42
313 NRZ or NRZI Encoding 3-42
317 Telecommunication Facilities 3-42
318 Full- or Half-Speed Transmission
3-44
332 X.25 Options 3-44
340 RTS Control Response Options 3-45
365 X.21 Switched Host DTE
Connection 3-45
370 Maximum Inbound I-Frame Size
3-46
372 Autocall/Autodisconnect 3-46
382 Transmit I-Frame Size 3-47
893745B
383 Token-Ring Network Maximum Out
3-48
384 Ring Speed of the Token-Ring
Network 3-48
385 Link Subsystem Name 3-48
386 Receive I-Frame Size 3-49
400 Network Type 3-65
401 Circuit Type 3-70
402 Logical Channel Identifier 3-70
409 X.25 Keyboard Support Options
3-71
420 Incoming Call Options 3-73
421 Outgoing Call Options 3-74
423 Host DTE Address 3-76
424 Model 3174 DTE Address 3-66
430 Negotiated Packet Size 3-76
431 Packet Sequence Numbering 3-66
432 Negotiated Window Size 3-77
433 K-Maximum Out 3-67
434 Nonstandard Default Packet Size
3-67
435 Nonstandard Default Window Size
3-68
440 Throughput Class Negotiation 3-77
441 Closed User Group 3-78
442 Recognized Private Operating
Agency 3-78
450 Link Level Transmit Timeout 3-68
451 Number of Retries 3-68
452 Connection Identifier 3-79
453 Connection Options 3-79
461 Lowest Incoming Channel 3-69
462 Highest Incoming Channel 3-69
463 Lowest Two-Way Channel 3-69
464 Highest Two-Way Channel 3-69
465 Lowest Outgoing Channel 3-69
466 Highest Outgoing Channel 3-70
500 CSCM Unique 3-81
501 Network ID (NETID) 3-81
Index-5
502 Logical Unit Name (LUNAME)
3-82
510 APPN Network Controller 3-83
511 APPN Control Point Name
(CPNAME) 3-83
512 APPN Virtual Node Name
(VNODE) 3-84
552 Maximum Number of DLCIs 3-196
554 Committed Information Rate 3-197
558 Frame-Relay Congestion Control
3-197
560 Discard Eligibility (DE) Bit Support
3-197
562 Local Management Interface (LMI)
Type 3-197
563 Local Management Interface (LMI)
Transmit Polling Interval 3-198
566 Additional Receive Buffer Space
3-198
569 Define DLCIs 3-198
570 Virtual MAC Address 3-199
610 APPN Sessions 3-85
611 APPN Node/Links 3-85
612 APPN Wildcard Option 3-86
613 APPN Wildcard Host Link 3-87
614 Focal Point Name 3-87
615 Focal Point Network ID 3-88
616 Report to Alert Focal Point (host
links) 3-88
620 Dependent LU Server (DLUS)
Primary Host Name 3-88
621 Dependent LU Server (DLUS)
Primary Host Name Network ID 3-89
622 Dependent LU Server (DLUS)
Backup Host Name 3-89
623 Dependent LU server (DLUS)
Backup Host Name Network ID 3-89
650 3174-Peer Support 3-102
651 Bridge Support 3-103
652 LAN Manager Support 3-120
Index-6
653 3174-Peer Online Test Updates
3-120
656 Multiport Bridging 3-102
660 3174-Peer Port Address Range
3-103
661 Percentage of Discard Threshold
3-105
670 Bridge Number 3-117
671 Token-Ring Segment Number
3-117
672 3174-Peer Segment Number 3-118
673 Token-Ring Hop Count 3-118
674 Frame Forwarding Active 3-118
675 Bridge Performance Threshold
3-119
676 Logging Interval 3-119
677 Alert Threshold 3-119
680 Bridge Number 3-106
681 Bridge Maximum Frame Forward
Size 3-106
682 Bridge Performance Counter
Threshold 3-106
683 Logging Interval 3-107
684 Alert Threshold 3-107
685 Token-Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode
3-107
690 Reporting Link 0 Password 3-121
691 Reporting Link 1 Password 3-121
692 Reporting Link 2 Password 3-121
693 Reporting Link 3 Password 3-121
700 Configure TCP/IP 3-147
721 Station Set Name 3-155
722 Station Type 3-156
723 Port Set Name 3-157
725 Host Connection Menu Option
3-158
751 Data Stream Supported by the TCP/
IP Host 3-158
752 ASCII Host Phone Number 3-158
761 Auto XON/XOFF 3-158
893745B
762 Wraparound Option 3-159
763 New Line Option 3-159
764 Margin Bell 3-160
765 DEC Host ASCII Character Set
3-160
771 Automatic Line Feed for Cursor
Control 3-160
772 Carriage Return/Carriage Return
Line Feed Selection 3-161
773 Automatic New Line for Cursor
Control 3-161
774 Scrolling 3-161
775 Line Turnaround Character 3-161
776 IBM ASCII Host Character Set
3-162
790 Default Host IP Address 3-162
791 Non-Standard TCP Port Number
3-162
800 Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM)
3-174
801 Logical Terminal Assignment (LTA)
3-174
802 Prompts for Extended VPD 3-174
803 ISDN Definition 3-174
900 Token-Ring Network Address
3-178
905 Token-Ring Error Alerts 3-178
908 Token-Ring Link Subsystem Name
3-179
912 Group Poll Address 3-180
920 ISDN Link Subsystem Name 3-180
925 Number of LAN DSPUs for Frame
Relay 3-180
941 Ring Transmission Definition 3-182
modifying responses to C-5
Port Set Name (723) 3-157
responding to C-5
responding to questions A-18
responses
altered while copying C-5
893745B
copying C-7
modifying C-5
configuring
117 Port Assignment panel 4-46
128 RTM panel
version A 4-33, 4-47
version B 4-34, 4-47
332 X.25 Options panel 4-37, 4-48
940 Ring Address Assignment panel 4-43
941 Ring Transmission Definition panel
4-29, 4-45
Common Network panel 4-26, 4-43, 4-44
Common SNA panel 4-24
completing 4-39, 4-48
Completion panel 4-39, 4-49
description of 4-15, A-17
End User Productivity panel 4-38
Frame-Relay Description panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel 4-44
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
panel 4-36
getting started 4-8
Host panel 4-24, 4-41
Model/Attach 4-20
panel flow 4-18
PF keys 4-13
procedure, warning 4-39
selecting 4-18
TCP/IP (700) 3-147
Token-Ring Description panel 4-21
congestion control 3-197
connect-data-set-to-line operation (310) 3-42
connection
identifier (452) 3-79
options (453) 3-79
connections, maximum printer (059) 3-167
connectivity
coaxial 1-8
options 1-1
remote 1-8
Index-7
token-ring 1-10
considerations, module storage 3-183
control disk
configure complete 4-50
customize control disk 4-50
control disk drive, verifying 4-9
control diskette 1-4
copying C-3
customizing D-1
control extension diskette 1-4
controller
Model 3174 address (104) 3-13
storage worksheet Id-4
copy
file options C-2
files procedure C-12
from session to session (006) 3-189
local, for record-keeping G-1
procedure
altering configuration responses C-5
configuration responses C-7
Control diskette C-3
Copy Customizing Data C-7
copy user data C-10
defining the modified responses C-14
Full Copy C-3
Library diskette C-3
menu panel C-1, C-4, C-13
modified keyboards C-8
Modify and Copy C-5
Modify and Copy panel C-14
multiple times C-15
PAM C-7
Patches C-8
procedure for all types except full copy
C-12
procedure for full copy C-4
RPQs C-9
selecting a Copy option C-4
selecting from Master Menu C-4, C-12
Index-8
Utility diskette C-3
verify drives C-5, C-13, E-6
user data C-10
for 3174-Peer parameters transfer C-10
for VPD transfer C-10
utility
copying user product data C-10
copying vital product data C-10
correcting
errors 4-9
responses 4-32
COS
Definition A-21
Definition worksheet Ib-13
Node Definition worksheet Ib-14
Transmission Group Definition worksheet
(Part 1) Ib-15
Transmission Group Definition worksheet
(Part 2) Ib-16
country extended code page, support (123) 3-21
creating
backup diskettes C-2
dump or trace diskettes E-5
CSCF 1-2
IML password required (008) 3-190
CSCM 1-16
unique (500) 3-81
CSCU 1-16
current requirements H-1
cursor control
automatic line feed (771) 3-160
automatic new line (773) 3-161
customer support xxxi
customization 3-1, 4-1
data, management of G-3
utilities A-1
customize control disk
procedure 4-12, 4-37, 4-38, 4-48, 4-50
117 Port Assignment panel 4-46
128 RTM panel
893745B
identifying F-3
panel for identifying F-4
selecting F-3
when to identify F-1
which ones to identify F-1
panels A-8
description of A-8
sample A-8
planning A-18
utilities A-1, A-5
utility options A-9
warning 4-50
version A 4-33, 4-47
version B 4-34, 4-47
940 Ring Address Assignment panel
4-43
941 Ring Transmission Definition panel
4-29, 4-45
Common Network panel 4-26, 4-43,
4-44
Common SNA panel 4-24
configure 4-15
control disk 4-15
description of 4-8
Host panel 4-24, 4-41
Model/Attach 4-20
selecting 4-12
Customize Control Disk Menu A-9
description of A-17
options
3174-Peer definition A-22
Configure A-17
Define APPN Node A-21
Define COS A-21
Define Devices A-19
description of A-9
Merge RPQs A-20
Modify Keyboards A-20
TCP/IP Configure A-20
panel 4-11
customizing
Control disk 4-8, A-7
correcting errors 4-9
correcting responses A-19
Customize Control Disk Menu options A-17
data D-1
data, copying C-7
description of 4-8, A-5, A-9
display stations A-5, F-2
entering responses A-18
keyboard
default keyboard F-1
893745B
D
data
customizing D-1
management E-1
saving for configuration 4-39, 4-48
data stream
DECVT100/VT220, questions 3-158
IBM 3101 questions 3-160
supported by the TCP/IP host (751) 3-158
DEC host ASCII character set (765) 3-160
DECVT100/VT220 data stream, questions 3-158
761 Auto XON/XOFF 3-158
762 Wraparound Option 3-159
763 New Line Option 3-159
764 Margin Bell 3-160
default
IP address (790) 3-162
packet size, nonstandard (434) 3-67
window size, nonstandard (435) 3-68
defining
APPN node A-21
devices A-20
definition
additional extension-mode key (168) 3-33
Response Time Monitor (127) 3-27
ring transmission (941) 3-182
definitions, list of Glossary-1
Index-9
dependent LU server (DLUS)
backup host name (622) 3-89
backup host name (623) network ID 3-89
primary host name (620) 3-88
primary host name (621) network ID 3-89
designation, model 3-9
determining microcode levels C-11
Device Definition worksheet Ic-24
devices
defining A-20
port assignment (116) 3-18
DFT options (173) 3-35
dimensions of diskette label A-13
discard eligibility (DE) bit support 3-197
discharge, electrostatic 2-1
disk drive assignment panel 4-10
disk, updating RAM D-8
diskette
control C-3
creating backup C-2
customizing control D-1
label
maximum dimensions A-13
minimum dimensions A-13
trace E-1
diskettes
Control 1-4
Control Extension 1-4
duplicate G-5
for record-keeping G-5
how to customize A-7
kinds of 1-4
management of G-3
RPQ (request for price quotation) 1-5
utility 1-5
display stations used for customizing A-5, A-8,
F-2
displaying microcode release levels E-2
Index-10
distributed function terminal (DFT)
options (173) 3-35
password (175) 3-37
DLCI
definition 3-192
maximum number 3-196
number and SAP 3-194
optional 3-200
documents, related xxix
downstream physical unit. See DSPU
DPC 1-8
drives
selecting B-3
verifying
copy C-5, C-13, E-6
microcode upgrade D-5
DSL
merge B-1
DSL merge
after microcode upgrade D-2
multiple merges B-8
PF keys B-1
procedure B-2
select Merge/Delete B-4
selecting B-2
DSPU 1-2, 1-11
number of token-ring (925) 3-180
dual-purpose connector. See DPC
dump diskette, formatting E-5
duplicate diskettes G-5
E
electrical specifications H-1
electrostatic discharge 2-1
enable frame relay over communications adapter
(300) 3-196
encoding, NRZ or NRZI (313) 3-42
End User Productivity Functions panel, entering
responses 4-38
enhanced keyboard
893745B
Katakana worksheet Id-27
U.S. worksheet Id-23
World Trade worksheet Id-25
Enhanced Keyboard (Katakana) worksheet Id-27
Enhanced Keyboard (U.S.) worksheet Id-23
Enhanced Keyboard (World Trade) worksheet
Id-25
ENTER push button 1-9
entering customizing responses A-18
117 Port Assignment panel 4-30, 4-46
128 RTM panel 4-33
332 X.25 Options panel 4-37, 4-48
APPN, module not attached to a token ring
Common Network panel 4-25
Common SNA panel 4-24
End User Productivity Functions panel 4-38
Frame-Relay Description panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel 4-44
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
panel 4-36
Model/Attach panel 4-20
Token-Ring Description panel 4-21
Token-Ring Gateway Common Network
panel 4-25
environmental specifications H-2
erasure of customized data, warning 4-39
errors, correcting 4-9
ESD. See electrostatic discharge
Extended Vital Product Data (EVPD) worksheet
Ic-27
F
facilities, telecommunication (317) 3-42
features
3174-Peer 1-15
APPN 1-12
CSCM 1-16
CSCU 1-16
DSPU 1-11
frame relay 1-14
893745B
gateway 1-11
Model 3174 module 1-1
TCP/IP 1-13
field description, Keyboard Changes Chart 3-217
files, copying options C-2
filling out, keyboard worksheets 3-202
filters, route designator 3-128
flow of Configure panels 4-18
focal point
name (614) 3-87
network ID (615) 3-88
formatting a dump diskette E-5
frame
forwarding active (674) 3-118
size, gateway, token-ring network (386) 3-49
Frame-Relay
Description panel
entering responses 4-35
Index Assignment panel 4-27
Optional DLCI Definitions 4-7
frame-relay 1-14
IP address (066) 3-168
LLC poll/response timer (250) 3-194
network
additional receive buffer space (566)
3-198
committed information rate (554) 3-197
congestion control (558) 3-197
discard eligibility (DE) bit support (560)
3-197
DLCI definition (569) 3-198
enable frame relay (300) 3-196
Frame-Relay Index Assignment
worksheet 3-201
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
worksheet 3-200
LLC idle timer (251) 3-194
LLC poll/response timer (250) 3-194
LLC retry count (252) 3-194
LLC transmit window size (253) 3-195
Index-11
local management interface (LMI)
transmit polling interval (563) 3-198
local management interface (LMI) type
(562) 3-197
maximum number of DLCIs (552) 3-196
maximum receive basic transmission unit
(BTU) size (260) 3-195
maximum send basic transmission unit
(BTU) size (261) 3-195
virtual MAC address 3-199
subnet mask (068) 3-169
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions panel
4-36
front panel
Model 3174 module 1-6
monitoring 2-10
full copy C-3
selecting C-4
full- or half-speed transmission (318) 3-44
function group 3-219
function, alert event report (220) 3-40
functional overview 1-1
G
gateway feature 1-11
general restrictions, keyboard 3-206
general specifications H-1
Generate Labels function A-11
grounding techniques 2-1
group
function 3-219
shift 3-219
H
HAP sharing for local copy (007) 3-189
highest
incoming channel (462) 3-69
outgoing channel (466) 3-70
two-way channel (464) 3-69
hop count, token-ring (673) 3-118
Index-12
host
attachment (101) 3-9
connection menu option (725) 3-158
DTE address (423) 3-76
remote attachment 2-7
Host Attachment worksheet Ia-2
hot key, personal computers (168) 3-33
I
IBM 3101 data stream, questions 3-160
771 Automatic Line Feed for Cursor Control
3-160
772 Carriage Return/Carriage Return Line
Feed Selection 3-161
773 Automatic New Line for Cursor Control
3-161
774 Scrolling 3-161
775 Line Turnaround Character 3-161
IBM ASCII host character set (776) 3-162
ID, network (501) 3-81
identifier
logical channel (402) 3-70
machine (108) 3-16
Identify Customizing Keyboard
default keyboard F-1
description of A-15
panel F-4
PF keys F-3
procedure F-3
selecting F-3
when to F-1
which ones to F-1
I-frame size
maximum inbound (370) 3-46
transmit (382) 3-47
transmit (941) 3-182, 3-195
IML
Model 3174 module, how to 4-52
procedure 4-52
incoming channel
893745B
highest (462) 3-69
lowest (461) 3-69
incorrect responses, correcting A-19
index assignment 3-201
indicators 2-11
individual port assignment (116) 3-18
InfoFACTS xxxii
information rate, committed 3-197
initializing RAM disk 2-12
installation
jumper settings 2-3
network selection 2-4
ring speed selection 2-4
Model 3174 module 2-5
procedure 2-2
introduction
Model 3174 module 1-1
utilities A-1
IP
address, LAN (052) 3-166
routing (057) 3-166
ISDN
definition (803) 3-174
DSPUs, number of (190) 3-38
isolated mode 2-4
J
jumper settings 2-3
backplane connection 2-4
isolated mode 2-4
network selection 2-4
ring speed selection 2-4
K
Katakana Converged Keyboards worksheet
Id-21
keeping records G-1
key function nomenclature 3-214
keyboard
additional extension-mode key definition
893745B
(168) 3-33
alternate selection (132) 3-28
copying C-8
customizing
default keyboard F-1
identifying F-3
panel for identifying F-4
selecting F-3
when to identify F-1
which ones to identify F-1
group 3-218
identifying for customizing F-1
language (121) 3-19
languages supported 3-212
layouts
AZERTY F-1
QWERTY F-1
modifying
after microcode upgrade D-2
APL restrictions 3-211
completing the worksheets 3-202
Enhanced (Katakana) worksheet Id-27
Enhanced (U.S.) worksheet Id-23
Enhanced (World Trade) worksheet
Id-25
function group 3-219
general restrictions 3-206
Katakana Converged Keyboards
worksheet Id-21
key function nomenclature 3-214
Keyboard Changes Chart 3-217
Keyboard Changes Chart example 3-219
keyboard group 3-218
keyboards supported 3-212
languages supported 3-212
local function restrictions 3-210
nomenclature presentation restrictions
3-211
Non-Katakana Converged worksheet
Id-19
Index-13
planning for 3-202
planning procedure 3-202
shift group 3-219
types of worksheets 3-202
selection, modified layouts (137) 3-30
selection, standard layouts (136) 3-29
worksheets
Enhanced (Katakana) Id-27
Enhanced (U.S.) Id-23
Enhanced (World Trade) Id-25
Katakana converged Id-21
non-Katakana converged Id-19
Keyboard Changes Chart
example of 3-219
field description 3-217
keypad
attribute select (166) 3-33
selection, standard layouts (138) 3-31
keys, PF
Configure 4-13
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
media management E-2
Merge DSL B-1
microcode upgrade D-3
K-maximum out (433) 3-67
L
Label Definition panel A-13
label generation options A-11
LAN
adapter type (102) 3-10
address assignment 3-181
Address Assignment worksheet Id-2
DSPUs, number of (925) 3-180
gateway (150) 3-32
IP address (052) 3-166
manager support (652) 3-120
network
maximum out (383) 3-48
retry count 3-189
Index-14
timer 3-188
subnet mask (054) 3-166
T1 retry count 3-189
T1 timer (004) 3-188
transmission definition (941) 3-195
Transmission Definition worksheet Id-3
transmit I-frame size (382) 3-47
language, keyboard (121) 3-19
languages supported 3-212
layouts
AZERTY keyboard F-1
modified keyboards (137) 3-30
QWERTY keyboard F-1
standard keyboards (136) 3-29
standard keypads (138) 3-31
LED indicators 2-11
levels
configuration C-11
maintenance C-11
microcode C-11
release C-11
suffix C-11
library (LIB) diskette 1-5
copying C-3
light emitting diodes (LEDs) 2-11
line feed selection, carriage return (772) 3-161
line turnaround character (775) 3-161
link
level transmit timeout (450) 3-68
subsystem name (385) 3-48
subsystem name (908) 3-179
subsystem name, ISDN (920) 3-180
LLC
idle timer (251) 3-194
poll/response timer (250) 3-194
retry count (252) 3-194
transmit window size (253) 3-195
local
copy
for record-keeping G-1
893745B
HAP sharing (007) 3-189
print queue buffer size (001) 3-187
requesting G-2
format storage (179) 3-38
function restrictions, keyboard 3-210
management interface (LMI) transmit polling
interval 3-198
management interface (LMI) type 3-197
logging
interval (676) 3-119
interval (683) 3-107
logical
channel identifier (402) 3-70
terminal assignment (LTA) (801) 3-174
unit name (LUNAME) (502) 3-82
Logical Terminal Assignment (LTA) worksheet
Ic-26
loss of customized data, warning 4-50
lowest
incoming channel (461) 3-69
outgoing channel (465) 3-69
two-way channel (463) 3-69
M
machine, unique identifier (108) 3-16
magnetic character set (141) 3-32
maintenance level C-11
making multiple copies C-15
management of
customization data G-3
diskettes G-3
media A-4, E-1
the module microcode A-1
manual spanning tree mode 3-109
Manual Spanning Tree Mode worksheet Ib-22
margin bell (764) 3-160
Master Menu
options
Central Site Customizing A-10
Identify Customizing Keyboard A-15
893745B
panel 4-4
maximum
inbound I-frame size (370) 3-46
LAN out (383) 3-48
number of DLCIs 3-192, 3-196
printer connections (059) 3-167
Telnet connections (058) 3-167
token-ring network out (383) 3-48
media management
description of A-4, E-1
display disk information E-2
menu panel E-1
options E-1
PF keys E-2
memory requirements
central site change management (CSCM)
3-183
multihost support 3-183
multiple logical terminals (MLT) 3-183
token-ring gateway 3-183
worksheet Id-4
menu option, host connection (725) 3-158
menu options
Configure 4-18
Copy C-4, C-12
Customize Control Disk Menu 4-10, 4-12,
A-17
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
Merge DSL B-2
microcode upgrade D-3
menu, Customize Control Disk 4-12, A-17
merge
DSL B-1
after microcode upgrade D-2
multiple merges B-8
PF keys B-1
procedure B-2
select Merge/Delete B-4
selecting B-2
RPQs A-20
Index-15
after microcode upgrade D-2
copying RPQs C-9
methods of record-keeping
using a printer G-1
using diskettes G-5
microcode
levels
determining C-11
releases of A-4
managing module A-1
release levels, displaying E-2
tailoring module A-10
upgrade
description of D-1
PF keys D-3
planning D-1
procedure D-3
procedures performed after D-2
selecting D-3
verify drives D-5
miscellaneous
feature options (125) 3-22
feature options (126) 3-25
MLT (multiple logical terminals)
level 3-53
storage requirements 3-183
worksheet Ia-14
mode, isolated 2-4
Mode/COS Correlation worksheet Ib-17
Model 3174
address (104) 3-13
alert control point (221) 3-41
configuration designation (100) 3-9
DTE address (424) 3-66
IP address (052) 3-166
token-ring address (080) 3-190
Model 3174 module
connectivity options 1-1
customization 4-1
front panel 1-6
Index-16
monitoring 2-10
installing 2-5
introduction 1-1
operator panel 1-9
overview 1-1
printer sharing 3-34
ring speed 2-4
specifications H-1
utilities A-1
model designation (100) 3-9
Model/Attach panel, entering responses 4-20
modifiable keyboard
modified layouts (137) 3-30
standard layouts (136) 3-29
Modify and Copy C-5
defining the modified responses C-14
panel C-14
modify keyboards 3-202
after microcode upgrade D-2
APL restrictions 3-211
completing the worksheets 3-202
copying C-8
description of A-20
Enhanced (Katakana) worksheet Id-27
Enhanced (U.S.) worksheet Id-23
Enhanced (World Trade) worksheet Id-25
function group 3-219
general restrictions 3-206
Katakana Converged Keyboards worksheet
Id-21
key function nomenclature 3-214
Keyboard Changes Chart
description of 3-217
sample 3-217, 3-219
keyboards supported 3-212
languages supported 3-212
local function restrictions 3-210
nomenclature presentation restrictions 3-211
Non-Katakana Converged worksheet Id-19
planning for 3-202
893745B
planning procedure 3-202
shift group 3-219
types of worksheets 3-202
modifying configuration responses C-5
module
installation procedure 2-2
microcode
managing A-1
tailoring A-10
operations 1-4
monitoring front panel 2-10
Multi-Host Definition worksheet Ia-3
multihost support
token-ring gateway and 3-51
with support 3-51
without support 3-51
multiple protocols 1-14
multiport bridging (656) 3-102
N
negotiated
packet size (430) 3-76
window size (432) 3-77
network
diskettes, management of G-3
ID, NETID (501) 3-81
type (400) 3-65
Network Resources Qualifiers worksheet Ib-10
Network Resources worksheet Ib-9
new line option (763) 3-159
node, APPN A-21
nomenclature
key function 3-214
presentation restrictions, keyboard 3-211
Non-Katakana Converged Keyboards worksheet
Id-19
nonstandard
default packet size (434) 3-67
default window size (435) 3-68
feature options (009) 3-190
893745B
operation selection (103) 3-10
NRZ or NRZI encoding (313) 3-42
number of
ISDN DSPUs (190) 3-38
retries (451) 3-68
numbering, packet sequence (431) 3-66
O
offline tests 1-5
OIA. See operator information area
online
test password (098) 3-8
tests 1-5
operation
connect-data-set-to-line (310) 3-42
selection, nonstandard (103) 3-10
operations
making the Model 3174 operational 2-12
module 1-4
with diskettes 1-4
operator information area (OIA) G-2
operator panel 1-9
options
configuration overview A-18
connection (453) 3-79
copying files C-2
customizing utilities A-5
incoming call (420) 3-73
label generation A-11
miscellaneous feature (125) 3-22
miscellaneous feature (126) 3-25
new line (763) 3-159
nonstandard
feature (009) 3-190
outgoing call (421) 3-74
RTS control response (340) 3-45
selection of
Configure 4-18
Copy C-4, C-12
Customize Control Disk 4-12
Index-17
Customize Control Disk Menu 4-10
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
Merge DSL B-2
microcode upgrade D-3
wraparound (762) 3-159
X.25 (332) 3-44
X.25 keyboard support (409) 3-71
outgoing channel
highest (466) 3-70
lowest (465) 3-69
overview
configuration options A-18
copy files C-1
customize control disk 4-8
media management E-1
merge DSL code B-1
microcode upgrade D-1
P
packet
sequence numbering (431) 3-66
size, negotiated (430) 3-76
PAM, copying C-7
panel flow, configuration 4-15
panel operator 1-9
panels
117 Port Assignment 4-46
128 RTM
version A 4-33, 4-47
version B 4-34, 4-47
332 X.25 Options 4-37, 4-48
940 Ring Address Assignment 4-43
941 Ring Transmission Definition 4-29,
4-45
Central Site Customizing A-13
Label Definition panel A-13
Parameter Assignments panel A-10
Common Network 4-26, 4-43, 4-44
Common SNA 4-24
Configure Complete 4-39, 4-49
Index-18
Copy Menu C-1, C-4, C-13
Customize Control Disk Menu 4-11, 4-12,
A-17
customizing A-8, A-13
Customizing Keyboard Type F-4
description of A-8
Diskette Creation E-6
Display Disk Information E-1
DSL Merge B-3
End User Productivity Functions 4-38
flow during Configure 4-18
Frame-Relay Description panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Index Assignment 4-44
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
panel 4-36
Host 4-24, 4-41
Label Definition A-13
Master Menu 4-4
Media Management Menu E-1
Microcode Upgrade D-5
Model/Attach 4-20
Modify and Copy C-14
Parameter Assignments A-10
processing A-14
sample A-8
customizing A-8
standard layout A-8
Token-Ring Description 4-21
Parameter Assignments panel A-10
patches, copy C-8
peer communication and bridge configuration
questions
650 3174-Peer Support 3-102
651 3174-Peer Bridge Support 3-103
652 LAN Manager Support 3-120
653 3174-Peer Online Test Updates 3-120
656 Multiport Bridging 3-102
660 3174-Peer Port Address Range 3-103
661 Percentage of Discard Threshold 3-105
670 Bridge Number 3-117
893745B
671 Token-Ring Segment Number 3-117
672 3174-Peer Segment Number 3-118
673 Token-Ring Hop Count 3-118
674 Frame Forwarding Active 3-118
675 Bridge Performance Threshold 3-119
676 Logging Interval 3-119
677 Alert Threshold 3-119
680 Bridge Number 3-106
681 Bridge Maximum Frame Forward Size
3-106
682 Bridge Performance Counter Threshold
3-106
683 Logging Interval 3-107
684 Alert Threshold 3-107
685 Token-Ring Adapter in Wrap Mode
3-107
690 Reporting Link 0 Password 3-121
691 Reporting Link 1 Password 3-121
692 Reporting Link 2 Password 3-121
693 Reporting Link 3 Password 3-121
percentage of discard threshold (661) 3-105
personal computers, additional extension-mode
key definition (168) 3-33
PF (program function) keys
Configuration procedure 4-13
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
Media Management E-2
merge DSL B-1
microcode upgrade D-3
warning 4-39
phone number, ASCII host (752) 3-158
physical
specifications H-2
unit identification (215) 3-39
planning
configuration A-5
modify keyboards 3-202
reason for A-18
steps for storage 3-184
poll address, group (912) 3-180
893745B
port
address (118) 3-19
assignment
completing the worksheet (116=1) 3-57
completing the worksheet (116=2) 3-58
individual (116) 3-18
port-by-port (117) 3-19
communication 1-1
terminal 1-8
Port Assignment worksheet Ia-16
Port Set worksheet Ic-13
Port-to-Port Set Map worksheet Ic-14
precautionary procedures 2-1
presentation space
storage Ia-15
storage requirements 3-50
worksheet Ia-14
Presentation Space Storage worksheet Ia-15
printer
connections, maximum (059) 3-167
for record-keeping G-1
sharing (172) 3-34
Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM) (800) 3-174
copying C-7
Printer Authorization Matrix (PAM) worksheet
Ic-25
private operating agency, recognized (442) 3-78
problem solving 1-6, 4-9
procedure
configure 4-13
copy files C-12
customize control disk 4-12
diskette management G-4
filling in keyboard worksheets 3-202
Full Copy C-4
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
management of customization data G-4
merge DSL B-2
microcode upgrade D-3
module installation 2-2
Index-19
reconfiguring 4-13
storage planning 3-184
processing panels A-14
product assistance data (099) 3-8
program symbols, compressed (165) 3-33
prompts for extended VPD (802) 3-174
PS/55ÑModel 3174 printer sharing (172) 3-34
purpose of record-keeping G-1
push buttons
ALT2/ADV 1-9
ALT2/ENTER 1-9
ENTER 1-9
Q
questions for
DECVT100/VT220 data stream 3-158
IBM 3101 data stream 3-160
QWERTY keyboard layout F-1
R
RAM disk 2-2
initialize 2-12
upgrading D-8
rate of committed information (554) 3-197
receive
buffer space, additional 3-187
maximum basic transmission unit (BTU) size
(260) 3-195
recognized private operating agency (442) 3-78
reconfiguring procedure 4-13
record-keeping G-1
methods of G-1
purpose of G-1
using a printer G-1
using diskettes G-5
related documents xxix
release levels, microcode C-11, C-15
remote
attachment to host 2-7
connectivity 1-1
Index-20
report to alert focal point (host links) (616) 3-88
reporting
link 0 password (690) 3-121
link 1 password (691) 3-121
link 2 password (692) 3-121
link 3 password (693) 3-121
requesting a local copy G-2
requirements, current H-1
responding to configuration questions A-18
Response Time Monitor (RTM)
boundaries and interface (128) 3-28
definition (127) 3-27
worksheet Ib-2
responses
configuration C-5
correcting A-19
entering A-18
117 Port Assignment panel 4-30, 4-46
128 RTM panel 4-33
332 X.25 Options 4-37, 4-48
APPN, module not attached to a token
ring
Common Network panel 4-25
Common SNA panel 4-24
End User Productivity Functions panel
4-38
Frame-Relay Description panel 4-35
Frame-Relay Index Assignment panel
4-44
Frame-Relay Optional DLCI Definitions
4-36
Model/Attach panel 4-20
Token-Ring Description panel 4-21
Token-Ring Gateway
Common Network panel 4-25
restrictions for modifying keyboards 3-206
APL 3-211
general 3-206
local functions 3-210
nomenclature presentation 3-211
893745B
ring
address assignment (940) 3-181
error alerts (905) 3-178
speed of the token-ring network (384) 3-48
speed selection 3-191
speed, token-ring 3-191
transmission definition (941) 3-182
route designator filters 3-128
routing
field support (062) 3-168
IP (057) 3-166
RPQ (request for price quotation) diskette 1-5
RPQ merge
after microcode upgrade D-2
copying RPQs C-9
RTS control response options (340) 3-45
S
saving
configuration data 4-39
saving configuration data 4-48
screen size, CUT devices
CUT/24 x 80 3-51
CUT/24 x 80 with EAB 3-51
CUT/27 x 132 3-51
CUT/32 x 80 3-51
CUT/32 x 80 with EAB 3-51
CUT/43 x 132 with EAB 3-51
CUT/43 x 80 3-51
CUT/43 x 80 with EAB 3-51
scrolling (774) 3-161
SDLC 1-2
worksheet Ia-4
Secondary X.25 Options worksheet Ib-5
segment number, token-ring 3-117
select option
Configure 4-18
Copy C-4, C-12
Customize Control Disk 4-12
from Customize Control Disk Menu 4-10
893745B
Identify Customizing Keyboard F-3
Merge DSL B-2
microcode upgrade D-3
selecting
drives B-3
ring speed 2-4
selection, alternate base keyboard (132) 3-28
send basic transmission unit (BTU) size,
maximum (261) 3-195
service access point (SAP)
token-ring attached Model 3174s (106) 3-14
token-ring gateway (107) 3-15
session to session, copy (006) 3-189
setting
backplane 2-4
jumpers 2-4
sharing, between bracket printer (213) 3-39
shift group 3-219
signal cables, installing 2-9
single-link multi-host support, storage
requirements 3-183
SNA gateway 1-11
Source Route Bridge
Definition worksheet Ib-20
Interfaces worksheet Ib-21
spanning tree mode, manual 3-109
specifications
electrical H-1
environmental H-1, H-2
general H-1
physical H-2
RTM boundaries and interface (128) 3-28
specifying keyboard language, warning 3-203
speed, ring 2-4
standard
keypad layouts (138) 3-31
layouts, modifiable keyboards (136) 3-29
station
set name (721) 3-155
type (722) 3-156
Index-21
status codes 1-5
Status LED 2-11
storage
considerations 3-183
planning procedure 3-184
presentation space (101) 3-9
requirements
central site change management (CSCM)
3-183
multiple logical terminals (MLT) 3-183
single-link multihost support 3-183
token-ring gateway 3-183
Storage Requirements worksheet Id-4
subnet mask, LAN (054) 3-166
subsystem name
ISDN link (920) 3-180
link (908) 3-179
suffix level C-11
support
keyboards 3-212
languages 3-212
utilities A-2
Support Wire xxxiii
symbols, compressed program (165) 3-33
Synchronous Data Link Control. See SDLC
T
tables
task 4-5
worksheet 4-5
tailoring the module microcode A-10
task tables 4-5
TCP/IP 1-13
3174 Defined Nicknames worksheet Ic-22
buffer space (060) 3-167
configuration questions
098 Online Test Password 3-8
179 Local Format Storage 3-38
700 Configure the TCP/IP Feature 3-147
configure A-20
Index-22
data stream supported by the host 3-158
Domain Name Services worksheet Ic-21
host station using
DECVT100/VT200 data stream 3-159
DECVT100/VT220 data stream 3-158
IBM 3101 data stream 3-160
Options worksheet Ic-19
Routing Information worksheet Ic-20
SNMP enhancements 3-173
SNMP Enhancements worksheet Ic-23
station set questions
721 Station Set Name 3-155
722 Station Type 3-156
723 Port Set Name 3-157
725 Host Connection Menu Option
3-158
technical support xxxi
telecommunication facilities (317) 3-42
terminal ports 1-8
tests
offline 1-5
online 1-5
throughput class negotiation (440) 3-77
token-ring
adapter in wrap mode (685) 3-107
address (080) 3-190
control unit 1-10
DSPUs, number of (925) 3-180
error alerts (905) 3-178
gateway 1-11, 3-32
entering responses on the panels 4-25
hop count (673) 3-118
network 1-11
address and SAP (106) 3-14
address and SAP of the gateway (107)
3-15
ring speed (384) 3-48
service access point, gateway (107) 3-15
service access point, Model 3174 (106)
3-14
893745B
transmit I-frame size (382) 3-47
network 3270 gateway, storage requirements
3-183
network address and SAP (900) 3-178
network gateway
identification (150) 3-32
network questions
386 Receive I-Frame Size 3-49
900 Address for the Gateway 3-178
905 Token-Ring Error Alerts 3-178
908 Token-Ring Link Subsystem Name
3-179
912 Group Poll Address 3-180
941 Ring Transmission Definition 3-182
segment number (671) 3-117
speed (082) 3-191
Token-Ring Description panel 4-21
Token-Ring Network worksheet Ia-10
secondary worksheet Ia-12
trace diskette E-1
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
See TCP/IP
transmit
I-frame size (382) 3-47
timeout, link level (450) 3-68
troubleshooting 1-6, 4-9
turnaround character, line (775) 3-161
two-way channel
highest (464) 3-69
lowest (463) 3-69
U
unique characters, warning
APL2 3-203
CECP 3-203
unique machine identifier (108) 3-16
unit name, logical (502) 3-82
upgrading
microcode
description of D-1
893745B
PF keys for microcode upgrade D-3
planning D-1
procedure D-1, D-3
procedures performed after D-2
selecting option for D-3
verifying drives D-5
RAM disk D-8
upper limit address (105) 3-13
user group, closed (441) 3-78
utilities
customization A-1
introduction to A-1
support A-2
Utility disk options
3174-Peer Definition A-22
APPN Node Definition A-21
Central Site Customizing A-10
Configure A-17
COS Definition A-21
customizing A-9
Define Devices A-19
Define TCP/IP A-20
Define Wan Profiles A-22
Identify Customizing Keyboard A-15
Merge RPQs A-20
Modify Keyboards A-20
RPQs A-20
TCP/IP Configure A-20
Utility diskette 2-7
copying C-3
Customize Control Disk Menu A-9, A-17
description of 1-5
V
verifying
drives 4-10
control disk 4-9
Copy C-13
copy E-6
procedure 4-10
Index-23
LEDs 2-11
virtual MAC address 3-199
W
WAN profiles A-22
warning
APL2 3-203
CECP 3-203
Configure Complete 4-39
configure procedure 4-39
specifying keyboard language 3-203
wildcard
host link (613) 3-87
option (612) 3-86
window size
negotiated (432) 3-77
nonstandard default (435) 3-68
worksheets 4-6, 4-21, 4-22
configuration
10AÑPresentation Space (MLT) Ia-14
10DÑPresentation Space Storage Ia-15
11AÑ117 Port Assignment Ia-16
12Ñ128 Response Time Monitor Ib-2
13SÑSecondary X.25 Options Ib-5
13ÑX.25 Options Ib-3
14ÑCommon SNA Ib-7
15ÑAPPN Node Definition Ib-8
16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers
Ib-10
16ÑNetwork Resources Ib-9
17ÑAssociated LUs Ib-11
18ÑCOS Definition Ib-13
19ÑCOS Node Definition Ib-14
1ÑHost Attachment Ia-2
20AÑCOS Transmission Group
Definition (Part 1) Ib-15
20BÑCOS Transmission Group
Definition (Part 2) Ib-16
21ÑMode/COS Correlation Ib-17
Index-24
22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges option
Ib-18
22BÑ3174-Peer Definition Ib-19
22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition
worksheet Ib-20
22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces
Ib-21
22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode
Ib-22
23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile Ic-1
23BÑBridge Management Ic-2
25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram Ic-11
27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure Ic-12
28ÑPort Set Ic-13
29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map Ic-14
2ÑMulti-Host Definition Ia-3
30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set Ic-15
31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default
Destination Ic-17
31AÑTCP/IP Options Ic-19
31AÑTCP/IP SNMP Enhancements
Ic-23
31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information
Ic-20
31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services
Ic-21
31DÑTCP/IP 3174 Defined Nicknames
Ic-22
38ÑDevice Definition Ic-24
39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix
(PAM) Ic-25
40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment
(LTA) Ic-26
41ÑExtended Vital Product Data
(EVPD) Ic-27
45ÑCommon Network Id-1
46ÑLAN Address Assignment Id-2
47ÑLAN Transmission Definition Id-3
49ÑStorage Requirements Id-4
4ÑSDLC Ia-4
893745B
5SÑX.25 secondary Ia-8
5ÑX.25 Ia-6
9SÑSecondary Token-Ring Network
Ia-12
9ÑToken-Ring Network Ia-10
Enhanced Keyboard (Katakana) Id-27
Enhanced Keyboard (U.S.) Id-23
Enhanced Keyboard (World Trade)
Id-25
introduction Ia-1
Katakana Converged Keyboards Id-21
Non-Katakana Converged Keyboards
Id-19
description of Keyboard Changes Chart
3-217
filling out
10AÑPresentation Space (MLT) 3-50
10DÑPresentation Space Storage 3-50
11AÑ117 Port Assignment 3-56
12Ñ128 RTM 3-61
13SÑSecondary X.25 Options 3-63
13ÑX.25 Options 3-63
14ÑCommon SNA 3-81
15ÑAPPN Node Definition 3-85
16AÑNetwork Resources Qualifiers
3-93
16ÑNetwork Resources 3-90
17ÑAssociated LUs 3-94
17AÑX.25 APPN Nodes 3-95
18ÑCOS Definition 3-96
19ÑCOS Node Definition 3-97
1ÑHost Attachment 3-1
20AÑCOS Transmission Group
Definition 3-99
20BÑCOS Transmission Group
Definition 3-100
21ÑMode/COS Correlation 3-101
22AÑ3174-Peer and Bridges Options
3-102
22BÑ3174-Peer Definition 3-103
893745B
22CÑSource Route Bridge Definition
3-106
22DÑSource Route Bridge Interfaces
3-108
22EÑManual Spanning Tree Mode
3-109
23AÑ3174-Peer Bridge Profile 3-117
23BÑBridge Management 3-120
24AÑFilter Definition 3-122
24BÑHop Count Filter 3-123
24CÑSource SAP Filters 3-124
24DÑSNAP Ethertype Filters 3-126
24EÑRoute Designator Filters 3-128
24FÑMAC Address Filters 3-130
24GÑFrame Data and Offset Filters
3-132
24HÑFilter Order Definition 3-135
25AÑ3270 Attachment Diagram 3-138
27ÑAEA and TCP/IP Configure 3-147
28ÑPort Set 3-148
29ÑPort-to-Port Set Map 3-150
2ÑMulti-Host Definition 3-11
30ÑAEA and TCP/IP Station Set 3-152
31ÑAEA and TCP/IP Default
Destination 3-163
31AÑTCP/IP Options 3-166
31BÑTCP/IP Routing Information
3-170
31CÑTCP/IP Domain Name Services
3-171
31DÑTCP/IP 3174 (Model 3174
Module) Defined Nicknames 3-172
38ÑDevice Definition 3-174
39ÑPrinter Authorization Matrix
(PAM) 3-175
40AÑLogical Terminal Assignment
(LTA) 3-176
41ÑExtended Vital Product Data (VPD)
3-177
45ÑCommon Network 3-178
Index-25
46ÑLAN Address Assignment 3-181
47ÑLAN Transmission Definition
3-182
49ÑStorage Requirements 3-183
4ÑSDLC 3-13
50ÑEnd-User Productivity Functions
3-187
51AÑToken-Ring Description 3-190
52ÑX.25 Circuit Profiles 3-63
53ÑFrame Relay 3-194
53SÑSecondary Frame Relay 3-194
54ÑFrame Relay Description 3-196
55ÑFrame-Relay Optional DLCI
Definitions 3-200
56ÑFrame-Relay Index Assignment
3-201
keyboard worksheets 3-202
tables 4-5
Workstation Networking Module
unpacking 2-1
World Wide Web xxxiii
wraparound option (762) 3-159
X
X.21 switched host DTE connection (365) 3-45
X.25
APPN nodes 3-95
circuit profiles worksheet 3-63
configuration questions
400 Network Type 3-65
401 Circuit Type 3-70
402 Logical Channel Identifier 3-70
409 X.25 Keyboard Support Options
432 Negotiated Window Size 3-77
433 K-Maximum Out 3-67
434 Nonstandard Default Packet Size
3-67
435 Nonstandard Default Window Size
3-68
440 Throughput Class Negotiation 3-77
441 Closed User Group 3-78
442 Recognized Private Operating
Agency 3-78
450 Link Level Transmit Timeout 3-68
451 Number of Retries 3-68
452 Connection Identifier 3-79
453 Connection Options 3-79
461 Lowest Incoming Channel 3-69
462 Highest Incoming Channel 3-69
463 Lowest Two-Way Channel 3-69
464 Highest Two-Way Channel 3-69
465 Lowest Outgoing Channel 3-69
466 Highest Outgoing Channel 3-70
incoming call options (420) 3-73
keyboard support options (409) 3-71
options (332) 3-44
Options worksheet Ib-3
secondary Ib-5
options worksheet 3-63
options worksheet, secondary 3-63
outgoing call options (421) 3-74
worksheet Ia-6
worksheet, secondary Ia-8
XON/XOFF, auto (761) 3-158
3-71
420 Incoming Call Options 3-73
421 Outgoing Call Options 3-74
423 Host DTE Address 3-76
424 Model 3174 DTE Address 3-66
430 Negotiated Packet Size 3-76
431 Packet Sequence Numbering 3-66
Index-26
893745B